Association for Behavior Analysis International

The Association for Behavior Analysis International® (ABAI) is a nonprofit membership organization with the mission to contribute to the well-being of society by developing, enhancing, and supporting the growth and vitality of the science of behavior analysis through research, education, and practice.

Search

31st Annual Convention; Chicago, IL; 2005

Program by Day for Monday, May 30, 2005


Manage My Personal Schedule

 

Special Event #283
ABA Business Meeting
Monday, May 30, 2005
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Private Dining Room 1 (3rd floor)
Domain: Theory
Chair: Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
Panelists: MARIA E. MALOTT (Executive Director), GERALD R. BERNICKY (Affiliated Chapters Board Coordinator), PAMELA G. OSNES (Education Board Coordinator)
Abstract:

ABA Business Meeting

MARIA E. MALOTT (Executive Director)
GERALD R. BERNICKY (Affiliated Chapters Board Coordinator)
PAMELA G. OSNES (Education Board Coordinator)
 
 
Invited Tutorial #216
CE Offered: BACB
2005 ABA Tutorial: The Importance of Understanding and "Extending" Skinner's Extended Tacts for Behavior Analysis Applications
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
International North (2nd floor)
Area: VBC; Domain: Theory
BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: T. V. Joe Layng, Ph.D.
Chair: Janet S. Twyman (Headsprout)
Presenting Authors: : T. V. JOE LAYNG (Headsprout)
Abstract:

Some have maintained that the investigation and teaching of higher cognitive function is outside the domain of behavior analysis or at least Skinners treatment of Verbal Behavior. In contrast, this presentation will argue that Skinners treatment provides the foundation for understanding a range of complex verbal phenomena important to behavior analysts or anyone interested in higher cognitive function. This is particularly true for those who build programs to teach verbal behavior skills. Building on Skinners analysis, this talk offers a heuristic that may be useful for those who design Verbal Behavior programs. This heuristic helps delineate a hierarchy of repertoires and the contingencies that define them. These extended relations include: Basic units or sameness relations, which include concepts and simple equivalence relations; linked units or ordered relations, which include principles and more complex equivalencelike relations; and combined units or generative repertoires, which include reasoning, problem solving, and the use of metaphor. Generative repertoires are of particular importance for they provide the learner with the means for more autonomous learning. Accordingly, this category will be emphasized, drawing heavily from the work of Joanne K. Robbins (and others) and her analysis of how to teach the various types of intelligence.

 
T. V. JOE LAYNG (Headsprout)
Joe Layng co-founded Headsprout, and serves as the company's Senior Scientist where he led the scientific team that developed Headsprout’s patented Generative Learning Technology. This technology forms the basis of the company’s Headsprout Early Reading program, for which Joe was the chief architect. Joe has over 25 years of experience in the experimental analysis of behavior and the learning sciences both in the laboratory and in applied settings. Joe earned a Ph.D. in Behavioral Science (Biopsychology) from The University of Chicago, where he conducted basic research on animal models of psychopathology. Specifically, he, in collaboration with P. T. Andronis and I. Goldiamond, investigated the recurrence of chronic, un-reinforced, self-injurious behavior (SIB – head-banging by pigeons) as a function of past selection contingencies for SIB, and current selection contingencies which maintained a different class of behavior (key-pecking). He also collaborated with P. T. Andronis and I. Goldiamond on research investigating the adduction of untrained complex symbolic social-behavior, which led to the key elements upon which the Headsprout Generative Learning Technology is based. Other work has included Signal Detection Theory experiments on the discrimination of ambiguous stimuli, particularly those of social consequence, in collaboration with J. K. Robbins, H. Karp, and M. Mauldin while at the University of Houston–Clear Lake. From 1991 to 1996, Joe was the Director of the Academic Support Center, and then Dean of Public Agency and Special Training Programs at Malcolm X College in Chicago. While at Malcolm X College Joe founded the Personalized Curriculum Institute (PCI), which rapidly equips under-prepared students with the skills needed for college success, and worked with the Chicago Public Schools and the Chicago White Sox Charities to bring research-based instruction to Chicago's schools.
 
 
Paper Session #285
Design of Effective Computer-Based Instruction
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Williford B (3rd floor)
Area: EDC
Chair: Jared A. Chase (University of Nevada, Reno)
 
Computer-Based Independent Learning by Low Functioning Students
Domain: Service Delivery
KARL W. SMITH (Accelerations Educational Software)
 
Abstract: Teaching students with autism and other learning disabilities frequently requires intensive and expensive one-on-one instruction to be effective. Comparatively inexpensive computers and software could offer a way to deliver more education to these students if the software is designed to enable independent use. Almost no commercially available software currently exists that allows independent effective teaching of students that normally require one-on-one instruction.Behavioral psychology in particular has demonstrated effective methods of instruction of even extremely uncooperative and difficult to educate children and students. The methods require the instructor to adapt to the specific learning needs of the student and use careful control of stimuli, reinforcements, and task to accommodate learning. The instructor collects data continuously or on a probe basis to determine the effectiveness of instruction and make adjustments accordingly. Since the methods are data driven and with the computer’s ability to deliver phenomenally stimulating reinforcement, at least some of teaching can be emulated by software.This presentation will discuss methods of creating software to allow most low functioning students to become independent learners and will show one product designed for these students.
 
Differential Effects of Elaborate Feedback and Basic Feedback on Student Performance in a Modified PSI Course
Domain: Applied Research
JARED A. CHASE (University of Nevada, Reno), Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno)
 
Abstract: A prevalent concern facing collegiate educators of large enrollment courses is an inability to provide immediate and personalized feedback to each of their students. With recent advances in technology, this no longer needs to be the circumstance. Many large enrollment courses use web-based technology that offers immediate computerized feedback. However, this feedback is often of a basic sort (e.g., correct or incorrect). The purpose of the current investigation was to provide and to assess the effects of immediate, elaborate feedback relative to immediate, basic feedback on student performance. Four groups from an introductory psychology course participated in the study. Group A received only basic feedback on all quizzes. Group B received elaborate (e.g., specific to each question and conceptual) feedback on all quizzes. Groups C and D received both conditions of basic and elaborate feedback counterbalanced across groups. Response accuracy on identical questions randomly selected for the midterm and the final were evaluated both within- and between-groups. This presentation will provide an overview of the method and results of the study. In addition, findings and implications for future applications will be discussed.
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #286
CE Offered: BACB

Is Autism on the Rise? Issues of Prevalence and Early Risk Factors

Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Continental B (1st floor)
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Marygrace Yale Kaiser, Ph.D.
Chair: Jack Scott (Florida Atlantic University)
MARYGRACE YALE KAISER (University of Miami), Keith Scott (University of Miami)
Marygrace Yale Kaiser is a Research Assistant Professor and Assistant Director of the Autism and Developmental Disabilities Monitoring Project at the University of Miami. Her work and that of her colleague Keith Scott, has focused on prevalence of serious disabilities in children with special attention to the epidemiology of autism. Dr Kaiser received her doctorate in psychology from the University of Miami where she coordinated the Early Social Communication Project. This project examined the development of joint attention and other forms or early social interaction in children with autism. Her current research puts her in a unique position to build on her background in autism and now to apply the tools of developmental epidemiology to account for the increasing rates of autism and related disabilities.
Abstract:

Recently, issues concerning Autism and Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASDs) have received a great deal of attention. Comparisons of epidemiological data from the last 30 years suggest that there has been a significant increase in the prevalence of the disorder. However, the meaning of this increase is currently poorly understood and few population-based studies have been conducted with large U.S. samples. This talk will detail past and present efforts to document the prevalence of autism, as well as discuss implications of the apparent increase in the number of individuals affected by the spectrum of disorders. In addition, characteristics that may increase the risk for developing autism will also be discussed. The few studies that have explored possible association have mostly involved analyses of small, ethnically similar samples which may make results more difficult to generalize. Data from two investigations of large ethnically diverse populations will be highlighted and areas of future investigation will be presented.

 
 
Paper Session #287
Int'l Paper Session - Neural Events and Automatic Reinforcement
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Astoria (3rd floor)
Area: TPC
Chair: Jose E. Burgos (University of Guadalajara, Mexico)
 
Radical Behaviorism Allows for Neural Causation
Domain: Theory
JOSE E. BURGOS (University of Guadalajara, Mexico)
 
Abstract: The radical-behavioristic tenet that neural events do not cause behavioral events is problematic in one crucial respect. In radical behaviorism, causal relations are conceived as functional relations where causes are independent variables and effects are dependent variables. However, there are ordered functional relations whose independent variables are neural and whose dependent variables are behavioral. Radical behaviorism thus allows for neural causation of behavior.
 
An Analysis of the Concept of "Automatic Reinforcment"
Domain: Theory
KENNETH MACALEESE (University of Nevada, Reno)
 
Abstract: In contemporary behavior theory, “automatic reinforcement” is regarded as positive (or negative) reinforcement that is not mediated by another person, i.e., is not “socially mediated.” In addition to the issue of distinguishing between social and nonsocially mediated sources of reinforcement, the problem with automatic reinforcement is that it is not well integrated with theory and research on continuous, conjugate, and synchronous reinforcement. These three types or “schedules” of reinforcement may each constitute automatic reinforcement in some cases and at some times, but not in other cases and not at other times. Highlighted along the way will be the history and current status of automatic reinforcement, again with an eye toward determining exactly what is and is not meant by the term.
 
 
 
Paper Session #288
Recent Investigations in Tolerance and Sensitization to the Effects of Cocaine
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Lake Ontario (8th floor)
Area: BPH
Chair: Jonathan W. Pinkston (University of Florida)
 
Effects of Cocaine on Eating by Pigeons
Domain: Basic Research
JIN HO YOON (University of Florida), Marc N. Branch (University of Florida)
 
Abstract: Effects of cocaine on feeding were examined when intermittent-food was presented for brief durations. In Experiment 1, pigeons were exposed to a variable-time 2-min schedule. Dose related decreases in eating were observed following acute administrations of cocaine. Following daily administrations of cocaine, tolerance was observed. In Experiment 2, 2 groups of pigeons were exposed to a 3-component multiple fixed-time schedule of reinforcement (i.e., 10 s, 30 s, & 120 s). The Before Group received cocaine immediately prior to session and saline following session. The After Group had the order of their injections reversed. Once dose-response functions were assessed, the order of injections was reversed so that all subjects eventually had experience receiving cocaine before and after session. Overall, the degree of tolerance observed was similar across components for a given subject. Additionally, tolerance was more likely to be observed when cocaine was administered prior to session and sensitization was more likely to be observed when cocaine was administered following session. Both Experiment 1 and 2 concluded with the assessment of dose-response functions in the context of daily saline administrations. Under these conditions, dose-response functions generally shifted to the left.
 
Effects of Cocaine on the Locomotor Behavior of Pigeons
Domain: Basic Research
JONATHAN W. PINKSTON (University of Florida), Marc N. Branch (University of Florida)
 
Abstract: Previous research has shown that intermittent administration of cocaine may result in increased sensitivity of locomotor behavior to the drug, a phenomenon known as sensitization. Recent work in our lab has been focused on documenting these changes in the drug’s effects using pigeons. In the present experiment, we examined the ability of various doses of cocaine to produce sensitization. This provided us with an opportunity to validate a device designed to detect locomotor behavior in birds. We also examined cocaine’s effects on other behaviors, e.g. grooming, during the development of sensitization. Pigeons were exposed to daily administration of 1.0, 3.0, or 10.0 mg/kg cocaine, across groups. The results showed increased sensitivity to the drug developed to the locomotor behavior of all subjects, regardless of daily dose. Higher daily doses of cocaine resulted in increased sensitivity to higher doses of cocaine than did lower daily doses. Furthermore, the results showed a change in maximum effect in addition to the increase in sensitivity. These effects in relation to the various other behaviors measured will be discussed
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #289
CE Offered: None

Why Superstition? An Historical, Conceptual, and Empirical Analysis

Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
International South (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: James S. MacDonall, Psy.D.
Chair: James S. MacDonall (Fordham University)
WILLIAM D. TIMBERLAKE (Indiana University)
William Timberlake received his BA from Pomona College and his PhD from University of Michigan with honors in Experimental Psychology. At Indiana since 1969, he co-founded and directed the Center for the Integrative Study of Animal Behavior and he served for many years on the Board of Fellows of the Poynter Center for the Study of Ethics and American Institutions. His research has been supported by NSF, NIH, and NIDA, and he has published over 130 papers. He is a fellow of APS, APA, and AAAS. His training in operant conditioning came from interactions with Allison, Hearst, and Dinsmoor at Indiana, and sabbatical leaves spent at Harvard with Herrnstein, Skinner, DeVilliers, Mazur, Heyman, Vaughan, and Alexandra Logue, at San Diego with Fantino and Williams, and at Reed with Alan Neuringer. In 1982, he and Gary Lucas began work on superstition in pigeons to discover why Staddon’s group and Skinner reported such different results. In 1985, Timberlake and Lucas published a nine experiment paper that indicated a relation between superstitious behavior and the pigeon’s food-searching repertoire. Several further experiments testing this view were recently performed or recovered due to the efforts of Eduardo Fernandez. Dr. Timberlake also would like to acknowledge important discussions with Nancy Innis, who regrettably died last summer in China, but would have enjoyed the results.
Abstract:

In 1948 Dr. Skinner cleverly introduced the concept of superstitious operant conditioning to explain the results of presenting reward to a pigeon on a fixed-time, response-independent (Pavlovian) schedule. In this talk I will briefly explore: (1) Possible contributions of then recent developments in shaping-by-hand, and an increased focus on human behavior; (2) Why Skinner didn't extend the concept of superstition to account for other Pavlovian results; and (3) Whether superstitious causal inference or niche-related preorganization better accounts for the topography and timing of temporally conditioned behavior.

 
 
Symposium #290
Int'l Symposium - Analysis of Verbal Processes in Clinical Values Methods
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Private Dining Room 3 (3rd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Miguel Rodriguez-Valverde (University of Almeria, Spain)
Discussant: Rainer Franz Sonntag (Private practice)
Abstract: This session presents three studies concerned all of them with the analysis of values clarification according to the processes involved in Experiential Avoidance Disorder and, consequently, according respectively to the ways that mainstream cognitive therapies and new behavioural psychotherapies confront clinical experiential avoidance. The first paper addresses, first, the impact of orienting specifically valued experimental task in the context of two relations as personal values, respectively to Control and Acceptance Pain. Then specific acceptance-based and cognitive-control-based strategies were compared in coping with experimentally induced pain. The second paper examines the effects of acceptance and personalization versus generic values on tolerance for and perception of aversive stimulation. The third study presents an analogue for personal psychological impact of aversive private events by analysing the . conditions under which aversive private events change their value according to coordination with valued actions or against them.
 
Experimental Pain Task in the Context of Values
MIGUEL RODRIGUEZ-VALVERDE (University of Almeria, Spain), Marisa Páez Blarrina (University of Almeria, Spain), M. Carmen Luciano-Soriano (University of Almeria, Spain), Olga Gutierrez Martinez (University of Almeria, Spain)
Abstract: Given a previous values context specifically related to each kind of strategy, this study compares specific acceptance-based and cognitive-control-based strategies for coping with experimentally induced pain. Thirty participants were randomly assigned to one of three conditions. Ten were assigned to an acceptance-based protocol (ACT) addressed to framing pain-related thoughts and feelings as in coordination with personal values, while disconnecting pain-related thoughts and feelings from literal actions. Another ten to a cognitive-based protocol (COG) addressed to framing those thoughts and feelings as in opposition to reaching one’s personal values, while trying to change or control such private events related to pain. The remaining were assigned to an experimental control condition (CONT). Participants took part in a nonsense-syllables-matching task that involved successive exposures to increasingly painful shocks. At different times throughout the task, participants had to choose whether to continue with the task and be shocked or stop performing the task and avoid being shocked, and they had explicit benefits and costs for each option. Two measures were obtained: tolerance to shocks and self-reports of pain. ACT participants showed significantly higher tolerance to pain and lower believability of pain perceptions as compared to the COG and CONT conditions. Conceptual and clinical implications are discussed.
 
Acceptance and Personal Values in the Context of Aversive Stimulation
HAZEL MOORE (National University Ireland, Galway), Ian T. Stewart (National University Ireland, Galway), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: This study examined the effects of acceptance and personalization of values on tolerance for and perception of aversive stimulation in the form of periodic electric shock. Forty participants were randomly assigned to either an acceptance-based protocol (ACT), designed to disconnect pain-related thoughts and feelings from literal actions, or to a control-based protocol (CONT) that focused on changing or controlling pain-related thoughts and feelings. Furthermore, for half the participants in both conditions, participation in the study was explicitly linked with important personal values whereas for the remainder it was linked with generic values. All participants took part in a nonsense-syllables-matching task that involved successive exposures to increasingly aversive shocks. At times throughout the task, participants were asked to choose to continue with the task and be shocked or stop the task and avoid being shocked. Participants performed the task twice, both before and after receiving the assigned experimental protocol. Two further measures were obtained at pre- and post-intervention: tolerance of the shocks and self-reports of pain. Results showed that ACT participants showed higher tolerance of aversive stimulation and lower believability of experienced pain. The results are also relevant to the systematic analysis of values in clinical analogue studies of psychological acceptance.
 
Coordination and Opposition Relations Between Aversive Private Events and Evalued Actions: An Experimental Preparation
M. CARMEN LUCIANO-SORIANO (University of Almeria, Spain), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Miguel Rodriguez-Valverde (University of Almeria, Spain), Olga Gutierrez Martinez (University of Almeria, Spain), Francisco J. Molina-Cobos (University of Almeria, Spain), Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi)
Abstract: The analysis of the conditions under which aversive private events change their value is the main goal of this study. Two relevant context are analyzed in this study that concern those involved, on the one hand, in Experiential Avoidance Disorder –EAD-(where aversive private events are against valued actions), and on the other hand, in Acceptance Commitment Therapy -ACT (where this aversive private events are contextualized in coordination with valued actions). Four groups of ten subjects each took part in the study. Two of them underwent two experimental conditions (one group per condition) where different relations with private events were experimentally established: (1) A coordination relation with valued actions, and (2) an opposite relation with valued actions. The other two served as control conditions. Results are discussed in terms of the transformation of functions involved in each condition, as well as in terms of EAD prevention. The clinical implications of the study are remarked in regard to their relevance for understanding some clinical methods in ACT.
 
 
Paper Session #291
Int'l Paper Session - Applied Behavior Analysis in Developmental Disabilities
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Stevens 4 (Lower Level)
Area: DDA
Chair: Bunyamin Birkan (Anadolu University)
 
Teaching, Maintaining and Generalizing Time Concepts for Students with Mental Retardation: How Many Subaims Should Be Thought?
Domain: Applied Research
BUNYAMIN BIRKAN (Anadolu University)
 
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to analyze effectiveness of direct instruction method for teaching, maintaining and generalizing time concepts for students with mental retardation. It was also tested that how many subaims should be thought for promoting generalization in this study. Participants included three students whose functioning levels ranged from mild to moderate mental disabilities. Effectiveness of direct instruction method was evaluated through use of a multiple probe design across behaviors and replicated across students. Results indicated that the direct instruction method was successful in teaching targeted behaviors to all three children with mental retardation. Students maintained target behaviors at 100% accuracy 17, and 30 days after training and generalized responses across real time materials. Limitations of the study and future research implications are discussed.
 
Reinforcer Potency of Complex Stimuli: Preferences for Color
Domain: Applied Research
RICK SHAW (Lifeways Learning Center)
 
Abstract: A paired stimulus (PS) 16-item (4 separate colors by 4 separate items) preference assessment and a 4-item (4 separate colors by highest preferred item) PS preference assessment and was conducted as a screen to identify potential reinforcers and reinforcing colors for 16 individuals with moderate to severe retardation. Eight participants of the 16 met the criteria from the screening to continue to the reinforcer assessment for color preferences. For the reinforcer assessment, rates of responding were measured on a fixed-ratio concurrent operant schedule using a reversal design to verify the identified preferences for high preferred color (HPC) items and low preferred color (LPC) items. The results indicated that six of the eight participants from the reinforcer assessment demonstrated a preference for color as indicated through differential responding for the HPC item vs. the LPC item for all participants. Results also indicated increased responding for the identified reinforcers for all participants during the reinforcer assessment.
 
Teaching to Recognize Animal Sounds to a Child with Visual Impairment and Mental Retardation
Domain: Applied Research
AYTEN UYSAL (Anadolu University)
 
Abstract: It's important for visually impaired children to recognize evviromental sounds.This study was prepared to teach a visualy impaired and mental reterded child to recognize various animals from their saunds. Simultaneous prompting was used for this purpose. Three sets of animal souns were prepared to teach animal names that the child did not know. The study was designed using multiple probe design across behaviors. The subject of the study was nine years old girl and the skills were tought individualy to subject. At the end of the study, simultaneous prompting was faund to be effective in teaching the targeted skills.
 
 
 
Symposium #292
Assessing High-Risk Drinking Among College Students Across Environmental Settings
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Boulevard B (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kent E. Glindemann (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University)
Abstract: Four data-based presentations on college alcohol use and abuse will be presented. The first paper presents data assessing the prevalence of drinking and driving following Division I NCAA football games. Implications for intervention efforts to reduce levels of driving under the influence (DUI) after these types of sporting events will be discussed. The second presentation reports on intervention efforts to reduce at-risk drinking by college students in a community setting. Results indicated that incentive/reward interventions show some promise as a tool to reduce alcohol consumption in a large-scale setting. A focus of this paper is on the development of the methodology necessary to conduct this research in community field settings. The third paper presents research assessing the effects of various themed fraternity parties on students’ levels of intoxication, and discusses implications for prevention interventions with these high-risk groups. The final paper presents data indicating that differential reinforcement, using an incentive/reward intervention, can effectively reduce alcohol consumption in a high-risk setting (e.g., at fraternity parties), and assessed the effects of multiple exposures to this intervention. The chairperson will then comment on the presentations, and discuss implications for future research efforts in this realm.
 
Drinking and Driving Following NCAA Collegiate Football Games
STEVEN W. CLARKE (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), Kent E. Glindemann (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), Christi Blake (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), Christopher Downing (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University)
Abstract: This field study was designed to study intoxication levels of drivers following collegiate football games. Participants included 144 individuals (86 men and 58 women) attending tailgate parties at one of four NCAA Division 1-A college football games at a large university in the southeastern United States. Research assistants approached drivers as they entered one of three randomly selected parking lots. The drivers were recruited to participate before the game, and agreed to self-administer a Breathscan ® tester after the game, just before they left the parking lot. Drivers returned the breathalyzers to research assistants at the exits of the parking lot in exchange for a raffle entry form to win $250. A positive breath test indicated that the driver was at or above a BAC of .05 (accuracy = ±.005). Eighty-seven percent of drivers agreed to participate, and 52.5% returned a breath tester. Results indicated that 36.4% of drivers tested positive, and were thus at risk for DUI. The range was from 16.6% to 44.6%, and men were more likely to test positive than women. The implications of these findings for future studies of alcohol consumption at tailgate parties, and the development of interventions to prevent DUI will be discussed.
 
Development of a Methodology to Track Participants’ Alcohol Consumption in a Community Setting
ASHLEY RAINIS (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), David Michael Harris (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), Steven W. Clarke (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), E. Scott Geller (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University)
Abstract: The current study developed and assessed a methodology for tracking college students’ Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) levels in the downtown area of a large college town. A within-subjects design examined the drinking behaviors of participants across five consecutive Thursday nights. Participants were recruited to join a longitudinal study during the first week of the study from 12:00 AM until 2:30 AM. An incentive of entry into a raffle for $250 was offered. Participants were asked to predict their level of intoxication, complete a brief survey on their drinking behaviors, and were then administered a BAC test using handheld breathalyzers. The following day participants completed an online survey assessing negative outcomes resulting from their alcohol consumption. Participants were asked to visit a BAC assessment tent set up downtown for the following four consecutive Thursday nights between 11:00 PM and 2:30 AM to receive a BAC assessment and complete the survey. Research findings indicate this is a viable methodology for recruiting and tracking participants who consume alcohol in community settings. This methodology will now be employed to test a community-wide intervention for ameliorating peak BAC levels with this population. Results, including BAC levels and subsequent negative outcomes, will be presented and discussed.
 
Assessing the Effects of Themed Fraternity Parties on Students’ Levels of Intoxication
SARA E. VALENTINO (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), Elizabeth Mackey (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), Demetrius Ball (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), Douglas Wiegand (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University)
Abstract: The goal of this field study was to evaluate the relation between various party themes and subsequent alcohol intoxication at fraternity parties. BAC data was collected at 24 fraternity parties with eight different fraternities. Party themes were categorized as: a) None, b) Costume Party (e.g., boss-secretary, pirates-mermaids, toga, Tahiti, Beach, Graffiti), c) Alcohol-Related (e.g., 40 oz’ers, Ice-Luge), and d) Hazing (new members were humiliated). Each fraternity had at least one party without a theme and one party with a theme. Individuals who attended both parties were then selected for analysis. Themes were determined by two independent observers (r = 1.0). Individual participation in the party theme was also recorded. Overall, parties with a greater amount of alcohol present and parties closed to Greek members only had the highest mean BACs. While there was little difference in BACs across themes, a number of significant findings emerged. Specifically, party goers were significantly more intoxicated at: a) parties involving hazing of new members, and b) parties with a Alcohol-Related theme. In addition, alcohol consumption was significantly higher at two of three “toga” parties. The implications of these findings for alcohol risk management and the implementation of interventions to reduce intoxication will be discussed.
 
The Effects of Multiple Exposures to an Intervention Aimed at Reducing Fraternity Party Alcohol Use
IAN J. EHRHART (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), Morgan Padgett (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), Stacey Pavlak (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University), Paul Blalock (Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University)
Abstract: College student alcohol use continues to be a concern on this nation’s campuses, contributing to a variety of negative consequences ranging from physical harm to reduced academic success, and impaired decision-making to driving under the influence (DUI). This study investigated the ability of an incentive/reward intervention to reduce alcohol use at university fraternity parties. Four fraternities were recruited and placed into either a standard A-B-A design (two fraternities, three parties each) or an extended A-B-B-B-A design (two fraternities, five parties each), the latter being implemented to study the effects of multiple exposures to the above intervention. At baseline parties, all participants completing a brief questionnaire and having their Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) assessed with a handheld breathalyzer were entered into a raffle for $100 to be drawn before the research team left the party. At intervention parties, a contingency was implemented in which only those participants whose BAC was below .050 were entered into the raffle. Independent variables included Gender, Fraternity Party, and Greek-Life Status, with the primary dependent variable being assessed BAC level. Results will be discussed with an emphasis on directions for further research using this unique intervention.
 
 
Symposium #293
Int'l Symposium - Behaviour Analysis and the Neuroscience of Language and Cognition: Semantic Priming and Derived Stimulus Relations
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Boulevard C (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Simon Dymond (APU, Cambridge, UK)
Discussant: William J. McIlvane (University of Massachusetts Medical School)
Abstract: A number of behavioral researchers have argued that derived equivalence relations provide the basis for semantic or symbolic meaning in natural language. If this view is correct, it follows that equivalence relations should possess properties that are typically associated with semantic relations. This symposium will describe an ongoing programme of collaborative research designed to investigate cognitive phenomena such as semantic priming from a behavior-analytic perspective. The first paper will describe a series of experiments on semantic priming and derived stimulus relations involving arbitrary pseudowords. Behavioural measures (response latencies and errors) and event-related potentials (ERPs) measures of semantic priming were employed. The second paper incorporated a series of methodological controls and employed a larger derived relational network, while the third paper investigated cross-modal semantic priming effects and derived stimulus relations. Taken together, the three papers provide supportive evidence for a preliminary behavior-analytic account of semantic networks by fusing cognitive methodology and ERPs measures with derived stimulus relations.
 
Equivalence Relations and Semantic Priming: A Preliminary Behavior-Analytic Model of Semantic Networks
SEAN COMMINS (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Carmel Staunton (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Robert Whelan (APU, Cambridge, UK), Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Derek Walsh (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Paul M. Smeets (Leiden University), Simon Dymond (APU, Cambridge, UK)
Abstract: The present study sought to test a preliminary behaviour-analytic model of semantic networks by using priming and derived equivalence relations. In Experiment 1, participants were trained and tested in two four-member equivalence relations using word-like nonsense words (participants were told that the words were from a foreign language). This was followed by exposure to a single-word lexical decision task in which participants were presented with pairs of nonsense words that were previously used in the equivalence training and testing or were completely novel. Priming effects were observed within but not across equivalence relations, in that recognition was faster for a nonsense word that was preceded by an equivalent rather than a non-equivalent word. In Experiment 2, the lexical decision task was presented immediately after the conditional discrimination training (i.e., before an equivalence test), and the priming effect was replicated for those participants who subsequently passed the equivalence test but not for those who failed. Experiment 3 employed a two-word lexical decision task (rather than the single-word task), and event related potentials were recorded during specific priming trials. The reaction time effect was again replicated, and the grand average N400 waveforms and peak amplitudes were greater for non-equivalent word-pairs relative to directly trained and equivalent word pairs. All three experiments provided evidence to support the argument that derived stimulus relations are a useful preliminary model of semantic relations.
 
Visual-Visual Equivalence Relations and Semantic Priming: A Behavioural and Event Related Potentials Study
EOGHAN J. RYAN (APU, Cambridge, UK), Simon Dymond (APU, Cambridge, UK), Robert Whelan (APU, Cambridge, UK), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: If derived relational responding is to provide a functional-analytic account of language and cognition, then it follows that many of the measures of language and thought processes typically employed within cognitive psychology, such as semantic priming, should be sensitive to derived stimulus relations. The research reported here was designed to test this suggestion using episodic and mediated priming. In the current study, adult participants were first exposed to conditional discrimination training designed to establish four, four-member derived equivalence relations and were then presented with a standard lexical-decision task. The presentation of across-class primes and targets resulted in increased response latencies relative to within-class primes-target pairs. No differential effects were found for accuracy scores, however. During this experiment, event related potentials (time-locked, averaged electroencephalograms) were recorded. In addition to the increased response latencies to across-class prime-target pairs, a larger N400 waveform was also recorded. This waveform has been shown in cognitive research to be sensitive to semantic relatedness. Taken together, these data lend support to the argument that derived relations constitute behavioural units of human language and cognition.
 
Auditory-Visual Equivalence Relations and Semantic Priming
SIMON DYMOND (APU, Cambridge, UK), Kelly J. Garner (APU, Cambridge, UK), Robert Whelan (APU, Cambridge, UK), Eoghan J. Ryan (APU, Cambridge, UK), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: If derived-stimulus relations are to provide a behavioural model of semantic relations found in natural language, then behavioural and electrophysiological measures of semantic relations within cognitive neuroscience research should apply to derived stimulus relations. The present experiments sought to examine cross-modal (auditory-visual) semantic priming with derived equivalence relations and incorporated behavioural (response latencies and errors) and event-related potential measures. In Experiment 1, subjects were first exposed to conditional discrimination training designed to establish four, three-member derived equivalence relations. Two of the four classes contained an auditory node (i.e., a computer-generated spoken pseudoword) and the remaining two classes contained purely visual stimuli. Subjects were then presented with a standard lexical-decision task, before being exposed to a formal matching-to-sample test for equivalence relations. Experiment 2 utilized the same procedure with the added measurement of event-related potentials during the lexical decision task.
 
 
Symposium #294
Int'l Symposium - Derived Relational Responding and Non-Arbitrary Relations
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Boulevard A (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Ian T. Stewart (National University of Ireland, Galway)
Abstract: The theme of the current symposium is the relationship between derived (arbitrary) and non-arbitrary relational responding. The first three papers examine various aspects of the interference of non-arbitrary relational responding (NARR) with the emergence of arbitrary relational responding (ARR) in normally developing adults and children as well as in developmentally delayed children. The fourth paper is also concerned with NARR and derived relational responding but instead of examining the interference of NARR in the context of ARR such as equivalence, it explores the role of NARR as an important aspect of the learning history necessary for ARR. Paper 1 examines how prior training in transitivity can mitigate the effect of NARR on derived equivalence, as well as examining the effect of NARR on transitivity itself. The second paper examines inoculation against the NARR effect in one non arbitrary dimension by training alternative non-arbitrary dimensions. The third paper examines the effect of NARR on derived equivalence in the context of a population with Autistic Spectral Disorder. The fourth paper presents an investigation of second order contextual control over non-arbitrary relational responding, thus demonstrating a phenomenon that may be useful in diverse research projects that use derived relations-based protocols to model language.
 
Stimulus Equivalence, Transitivity & Non-Arbitrary Relations
LORNA POWER (National University of Ireland, Galway), Ian T. Stewart (National University of Ireland, Galway), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: The theme of the current symposium is the relationship between derived (arbitrary) and non-arbitrary relational responding. The first three papers examine various aspects of the interference of non-arbitrary relational responding (NARR) with the emergence of arbitrary relational responding (ARR) in normally developing adults and children as well as in developmentally delayed children. The fourth paper is also concerned with NARR and derived relational responding but instead of examining the interference of NARR in the context of ARR such as equivalence, it explores the role of NARR as an important aspect of the learning history necessary for ARR. Paper 1 examines how prior training in transitivity can mitigate the effect of NARR on derived equivalence, as well as examining the effect of NARR on transitivity itself. The second paper examines inoculation against the NARR effect in one non arbitrary dimension by training incorporating alternative dimensions. The third paper examines the effect of NARR and derived equivalence in the context of a population with Autistic Spectral Disorder. The fourth paper presents an investigation of second order contextual control over non-arbitrary relational responding, thus demonstrating a phenomenon that may be useful in diverse research projects that use derived relations-based protocols to model language.
 
Stimulus Equivalence, Non-Arbitrary Relations and Non-Arbitrary Relational Training
MARY CASSERLY (National University of Ireland, Galway), Ian T. Stewart (National University of Ireland, Galway), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: The inclusion in equivalence testing of color as a competing non-arbitrary relational response dimension has been shown to interfere with equivalence responding. This study extended previous analyses of this phenomenon by allowing training stimuli to vary along non-arbitrary dimensions other than color before exposure to the color equivalence test. Three groups of adults were trained and tested for the formation of three 3-member equivalence relations. Group 1 were trained using black and white stimuli and then tested with a color interference equivalence test in which the sample was always differently colored from the ‘equivalent’ comparison, but was the same color as one of the non-equivalent comparisons. This training and testing pattern was repeated three times using the same stimuli each time. Group 2 also received three sessions of black and white equivalence training followed by color equivalence testing. However, for this group, the training stimuli varied along the non-arbitrary dimensions of size, font and shape, respectively, in the three training sessions. For Group 3, the training stimuli varied along two non-arbitrary dimensions (e.g., both size and font) before each of the three testing sessions. Findings raised a number of issues for derived relational control, and these will be discussed.
 
Exploring the Interfering Effects of Non-Arbitrary Relations on Derived Relational Responding in Children with a Diagnosis of Autism: A Possible Behavioral Methodology for Assessing Executive Function
NEIL KENNY (CABAS, Ireland), Ian T. Stewart (National University of Ireland, Galway), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: Executive function (EF) is a subject rarely studied by behavior analysis. However, a recent study by Stewart, Barnes-Holmes, Roche, and Smeets (2002) reported a procedure that may be useful for analyzing EF. The procedure involved presenting tests for equivalence relations that included competing forms of non-arbitrary stimulus control. The study provided clear evidence of interference from the non-arbitrary stimulus relations in a normal adult population. Executive dysfunction is pervasive in children with autism (Pennington & Ozonoff, 1996), and affected subjects have also been found to demonstrate poor abstract reasoning, inflexible rule use, perserverative behaviors, cognitive inflexibility and poor attention. The aim of the present study was to explore the effects of conflicting non-arbitrary relations on the formation of derived relations using subjects with a diagnosis of autism. The study also sought to determine if exemplar training could be used to establish derived relational responding in the context of competing non-arbitrary stimulus relations and to determine if this training also served to reduce the interference effect across multiple stimulus dimensions. In general, exemplar training proved to be effective, and the implications of the data for educational interventions with autistic populations will be discussed.
 
An Empirical Investigation of Contextual Control Over Non-Arbitrary Relational Responding
GILLIAN KELLY (National University of Ireland, Galway), Ian T. Stewart (National University of Ireland, Galway), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: This study provides an empirical demonstration and investigation of the Relational Frame Theory phenomena of Crel and Cfunc based contextual control. In Experiment 1, participants were trained to respond in accordance with relations of sameness and difference in the presence of two arbitrary shapes which were thus established as Crel cues for SAME and DIFFERENT relational responding respectively. Training using additional contextual cues was then provided in order to induce transformations of function along particular stimulus dimensions (e.g., size), thus establishing Cfunc control. Following this training, participants were then successfully tested for generalization of Cfunc control in which a novel Cfunc stimulus cue came to control transformation of function along a novel stimulus dimension. Expt. 2 demonstrated control via compounds of the Crel and Cfunc cues shown in Experiment 1. Experiment 3 demonstrated the generalization of Cfunc control to an alternative pattern of relational responding. Participants were first trained and tested for More Than / Less Than responding. They then successfully completed tests for Cfunc control over the transformation of function in accordance with More than / Less than relations. The implications of these findings are discussed and directions for future research are explored.
 
 
Symposium #295
Discerning Patterns in Complex Environments: Challenges in Organizational Interventions
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Marquette (3rd floor)
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Thomas E. Boyce (Center for Behavioral Safety, LLC)
Discussant: Ned Carter (The Swedish Association of Local Authorities and Regions)
Abstract: Organizational and community settings provide an opportunity to assess a wide variety of variables and methodological considerations. They are unique in that there is a wealth of information and data to analyze and many unique challenges provided by these situations. This symposium seeks to address some of these considerations, more specifically related to how more extensive data analysis can deepen these investigations in complex organizations and seek to identify the function of behavior in these settings.
 
The Challenge of Identifying the Function of Behavior in an Organizational Setting
SHARLET D. BUTTEFIELD (University of Nevada, Reno), Thomas E. Boyce (Center for Behavioral Safety, LLC)
Abstract: Interventions in organizational and community settings deal with many complex factors and challenges, in addition to those seen in clinics or in the laboratory. This presentation discusses some of these factors more generally, and specifically as related to an anti-theft intervention in a specific organizational setting. Some of the issues discussed relate to methodological concerns, but in addition, explore the challenge of establishing function of a behavior as it relates to the intervention. More specifically, a low-cost intervention was implemented to decrease theft in an organization, and results indicate that the function of the theft behavior may have varied based on product selection. This presentation will discuss these findings as they relate to the function of theft behavior in this specific study, as well as possible implications for other organizational and community interventions
 
Having Tidied Up, Patterns Reveal: Analysis of Occupational Health and Safety in Complex Settings
BISMARCK J. MANES (Western Michigan University), Grisel M. Puertos (Western Michigan University), Mark P. Alavosius (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Large organizations require thorough analyses of large and potentially complex data sets to reveal orderly patterns suggesting interventions. Analyses support meaningful interpretation of environmental conditions and their effects on behavior. Advancements in computer technology have expanded our ability to work with large data sets and explore complex patterns. Hospital settings are representative of complex environments consisting of many separate departments and/or units; assessment data are reviewed from one large community hospital. Yet, hospitals are small when contrasted with self-insured groups (SIGs), where individual companies in an industry or region pool funds to cover the workers' compensation costs incurred by the group, and unused worker's compensation funds are redistributed back to member companies potentially as reinforcement of safety management. Given these contingencies, SIGs offer especially interesting niches for behavior-based safety technologists due to the contingencies in place that establish safe work environments as valuable conditions. Analysis of injury data is a necessary method for assessing areas of improvement relevant to health and safety in complex organizations like hospitals and SIG situations. Important dimensions of injuries, such as severity and cost, and consideration of contextual variables add depth to traditional safety measures (e.g. frequency of injury reports). Sulzer-Azaroff and Fellner (1984) outlined a strategy for assessing performance targets in occupational settings. This presentation extends this strategy to include more extensive explorations of large data sets obtained from several projects now underway.
 
A Model of Performance Diagnosis and the Development of a Job Performance Diagnostic Questionnaire
RYAN B. OLSON (Santa Clara University), Stephanie Capodanno (Santa Clara University), Jeanine Plowman Stratton (Florida State University, BMC)
Abstract: Organizational performance diagnostic methods often focus upon a few critical behaviors or accomplishments and may require a subject matter expert to implement. While this type of customization leads to effective interventions, the process is not likely to be repeated broadly by non-experts. In our view, society and the field of OBM will benefit from the development of performance analysis techniques that are applicable at the level of job performance and less dependent upon special expertise. The current project describes a model of performance and reports on the development and pilot testing of an informant assessment questionnaire designed to diagnosis general weaknesses in support for job performance.
 
 
Symposium #296
Integrating the New Behavior Therapies
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Private Dining Room 1 (3rd floor)
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Elizabeth Gifford (Center for Health Care Evaluation)
Discussant: Robert J. Kohlenberg (University of Washington)
Abstract: As behavior therapy continues to evolve, new therapies and applications continue to emerge. Manualized treatments are the standard in empirical cognitive behavioral psychology, driven by the requirements of randomized controlled trials. Yet topographically driven treatment is inconsistent with a thoroughgoing behavioral approach. In this symposium we present several examples of people working to integrate intervention strategies from the new wave behavior therapies, including Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, Dialectical Behavior Therapy, and Functional Analytic Psychotherapy. Each presenter will describe their integration efforts, present applications to specific populations in which they have applied these efforts, and discuss their perspective on the integration process.
 
Functional Analytic Psychotherapy as an Integrative and Comprehensive Behavioral System for the Treatment of Depression
JONATHAN W. KANTER (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Glenn M. Callaghan (San Jose State University), Sara J. Landes (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Laura Dee (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Andrew Busch (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Keri R. Brown Popp (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee)
Abstract: Clinical behavior analysts seeking to work with adult, outpatient depression are presented with the dilemma that the most widely-used empirically-supported treatments—Cognitive Therapy and Interpersonal Therapy—do not provide a functional approach to the assessment and treatment of problems that affect interpersonal relationships. These problems may include emotional avoidance, interpersonal sensitivity, problems with intimate relating, passivity, and rumination. However, behavioral treatments such as Acceptance and Commitment Therapy and Behavioral Activation do not explicitly target the full range of potential interpersonal problems revealed through functional assessment. This talk will present new advances based on Functional Analytic Psychotherapy (FAP) that allow the clinical behavior analyst to utilize a thorough-going behavioral formulation of interpersonal problems to decide when and where to engage in values clarification, acceptance, cognitive restructuring, activation and other interventions with depressed clients. Examples of the use of this formulation with depressed clients will be presented.
 
The Integration of FAP and DBT in Secure Settings
KIRK A.B. NEWRING (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: This discussion will focus on the use of FAP and DBT in two populations; civilly committed sexually violent predators, and criminally committed youthful sex offenders. These sexually misbehaving individuals are often stigmatized. One of DBT's core assumptions is that clients are doing the best they can. Further, DBT presumes the client to be behaving in such as way, not out of malevolence, but out of contextual motivators. This nonjudgmental stance provides an opportunity to establish the relationship necessary for FAP. Clients with high frequency problem behavior are often appropriate for DBT. Counter to what the media may convey, however, sexually violent offenders infrequently engage in overt sexually violent behavior. In the FAP conceptualization, there may be functional equivalents to the "problem" behavior for which they are incarcerated. For example, the so-called "power and control" rapists can demonstrate behaviors consistent with power and control struggles without sexually offending. In DBT, validation with the sexually violent predator or sexually inappropriate youth can function as a reinforcer. Providing contexts in which the horrific and hurtful behaviors can be understood often enhance the therapeutic relationship, which in turn enhances the power of FAP.
 
The Relationship in Psychotherapy: A FAP and ACT Perspective
BARBARA S. KOHLENBERG (University of Nevada School of Medicine), Elizabeth V. Gifford (Center for Health Care Evaluation)
Abstract: It is widely accepted that the relationship between client and therapist is a potent variable leading to positive psychotherapy outcome. However, the psychotherapy relationship is conceptualized in different ways across different therapies. In this paper we will review traditional FAP and ACT perspectives on the psychotherapeutic relationship. We will also discuss our integration of FAP and ACT perspectives, and how we applied this new treatment, FACT, to smoking cessation. The convergence and divergence between FAP and ACT will be discussed, and clinical examples will be presented.
 
 
Symposium #297
Intelligence Can Be Taught: The Life and Work of Arthur Whimbey
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Private Dining Room 2 (3rd floor)
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Bradley G. Frieswyk (BGF Performance Systems)
Discussant: Myra Jean Linden-Whimbley (TRAC Institute)
Abstract: In August of 2004, Dr. Arthur Whimbey passed away after a four-year struggle with throat and mouth cancer. During his lifetime he published over 30 reading, writing, and math textbooks; and theory books dealing with training intelligence and education reform. His contributions to education and instructional design are still having tremendous success in remedial college programs and intervention programs for middle and high schools. Most notably for ABA is the application of his work at the Morningside Academy in Seattle, WA. In 1999 Dr. Whimbey was well received at ABA as an invited speaker making a behavioral analysis of his work. This symposium is dedicated to his work’s history and future.
 
Teaching Intelligence in Motor and Cognitive Domains: The Role of Examples and Nonexamples in Teaching Complexity
JOANNE K. ROBBINS (Morningside Academy)
Abstract: Art Whimbey initially referred to Think Aloud Problem Solving (TAPS), an approach to training intelligence, as Cognitive Therapy. Building on the work of Benjamin Bloom (1950), TAPS emerged as a speaker and listener dialogue to be employed in all of Whimbey’s cognitive therapy exercises ranging from college prep exercises in Analytical Writing and Thinking (1990) to Thinking Through Math Word Problems (1990) for elementary age students. This paper describes how Tiemann and Markle’s matrix of Types of Learning presented in Analyzing Instructional Content and the instructional design principles from Markle’s Design for Instructional Designers can combine with Whimbey’s strategy to increase intelligence in psychomotor, simple cognitive, and complex cognitive domains.
 
Teaching Reasoning Skills with Thinking-Aloud Problem Solving (TAPS)
KENT JOHNSON (Morningside Academy)
Abstract: Much of the thinking and reasoning that a problem solver engages in involves a private conversation with oneself as a speaker and as a listener and reactor to one’s own speaking. From this radical behavioral account we can identify key thinking and reasoning repertoires, which we can teach to learners in order to improve their skills at figuring out solutions to problems. I will elaborate a behavioral account of the reasoning process and describe Arthur Whimbey’s Thinking-Aloud Problem Solving (TAPS) method, which provides a logical extension of this analysis. I will describe 5 repertoires of the problem solver as a speaker, 5 repertoires of the problem solver as a listener and reactor to one’s own speaking (Robbins, 1996), and his method for systematically teaching these repertoires to learners.
 
Against Convention: A Life Struggle to Improve Education
BRADLEY G. FRIESWYK (BGF Performance Systems)
Abstract: Arthur Whimbey started his career with successful trade book titled Intelligence Can Be Taught, which flew in the face of the predominant notion at the time that a person’s tested IQ is set and cannot be affected by instruction. However, the warm reception was not repeated when he produced separate works that challenged modern thought in reading and writing instruction. A keen insight and analysis of the behaviors that humans engage in during the demonstrated mastery of such skills, and a careful sequencing and design of instruction led to some of the most effective, yet sparsely accepted, programs and methods ever produced. However, under the pressure of No Child Left Behind and the new emphasis on testing that accompanies it, Dr. Whimbey’s work is being discovered and used by teachers and administrators nationwide.
 
 
Symposium #298
Knowledge Management and Virtual Teams: Helping Performance Analysts and Other Workers to Perform Well
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Joliet (3rd floor)
Area: OBM; Domain: Theory
Chair: Joseph R. Sasson (Florida State University)
Discussant: Donald A. Hantula (Temple University)
Abstract: This symposium will focus on Knowledge Management (KM). The first presentation will provide a behavioral perspective of KM along with high-level review of how to design a performance-based KM system and data from one such implementation. The second presentation will present a KM system that has been designed to support performance analysts and to encourage collaboration (via virtual teams) and knowledge reuse in performance improvement endeavors. The third presentation will focus on issues concerning virtual teams (e.g., trust) and virtual team success in comparison to in-vivo teams, using theories of media compensation to explain changes in human operant and verbal behavior.
 
A Performance-Based Knowledge Management System: A Study and its Results
JACALYN S. SMELTZER (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: This presentation will review the results of a study in which a performance-based knowledge management system (KMS) was designed for a small business in the professional services industry. A mixed methods research design including repeated measures of independent groups was used for the study. Highlights from the study will be reviewed, including: 1) A high-level description of how to design a performance-based KMS, 2) A behavior-analytic interpretation of many concepts in knowledge management, and 3) A brief review of the types of data collected.Performance results indicated a significant increase in the frequency of performers creating a particular work product that was supported by a knowledge item in the knowledge base after the KMS implementation, for one of the two subject groups (chi-square for independence test), and a significant improvement in the similarity of a particular work product to the expected attributes of that work product based on a supporting knowledge item in the knowledge base after the KMS implementation for both subject groups (t-tests for independent samples).
 
Net-Centric Performance Improvement: Promoting Collaboration and Information Reuse in Performance Improvement
JOSEPH R. SASSON (Florida State University), Ian Douglas (Florida State University)
Abstract: A way to improve the effectiveness of the performance improvement process in large organizations (and across organizations) is Net-Centric Performance Improvement (Net-PI). The Net-PI components provide a means of aligning all levels of the organization, collaborating for performance improvement (PI) purposes, promoting the reuse of information, and documenting the rationale for decisions made throughout the PI process. The Net-PI prototype (which is research based and not a commercially available product) and its benefits will be presented. Attendees will learn about the future of performance analysis software that performance analysts can use to analyze performance problems and develop solutions in an effective manner with the collaboration of stakeholders all over the world.
 
Explaining Adaptation and Performance in Virtual Teams: Media Compensation Theory
DONALD A. HANTULA (Temple University), Ned Kock (Texas A&M University), Darleen DeRosa (Right Management Consultants), John D'Arcy (Temple University)
Abstract: This paper proceeds from the paradox that virtual teams are generally successful, sometimes even outperforming face-to- face teams in spite of much theory that predicts the opposite. We review theories that have previously been used to explain behavior toward electronic communication media, highlighting a theoretical gap, which is filled with a new adaptive perspective called media compensation theory. Eight theoretical principles are discussed – media naturalness, innate schema similarity, learned schema variety, evolutionary task relevance, compensatory adaptation, media humanness, cue removal, and speech imperative. Those principles are then used as a basis for a discussion of the impact that different media have on virtual teams. Empirical evidence in connection with studies of idea generation, problem solving, and business process redesign tasks are reviewed. The evidence provides support for the framework proposed, and a future research agenda in virtual teams from a media compensation perspective.
 
 
Symposium #299
Methodological Issues in Applied Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Stevens 1 (Lower Level)
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: SungWoo Kahng (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
CE Instructor: SungWoo Kahng, Ph.D.
Abstract: As the field of behavior analysis continues to grow, there continues to be an increasing need for the refinement and continued evaluation of behavior analytic methodology. Four presentations will cover a range of methodological issues as they relate to applied behavior analysis. The first presentation examines a novel method for measuring injuries as a dependent measure, which may be important for the assessment and treatment of severe self-injurious behavior. The second involves using behavior analysts to evaluate whether or not baseline data would allow for adequate comparisons between baseline and post-training when evaluating foster care displacement data. The third reexamines the consistency of visual inspection of single-case data, which is the primary method of data analysis in applied behavior analysis. The final presentation is an examination of four common methods for calculating interobserver agreement, which is a part of nearly all published single-case studies.
 
Comparative Analysis of Product Measures of Self-Injurious Behavior
DAVID M. WILSON (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida), Sarah E. Bloom (University of Florida)
Abstract: We evaluated the utility of an inexpensive, efficient, and noninvasive technique for measuring the severity of tissue damage produced by self-injurious behavior (SIB). The technique used digital photographs of wounds and computer software to obtain surface- area measurements of wounds. In Study 1, the digital photograph/computer assisted technique was compared to a transparency-based technique in estimating the size of several models of wounds that varied in shape and size. In Study 2, the digital photograph/computer assisted technique was used to document changes over time in the SIB exhibited by a woman diagnosed with Prader-Willi Syndrome, as evidenced by changes in wound surface area (WSA). WSA was used as the primary dependent variable, and treatment contingencies were placed on changes in WSA.
 
Methods to Analyze Placement Disruptions Experienced by Foster Parents and Foster Children
CAROLE M. VAN CAMP (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract: The Behavior Analysis Services Program provides behavioral parent training, as well as individualized assessments and interventions, designed to reduce the frequency of placement disruptions (i.e., the removal of a foster child from one home to another) experienced by foster children and foster parents living in the state of Florida. This study employed various methods to evaluate placement disruptions. First, factors associated with higher or lower risk of experiencing placement disruptions were identified, and included both child and parent characteristics. Risk ratios were calculated by dividing the conditional probability of placement disruptions given a certain factor (i.e., a gender of male) by the unconditional probability of placement disruptions across the entire sample. Second, baseline (i.e. pre-training) levels of placement disruptions experienced by foster parents were evaluated for appropriateness for inclusion in a subsequent analysis of training effectiveness. Specifically, baseline levels of placement disruptions were deemed suitable for inclusion in a treatment analysis if a panel of “expert” behavior analysts agreed that the data paths would allow for a comparison between baseline levels of disruptions and post-training levels of disruptions. Implications for behavioral research on the assessment of placement disruptions experienced by those involved in child welfare will be discussed.
 
Inconsistent Visual Analyses of Intrasubject Data Revisted
KATHARINE GUTSHALL (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), SungWoo Kahng (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Kyong-Mee Chung (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Joyce Kao (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Kelli Wheeler (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Tiffany M. Reid (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Jennifer Boensch (University of Maryland, Baltimore County)
Abstract: We conducted a replication and extension of DeProspero and Cohen (1979) examining the consistency of visual analyses in the analysis of single-case data. In experiment 1, we solicited feedback from members of the Board of Editors of the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis. They were asked to rate the demonstration of experimental control of single-case graphs using a 0 (no control) to 100 (control) scale as well as a yes/no scale. The results from this experiment showed consistency using the yes/no scale. Experiment 2 used graduate students to rate whether or not the graphs demonstrated experimental control using the 0 to 100 scale. These data showed that graduate students tended to be more conservative in their estimates of experimental control.
 
Influences of Calculation Method and Response Rate on Interobserver Agreement Scores
NATALIE ROLIDER (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida)
Abstract: We compared four commonly used methods for calculating observer reliability: total, interval, exact, and proportional agreement. Trained observers used PDAs to record computer-generated session data appearing on a separate computer screen. Two target events (responses) were programmed to occur at different rates (low, moderate, high) during each session so that reliability could be compared across a range of values. Interobserver agreement was calculated using each the four methods listed above. Exact agreement yielded the most conservative results, especially for high-rate responding, but proportional agreement was the most representative.
 
 
Symposium #300
Models of Teaching Verbal Behavior Across Settings: Home, School, and Clinic
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Stevens 5 (Lower Level)
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Kelly Kates-McElrath (Bucks County Schools Intermediate Unit #22 and Temple University)
Discussant: Philip N. Hineline (Temple University)
Abstract: Teaching children with autism who tend to be language-deficient the verbal behavior necessary to effectively commuicate and interact socially has become the focus of an increasing number of home-based and school-based programs. With the introduction of clinical settings providing this type of service, parents have access to additional resources and supports. Dependent on the setting, service delivery may vary.
 
Teaching Verbal Behavior in School-Based Settings
KIM STUNKARD (Council Rock School District)
Abstract: Determining an appropriate educational environment involves the members of a multidisciplinary team collaboratively executing the tasks that are aligned in a process of securing an appropriate educational environment. The aspects of a student’s individualized education program necessitate the need for the team to examine and review the existing features in the variety of special and regular education classrooms/ environments available to the school district. Recommended educational placements possess features that are conducive to providing the educational opportunities that will ensure student progress.It is often a difficult task to locate an appropriate educational program for a student with autism or other developmental disability. School districts possess the capability of providing educational programs that meet students’ needs. Classrooms, within the school district, can be arranged to provide more intensive and individualized programming. Applied Behavior Analysis with an emphasis on Verbal Behavior offers an approach to instruction that ensures acquisition or reduction of target behaviors. Intensive individualized school-based programs utilizing the approach may provide a forum in which to meet students’ needs while ensuring a free and appropriate PUBLIC education.
 
Teaching Verbal Behavior in Home-Based Settings
KATRINA L. MELLOTT (POAC)
Abstract: Skinner’s analysis of language, 1957, has been the foundation for many Applied Behavior Analysis programs for children with autism and other developmental delays. The Verbal Behavior model can be used in different settings. This paper emphasizes the effectiveness and efficiency of teaching Verbal Behavior in the home setting. The VB home program can run independently or in concurrence with a school or clinic program. The home-based model is ideal for response and stimulus generalization to occur across settings and people. The program is supervised by the parents and overseen by a verbal behavior consultant; therefore trainings for the therapists should be provided in the home by the consultant or achieved through professional workshops. The verbal behavior model in the home is a program that teaches and maintains skills the child will learn and use throughout their life.
 
Teaching Verbal Behavior in Clinical Settings
LEIGH MARIANO (Carbone Clinic)
Abstract: Children with autism and related disabilities are consistently and constantly being pushed from one treatment to another. These children are unable to find a consistent balance in a treatment that proves to be effective. Applied Behavior Analysis with an emphasis in Verbal Behavior has proven to be a comprehensive combination of skill set areas that aid to the future development in children with autism and related disabilities. Amongst its peers Verbal Behavior stems to be a treatment area with little or no empirical basis for its credibility and is therefore seen as a treatment only implemental in a home environment. Although Verbal Behavior is generally implemented within a home based program, with the proper funding and training these techniques have proven to be effective in a clinical setting. With an empirical base and the proper quality control a clinical setting can functionally serve as a beneficial resource for the treatment of children with autism and related disabilities.
 
 
Symposium #301
Perfecting the “Two-Step”: Supporting Staff in Providing Quality Lifestyles for Persons with Severe Disabilities
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Stevens 2 (Lower Level)
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Jamie D. Price (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.)
Discussant: Michael C. Strouse (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.)
CE Instructor: Diane Bannerman Juracek, Ph.D.
Abstract: In the context of his chapter entitled “Get a Life” (Koegel, Koegel & Dunlap, 1996), Todd Risley discussed the importance of “durable dance partners” for people with developmental disabilities. “Durable dance partners” are long-term, reliable support providers who build positive relationships, provide consistent treatment, and facilitate a high quality of life for those they support. This symposium describes three studies that show how these partnerships can be facilitated to produce positive outcomes for persons served. The first presentation examines how the satisfaction of people with severe disabilities can be assessed and how positive outcomes can be produced by increasing the satisfaction of live-in care providers through the use of a family “Quality of Life Plan”. The second presentation compares teacher interactions, person served rates of engagement, problem behavior, and preferred activities across two different models of day services. Finally, the third presentation focuses on the challenge of supporting staff implementation of a rigorous behavior support plan to address extreme self-injury and parasuicidal behavior.
 
Joy of the “Dance”: Increasing Quality of Life for People with Disabilities and Their Support Providers
DIANE BANNERMAN JURACEK (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Holly M. Sweeney (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Jamie D. Price (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Christina M. Holt (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Tammy Rystrom (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Michael C. Strouse (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Jan B. Sheldon (University of Kansas), James A. Sherman (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Service providers are continually challenged to offer high quality community residential services for people with severe and multiple developmental disabilities. Low pay, lackluster staff satisfaction, and high turnover hinder efforts to provide consistent treatment and build long-term relationships between staff and persons served. In this study, low levels of live-in staff satisfaction (averaging 3.7 on a 1-5 scale where 1 is not at all satisfied and 5 is very satisfied) led to the development and implementation of a “Quality of Life Plan” (QLP) for live-in couples. Satisfaction ratings and other outcomes, (e.g., engagement in high priority family activities) were measured to assess the effects of the QLP. Additionally, a Quality of life satisfaction survey was used to assess person served satisfaction and other outcomes, such as the number of visits to a favorite community venue.
 
Dosie-Doe All Day: Comparing Staff and Person-served Outcomes Across Two-Day Service Models
JAMES PARA-CREMER (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Diane Bannerman Juracek (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Mahin L. Para-Cremer (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Holly M. Sweeney (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Michael C. Strouse (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), James A. Sherman (University of Kansas), Jan B. Sheldon (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Provision of day services that are engaging and preferred by persons with severe developmental disabilities is a challenge. This study compares teacher interactions and consumer rates of engagement, problem behavior, and preferred activities across two different models of day service. The first model is a center-based model where vocational, leisure, and learning activities are based in a large building with large groups of consumers. The second model provides similar valued day activities with a smaller group of consumers in a smaller community-based setting. Both models include individualized daily schedules and community outings. A consultation process (Harchik, Sherman, Sheldon, & Strouse, 1992), including an inservice, coaching in the natural setting, and a lottery reward system were used to teach staff to actively engage consumers in their scheduled activities. Pilot data show that the consultation process paired with a lottery incentive system resulted in an increase in the average number of correctly completed steps from 60% to 97%. Additional data, including teacher and consumer satisfaction ratings will be presented.
 
Supporting Staff in the Treatment of Severe Self Injurious/Parasuicidal Behavior: Behavioral and PRN Medication Interventions
CHRISTINE M. MAGEE (The May Institute), James M. Sperry (The May Institute)
Abstract: The following is a data-based case study in the treatment of serious self-injurious/parasuicidal behavior using psychiatric hospitalizations as a measure. The participant is a 38 year old male with a diagnosis of Mild Mental Retardation, Depression with Psychotic Features, and Borderline Personality Disorder. The participant has a long history of self-injury/parasuicdal behavior resulting in the need for medical attention and psychiatric hospitalization. The behavior was effectively managed in a more restrictive residential setting for a number of years with no hospitalizations. The participant’s stability was jeopardized upon moving to a less restrictive setting and the need for psychiatric hospitalization reoccurred. Efforts to return the participant to the more restrictive setting proved ineffective and after a life threatening episode of the behavior the use of PRN medication became necessary to assure the participant’s safety in the residential setting. In addition, staff required specialized support to provide this individualized community based programming. Ongoing staff performance as well as access to the PRN medication are closely monitored and has resulted in a decrease in the frequency of severe self-injurious/parasuicidal behavior and psychiatric hospitalization.
 
 
Symposium #302
Recent Advances in Safety Skills Training: Abduction, Sexual Abuse, and Firearm Injury Prevention Skills
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Williford A (3rd floor)
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University)
CE Instructor: Raymond G. Miltenberger, Ph.D.
Abstract: The four papers in this symposium will present recent research on teaching safety skills to children and individuals with mental retardation. The first paper describes research comparing two procedures for teaching abduction prevention skills to children. The second paper describes a study evaluating behavioral skills training for teaching sexual abuse prevention skills to women with mental retardation. The third paper compares two procedures for teaching skills to children to prevent gun play and the fourth paper evaluates peer training for teaching skills to children to prevent gun play.
 
A Comparison of Two Behavioral Skills Training Procedures for Teaching Abduction Prevention Skills to School-Age Children
BRIGITTE M. JOHNSON (University of Iowa), Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University), Peter J. Knudson (North Dakota State University), Kristin Egemo-Helm (North Dakota State University), Linda K. Langley (North Dakota State University)
Abstract: Although child abduction is a low rate event, it presents a serious threat to the safety of children. The victims of child abduction face the threat of physical and emotional injury, sexual abuse, and death. Previous research has shown that behavioral skills training (BST) is effective in teaching children abduction prevention skills although not all children learn the skills. This study compared BST only to BST with an added in-situ training component in teaching abduction prevention skills in a small-group format to school-aged children. Results showed that both programs were effective in teaching abduction prevention skills. In addition, the scores for the group receiving in situ training were significantly higher than scores for the group receiving BST alone at the 3 month follow-up assessment.
 
Evaluation of a Behavioral Skills Training Program to Teach Sexual Abuse Prevention to Women with Mental Retardation
KRISTIN EGEMO-HELM (North Dakota State University), Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University), Peter J. Knudson (North Dakota State University), Nicholas Finstrom (North Dakota State University), Candice Jostad (North Dakota State University), Brigitte M. Johnson (University of Iowa)
Abstract: The current study evaluated a behavioral skills training (BST) program in combination with in-situ training to teach sexual abuse prevention skills to 5 women with mild to moderate mental retardation. In-situ assessments were conducted following BST, and in-situ training sessions were conducted for those who were unable to demonstrate the skills in the natural setting. The results showed that generalization of the safety skills to the natural setting occurred for three of the five participants following one to two in-situ training sessions. One participant required twelve in-situ training sessions and three booster training sessions to reach criterion level. Three of four participants assessed one month following training maintained the skills to criterion levels.
 
A Comparison of the Eddie Eagle GunSafe Program and Behavioral Skills Training for Teaching Skills to Prevent Gun Play
PAMELA D. KELSO (University of Manitoba), Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University), Marit Waters (North Dakota State University), Kristin Egemo-Helm (North Dakota State University), Angela Bagne (North Dakota State University)
Abstract: The effectiveness of the Eddie Eagle GunSafe Program, Level Two was compared to a Behavioral Skills Training (BST) procedure. Self-report, role-play, and in-situ assessments were used to evaluate the procedures in a posttest only control group design. Those children not demonstrating the target skills after training received an in-situ training session. Results indicated both programs were successful in promoting verbal report of the desired safety skills, however no differences were observed between training conditions as measured by role-play and in-situ assessments. However, the BST procedure was superior to the control condition on the role-play measure. Furthermore, the majority of the participants displayed the target behaviors following an additional in-situ training session and both the BST and Eddie Eagle group differed significantly from the control group at the second in-situ assessment.
 
Firearm Injury Prevention Skills: Increasing the Efficiency of Training with Peer Tutoring
CANDICE JOSTAD (North Dakota State University), Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University), Pamela D. Kelso (University of Manitoba), Peter J. Knudson (North Dakota State University)
Abstract: Gun play results in hundreds of childhood deaths and injuries each year in the United States. Behavioral Skills Training (BST) is used to teach children the skills needed to resist gun play when finding a firearm. Although effective, existing BST programs are time and resource intensive and therefore lack the efficiency required to be widely utilized. The current study examined the use of peers as tutors to decrease the time and resources needed to teach these safety skills to youngsters. Peer trainers conducted BST sessions and in-situ training with other children. Children taught by the peer trainers acquired the safety skills and demonstrated maintenance of those skills at follow-up. Furthermore, all of the peer trainers acquired and maintained the skills. These results support the use of peer tutoring to increase the efficiency and adoptability of BST programs.
 
 
Symposium #303
Supporting and Evaluating Implementation of Positive Behavior Support for At-Risk Students, School and States
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Williford C (3rd floor)
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Emma J. Martin (University of Oregon)
Discussant: Teri Lewis-Palmer (University of Oregon)
Abstract: Supporting students with problem behavior continues to challenge public schools. Additionally, the recent re-authorization of IDEA requires schools to provide positive behavior support and to conduct functional behavior assessments. Combined with decreasing resources schools require strategies and systems that are both effective and efficient. While several schools are participating in school-wide discipline project, the primary focus on these projects has been to build a foundation for specialized support. One emerging practice is applying research-based strategies with targeted groups of students. By adopting this approach schools are able to support 20-40 students with function-based but similar support thereby increasing the efficiency of their efforts. Another is to focus on establishing state-wide systems that support multiple schools to increase sustainability of efforts. The purpose of this session is to provide examples of three different approaches to positive behavior support.
 
Preventing Problem Behavior School-Wide with the Behavior Education Program: A Review of Research and Practical Implications
LEANNE HAWKEN (University of Utah), Katherine S. MacCleod (University of Utah)
Abstract: To prevent severe problem behavior, schools should implement a continuum of effective behavior support which includes universal school-wide procedures, targeted procedures for students at-risk, and intensive individualized procedures. Much of the literature summarizes implementation strategies for the universal and individual levels of support but few examples have been provided on how to implement targeted interventions for students at-risk but not currently engaging in severe problem behavior. A review of the research on one type of targeted intervention, the Behavior Education Program (BEP) will be presented including the effects of the BEP on office discipline referrals for both middle and elementary school students as well as the effects on direct observation of classroom problem behavior and academic engagement. Fidelity of treatment and social validity data will also be summarized. The review of the research provides evidence for the inclusion of the BEP as part of a school’s system of behavior support. Practical information will be included in the presentation for educators and researchers interested in implementing the BEP. Key Words: targeted intervention, secondary level prevention, school-wide behavior support, positive behavior support.
 
Program Evaluation of the Alabama School-Wide Positive Behavioral Support Implementation
MACK BURKE (University of Georgia), Shanna Hagan-Burke (University of Georgia), Tracy L. Blankenship (University of Georgia)
Abstract: States across the nation are witnessing students entering school who are culturally, economically, socially, and academically, more different than similar to one another. Many of these learners are exposed to cultural, familial, and community risk factors that place them at-risk for developing antisocial behavior patterns. To address the social-behavioral issues presented by children from diverse backgrounds that place them at great behavioral risk-effective and efficient prevention and intervention approaches must be identified and implemented to (a) prevent the occurrence and development antisocial behaviors and (b) respond early and proactively to the needs of children and youth who currently display such behavior. The purpose of this presentation is to provide results from four cohorts of schools who are implementing School-Wide Positive Behavioral Support in the state of Alabama. Results from (a) office discipline referrals, (b) Effective Behavioral Support Survey, (c) School-Wide Evaluation Tool, and the (d) Stanford 10 Achievement Test will be reviewed and discussed.Key words: Anti-social behavior, school-wide behavior support, office discipline referrals
 
Evaluating the Effectiveness of School-wide Positive Behavior Support in Urban Schools
KIMBERLY S. THIER (The May Institute), Marcie W. Handler (The May Institute), Robert F. Putnam (The May Institute)
Abstract: Schools continue to struggle with supporting all students within the school academic and social needs. While establishing a school-wide foundation is critical, schools must consider the role that classroom instruction and management have on student success. This presentation discusses nine schools, in one urban school district, that received training and consultation in positive behavior support across school-wide and classroom-wide systems. Fidelity of implementation data were collected for critical school-wide and classroom-wide variables. Student academic (i.e., on-task, academic achievement) and behavioral (i.e., ODR, ISS/OSS) outcome data for all nine schools will be discussed. Furthermore, implications and recommendations related to administrative and district support will be discussed.Key words: Classroom management, office discipline referrals, academic achievement,
 
 
Symposium #304
Teaching Applied Behavior Analysis: State Dependent Learning, Memory, and Issues Concerning Supervision
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Lake Erie (8th floor)
Area: TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Diane Raymond (Simmons College)
Discussant: Michael J. Cameron (Simmons College)
CE Instructor: Susan Ainsleigh, Ed.D.
Abstract: A successful behavior analytic graduate program requires that professors respond to the individualized learning needs of graduate students, both in classroom and supervised learning environments. Varying levels of experience in the field of applied behavior analysis and differing learning styles result in the need to develop instructional models to support graduate students who present with unique needs. In addition, careful attention to target environments of eventual practice is required to ensure that generalization occurs; in other words, that students acquire the unique skills they will need to perform effectively in future predicted stressful environments. This symposium presents a graduate behavioral education program’s responses to several unique learning challenges: the support of a student with Traumatic Brain Injury (TBI), the use of pedagogy that fosters generalization of learning in multiple contexts, and the design and evaluation of a supervised experiential learning program that supports students with varying backgrounds, levels of expertise, and research interests.
 
The Application of State Dependant Learning and Generalization Models to the Training of a Successful Behavior Analyst
ALLAN BLUME (Simmons College), Michael F. Dorsey (Simmons College)
Abstract: The first step in defining the successful training of a graduate student in the principals of applied behavior analysis lies in his/her ability to successfully pass the Behavior Analysis Certification Board examination. Other defining characteristics include their ability to apply the knowledge and skills they acquired during their educational experience within the work environments in which they eventually will attempt to practice their profession. This paper will provide a data based review of the various environmental conditions in operation within these situations and the systematic design and application of multiple pedagogies in the training of students relative to a state dependant/generalization model. Specific focus will be paid to the more stressful environmental variables that will challenge a successful student and how, as educators, we can adapt our teaching styles to offer students the skills necessary to overcome the deleterious effects of these challenges and overcome barriers that may otherwise render a well trained student ineffective in their practice.
 
Visual and Auditory Memory: Implications for Graduate Students Studying Behavior Analysis
MICHAEL J. CAMERON (Simmons College), Errion L. Turner (Simmons College)
Abstract: Professors teaching in behavior analytic graduate programs areconfronted each semester with a heterogeneous group of students. Some students rapidly acquire the basic principles of applied behavior analysis while others require a significant amountof repetition before learning. Although there may be varying reasons for a large discrepancy in the number of trials to criterion performance, a traumatic brain injury (TBI) can certainly be implicated for some students. When a professor attempts to assist such a student, a knowledge-base of different types of memory is extremely helpful. For example, visual memory concerns a person’s ability to remember what has been seen while auditory memory concern’s a person’s ability to remember what has been heard. The “picture superiority effect” suggests that we have better memory for pictures than words. In fact, Paivio (1991) suggests that dual decoding pictures are better remembered because they are encoded with two specific codes (pictorial and verbal) while words access just a single code (verbal). The extra code associated with pictures appears to give learners an advantage during retrieval. A graduate student with a TBI participated in this study. The study was initiated due to her limited ability to retain verbal information. The participate was taught how to create pictures out of each of the line items on the Behavior Analytic Certification Board ® Task List. The participant subsequently created her own pictures for each of the line items and studied both pictures and descriptions. The results of this study showed that the participant learned all items on the task list, made complex linkages and connections to other sections of the task list, retained the information, and demonstrated correct answer latencies that were comparable to her peers without a TBI. The implications of an understanding of verbal and auditory memory are discussed.
 
Evaluation of a Supervised Experiential Learning Program for Graduate Behavioral Education Students
SUSAN AINSLEIGH (Simmons College)
Abstract: This case study evaluates the experiential learning component of a graduate program in behavioral education using the framework of the CIPP program evaluation model (Stufflebeam, 1987) as a guide. Using archival record review, document review, interview of participants from a graduate behavioral education program, and interview of independent experts in the field of applied behavior analysis, a detailed portrait of the supervised, experiential learning component of a graduate-level behavioral education program is provided. The results of this study describe the intended outcomes of experiential learning in the field of applied behavior analysis, outline recommended procedures for developing and implementing a supervised, graduate-level experiential learning program, and describe the necessary components for evaluating the impact of supervision and experiential learning on the performance of future behavior analysts and educators.
 
 
Symposium #305
The Formation of Generalized Response Classes in Children with Autism: Discussion, Analysis and Implications
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Waldorf (3rd floor)
Area: TPC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: John C. Barnard (Educational Services Unit, Burlington County Special Services School District)
Discussant: Nicholas M. Berens (Center for Advanced Learning)
Abstract: Curriculum development in early intensive behavioral intervention (EIBI) for young children with autism is a specialized area that requires careful analysis and sequencing in order to build a complex repertoire of language and cognitive skills. Given the complexity of some of these behavioral repertoires, an analysis of curriculum sequences within effective EIBI can occur at many levels. This symposium will approach this task by looking at the possible role of individual learning trials towards the development of higher order, or generalized, response classes. Established EIBI curriculum sequences will be reviewed in accordance with relational frame theory (RFT) with an emphasis on specifying potential controlling variables employed in the development of generalized response classes. Key elements of RFT will also be applied to proposed curricular sequences whereby the specific application of multiple exemplar training with an emphasis on derived relational responding may yield a greater understanding of hierarchical skill-building and the development of multiple concurrent repertoires. It will be proposed that this type of curricular analysis could allow for increased research opportunities for applied clinicians and potential research questions will be discussed.
 
Relational Frame Theory and Early Intensive Behavioral Intervention for Autistic Spectrum Disorder
JOHN D. MCELWEE (Step By Step Academy)
Abstract: Relational Frame Theory (RFT) is a modern behavior analytic account of verbal behavior and cognition. This presentation will introduce participants to the conceptual and procedural tools of this theory. Relational operants are viewed as central to the development of verbal behavior and the ability to derive relations between stimuli. And this higher order operant is proposed as the means by which this skill is developed with arbitrary relational responding hypothesized as the core competence involved in developing verbal behavior. This presentation will discuss the implications of RFT towards early intensive behavioral intervention (EIBI) with an analysis of the components needed to perform relational/conditional discriminations. A review of existing curricula employed during EIBI will be conducted, with an emphasis on the Assessment of Basic Language and Learner Skills (ABLLS), in order to identify overlaps with RFT. The implications towards performance standards for skills, instructional protocols, and curriculum development will be shown with specific examples of precision teaching tools highlighted throughout this presentation.
 
A Proposition Towards Improved Curriculum Design: Emphasizing Multiple Bi-Directional Relations Within Hierarchical Skill Acquisition
JOHN C. BARNARD (Educational Services Unit, Burlington County Special Services School District), Thomas J. Waltz (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Within many behavior analytic approaches to curriculum development there appears to be an emphasis on the development of smaller, discrete units of behavior sometimes at the expense of a detailed analysis of the creation of larger, higher order behavioral classes. These generalized response classes may be discussed “after the fact” but typically not in terms of planned programming and usually only in the explanatory terms of response or stimulus generalization. This presentation will break down specific repertoire assumptions within trained and derived relations and propose a coordinated curriculum sequence that better accounts for the development of higher order behavioral classes. Hierarchical program sequencing will be discussed in terms of the concurrent training of multiple repertoires via specific program sequences and an emphasis on multiple exemplar training from the onset of intervention. Mutually entailed derived relations will also be discussed along with the differences between the development of selection-based verses topography-based repertoires.
 
Developing a Research Program for Tracking the Acquisition of Relational and Other Large Operants
THOMAS J. WALTZ (University of Nevada, Reno), Claudia Cardinal (University of Nevada, Reno), John C. Barnard (Educational Services Unit, Burlington County Special Services School District), Philip L. Concors (Devereux Consultants)
Abstract: The number of 1:1 instructional hours involved in early intensive behavioral intervention (EIBI) for autism generates a significant amount of raw data. The individualized nature of these interventions, however, makes it difficult for applied clinicians in EIBI to utilize certain traditional experimental models for behavioral research. Multiple exemplar training, for example, generates data that could potentially clarify many of the fundamental questions regarding how relational and other large operants are acquired and how they are most efficiently trained. This presentation will focus on building an alliance between applied behavior analysts and basic researchers in order to better answer basic questions in applied settings. Suggestions will be made for a) selecting curriculum sequences for investigation, b) developing efficient data recording techniques to capture the larger units of behavior, c) establishing data analysis procedures, and d) maximizing collaborative efforts.
 
 
Invited Panel #306
The Role of Values in a Science Driven Technology
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Lake Huron (8th floor)
Area: CSE/TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Maria R. Ruiz (Rollins College)
CE Instructor: Maria R. Ruiz, Ph.D.
Panelists: JAMES M. JOHNSTON (Auburn University), JUDITH E. FAVELL (AdvoServ), GINA GREEN (San Diego State University), SIGRID S. GLENN (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Values can be seen as bits of verbal behavior that specify or imply contingencies governing the behavior of the individual or group espousing those values. Like other disciplines, behavior analysis has certain values, which influence and are influenced by societal and cultural values. Applied behavior analysis has a long history of addressing issues associated with cultural values, particularly through its involvement in the area of developmental disabilities including normalization, respect for the individual, social validation, least restrictive alternative, dignity, inclusion, self-determination, participation, and person-centeredness, among others. Our values may conflict with one another. These conflicts may remain at the level of an individual but often the conflict pits “good” for one individual against “good” for others; or “good” for now against “good” in the future; or “good” for our culture against “good” for the biosphere. Science-driven technologies make possible new “goods” but in the process increase the possibility for conflicting goods. The overarching values of behavior analysis are scientific ones. The challenge for applied behavior analysis is how to integrate cultural values with scientific values such as effectiveness – the standard by which we judge research literature and behavior change procedures – without sacrificing the scientific foundation that makes our technology effective.
JAMES M. JOHNSTON (Auburn University)
Dr. Johnston received his doctorate from the University of Florida in 1970 and is professor of Psychology at Auburn University. He has conducted both laboratory and field research with both human and non-human species on a variety of topics, ranging from rumination to canine olfaction, most recently serving as Director of Behavioral Research for the Institute for Biological Detection Systems. His present activities focus on longstanding interests in the area of developmental disabilities. He serves as director of the Department of Psychology’s Master’s Program in Applied Behavior Analysis in Developmental Disabilities and has for some years been involved with the Alabama Department of Mental health and Mental Retardation in facilitating the statewide delivery of sound habilitative services, following similar involvement in Florida’s mental retardation system while on the faculty of the University of Florida from 1975-1985. He has served as editor of The Behavior Analyst and on the editorial boards of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior and the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, among others. He has also served as president of the Association for Behavior Analysis, as well as for the Florida, Alabama, and Southeastern affiliate chapters of the Association, and is currently president of the Behavior Analysis Certification Board. In addition to authoring numerous journal and technical publications, he has co-authored a text in research methods for studying behavior, now in a two-volume second edition, and has additional teaching interests in applied behavior analysis and in conceptual issues in the study of behavior.
JUDITH E. FAVELL (AdvoServ)
Judith E. Favell is CEO of AdvoServ, a multi-state network of treatment programs for children and adults with developmental and emotional challenges. Dr. Favell received her bachelor's degree in psychology from Illinois Wesleyan University in 1966, and earned her Ph.D. in developmental and child psychology from the University of Kansas in 1970. Throughout her career as a clinician, researcher, teacher, lecturer and administrator, she has focused on the understanding and treatment of serious behavior disorders, such as self-injurious and aggressive behavior in individuals with autism. Her work has encompassed not only clinical domains, but also organizational, regulatory, legal and policy issues, for example through testifying, chairing national task forces, serving as expert witness and writing guidelines and policies governing treatment in developmental disabilities. Dr. Favell has authored numerous articles, monographs, chapters and books, edited a leading journal and several newsletters, and served on the editorial boards of many others. She has presented extensively both nationally and internationally on topics ranging from innovations in treatment to utilization of video technology with vulnerable and dependent populations. Her offices have included President of the International Association for Behavior Analysis and President of the American Psychological Association's Division on Developmental Disabilities.
GINA GREEN (San Diego State University)
Gina Green received a PhD in Psychology (Analysis of Behavior) from Utah State University in 1986 following undergraduate and master’s degree studies at Michigan State University. She has been a faculty member in Behavior Analysis and Therapy at Southern Illinois University; Director of Research at the New England Center for Children in Southborough, Massachusetts; Associate Scientist at the E.K. Shriver Center for Mental Retardation in Waltham, Massachusetts; and Research Associate Professor of Psychiatry and Pediatrics, University of Massachusetts Medical School. Dr. Green is currently in private practice in San Diego as a consultant and is on the faculty at San Diego State University and the University of North Texas. She has authored numerous publications on the treatment of individuals with developmental disabilities and brain injuries, as well as the experimental analysis of behavior. Dr. Green co-edited the books Behavioral Intervention for Young Children with Autism and Making a Difference: Behavioral Intervention for Autism. She serves or has served on the editorial boards of several professional journals in developmental disabilities and behavior analysis. Dr. Green also serves on the Board of Trustees and the Autism Advisory Group of the Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies, the Board of Directors of the Behavior Analyst Certification Board, the Board of Directors of the California Association for Behavior Analysis, and the advisory boards of several autism programs and organizations. She is a Board Certified Behavior Analyst, former president of the Association for Behavior Analysis, and a Fellow of the American Psychological Association and the Council for Scientific Medicine and Mental Health. Psychology Today named her “Mental Health Professional of the Year” in 2000. Dr. Green lectures and consults widely on autism and related disorders, behavioral research, and effective interventions for people with disabilities.
SIGRID S. GLENN (University of North Texas)
Sigrid Glenn is Regents Professor of Behavior Analysis and was the founding chair of the Department of Behavior Analysis at UNT. She is a past president of ABA. Her published work includes empirical and theoretical journal articles, book chapters, and books, some of which is widely cited in publications of many different disciplines.
 
 
Paper Session #307
Theories of Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Continental C (1st floor)
Area: AUT
Chair: Philip W. Drash (Autism Early Intervention & Prevention Center)
 
Exploratory Studies in the Prevention of Autism: An Analysis of Four Successful Cases
Domain: Theory
PHILIP W. DRASH (Autism Early Intervention & Prevention Center), Roger M. Tudor (Westfield State College)
 
Abstract: Based on our recently published analysis of autism as a contingency-shaped disorder of verbal behavior in The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, it appears that behavior analysis may now be in a position to answer one of the more challenging questions of autism professionals and parent advocates, "How can autism be prevented?" This presentation will analyze four successful cases in the prevention of autism. The subjects were young children who were originally at high risk for autism. All four children achieved complete recovery. In one case the intervention was minimal. In all cases the intervention was substantially less than required for intensive ABA in-home therapy. The children initially ranged in age from 17 months to 2 years, 10 months. Each case represents a different aspect of the continuum of prevention in autism.This paper will present the methods of intervention used and will discuss how the intervention procedures relate to a behavioral theory of the etiology and prevention of autism.
 
An Operant/Respondent Theory of Autism
Domain: Theory
SVEIN EIKESETH (Akershus University College)
 
Abstract: This paper examines the possibility that abnormal reinforcement and respondent mechanisms are responsible for some of the behaviors displayed by individuals with autism. Typically, sensory stimuli have a powerful effect on (the behaviors of) children with autism, as shown when they demonstrate hyper- or hypo sensitivity to sounds, smell, touch, pain, etc., or when they exhibit high rates of self-stimulatory behaviors such as gazing, rocking, spinning, lining objects, looking at videos, etc. It is suggested that some sensory stimuli have extreme reinforcing and eliciting properties whereas other sensory stimuli have extreme aversive properties. If so, individuals with autism may spend most of their time attempting to avoid or escape aversive sensory stimulation and to maximize access to reinforcing sensory stimuli. An organism who responds in such a way will exhibit high rates of self-stimulatory behaviors because of the sensory/perceptual reinforcement mechanism underlying such behaviors. Also, because the sensory/perceptual reinforcers are not mediated socially, but rather occur through automatic reinforcement, communication and social skills are virtually nonfunctional for the organism. This may explain the social and communicative deficits, which together with the display of high rates of stereotyped behavior define autism.
 
A Rationale for Addressing Core Strengths in Autism Intervention
Domain: Service Delivery
MARY D. SALMON (The Ohio State University), Diane M. Sainato (The Ohio State University)
 
Abstract: Presenting prior to age 3, autism is a neurobiological disorder considered to be one of the most profound disorders of childhood affecting the manner in which children learn to be social beings, to take care of themselves, and to participate in family and community events. Perhaps, nothing strikes more at the core of a family’s functioning than the birth of a child with a severe disability. For this reason, considerable multidisciplinary attention is focused on the development of effective intervention strategies that yield the most positive changes for the child with autism and for his family, across the lifespan. This presentation will briefly describe the core deficits and concomitant strengths of autism spectrum disorder in reference to the cognitive, social-communicative, and behavioral development of the child. Using empirically validated intervention strategies that build on the child’s existing repertoire of skills while embracing the behavioral assets typically encountered in individuals with autism, an argument for a shift to a strengths-based system of service delivery is proposed.
 
 
 
Symposium #308
Translational Research Relevant to Discrete-Trial Training Among Children with Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Continental A (1st floor)
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Wayne W. Fisher (Marcus Autism Center)
Discussant: Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
CE Instructor: Wayne W. Fisher, Ph.D.
Abstract: Basic research focuses on increasing our understanding of general principles of behavior (i.e., why questions), whereas applied research focuses on how specific problems can be resolved or improved (i.e., how to questions). Translational research is a term that is increasingly used to describe research that attempts to link and interrelate basic and applied research. Building such connections can make basic research more relevant to everyday problems. In addition, the precision and generality of applied research is often enhanced when it is informed or derived from basic research and principles. This symposium will feature three examples of translational research relevant to discrete-trials training among children with autism. Athens and Vollmer will present a study in which a common clinical problem, decreased treatment integrity during discrete-trial training, was examined in a human-operant laboratory using college students as participants. Dickson, Wang, and Dube will present data on overselective observing and attending responses in special-education students performing matching-to-sample tasks. Shabani and Fisher will present data on the effects of interspersing previously mastered items during discrete-trial training with children with autism. Finally, Dorothea Lerman will serve as the discussant to integrate the findings of these three presentations into the broad themes of translational research.
 
An Investigation of Treatment Integrity Failures During Discrimination Training
ELIZABETH S. ATHENS (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract: Discrete trial training is a commonly used teaching method for children diagnosed with autism. Little attention has been given to methodological issues related to the general procedures. For example, discrete trial training commonly utilizes discrimination training, however little is known about the sensitivity of this training to treatment integrity failures within discrete trial training. The purpose of this study was to evaluate a method of conducting human operant (translational) research on discrimination training and to examine responding during two kinds of treatment integrity failures. A simulated program of a complex discrimination task was developed using Visual Basic computer programming. The program was used to examine responses to arbitrary, novel tasks in a controlled laboratory setting with undergraduate college students as participants. The two kinds of errors evaluated were: a) errors of omission (a reinforcer was not delivered when it was earned), and b) errors of commission (a reinforcer was delivered when it was not earned). The probability of errors of omission and commission were manipulated across several conditions for three groups of five participants. Results for all three groups suggest that errors of commission were more detrimental to learning. Preliminary data for individual subject replications will also be presented. Plans to replicate these procedures with children will be discussed.
 
Effects of Reinforcer Rate on Observing in Restricted Stimulus Control
CHATA A. DICKSON (E.K. Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts M), Sharon Wang (E.K. Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts Medical School), William V. Dube (E.K. Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts Medical School)
Abstract: This paper will present translational research on overselective observing and attending in special-education students performing matching-to-sample tasks. The basic research foundation comes from two areas: research in observing behavior that has shown a relation between stimulus-reinforcer relations and observing preferences, and research in behavioral momentum that has shown a relation between reinforcer rate and behavioral persistence. Our experiments investigate reinforcer-related variables that may affect the flexibility of observing behavior in transition points from less- to more-complex sample stimuli (one- vs. two-element sample stimuli). Observing topographies, measured by eye tracking apparatus, include number and duration of observations. Results show that both overall reinforcer rate and specific stimulus-reinforcer relations may affect observing behavior in matching to sample.
 
The Effects of Interspersal Versus Non-Interspersal Training on Acquisition During Discrete Trial Instruction
DANIEL B. SHABANI (Marcus Autism Center), Wayne W. Fisher (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: This study incorporated features from a withdrawal and multielement design to compare the effects of interspersal versus noninterpsersal training during discrete trial instruction with three children diagnosed with autism. During interspersal training sessions, previously mastered sight words and numbers were alternated with one novel target word or number. During non-interspersal training sessions, only novel sight words or numbers were presented. After meeting specific mastery criteria, periodic baseline probes were conducted in order to assess the effects of interspersal and non-interspersal training on acquisition rates. Results indicated different rates of acquisition across training procedures. The implications for discrete trial training programs will be discussed.
 
 
Panel #309
Applied Behavior Analysis: Treatment Prospectives Across the Lifespan of Individuals with Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Continental B (1st floor)
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Anne S. Holmes (Eden Family of Services)
ANNE S. HOLMES (Eden Family of Services)
DIANE VANDRIESEN (Eden Family of Services)
NINA FINKLER (Eden Family of Services)
Abstract: The use of applied behavior analysis as an effective treatment option for young children with autism has been well documented in professional literature. These treatment options have been incorporated into a variety of settings, i.e., home based programs, private schools, and public schools. All settings noted in the literature include the key elements of intensity of services, 1:1 instruction, data-based accountability, and documented success. The literature falls short in documenting the use of applied behavior analysis for individuals with autism as they age through upper elementary school, middle school, high school, and adulthood. Not only does the scope of ABA techniques need to expand as children age, but the application of techniques in natural settings must be addressed. Learning in ratios beyond 1:1 must be achieved in order for skills to be acquired and, more importantly, mastered. This panel will discuss the issue of effective application of applied behavior analysis for individuals with autism beyond early childhood.
 
 
Paper Session #310
Int'l Paper Session - EAB I
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
International South (2nd floor)
Area: EAB
Chair: Josele Abreu-Rodrigues (University of Brazil)
 
Variation and Behavioral Sensitivity to Contingency Changes
Domain: Basic Research
JOSELE ABREU-RODRIGUES (University of Brazil), Ana A. Baumann (Utah State University), Alessandra Souza (University of Brazil)
 
Abstract: Two studies compared the effects of instructions and self-descriptions, and histories with either a variety of schedules of reinforcement or a single schedule upon behavioral sensitivity. In Experiment 1, during Training, the variable groups were exposed to three schedules (FR, VI, FT), and the specific groups to one schedule (FR). Each one of these two groups was divided into two subgroups. Participants in the self-description groups were asked to indicate the best way to gain points. Their answers were given to participants in the instruction groups. During Testing, all participants were exposed to an FI schedule. Response rates decreased with the FI schedule for the variable groups, and remained unaltered for the specific groups. Experiment 2 asked whether the high sensitivity obtained with the variable groups were due to the exposure to several schedules or to the variable behavior patterns produced by those schedules. For such, the variable groups were exposed to FR, VR, and RR schedules. The implementation of the FI did not decrease the high response rates generated by those schedules. These findings suggest that self-descriptions and instructions are functionally equivalent, and that variable contingencies promote greater behavioral sensitivity than specific ones as long as variable behavior patterns are obtained with the former contingencies.
 
Peak Shift and Resistance-to-Change
Domain: Basic Research
BRENT L. ALSOP (University of Otago, New Zealand), Benjamin McEachen (University of Otago, New Zealand)
 
Abstract: Four pigeons were trained in a multiple schedule where different colors signaled the two components. Responses were reinforced on a random interval 30-s schedule in one component, and on a random interval 180-s schedule in the other component. Response rates were higher during the component with the higher reinforcer rate. A succession of brief generalization tests was then carried out in extinction using eight different key colors. The generalization gradients revealed both positive and negative peak shift, and response rates to all stimuli decreased across sessions of extinction. An analysis of resistance-to-change at each test stimulus across extinction sessions revealed that resistance-to-change also showed the peak shift phenomenon. Response rate and resistance-to-change can share common properties of stimulus control, and both are worthy of analysis in order to understand the relation between response strength and antecedent stimuli.
 
 
 
Paper Session #311
Evaluating Web-Based Instruction for Adults
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Williford B (3rd floor)
Area: EDC
Chair: Darrel R. Davis (University of South Florida)
 
An Experimental Analysis of the Effectiveness of Two Web-Based Instructional Programs in Teaching Complex Auditory Discrimination with Classical Music
Domain: Applied Research
GUDMUNDUR T. HEIMISSON (University of South Florida), Darrel E. Bostow (University of South Florida), Michael A. Cohen (University of South Florida), Darrel R. Davis (University of South Florida)
 
Abstract: Posttest performances after two forms of Web-based tutorial instruction were compared. Both forms were designed to teach discrimination between different types of music (medieval/renaissance, baroque, classical, romantic, and modern). The first treatment condition was a web page with text and accompanying hyperlinks to musical selections matched to the text. In this condition, students read and listened at their own discretion — without program restrictions. The second treatment had exactly the same text and musical selections, but the web-based program showed only a few paragraphs at a time. Progress through the program was contingent on filling in missing words in the text presented. No time constraints were placed on participants. The essential difference between the conditions was 1) movement with the instruction content without restriction, and 2) advancement through the program being dependent upon correct responses to the text material (which included discriminative responding to accompanying musical examples). Implications of the study and suggestions for future research will be discussed.
 
Experimental Evaluation of Incremental Prompting as a Feature of Web-Delivered Programmed Instruction
Domain: Applied Research
DARREL R. DAVIS (University of South Florida), Darrel E. Bostow (University of South Florida), Gudmundur T. Heimisson (University of South Florida)
 
Abstract: An extensive tutorial was created about an operant analysis of the relevance of feelings in daily living. Dependent variables were various student outcomes such as posttest performance, self-report, time to complete the tutorials, and scored essays. The study compared the presentation of 1) standard prose, 2) the same prose delivered in PI format with the necessity of supplying missing words—but allowing only one try per frame, 3) PI with contingent gradually increasing prompting following wrong answers in each frame until the student answered correctly or the correct answer was presented. Data will be discussed with respect to the questions of 1) whether error-contingent prompting facilitates post-tutorial performance, and 2) whether any effects were observed in user performance that resulted from decreasing the contribution of each correct answer to a “running tutorial percent correct score.”
 
 
 
Symposium #312
From Primary Verbal Operants to Rules: A Conceptual Analysis of the Functional Variables at Work
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Stevens 3 (Lower Level)
Area: VBC; Domain: Theory
Chair: David Bicard (Hawthorne Country Day School)
Discussant: William L. Heward (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: In this symposium we will present two papers related to the study of verbal behavior. The first paper will discuss recent investigations done in the area of stimulus-stimulus pairing to teach primary verbal operants to non-verbal children. The second paper will discuss the research on rules and verbally controlled behavior. Both of the papers will delve into the conceptual and methodological difficulties in the study of these two areas of verbal behavior and discuss alternate interpretations of the research that may prove useful for the further study of verbal behavior.
 
A Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedure and Vocal Behavior of Children with Autism and Developmental Disabilities
SOYOUNG YOON (Hawthorne Country Day School), David Bicard (Hawthorne Country Day School)
Abstract: A stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure has been proven effective in inducing noble vocal sounds in children with no or very limited vocal verbal behavior. The effect of the pairing procedure is evident in increasing the rate of the specific vocal sound paired without direct reinforcement. However, the effect has been reported to be temporary in several studies. The author will describe possible variables related to this. And specifically, the author will present a study that manipulates one of the possible variables, the number of pairings and pairing sessions, and discuss the results. A stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure has been proven effective in inducing noble vocal sounds in children with no or very limited vocal verbal behavior. The effect of the pairing procedure is evident in increasing the rate of the specific vocal sound paired without direct reinforcement. However, the effect has been reported to be temporary in several studies. The author will describe possible variables related to this. And specifically, the author will present a study that manipulates one of the possible variables, the number of pairings and pairing sessions, and discuss the results.
 
A Conceputal Analysis of the Functional Charecteristics of Rules
DAVID BICARD (Hawthorne Country Day School)
Abstract: Since Skinner first introduced the term rule into the lexicon of behavior analysis in the 1960s, behavioral researchers have failed to come to a clear consensus concerning either the conceptual foundation or the experimental results of the analysis of how rules control verbal and nonverbal behavior. A precise and experimentally determined definition of rules will likely influence the course and interpretation of research and has implications for how behavior analysts apply the technology to help solve human problems. The purpose of this paper is to review the conceptual and experimental analysis of verbally controlled behavior, examine the relevant literature, and provide a research supported functional definition of the term rule.
 
 
Paper Session #313
The Place of Movement in the Analysis of Behavior
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Astoria (3rd floor)
Area: TPC
Chair: Parsla Vintere (The City University of New York)
 
Talking About Movement in Behavioral Terms
Domain: Theory
PARSLA VINTERE (The Graduate Center, The City University of New York), Claire L. Poulson (Queens College, City University of New York)
 
Abstract: Movement has rarely been a central focus in the field of behavior analysis and there is no separate area of study of movement. While movement is a part of all behavior, it may become the main focus in the context of motor development, health, and various forms of physical activity. The purpose of this paper is (a) to define movement in behavioral terms; (b) to provide a brief review of general categories of motor skill; and (c) to examine behavioral measures that might be used to uncover learning processes underlying movement. The behavior analysis literature on movement and that of subdisciplines of kinesiology will be discussed.
 
Behavioral Analysis of Movement
Domain: Theory
PARSLA VINTERE (The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Claire L. Poulson (Queens College, City University of New York)
 
Abstract: The purpose of this paper is to review the behavior analysis literature on movement and that of subdisciplines of kinesiology pertaining to movement as a dependent variable. Environmental control of movement by antecedents and consequences will also be discussed. Theoretical and empirical studies examining the effectiveness of various discrimination-training procedures, such as differential reinforcement, prompting, transfer-of-stimulus-control, response differentiation, and induction are presented in the context of motor development, health rehabilitation, and physical activity. Strategies for programming stimulus generalization are discussed. It is concluded that movement, when defined in behavioral terms, is an important and appropriate area of behavior analysis.
 
 
 
Symposium #314
Recent Developments in Conditioned Reinforcement and Drugs
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:00 AM–11:20 AM
Lake Ontario (8th floor)
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Bethany R. Raiff (University of Florida)
Discussant: Timothy A. Slocum (Utah State University)
Abstract: This symposium will cover recent developments in the relationship between drugs and their correlated, non-pharmacological stimuli. The first presentation (Koffarnus and Katz) will address effects of stimulant drugs on responding in second order schedules, while the second presentation (Raiff and Dallery) will discuss effects of nicotine on responding using the observing procedure. Finally, the third presentation (Roll, Reilly, and Johanson) will examine the influence of drug-associated consequences on the reinforcing properties of the drugs themselves.
 
Stimulant and Non-stimulant Effects on Responding During Second-Order Schedules of Food Reinforcement in Pigeons
MIKHAIL KOFFARNUS (National Institute on Drug Abuse), Jonathan L. Katz (National Institute on Drug Abuse /NIH /DHHS)
Abstract: An increase in the effects of conditioned reinforcement has been suggested as a mechanism for the increases in operant responding produced by psychomotor stimulant drugs. The current experiment attempted to independently assess the effects of psychomotor stimulant drugs on rates of operant responding and a potential effect on conditioned reinforcement. Six pigeons were trained to respond under second-order schedules of reinforcement with brief stimulus presentations paired with food delivery [FI 5-min(FR 10:S)]. The brief stimulus presentations within the second-order schedule were then replaced with stimuli not paired with any reinforcer. Data will be presented describing the effects on responding produced by cocaine, d-amphetamine, and pentobarbital administered before sessions.
 
Effects of Nicotine on Food/Extinction and Observing Responses in Rats
BETHANY R. RAIFF (University of Florida), Jesse Dallery (University of Florida)
Abstract: The non-pharmacological stimuli associated with smoking may be important in smoking maintenance, and have been shown to enhance nicotine self-administration in non-humans. However, the direct effects of nicotine on responding maintained by these stimuli (i.e., conditioned reinforcers) have not been explicitly studied. The current experiment used the observing-response procedure to study the acute and chronic effects of nicotine on lever pressing maintained by food and conditioned reinforcers (i.e., lights), and lever pressing in the absence of programmed consequences (i.e., extinction). Four rats served as subjects. Food-maintained responses during the acute phase did not change, but increased for three of four subjects at the intermediate doses during the chronic phase. Relative to vehicle, intermediate doses of nicotine increased observing-responses for three of the four subjects during the acute phase and for all subjects after chronic exposure. There were no significant changes in response rates during extinction for either the acute or chronic phase. The results suggest that nicotine enhances responding maintained by conditioned reinforcers, and possibly by food, but does not affect responding during periods of extinction.
 
Drugs as Conditioned Reinforcers
JOHN M. ROLL (Washington State University, Friends Research Institute), Mark P. Reilly (Central Michigan University), Chris-Ellyn Johanson (Wayne State University)
Abstract: Drugs of abuse have often been shown to confer reinforcing efficacy onto stimuli that are associated with their consumption. We have been investigating a related, yet conceptually different, aspect of this relation; namely, to what extent can the reinforcing (or punishing) events that follow drug consumption alter the reinforcing efficacy of the drug. That is, can the events that follow drug consumption serve to increase or decrease the drug’s reinforcing efficacy via a process of conditioned reinforcement? We will discuss data on this topic garnered from laboratory studies conducted with humans self- administering, placebo, diazepam or ethanol. Results suggest that the reinforcing efficacy of placebo and diazepam are readily increased by pairing their consumption with the perception of enhanced performance and monetary gain. Results for alcohol are more equivocal, perhaps suggesting that prior experience with a certain drug may produce some resistance to alteration in the drug’s reinforcing efficacy via a conditioned reinforcement process. Finally, we will conclude by discussing the clinical and prevention implications of these data.
 
 
Paper Session #315
Int'l Paper Session - Timing
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:20 AM
Private Dining Room 3 (3rd floor)
Area: EAB
Chair: Lauren Duffy (Texas Christian University)
 
Acquisition Versus Steady State in the Time-Left Procedure
Domain: Basic Research
ARMANDO MACHADO (University of Minho, Portugal), Marco Vasconcelos (Purdue University)
 
Abstract: We report the results of two experiments designed to test Scalar Expectancy Theory (SET) in the time-left procedure. Pigeons were initially exposed to two fixed-interval schedules, an FI 30 s and an FI 60 s. The two FIs were associated with distinct keys and were presented on separate trials. Subsequently, during test trials, the FI 60-s key was illuminated and then, after 15, 30, or 45 s had elapsed since trial onset, the FI 30-s key also was illuminated. SET predicted that a) preference for the FI 30-s key would be weaker the later that key was introduced into the test trials, and b) the result described in a) would be obtained since the very first test trials. The results from both experiments showed that prediction a) was confirmed but not prediction b). That is, preference changed reliably from acquisition to steady state, which suggests that learning took place during the test trials. We discuss the implications of these findings for theories of timing.
 
Temporal Dynamics and Reinforcer Duration: Determining Relevant Time Markers in Interval Schedule Performance in Pigeons
Domain: Basic Research
LAUREN DUFFY (Texas Christian University), Kaity Volpe (Texas Christian University), Jennifer J. Higa (Texas Christian University)
 
Abstract: Previous studies have shown that under certain conditions temporal performance on fixed interval (FI) schedules depends on the duration of the reinforcer. For example, postreinforcement pause (PRP) is longer with longer reinforcer durations. This result is unexpected because it means that timing is based on an event that is irrelevant to when a reinforcer will be available. A possible explanation is that animals are timing more than the interval requirement and include the duration of the reinforcer, so that the total cycle time drives behavior in the next interval. To test this idea, we exposed eight pigeons to a response-initiated delay (RID) schedule during which pigeons received reinforcers ranging from two to ten seconds. The total cycle time – time to the first response, delay to reinforcement, and reinforcer duration – was set to 60 s. Trial-by-trial and molar measures of performance during acquisition and the effects of reinforcer duration will be presented. The findings will be discussed in terms of models of timing including scalar expectancy theory and the multiple-time scale model.
 
 
 
Symposium #316
CE Offered: BACB
Achieving Fluent Responding in Young Children with Disabilities
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Stevens 1 (Lower Level)
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Brian Doyle (HMEA)
Discussant: Brian Doyle (HMEA)
CE Instructor: Robyn E. Stewart, M.Ed.
Abstract:

Teachers often encounter students who present with both academic deficits and social-behavioral difficulties. Deficiencies in basic academic skills can eventually lead students to be excluded from general education classrooms, while a lack of appropriate social skills affects not only their development of advanced communicative abilities, but also further exacerbates their isolation from peers. Both of these deficit areas are strong predictors of later problems in life. Fluency training, with its emphasis on ?the student knows best? approach, offers alternate strategies for addressing these issues. Fluency training has been found to increase acquisition and retention of both component and composite skills. This presentation examines how fluency training in combination with other treatments can improve a basic academic skill (i.e., oral reading and comprehension) and social skills in young children with developmental disabilities. Results will be discussed with respect to the retention, endurance, and application of these skills in classroom settings.

 
Increasing Sight Word Fluency Through Audio Taped Recordings
KARA MUIRHEAD (HMEA), Michael J. Cameron (Simmons College), Michele D. Mayer (HMEA)
Abstract: Research that focuses on sight word acquisition and its relation to reading fluency and comprehension have yielded mixed results. One group of studies has demonstrated support for within context teaching to increase reading fluency and comprehension through repeated readings, peer-mediated instruction and previewing. Other studies, however, have shown that within context instruction does not necessarily increase reading fluency and comprehension when compared to out of context strategies. This study seeks to increase the fluency of sight word recognition using audio tape recordings of a student diagnosed with Kleinfelter’s Syndrome, Developmental Delay and ADHD. This subject was chosen due to the desire of his TEAM to increase his time in the general education classroom and the gap between his instructional reading level in comparison to his peers. A changing criterion design demonstrated the effectiveness of increasing sight word recognition. A correlation is made between the increased fluency in sight word recognition during out of context instruction and the fluency of in context reading and comprehension.
 
Increasing Oral Reading Fluency Through Video Modeling and Sight Word Training
ROBYN E. STEWART (HMEA)
Abstract: Educators indicate that literacy skills are among the most necessary skills for functional living in today’s society. Additionally, students who read well are more likely to achieve success in school. Students with learning disabilities often struggle to read fluently which teachers suggest later leads to difficulty with reading comprehension skills. A variety of interventions including repeated readings, tutoring, phonological training programs, sight word training, and video self-monitoring have yielded mixed results. These intervention approaches have identified a variety of challenges as children attempt to generalize these skills to novel reading materials. For example, in some studies an increase in a child’s ability to identify sight words did not correlate to an increase in oral reading fluency. This study sought to increase oral reading fluency through fluency training for sight word identification, utilizing a matching to sample procedure, and then additionally following a video modeling procedure. Results indicate that the treatment package of sight word training in addition to video modeling, was successful in increasing oral reading fluency for a learner with PDD-NOS.
 
A Classroom Approach to Increasing Social Interactions Among Preverbal Pre-school Children with Autism
HEATHER LYNN LEWIS (Autism Education and Support Services)
Abstract: Intensive behaviorally-based classrooms provide quality research-based programs that allow for the implementation of dynamic and comprehensive therapy packages. The resources and expertise of a quality program aides in the development of many children on the autism spectrum. In a pre-school setting, an optimal environment to teach social skills, research is limited in the area of pre-school-based interventions, particularly with pre-verbal children. Using a multiple baseline design, six pre-verbal children between 36-60 months diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorders participated in a variety of treatment combinations in a classroom setting to determine effective classroom strategies for increasing social interactions. Results indicate establishing operations and targeting highly preferred activities vs. those pre-determined by an adult increase peer interactions between non-verbal children. Targeting these skills also indicated increased fluency of peer-initiated interactions as compared to adult directed play interactions. The results of this study provide specific socialization strategies that will aide classroom teachers with behaviorally-based pre-school classrooms.
 
 
Symposium #317
Acquisition of Observational Learning and Higher Order Verbal Operants
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Private Dining Room 2 (3rd floor)
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jessica Singer-Dudek (St. John's University)
Abstract: We present 4 papers focusing on the acquisition of observational learning and higher order verbal operants. Two of the papers describe studies that tested the effects of peer monitoring on the acquisition of observational learning. The first demonstrated that elementary students with developmental disabilities acquired tacts, reading words, and spelling words as a function of learning to monitor their peers’ correct and incorrect responses. The second demonstrated that middle school students acquired rule-governed responding by observing tutees’ correct and incorrect responses to peer tutors during tutoring sessions in which math rules for performing complex operations were taught. The third paper tested the effects of peer tutoring on the untaught responses of both tutors and tutees to contractions, morphemes, and spelling words in a multiple exemplar format. The fourth paper tested the relative effects of two types of multiple exemplar instruction on the transformation of establishing operations across mands and tacts for preschoolers with disabilities. Taken together, the results from these studies provide valuable information regarding the acquisition of observational learning and the emergence of untaught responses as a function of multiple exemplar instruction, both of which can lead to improved educational outcomes for all kinds of learners.
 
The Effects of a Peer-Monitoring Procedure on the Acquisition of Observational Learning
JOANN PEREIRA DELGADO (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: A series of experiments were conducted to test whether students without observational learning would acquire observational learning by teaching them to monitor the correct and incorrect responses of their peers. The procedure was tested across 6 five to six year old students with developmental disabilities, who did not demonstrate observational learning in pre-experimental probes. The dependent variable for the first experiment was responses to probes for common words and tacts immediately following each session in which they observed their peers receive learn units. A counterbalanced multiple baseline across participants for a) tacts and b) words was implemented. The treatment consisted of the observers completing a series of teaching sessions in which they learned to monitor their assigned peer’s correct and incorrect responses to learn unit presentations of words to a predetermined criterion. The results demonstrated a higher level of responding to words and tacts from pre-experimental levels, thereby demonstrating that the students had acquired observational learning. In addition, the results demonstrated that the participants’ performance was not localized to the peers they had been paired with in the training sessions. The purpose of the second experiment was to investigate the effects of the monitoring intervention used in experiment 1 on observational learning repertoires after observing a peer receive learn units on vocal spelling programs. Additionally, social exchanges were observed in the free play setting.
 
The Effects of Peer Monitoring on the Acquisition of Observational Learning of Rule-Governed Responding by Middle School Students
GRANT GAUTREAUX (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: Two experiments were conducted using peer tutoring to test the effects of a peer monitoring training procedure on observational learning. The participants in the first study were 2 male and 1 female middle school students. Instructional arrangements were designed to include a tutor delivering math instruction to a tutee. Targeted math operations involved rules, sequential steps and procedures of problem solving. Probes were conducted on tutors’ responses to stating seven sets of math rules. These probes showed that the tutors did not have the targeted math operations in their repertoires. Subsequently, upon completion of the probes, the tutors taught the rule sets to the tutee. Instructional tutoring sessions were limited to two consecutive sessions. The results of the pre and post tests showed that acquisition of math rules for tutors was greater after the implementation of the peer monitoring training procedure. Weekly probes were also administered to measure changes in self-monitoring, reading comprehension, and listening skills. Generalization from peer monitoring to self-monitoring was noted for tutor P and tutor M. Collateral changes were found for all participants in regards to listening skills. These findings give us valuable information which can be used to teach observational learning for those students who have a history of not learning via observation.
 
The Effects of Tutoring on the Emergence of Untaught Responses
LYNN YUAN (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to test whether new untaught responses would emerge as a function of observational learning occasioned through the multiple exemplar instruction delivered by a tutor. The first experiment investigated the emergence of untaught responses for the tutor and the tutee when multiple exemplar instruction was used during peer tutoring sessions. Two participants were paired as a tutor and a tutee for a contraction program, and two other participants were paired as a tutor and a tutee for a morpheme program. Prior to the experiment, probe sessions were conducted to determine the number of correct responses emitted by the tutor and the tutee on different response forms on the contractions and on the morphemes (Set 1). In the baseline condition, the tutees were taught to master one of the response forms on the contraction program and morpheme set following probe sessions on untaught responses. The tutors then taught the tutees with Set 2 contraction words and Set 2 morphemes using multiple exemplar training until the students achieved criteria. Probe sessions on the untaught responses were conducted for the Set 1 following the multiple exemplar training. The tutees were then taught to master one of the response forms and one of the morpheme sets with Set 3 and the other untaught responses were probed. The results showed that after multiple exemplar training was implemented by the peer tutors, the both the tutors and the tutees emitted untaught responses for both programs, showing that the multiple exemplar training could potentially contribute to the transformation of stimulus function and the development of derived relational responding for the tutees who was receiving the instruction as well as for the tutors who were delivering instruction.For the second experiment, the experiment was extended by investigating whether the tutors who have observational learning would acquire higher order operants with spelling responses by delivering multiple exemplar instruction to the tutee. The procedure in the second experiment was the same as the first experiment with an exception that the tutors taught tutees spelling responses in two forms (e.g., vocal response and scripting response) to test the transformation of stimulus function between these two response functions.
 
The Relative Effects of the Acquisition of Naming and a Multiple Exemplar Establishing Operation Experience on the Transformation of Establishing Operations across Mands and Tacts
ANJALEE NIRGUDKAR (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: Two experiments tested the effects of two types of multiple exemplar instruction, naming and establishing operations, on the transformation of establishing operations across mands and tacts. Seven preschool children with disabilities participated in the study. All participants followed one-step instructions, imitated multiple-step motor actions, and emitted mands and tacts with an appropriate autoclitic frame (e.g., I want x please; this is a dog). However, these responses were not under the control of the associated establishing operation. That is, the participants did not mand the items they tacted or tact the items they manded. The dependent variable in both experiments was the transformation of establishing operations. This was defined as the emission of a verbal operant (e.g., tact) not directly taught, after having learned another verbal operant (e.g., mand). Multiple exemplar naming instruction consisted of a counterbalanced sequence of instructions such that all functions, match, point to [x], tact or mand, intraverbal, were presented. Multiple exemplar establishing operation instruction consisted of a counterbalanced sequence of instructions such that both verbal operants, mands and tacts, were presented. A counterbalanced multiple probe design was utilized in this study. Results for all participants showed an increase in the level of correct responses to probe trials of the untaught verbal operant following multiple exemplar establishing operation instruction. There was no change in the level of correct responses to probe trials of the untaught verbal operant following multiple exemplar naming instruction. Multiple exemplar establishing operation instruction was effective in occasioning an increase in correct responses of verbal operants not directly taught.
 
 
Paper Session #318
Int'l Paper Session - Adjunctive and Automaintenance
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Boulevard B (2nd floor)
Area: EAB
Chair: Federico Sanabria (Arizona State University)
 
Pairing-Induced Vocalizations: Theoretical and Methodological Issues
Domain: Theory
FRANCOIS TONNEAU (University of Guadalajara, Mexico)
 
Abstract: Some recent studies show that pairing a target sound (e.g., “eh”) with an appetitive unconditional stimulus (e.g., tickling) can induce vocalizations in children; that is, the children start to emit the target sound and repeat it. The hypothesis that verbal stimuli become conditioned operant reinforcers through stimulus pairings may explain why children repeat the target sound, but does not explain why the children start emitting this sound at all. The latter finding can be explained only by appealing to non-operant processes of response induction. In this talk, I discuss possible relations between pairing-induced vocalization, Pavlovian conditioning, and autoshaping in nonhumans.
 
Indirect Reinforcer Deprivation in Schedule-Induced Drinking and Eating
Domain: Basic Research
RAUL AVILA (National Autonomous University of Mexico), Carlos A. Bruner (National Autonomous University of Mexico), Jorge A. Ruiz (National Autonomous University of Mexico)
 
Abstract: It is debatable whether schedule-induced drinking and eating are symmetrical phenomena. Experiments conducted in our laboratory suggest that both phenomena may share a common motivational basis. That is, that food deprivation produces an indirect water deprivation and that water deprivation produces an indirect food deprivation. In one experiment rats with free access to water in their home cages were deprived of food to either 100, 90 or 80% of their body weight. The results showed that the degree of food deprivation was inversely related to water intake. In another experiment rats with free access to food in their home cages were deprived of water for either 5:45, 11:30, 17:15 or 22:0 hours. The data showed that the length of the water deprivation period was also inversely related to food intake. The results of both experiments showed that contrary to common sense, not for having either commodity freely available in their home cages the rats can be considered not deprived of either water or food in schedule-induced drinking or eating experiments. The present results support the notion that schedule-induced drinking and eating are indeed symmetrical phenomena in as much as they are both the consequences of indirect reinforcer deprivation.
 
A Lagged Negative Automaintenance (NA) Preparation
Domain: Basic Research
FEDERICO SANABRIA (Arizona State University), Matthew Sitomer (Arizona State University), Peter Killeen (Arizona State University)
 
Abstract: NA procedures impose a negative contingency between response and reinforcement, which generally reduces the correlation between conditioned stimulus (CS) presentation and reinforcement. We present a procedure that separates these effects by yoking reinforcement to behavior on the prior trial, leaving the response-reinforcement contingency relatively invariant, but reducing the instrumental control of the omission contingency over response rate. When presented with this “lagged” NA procedure, naïve pigeons responded to the presence of the CS at high persistent rates. Local extinction and re-acquisition data were analyzed to evaluate competing models of respondent behavior.
 
 
 
Symposium #319
Int'l Symposium - Advancing the Analysis of Cultural Change: Metacontingencies, Interlocking Practices, and Research Agendas
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Lake Huron (8th floor)
Area: CSE; Domain: Theory
Chair: Mark A. Mattaini (Jane Addams College of Social Work-UIC)
Abstract: Interest in work at Skinner’s third level of selection, cultural change, is currently increasing internationally, with the recognition of the potential importance of this work for addressing critical human and ecological issues worldwide. The need for rigorous strategies for cultural change is increasingly evident, but scholarship in this area remains limited. In this symposium, the participants will present emerging work clarifying current conceptual and methodological challenges, and will describe current work in this emerging sub-discipline. The authors will also elaborate options for research agendas that can advance the field beyond its current heavy emphasis on interpretation toward increased empirically-grounded work. The presentations in this symposium will set the stage for an August “think tank” around these issues in Brasilia.
 
Targets of Intervention in Cultural Change
MARIA E. MALOTT (Malott and Associates), Sigrid S. Glenn (University of North Texas)
Abstract: In order to bring about cultural change, it is first necessary to identify the targets of intervention – what to measure. In this paper, we compare and contrast behavioral level interventions and cultural level interventions and identify a variety of targets for intervention at either or both of these levels. We classify the targets along several dimensions, including the number of organisms involved, the variables of which occurrences of the target are a function, the effect or product of the target, and the locus of any changes that are brought about by intervening. We discuss the importance of choosing the appropriate target for achieving a particular outcome.
 
Laws and the Complex Control of Behavior
JOAO CLAUDIO TODOROV (Pontifical Catholic University of Goias, Brazil)
Abstract: Laws are written to control behavior. Sometimes the control occurs right after its approval by Congress and the sanction of the Presidency. Sometimes the actual control is partial: only a part of the country obeys the law, or only a class of citizens, or the enforcement is slow in being established. The analysis of laws as metacontingencies, as sets of interlocked individual contingencies, helps in the study of how, when, and why laws control behavior. Data from individual cases of adolescents in Brasilia who were penalized according to the Statute of Children and Adolescents, Estatuto da Criança e do Adolescente (ECA), were analyzed to show how the concept of metacontingency helps to understand flaws the in law and flaws in the application of the law.
 
Some Variables Involved in the Selection and Maintenance of Metacontingencies
MARIA AMALIA ANDERY (Pontifical Catholic University of Sao Paulo, Brazil), Tereza Maria Serio (Pontifical Catholic University of Sao Paulo, Brazil), Nilza Micheletto (Pontifical Catholic University of Sao Paulo, Brazil)
Abstract: In a metacontingency the interactions among the interlocking contingencies and the interactions among this set of contingencies and the outcome generated by such contingencies may be described in terms of at least a few patterns and such a description may lead to a further understanding of the variables involved in the selection of metacontingencies. Furthermore, such an analysis may reveal some of the distinctions among the variables responsible for the selection of a group of metacontingencies and the variables responsible for their maintenance. The focus of interest in this paper are: (a) the characteristic relationships among the interlocking contingencies and the outcomes that comprise some metacontingencies, and (b) the distinct variables involved in the selection and in the maintenance of such metacontingencies.
 
Toward a Research Agenda for a Natural Science of Cultural Change
MARK A. MATTAINI (Jane Addams College of Social Work-UIC)
Abstract: The development of a natural science of cultural change has slowed to some extent in recent years, due in part to conceptual issues with how the sub-discipline has been defined, and the lack of a critical mass of researchers working in this area. In this paper, the author will argue that the 4-part research strategy employed in ecological research can and probably must guide this emerging science. The ecological model recursively interweaves systematic observations, experimentation in ongoing processes, improved measurement strategies, and refinement of conceptual frameworks. Widely accepted current conceptual frameworks, however, are not adequately operationalized to guide this work, but more functionally useful frameworks are available. Analyses of interlocking practices associated with some forms of collective violence will be used to exemplify this strategic direction, and the kind of research agendas that are likely to be required to advance the field beyond interpretation alone.
 
 
Paper Session #320
Assessment and Differential Diagnosis in Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Continental C (1st floor)
Area: AUT
Chair: Michelle Rone-DePolo (Cleveland Clinic Center for Autism)
 
Diagnostic and Medication Issues in the Differential Diagnosis of Autistic Disorders and Attention Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder
Domain: Service Delivery
MICHELLE RONE-DEPOLO (Cleveland Clinic Center for Autism), Aleksandra Rachitskaya (Case Western Reserve University Medical School)
 
Abstract: A retrospective chart review was conducted on 201 children referred to The Cleveland Clinic Center for Autism for assessment of possible autistic spectrum disorders between January 2002 and June 2004. The frequency of misdiagnosing children who met symptom criteria for autistic spectrum disorder with attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) was reviewed, and when applicable, the patient’s response to commonly prescribed ADHD medications. Of 201 patients, 26 (12.94%) had a prior diagnosis of ADHD. In 19 children (73.08%) ADHD was not confirmed, with symptoms better accounted for by an autistic spectrum disorder. Six children (23.08%) received a dual diagnosis of autistic spectrum disorder and ADHD. In one child, a diagnosis of ADHD alone was confirmed. Out of 26 patients with prior diagnosis of ADHD, 24 were prescribed one or more ADHD medications (e.g. methylphenidate, dextroamphetamine, etc.), totaling 33 medications prescribed. Medication efficacy (per parent report) was not demonstrated in 57.57% of the prescribed drugs. Findings indicate that there may be a trend in misdiagnosing patients presenting with symptoms of “high-functioning” autism or asperger’s disorder as having ADHD. When such misdiagnoses occur, a patient's awareness of and access to appropriate treatment may be delayed, and prescription practices may not be efficacious.
 
Evaluating a Multiple Stimulus Without Replacement Preference Assessment in Identifying Effective Reinforcers on a Free Operant Posting Task
Domain: Applied Research
LEANNE LEMMINGS (TreeHouse Trust)
 
Abstract: The ability to assess, efficiently and practicably, effective reinforcing stimuli for an individual child is a primary concern for educators and has a direct impact upon acquisition and maintenance of skills and adaptive behaviours. The dual purpose of this study was first, to discover whether top-ranked stimuli from an extended multiple-stimulus without replacement procedure (MSWO) were also identified if the number of sessions and trials were decreased thus providing educators with an efficient and practicable assessment method. Second, to conduct reinforcer assessments involving a simple free operant posting task to identify which of three conditions maximally increased rate of responding per minute on a 5-minute posting session: (i) the use of the of the top-ranked stimulus only as the consequent stimuli, (ii) the use of a selection of the top three ranked items delivered randomly, or (iii) random delivery of three novel items (not previously identified by staff when constructing the original preference lists for each child).
 
The Use of Assessment and Systematic Desensitization to Reduce the Fear Responses of Children with Autism
Domain: Applied Research
NADIA E. RAED (Florida State University), Mae R. Barker (Florida State University)
 
Abstract: A multiple-baseline across anxiety-provoking stimuli was used to evaluate a systematic desensitization procedure for decreasing the fear behaviors of two children with autism in response to flying insects. Treatment consisted of gradually exposing the participants to the fear provoking stimuli and allowing the participant access to a highly reinforcing activity. Dependent measures were occurrence of fear response and approach behaviors. Fear behaviors of both children decreased following treatment in both clinical and generalization settings.
 
 
 
Invited Symposium #321
CE Offered: None
Behavior Analysts Should Be the Best Teachers in the Academy. Are We?
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Lake Erie (8th floor)
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Thomas A. Brigham (Washington State University)
CE Instructor: Thomas A. Brigham, M.D.
Abstract:

Behavior analysts have a long history of innovation in instruction. Lead by the efforts of Skinner and Keller in programmed instruction and PSI, many behaviorists have used the principles of behavior analysis to inform their teaching. However, in contrast to the hey days of programmed instruction and the excitement of PSI, the past decade has seen little published research on instructional innovation based on behavior analytic principles. We will present examples of how behavior analytic principles can be used to improve instructional programs and university courses.

 
Behavior Analysis, Internet Technology, and Conceptual Learning
DANIEL J. BERNSTEIN (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Beginning with a self-paced introductory course that brought a large percentage of learners to high levels of achievement, I have designed courses at all levels of higher education that make learner understanding the primary goal. Most recently I have been exploring and evaluating various uses of technology to promote student understanding. How the ongoing courses can be used as a laboratory for evaluating the impact of out of class web-based activities on deep understanding of conceptual material will be discussed. I am also interested in representation of the intellectual work in teaching, especially through the external review of electronic course portfolios centered on student work. I will report on work with colleagues from many fields of study in developing ways to showcase the quality of their student work and the practices that have helped that work emerge. This effort falls under the rubric of the “Scholarship of Teaching” which is an increasing important area for the enhancement and evaluation of teaching sponsored by the Carnegie Foundation. As a Fellow of the Carnegie Academy for the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning, I will describe some of the projects to advance the science of teaching.
Dan Bernstein received an A.B. in psychology from Stanford University in 1968 and a Ph.D. in social and experimental psychology from the University of California at San Diego in 1973. He was a Professor of Psychology at the University of Nebraska - Lincoln from 1973 until 2002, when he became Director or the Center for Teaching Excellence at the University of Kansas. He is also a Professor of Psychology at KU. Beginning with a self-paced introductory course that brought a large percentage of learners to high levels of achievement, Bernstein has designed courses at all levels of higher education that make learner understanding the primary goal. Most recently he has been exploring and evaluating various uses of technology to promote student understanding. His ongoing courses are a laboratory for evaluating the impact of out of class web-based activities on deep understanding of conceptual material. Bernstein is also interested in representation of the intellectual work in teaching, especially through the external review of electronic course portfolios centered on student work. He works with colleagues from many fields of study in developing ways to showcase the quality of their student work and the practices that have helped that work emerge. He has received numerous campus awards for teaching, he was a Charter Member of the University of Nebraska Academy of Distinguished Teachers, and he is a Fellow of the Carnegie Academy for the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning.
 

BATS: An Organically Evolving, Supportive, Interactive Learning Environment

RICHARD W. MALOTT (Western Michigan University), Koji Takeshima (Western Michigan University), Holly C. Harrison (Western Michigan University), Emily Helt (Western Michigan University), Nicholas L. Weatherly (Western Michigan University), Alison M. Betz (Western Michigan University), Christen Rae (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

The Behavior Analysis Training System (BATS) is a system my graduate and undergraduate advisees and I continue to evolve within the Behavior Analysis Program at WMU. We have designed BATS to provide as much behavioral support as possible for all our behavior-analysis students from freshmen Honors College students to doctoral students. BATS is a complex, multi-faceted program; and behavior analysis, behavior systems analysis, and organizational behavior management are embedded into its day to day operations and into its design and organic evolution; but behavior analysis, behavior systems analysis, and organizational behavior management are also the subject matter and the basis of the skills we teach within this program. We are a behavioral, systems version of an Escher drawing of a hand drawing a picture of a hand drawing a picture of a hand drawing a picture of a hand. We not only teach behavior analysis, behavior systems analysis, and organizational behavior management, but we and our teaching benefit from these approaches as well. And it works.

Richard Malott (DickMalott@DickMalott.com) teaches behavior analysis at Western Michigan University, where he works with students interested in becoming practitioners, rather than researchers. He trains students to work with autistic children and to apply behavior systems analysis and organizational behavior management to human-services settings. He concentrates on training MA students but also works with a few PhD students. Every summer, he runs the Behavioral Boot Camp, an intense 15-class-hour-per-week, 7.5 week, graduate-level, behavior-analysis seminar for students from WMU and around the globe. Originally, he taught an intro behavior-analysis course to 1000 students per semester, who produced 1000 lever-pressing rats per year. Now, his students only condition 230 rats per year, but they also do 130 self-management projects and provide 13,500 hours of training to autistic children each year. He coauthored Principles of Behavior (the textbook previously known as Elementary Principles of Behavior.) Since 1980, he has been working on a textbook called I’ll Stop Procrastinating when I Get around to It. He has presented in 14 countries and has received two Fulbright Senior Scholar Awards. In 2002, he also received ABA’s Award for Public Service in Behavior Analysis. For more information, please see http://DickMalott.com.
 
“You Can’t Shape an Egg!" The Lecture-Discussion-Practice Course
THOMAS A. BRIGHAM (Washington State University)
Abstract: For a brief period, Keller’s “Goodbye Teacher” seemed to herald the end of the lecture course. Teachers and researchers rushed to explore what topics could be taught using the personalized system of instruction pioneered in that paper. Replications soon appeared followed by variations designed to deal with problems associated the initial program and increase overall effectiveness. A movement had been born. Unfortunately, it was short lived and the standard lecture course with midterm and final examinations remains the most common form of university instruction. I will describe an approach based on behavior analytic principles where brief lectures are followed by discussion and an opportunity to practice a skill or illustrate a concept. Examples demonstrating the process will be presented and procedures for generating them discussed.
Thomas A. Brigham received his Ph.D. in child psychology from the University of Kansas in 1970. He was a member of the faculty at New York University and is currently at Washington State University where he is a professor and scientist in the department of psychology. Professor Brigham has published extensively in the area of self-control/self-management and has developed several teaching programs in that area (Self-management for Adolescents, 1990 and Psychology Applied to Daily Living: Dealing with Friends, Alcohol, and Sex, 2002). He has also done extensive research using behavior analytic principles to design his university courses and instructional programs. In recognition of quality of this combination of research and teaching, Professor Brigham has received the major university and college awards for teaching and research at Washington State University. Additionally, the past two years, he has served as the Executive Assistant for Faculty Affairs to the University President.
 
 
Symposium #322
Current and Topical Book Reviews: History of Science, Verbal Behavior, and Applied Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Waldorf (3rd floor)
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: John C. Malone (University of Tennessee)
Discussant: John C. Malone (University of Tennessee)
Abstract: This symposium will present review essays on three books of current and topical interest in behavior analysis. The first addresses Smith’s book, The Body of the Artisan, which traces the origins of modern science to the arts of 15th and 16th century Europe, as did Bacon and Skinner. The review describes how her book supports Skinner’s views and how psychology has faltered by not anchoring it knowledge in behavior-qua-behavior. The second essay reviews Patterson et al.’s Crucial Conversations, a self-help book whose popularity illustrates the unmet demand for practical information about verbal behavior. The book parallels Skinner’s (1957) treatment in some ways, but extends it to analyses of verbal behavior that matter to people. The third paper argues that Lucyshyn, Dunlap, and Albin’s Families and Positive Behavior Support outlines a agenda for enhancing the ecological validity of applied behavior analysis, in particular, one that fills the gap between state of the art applied research and the everyday needs of practitioners and caregivers (e.g., in settings where individuals live, work, and go to school. The symposium will conclude with discussant comments from John Malone.
 
The Roots of Science in Art: Review of Smith’s The Body of the Artisan
EDWARD K. MORRIS (University of Kansas)
Abstract: The origins of knowledge in modern science are variously ascribed to (a) contemplation and theory or (b) manual labor and arts. Although traceable back to Francis Bacon, the latter remains the minority view, forgotten in the history of science. The historian of art, Pamela Smith, however, offers new evidence in support of it. In The Body of the Artisan, she argues that artisans saw knowledge as rooted in matter and nature. As evidence, she offers detailed descriptions of how early science was bound up in how 15th and 16th century artists knew nature (e.g., the chemistry of colors, the physics of clay) in order to do art, for instance, to paint and sculpt, and in order to represent nature faithfully, for instance, in paintings and statues. Her thesis is exactly Bacon’s and Skinner’s thesis about the origins of natural science. In my review, I describe, first, how Smith’s book supports and extends Skinner’s view. Second, I describe how psychology – having succumbed to 20th century “physics envy” over theory construction – faltered in basin its knowledge in the forms and functions of behavior-qua-behavior in nature.
 
Crucial Issues in the Analysis of Verbal Behavior: Review of Patterson et al.’s Crucial Conversations
THOMAS S. CRITCHFIELD (Illinois State University)
Abstract: This self-help book is reviewed and evaluated with an eye to deriving lessons from it for the analysis of verbal behavior. I will explain how the book’s popularity illustrates a sizeable and unmet demand for practical information about verbal behavior, and discuss how some aspects of the book’s analysis -- though often speculative and based on anecdote -- have parallels in Skinner’s (1957) treatment of verbal behavior. Although behavior analysts may find works originating outside of their field to be vague and mentalistic, such works can nevertheless inform us about the proper scope and level of analysis for the behavioral treatment of the topics in verbal behavior that matter to people.
 
Expanding Applied Behavior Analysis: Review of Lucyshyn, Dunlap, and Albin’s Families and Positive Behavior Support
CYNTHIA M. ANDERSON (West Virginia University), Tyler B. Weeks (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Although a large body of research exists on the utility of behavior-analytic interventions for affecting changes in the lives of individuals with disabilities, a gap exists between state of the art research and the needs of practitioners in the field. Practitioners often report that much published research is not useful because most studies (a) are conducted in atypical settings (e.g., laboratories rather than settings where individuals live, work, and go to school), (b) focus on only one or two relatively discrete target behaviors (e.g., self-injury), whereas practitioners are asked by caregivers to focus on many complex responses (e.g., several problem behaviors, increasing happiness, facilitating inclusion), (c) use intervention strategies that are not appropriate or feasible for real-world settings, and (d) do not demonstrate durability or maintenance over time or generality to new settings. I argue that Lucyshyn, Dunlap, and Albin provide a research agenda that enhances the ecological validity of applied behavior analysis.
 
 
Symposium #323
Int'l Symposium - Derived Relations, Implicit Associations and Clinically Relevant Stimuli
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Williford A (3rd floor)
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Mary Lyons (University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: The current session presents a series of studies that investigate the role of derived stimulus relations and implicit associations in the context of clinically relevant events. The first study involves comparing the implicit association test (IAT) and matching to sample (MTS) as methods for measuring pre-experimentally established verbal relations. The second paper employs the IAT) as a method for examining attitudes to food related stimuli in participants who provide either high or low scores on two psychometric instruments relevant to eating disordered symptomatology. The third paper employs a stimulus equivalence paradigm to investigate individual differences in self-esteem. And the final paper examines the transformation of respondent elicitation in accordance with equivalence relations employing a differential aversive conditioning procedure. All four studies indicate that the investigation of derived relations and implicit associations may provide some insight into the behavioural processes involved in clinically relevant behaviors.
 
Comparing the IAT and MTS as Methods for Measuring Pre-Experimentally Established Verbal Relations
MARY LYONS (University of Ireland, Maynooth), Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: This study compared two experimental procedures for measuring pre-experimentally established verbal relations with clinically relevant stimuli. This study compared performance on Greenwald’s Implicit Association Test (IAT) with performance on a test for equivalence relations using a matching-to-sample (MTS) procedure. Participants exposed to the IAT were presented with categorization tasks that involved associating stimuli that would have a high or low probability of association prior to the experiment; an IAT effect was recorded if a participant produced longer mean response latencies on the low-probability relative to the high-probability tasks. Participants exposed to the MTS procedure were trained on a series of emotionally neutral conditional discriminations, but the testing tasks presented; (1) non-equivalent comparisons that had a high probability of pre-experimental association, and (2) equivalent comparisons that had a low probability of pre-experimental association. If a participant failed the equivalence test this indicated an IAT-like effect. The implications of the results for developing a behavior-analytic interpretation of the IAT effect are considered.
 
Implicit Associations and Food Related Stimuli
MARCIA WARD (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: The current study employed the Implicit Association Test (IAT) as a method for examining attitudes to food related stimuli in participants who provide either high or low scores on two psychometric instruments relevant to eating disordered symptomatology. Participants were screened using both the EDI-2 (Eating Disorders Inventory 2) (Garner,et al 1990) and the EAT (Eating Attitudes Test) (Garner & Garinkel, 1985) .They were then categorized into two high- and low-groups on the basis of their score. All participants then completed an IAT which measured in order to identify individual differences in the strength of the associated links with food related stimuli. The implications of the results for the experimental analysis of pre-experimentally established clinically relevant verbal relations are discussed.
 
Equivalence Relations, Self-Evaluations and Self-Esteem
JULIET M. QUINLAN (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: The current study is a replication of Mervin and Wilson’s (in press) research. An initial screening using the Rosenberg Self-Esteem Scale (Rosenberg 1965) gave rise to two experimental groups: high self-esteem and low self-esteem. A series of automated match-to-sample procedures (alternating loaded and standard equivalence stimuli) compared self-evaluations and the formation of equivalence classes across the two groups. The results are discussed in relation to the relevant literature on derived relations and self-esteem, and the broader implications for the role of verbal behaviour in the formation of either positive or negative self-concept will be considered.
 
Transfer of Respondent Elicitation Established Through Aversive Conditioning
MIGUEL RODRIGUEZ-VALVERDE (University of Almeria, Spain), Carmen Luciano Soriano (University of Almeria, Spain), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: This study examines the transformation of respondent elicitation in accordance with equivalence relations employing a differential aversive conditioning procedure. Previous work of this kind (Dougher et al., 1994) has obtained the transfer of both respondent elicitation and extinction with long durations CSs and long inter-trial intervals. The current study replicates Dougher er al’s (1994), but also attempts to extend it by controlling two concerns that can be argues to constrain the validity of its results: (1) conditioning effects were not assessed during acquisition trials, but on the basis of a single probe trial after the transfer test; (2) transfer tests of a derived CS-were always presented prior to any tests of a derived CS+, in order to avoid a shift –in-contingencies effect. The conditioning procedure employed in this study is more similar to the procedures usually employed in psychophysiology research on autonomic conditioning, with shorter CS durations that allow the measurement of anticipatory conditioned responses during acquisition trials. Additionally, we employed 5-member equivalence classes in order to establish conditioning with two members and assess transfer effects with another two, as a means of controlling the shift in-contingencies effect reported by Dougher et al., 1994. Results are discussed in terms of their implications for a functional analytic account of human emotional responding.
 
 
Symposium #324
Descriptive Analysis and Treatment of Challeging Behavior in the Classroom
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Continental A (1st floor)
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Helena L. Maguire (Melmark New England)
CE Instructor: Frank L. Bird, M.Ed.
Abstract:

The current investigation replicated and extended the assessment and treatment methodology of Aggression and self Injurious behavior as well as tantrums behavior. The environmental variables that maintained elopement were identified in each case, and successful treatments were implemented for the 4 participants in settings which the challenging behaviors occurred. Longitudinal data is displayed graphically for each presentation.

 
Functional Analysis and treatment of Tantrum Behavior for an Eleven-Year-Old Boy with Autism
STACY WILLIAMS (Melmark New England), John Demanche (Melmark New England), John Stokes (Melmark New England)
Abstract: This study reviews the implementation of several intervention programs for tantrum behavior of an 11year-old boy with autism. Initial descriptive analyses were completed and identified a function of positive reinforcement (access to tangibles). The initial treatment package included a relaxation training program and functional communication training. Descriptive analyses continued to be conducted after the treatment package was implemented and systematic manipulations (Iwata et. al. 1982) were also conducted. Results indicated the function of the tantrum behavior had changed and was currently being maintained by negative reinforcement (escape from demands). The treatment package was then modified to include escape extinction and functional communication and no longer included relaxation training. Continued implementation resulted in decrease in tantrum behavior. IOA was completed for tantrum episode and duration. Results are displayed graphically.
 
Evaluation and Treatment of an Eighteen-Year-Old with Childhood-Onset Schizophrenia
ADRIAN OBLAK (Allegheny College), Rodney D. Clark (Allegheny College), Frank L. Bird (Melmark New England), John Stokes (Melmark New England)
Abstract: Childhood-onset schizophrenia is a severe disorder that usually is chronic and persistently disabling. Despite the fact that the majority of cases of schizophrenia have onsets in late adolescence or early adulthood, a consensus has emerged that schizophrenia does develop in children and can be reliably diagnosed. Treatments that help young patients manage their illness have improved significantly in recent decades. As in adults, antipsychotic medications are especially helpful in reducing hallucinations and delusions. The newer generation "typical" anti-psychotics, such as olanzaine and clozapine, may also help improve motivation and emotional expressiveness in some patients. This case study examines the medication history of a 20 year old male and the behavioral changes that have resulted from the medication changes in the past five years. Longitudinal data is displayed graphically.
 
Reducing Challenging Behavior in a Young Girl with Autism
MARIJKE P. CALLAHAN (Melmark New England), Mike Conard (Melmark New England)
Abstract: Reducing Challenging Behavior in a young girl with AutismResearchers in this study assessed the effectiveness of an Activity Time Out procedure (with required relaxation) to decrease challenging behavior including aggression, in an 11 year-old girl with Pervasive Developmental Disorder. The student attends, as a day student, a non-profit, private residential school for children with autism, acquired brain injury and other neurological disorders. Descriptive Analysis (ABC data) was conducted to determine the function of aggressive behavior. Data determined that the primary function of aggression was negative reinforcement - to escape demand situations. Data also suggested a secondary function of positive reinforcement - attention. Through the implementation of the Activity Time Out procedure, the researchers were able to decrease the frequency of aggressive behavior. The data – displayed graphically – shows that the frequency of aggressive behavior decreased with the introduction of the procedure. A longitudinal analysis illustrates that aggressive behavior has been maintained at low rates over a two year period.
 
Decreasing Challenging Behavior in a Thirteen-Year-Old Teenager While Increasing Alternative Adaptive Behaviors
SILVA ORCHANIAN (Melmark New England), Mike Conard (Melmark New England)
Abstract: This study demonstrates the results of an Activity Time Out procedure paired with relaxation strategies in decreasing challenging behaviors while increasing alternative adaptive behaviors. Target behaviors include aggression and tantrum. The individual is a 13 year old male student with a diagnosis of Pervasive Developmental Disorder. He attends a non-profit, private residential school for children with autism, brain injury and other neurological disorders. Descriptive Analysis (ABC data) was conducted throughout the duration of treatment to determine the maintaining variables of the target behaviors. Treatment strategies were developed based on the analysis of the data which indicated a primary function of escape. A longitudinal graphic data display demonstrates the effectiveness of the treatment strategies in deescalating the challenging behaviors over time. Strategies developed to teach adaptive alternative behaviors were effective to increase rates of appropriate alternative behavior.
 
 
Symposium #325
Experimental Analyses of Conditional Discrimination Learning and Equivalence Class Formation
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Boulevard C (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas)
Discussant: Richard W. Serna (E.K. Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts Medical School)
Abstract: The symposium is organized around three papers dealing with conditional discrimination learning and equivalence class formation. Thre first paper asks if stimuli that are treated similarly in one context will also appear to be equivaelent in other, unrelated contexts. The second experiment asks whether human subjects can acquire a conditional discrimination in which a brief tone serves as the comparison stimulus. The third paper looks at the effects of extended observing-response requirements on titrated delays in a titraing-delay-matching-to-sample procedure.
 
The Role of Common Stimulus Functions in the Development of Equivalence Classes
KIRSTY MACIVER (University of North Texas), Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas)
Abstract: The extension of stimulus functions across equivalence class members has been reported for reinforcing, discriminative, and eliciting stimulus functions among others. In this study, we ask if having learned a common response in the presence of several distinct stimuli will produce equivalence-like organization among those stimuli. Eight college students were exposed to training designed to teach nine simple discriminations, assigning each of three functions to a different set of three arbitrary visual stimuli. For seven of eight participants, three 3-member contingency classes resulted. When the same stimuli were presented in a match-to-sample procedure under test conditions, four participants demonstrated equivalence-consistent responding, matching all stimuli from the same contingency class. Test performance for two of the remaining three participants was systematically controlled by other identifiable variables, and was unsystematic for a final participant. For one participant, exposure to a different testing preparation yielded equivalence-consistent performance where the match-to-sample test had not. These data have implications for increasing our understanding of the ways in which equivalence classes may develop and maintain cohesiveness outside the laboratory context.
 
Tone-Letter Conditional Discrimination Learning with Typical College Students
JOSEPH L. CERMAK (University of North Texas), Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Although conditional discrimination procedures have served as a prevalent preparation for the investigation of a host of interesting behavioral phenomena with typically developing human subjects (e.g., concept formation and equivalence relations), our understanding of the development of conditional discriminations in this population remains incomplete. One reason for this lack of understanding may be the rapid manner in which typically developed adults acquire conditional discrimination performance. In this study, we sought to retard the development of conditional discriminations in typically developed adults in order to observe and describe the development of conditional relations more precisely. Toward this end, four subjects were taught eight conditional relations simultaneously in which tones served as sample stimuli and lowercase English letters served as comparison stimuli. Three of the four subjects acquired the conditional discrimination with some difficulty. Generalization tests with one subject suggested that the physical relation among sample stimuli was important and, by implication, that control over comparison-stimulus choices (within trial) extended beyond the current trial.
 
Effects of Extended Sample-Observing Response Requirements on Titrating Delay in a Matching-to-Sample Procedure with Pigeons
BRIAN D. KANGAS (University of North Texas), Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Laboratory lore suggests that requiring multiple response to sample stimuli facilitates the acquisition of conditional discrimination performance. The precise nature of this relation, however, is not well understood. What, for example, is the nature of the function relating sample-observing response requirements to improvements in the rate at which conditional discriminations are acquired? Traditional measures such as percent of correct trials are inadequate for such questions because of a ceiling effect – performance cannot improve past 100% correct. In the current study, we used a titrating-delay-matching-to-sample (TDMTS) procedure to parametrically examine the effects of extended sample observing-response requirements on conditional discrimination performance. Four pigeons worked on a successive matching-to-sample procedure in which the delay between sample offset and comparison onset was continually adjusted as a function of the pigeon’s performance accuracy. The number of responses required (FR 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16) to produce the comparison array was manipulated across conditions. Results show that all subjects are able to withstand longer delays between sample offset and comparison onset as observing-response requirements increase. In addition, preliminary results suggest a curvilinear function across FR values plotted against steady-state delays.
 
 
Symposium #326
Extensions of Applied Behavior Analysis in the Treatment of Problem Behavior
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Stevens 4 (Lower Level)
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University)
Discussant: Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract: Functional analyses methodology has significantly advanced the field of applied behavior analysis by providing an effective method of assessment that reliably identifies sources of reinforcement for problem behavior. Research in the area has included numerous replications across settings, response topographies, and condition types. Settings have included homes, schools, inpatient hospital units, and vocational programs. Response topographies have ranged from self-injury and aggression to bizarre vocalizations and elopement. Condition types included the common test conditions traditionally evaluated during a functional analysis, as well as modifications of these and other conditions. In the current symposium, a series of studies designed to further refine assessment and treatment procedures in applied behavior analysis will be presented. In the first investigation, the generalization of treatments prescribed following a functional analysis was evaluated. In the second investigation, an analogue model of a response class was developed in order to better understand the relations that exist between different response topographies (i.e., response-class hierarchies). In the third investigation, an evaluation of problem behavior maintained by idiosyncratic variables will be discussed. Finally, Timothy Vollmer will serve as the discussant to integrate the findings of these three presentations.
 
Generalization of Treatment Effects Across Settings and Time
KELLY J. BOUXSEIN (Marcus Autism Center), Wayne W. Fisher (Marcus Autism Center), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Functional analyses (FA) have been shown to be effective for identifying the environmental variables that maintain problem behavior and prescribing effective function-based treatments (Hanley, Iwata, & McCord, 2003; Iwata et al., 1994). Demonstrations of treatment effects subsequent to functional analyses are generally presented over the course of several brief (e.g., 10-min) treatment sessions. However, data on the generalization of these treatment effects to other settings, people, behaviors, and across time. Derby et al. (1997) evaluated the long-term effectiveness of function-based treatment in home settings and found continued successful treatment under these generalized conditions. Durand and Carr (1992) assessed the long-term maintenance of functional communication training. Results suggested that researchers may identify conditions under which treatment effects are likely to maintain across time and settings. In the current study, we exposed participants’ problem behavior to functional analysis procedures (Iwata, Dorsey, Slifer, Bauman, & Richman, 1982/94). Next, we developed function-based treatments during 10-min sessions under analogue conditions. Finally, we evaluated the extent to which treatment effects generalized across settings and time.
 
Development of an Analogue of a Response-Class Hierarchy
DANIEL B. SHABANI (Western Michigan University), James E. Carr (Western Michigan University), Anna I. Petursdottir (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Within the operant conditioning literature, there exists the concept of the functional response class. A functional response class is defined as a collection of responses, all of which produce the same outcome. If the members of a response class occur in a predictable order, a response-class hierarchy is said to exist. A hierarchy refers to a specific type of response class in which each member of the response class may be hierarchically related and ordered along various dimensions (e.g., response effort, immediacy of reinforcement, magnitude of reinforcer). Although the response-class hierarchy has received moderate conceptual attention over the years, there has been very little use of the concept in the applied literature. The purpose of the current investigation was to develop a model of a response-class hierarchy in order to stimulate a line of research that will begin to examine, using the model, different variables that determine the order in which behaviors occur and various ways of modifying or treating the response-class hierarchy. Results indicated that the model was successful in developing a response-class hierarchy. The implications for treating individuals who present with problem behaviors that are hierarchically sequenced will be discussed.
 
The Abolishing Effects of Sound Isolation Headphones on Destructive Behavior Reinforced by Escape From Noise
TRACY L. KETTERING (Marcus Autism Center), Wayne W. Fisher (Marcus Autism Center), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center), Kelly J. Bouxsein (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Results of previous studies suggest that the problem behavior of some individuals may be maintained by idiosyncratic variables that are not targeted during analogue functional analyses (e.g., (e.g., Fisher et al., 1998; Van Camp et al., 2000). For example, McCord, Iwata, Galensky, Ellingson, and Thompson (2001) showed that 2 participants’ problem behavior was maintained by escape from noise. In the current study, anecdotal observation and parental report suggested that the problem behavior of 2 individuals was sensitive to negative reinforcement in the form of escape from noise. Results of a functional analysis confirmed the relationship between problem behavior and noise removal. For one participant, destructive behavior occurred at higher levels in a condition in which specific social noises (i.e., adults arguing) were present. For the second participant, aggression occurred in all conditions in which a 101-DB noise was present. Results indicated that noncontingent access to sound-isolation headphones acted as an abolishing operation and reduced destructive behavior even though the contingency between the behavior and escape from noise remained in place.
 
 
Symposium #327
Recent Advances in the Tretment of Severe Behavior Disorders Maintained by Automatic Reinforcement
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Stevens 2 (Lower Level)
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Joel Eric Ringdahl (University of Iowa)
Abstract: The successful treatment of aberrant behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement continues to be an important area of research within applied behavior analysis and developmental disabilities. Varyious treatment approaches have been successful in reducing aberrant behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement. In the proposed symposium, four papers will be presented providing examples of these various approaches. Specific approaches evaluated will include antecedent manipulations (e.g., prompting or noncontingent reinforement), differential reinforcement, a combination of antecedent and contingency-based treatment approaches, and the use of restraint. For each approach, novel extensions of the current literature will be provided.
 
Altering Aumatically-Reinforced Sterotypy: The Effects of Direct and Indirect Intervention
KATHLEEN M. CLARK (New England Center for Children), Mary K. Kubala (ASTAR Center), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: We have examined the effects of both direct (response interruption plus redirection) and indirect (response independent access to preferred activities) interventions for treating stereotypy maintained by automatic reinforcement. Both procedures are generally effective for decreasing stereotypy, however, indirect treatment does not provide an active redirection of behavior. If contextually appropriate behavior occurs without prompting, it may be preferable to use more intensive direct intervention. This presentation will illustrate the effects of direct treatment for stereotypy for four children diagnosed with an Autism Spectrum Disorder. For all participants functional analysis found stereotypy to be maintained by automatic reinforcement. With the first student, direct and indirect interventions were directly compared via a multi-element design. Direct intervention produced lower levels of stereotypy than indirect intervention. However, lower levels of appropriate behavior occurred. With the three remaining participants, the effects of adding materials to the treatment context in which direct intervention was implemented was examined to determine if unprompted appropriate behavior would be fostered. It was found that adding materials to the treatment setting resulted in increased levels of independent appropriate behavior. Interobserver agreement data were collected in all phases of the analyses and intervention comparisons and mean total agreement scores exceeded 85%.
 
Use of a Differential Reinforcement Procedure to Reduce Problem Behavior Maintained by Automatic Reinforcement
JASON M. STRICKER (University of Iowa), Wendy K. Berg (University of Iowa), Joel Eric Ringdahl (University of Iowa), David P. Wacker (University of Iowa), Kelly M. Vinquist (University of Iowa)
Abstract: Functional analyses conducted for two boys with mental retardation indicated that problem behavior (self-injury for Charlie and property destruction for Steven) was maintained by automatic reinforcement. A concurrent operants assessment was conducted to identify social stimuli that were relatively more preferred than the automatic reinforcement associated with problem behavior. At least one set of social stimuli that competed effectively with automatic reinforcement (i.e. the alternative stimuli were selected to the exclusion of access to automatic reinforcement) was identified for each boy. A differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA) treatment was implemented using the social stimuli identified in the concurrent operants as the reinforcer for engaging in the alternative response. The alternative response was one manipulation of a nonpreferred toy without engaging in problem behavior. Reversals were conducted to the play condition of the functional analysis because the play and DRA sessions contained the same antecedent stimuli (toys and attention) and only differed in the consequences for problem behavior, thereby allowing an evaluation of the effects of the DRA contingency on behavior. The DRA treatment resulted in a 92% reduction in problem behavior for Steven and 78% reduction for Charlie. Interrater agreement scores averaged 96% for Charlie and 93% for Steven.
 
Examination of Treatment Procedures for Increasing Approprite Item Engagement and Decreasing Stereotypy During Preference Assessments
HEATHER MORRISON (New England Center for Children), Eileen M. Roscoe (New England Center for Children), Carly Moher Eby (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: A number of studies have shown an inverse relationship between behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement and item engagement. Lindberg, Iwata, and Kahng (1999) did not, however, observe reductions in participants’ automatically reinforced SIB as a result of increased item engagement. Response blocking and protective equipment was necessary to reduce problem behavior. The purpose of this study was to extend this line of research by comparing the effects of two commonly used treatment procedures (i.e., prompting and reinforcement) for increasing appropriate item engagement and decreasing problem behavior in the context of a duration-based preference assessment. A functional analysis was conducted to verify that participants’ behavior (i.e., mouthing, hand flapping) was maintained by automatic reinforcement. Following this, a series of duration-based preference assessments were conducted during which leisure items were singly presented for 3 min each. Within the context of the preference assessment, two treatment procedures, prompting and prompting with reinforcement, were compared using a reversal design. Results indicated that prompting alone was effective in increasing appropriate item engagement and decreasing problem behavior; however, reinforcement was necessary to obtain clinically acceptable levels of item engagement and problem behavior. Interobserver agreement was assessed during 33% of sessions and averaged above 90%.
 
Restraint Fading as a Treatment for SIB: Determination of the Least Restrictive Starting Point
JOHN M. HUETE (Kennedy Krieger Institute), SungWoo Kahng (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Stephanie A. Contrucci Kuhn (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Patricia F. Kurtz (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Heather M. Teichman (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Geri Ruffin (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Thompson Davis (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Lindsay S. Hauer (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: In cases of severe hand-to-head SIB, arm splints are sometimes used to prevent severe injury. Although arm splints inhibit hand-to-head SIB, they also interfere with adaptive skills that require arm movements. Procedures for gradually fading arm sleeve rigidity and increasing flexion have been reported (Fisher et al., 1997); but, these can be lengthy with the individual spending extended periods in unnecessarily restrictive arm sleeves. Wallace et al. (1997) described a procedure for evaluating the minimum level of rigidity necessary to maintain low rates of SIB and higher levels of adaptive behavior when using arm splints. We used this methodology to determine the starting point for restraint fading. The participants were four individuals who engaged in very severe SIB. The results provided additional support that the restraint analysis identifies an effective but less restrictive starting point for arm splints, has less of an adverse impact on adaptive behavior, and may circumvent problems that arise from an excessively restrictive restraint protocol.
 
 
Symposium #328
Int'l Symposium - Recent Applications of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy: Empirical Findings
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Private Dining Room 1 (3rd floor)
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Mike P. Twohig (University of Nevada)
Abstract: This symposium will present recent evaluations of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) as a treatment for a variety of psychological/social problems. Specifically, this symposium will present data on the effectiveness of ACT in the treatment of worry, adolescent self-destructive behavior, felt stigma in individuals seeking treatment for substance abuse, and chronic marijuana abuse. Special attention will be placed on specific process through which ACT is effective with these topographically different social problems. This symposium should assist in bringing the attendees up to date on recent empirical findings with ACT while illustrating how such topographically different behaviors can have similar behavioral functions.
 
ACT and Self-Stigma in Substance Abuse: A Pilot Study
JASON BRIAN LUOMA (University of Nevada, Reno), Barbara S. Kohlenberg (University of Nevada, Reno), Kara Bunting (University of Nevada, Reno), Steven C. Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Stigma has a number of negative effects on individuals with substance abuse problems. Both internalized self-stigma and societal discrimination can contribute to reductions in help-seeking, limited social support networks, early dropout from treatment, unstable housing, and unemployment. As part of a NIDA-funded project, we have developed a group psychotherapy approach to reducing the self-stigma of individuals with substance abuse disorders. This intervention is based on Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT), a psychotherapy approach emerging from the behavioral tradition that uses metaphor, paradox, and experiential exercises to help clients make contact with thoughts, feelings, memories, and physical sensations that have been feared and avoided. In contrast to traditional stigma-reduction approaches that focus on correcting shameful and self-limiting thoughts, ACT does not attempt to change the frequency or intensity of these thoughts. Rather, clients learn to recontextualize and accept these private events, develop greater clarity about personal values, and commit to needed behavior change. This paper will discuss our research program and our developing treatment manual. We will also present pilot data on the efficacy of this treatment approach with individuals in treatment for substance use disorders.
 
ACT Treatment in Intense Camp Settings for Female Adolescents with Self-Destructive Behavior
TOBIAS LUNDGREN (University of Uppsala, Sweden), JoAnne Dahl (University of Uppsala, Sweden), Mikael Vagner (In Vivo AB)
Abstract: The primary cause of death in youth in the western world is suicide. There is a great need for preventive work with self destructive behavior in adolescents. The purpose of this study is to develop and evaluate an ACT model in an intensive camp setting for female adolescents with self destructive behavior. The study was an ABC group design N=6. Follow up is done at 3 months and after 1 year. The treatment was provided by three graduate students trained in ACT. The key components in treatment were exposure, valued directions, defusion, commitment and acceptance. The goal of treatment was to build a broader behavioral repertoire towards valued life activities. Exposure took place naturally in valued direction as participants engaged in camp activities. Treatment effects was measured by Kasam, structured interviews, believability of obstacles. The result showed a higher degree of responsibility of their own life, a higher engagement in activities in valued direction and a decrease in criminal behavior.
 
ACT for Chronic Ruminators
JENNIFER A. HARRINGTON (University of New Mexico), Michael J. Dougher (University of New Mexico)
Abstract: Rumination, generally described as unwanted, negative, distressing thoughts, is a salient cognitive feature of several affective disorders. This presentation will offer a preliminary behavior analytic account of ruminative thinking and possible treatment implications derived from ACT. ACT teaches patients to accept unwanted private events, to defuse from negative cognition, and to identify and focus on actions directed toward valued goals. The present study examined the effects of a brief, group-format, ACT-based treatment compared to thought control techniques. Rather than targeting thought form or frequency, the ACT-based treatment targeted individual reactions to thoughts across a range of ruminative dimensions including: frequency, duration, distress, experiential avoidance, believability, and movement toward valued action. Non-clinical undergraduate participants who reported significant distress from efforts to control highly believable, unwanted, negative thoughts, were recruited for this study. The study utilized a single-case, repeated measures, A-B-C, multiple baseline across groups experimental design (where A = baseline, B = placebo treatment, C = actual treatment variable). Both the thought control placebo and ACT-based treatment consisted of two day, 2-hour intervention sessions. Results will be presented in terms of the effects of the ACT-based treatment on participant reactions to ruminative thoughts across a range of dimensions.
 
Acceptance and Commitment Therapy as a Treatment for Chronic Marijuana Abuse.
MIKE P. TWOHIG (University of Nevada), Deacon Shoenberger (University of Nevada), Steven C. Hayes (University of Nevada)
Abstract: There is a dearth of information on how to successfully treat chronic marijuana abuse (CMA). This presentation will provide a behaviorally based analysis of the problem and provide preliminary data on its treatment. In this study, an eight session ACT protocol was used to help individuals with CMA to state their values in life, contact of the function of their marijuana use, evaluate the effectiveness of its use, step back from evaluative language regarding its use, and make commitments to follow value-based behaviors. The study utilizes a multiple baseline across participants design with ancillary oral-swab tests to confirm self-reports of marijuana use. This study is approximately half way complete but the data is promising. We intend to recruit approximately three adults with CMA. Thus far one individual has completed posttreatment and was able to cease her marijuana use. A second participant is part way through the intervention and showing promising results. Additional participants are being recruited.
 
 
Symposium #329
Int'l Symposium - Relational Frame Theory Research on Analogical Reasoning and Coherence
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Boulevard A (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Serafin Gómez-Martín (University of Almeria, Spain)
Abstract: This symposium present fourth experimental papers within the context of Relational Frame Theory. Three papers are related with research on analogy. Specifically, there are two papers on the transformation of functions based on analogy and one paper on anology between multiple stimulus relations. Finally, a fourth paper is on coherence within relational networks. It shows how persistent it is the subjects showing coherent performances on equivalence tests.
 
Analogy between Multiple-Stimulus Relations, Respondent-Type Training and Transformation of Functions: New Paths in RFT Research on Analogy
HILARIO MESA MANJON (University of Almeria, Spain), Serafin Gomez-Martin (University of Almeria, Spain), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: In previous studies it was demonstrated analogical reasoning with relations other than those involved in a frame of coordination. Different subjects were exposed to a complex training protocol in which contextual cues for direction (bottom-to-top or top-to-bottom), more than, less than, same and different were established with the aim of generating a series of stimulus networks (e.g., A>B>C; D>E>F; G>H>I). Once these networks were created and analogical reasoning was demonstrated, new stimulus networks (J>K>L; LL>M>N; O>P>K) were presented using a respondent-type training procedure. The present study aims to extend these findings using two conditions in which several types of respondent type-training and Relational Evaluation Procedure were used to train and test the relational network and the analogies. This research may extend the research done so far from on analogy and shed some light on what is analogy and how id develops.
 
Equivalence-Equivalence and Transfer of Function: Further Investigations
SANDRA COYNE (National University of Ireland, Galway), Ian T. Stewart (National University of Ireland, Galway), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: This study provides further investigation into the phenomenon of equivalence-equivalence and transfer of function. Three groups of adults were trained and tested for the formation of four 3-member equivalence relations: A1-B1-C1, A2-B2-C2, A3-B3-C3, and A4-B4-C4. They were then tested for equivalence-equivalence (e.g., matching B1/C1 to B2/C2 rather than B3/C4). Next, they were provided with transfer of function training such that one color function (F1) was attached to compounds of directly trained same-relation stimuli, while a second color function (F2) was attached to directly trained different-relation stimuli. For Group 1, F1 was trained to 1 compound stimulus composed of two directly trained same-relation stimuli, and F2 to 1 compound composed of directly trained different-relation stimuli. Subsequent tests probed for F1 in the presence of compounds containing two equivalent stimuli and F2 in the presence of compounds containing two non-equivalent stimuli. Group 2 received the same number of transfer training trials, but for this group F1was trained to 2 same-relation exemplars and F2 to 2 different-relation exemplars. For Group 3, F1 and F2 were trained to 3 exemplars of trained same and different relation exemplars respectively. Results showed that transformation of function was more likely given greater variety of transfer training exemplars.
 
A Transformation of Aversive and Reinforcing Functions Based on Analogy
SERAFIN GOMEZ-MARTIN (University of Almeria, Spain), Francisca Lopez Ros (University of Almeria, Spain), Hilario Mesa Manjon (University of Almeria, Spain), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: In a previous study it was demonstrated that a derived relation might acquire a new “neutral” function from another similar derived relation, thereby providing a model of how analogy can be the basis for the transformation of stimulus functions. The present research is designed to extend this data incorporating aversive and reinforcing functions and testing the transformation of functions with new equivalence classes. Specifically, subjects were exposed to eight experimental phases: 1) training to form four equivalence classes (i.e., A1-B1-C1, A2-B2-C2, A3-B3-C3, A4-B4-C4); 2) tests for equivalence within the classes; 3) training Function 1 (F1, choosing nice pictures) to relations composed of same class stimulus and training Function 2 (F2, choosing bad pictures) to relations composed of different class stimulus; 4) tests for transformation of stimulus functions to new relations; 5) test to demonstrate analogy within the context of matching to sample; 6) training four new equivalence classes; 7) testing for the transformation of functions based on analogy in these new classes; 8) evaluation using a liker type scale how they like relations associated to F1 (reinforcing function) and to F2 (aversive function). These results may shed light on how psychological functions are transformed in accordance with analogical relations.
 
Relational Frame Theory and Coherence: An Experimental Approach
SERAFIN GOMEZ-MARTIN (University of Almeria, Spain), Maria Jose Garro Espin (University of Almeria, Spain), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: In two previous studies the effects of coherent and incoherent training of equivalence classes on test performance was studied. Specifically, subjects where exposed to coherent (e.g., standard equivalence training) and incoherent training (e.g., the following relations where trained, A1-B1, B1-C1, A2-B2, B2-C2, and A1-B2, B1-C2). Several conditions were arranged varying the order in which incoherent and coherent training were provided. The effect of training using the same stimulus set or multiple stimulus sets was also investigated. Results showed a general tendency in subjects to respond in accordance with coherent patterns of relational responding, especially when the same set was always used. The present research seeks to reexamine incoherent training, focusing in particular on the relative effects of different numbers of incoherent and coherent trials on equivalence test performance. Results will be discussed within the context of Relational Frame Theory and some clinical implications will be outlined.
 
 
Symposium #330
Int'l Symposium - SCAmP: A UK-Based Evaluation of Early Intensive Behavioural Intervention for Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Stevens 5 (Lower Level)
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Bob Remington (BRAIDD)
Abstract: This symposium describes the Southampton Childhood Autism Program (SCAmP), a UK based research project designed to deliver early intensive behavioral intervention to pre-school children with autism. We outline the key research questions we addressed, describe the curriculum that we delivered, and present the key outcome research data for children and their parents. Finally, we discuss the practical challenges involved in delivering and evaluating an experimental ABA intervention program a UK public sector context, where there is little institutional familiarity with the methods or principles on which the treatment is based. The considerable difficulties encountered deserve consideration because understanding the issues involved can help lead to more effective future services.
 
The Southampton Childhood Autism Program (SCAmP): The Research Context
BOB REMINGTON (University of Southampton, UK), Richard P. Hastings (University of Wales, Bangor), Francesca Degli Espinosa (University of Southampton, UK), Hanna Kovshoff (University of Southampton, UK), Erik Jahr (Akershus University Hospital, Norway), Tony Brown (University of Southampton, UK)
Abstract: The Southampton Childhood Autism Program (SCAmP) was established with the support of 11 Southern England Local Education Authorities. We were thus able to construct a publicly funded 2 year intervention program for three cohorts of 10 pre-school children with autism. Charitable research funding further allowed us to carry out an outcome evaluation comparing children receiving ABA intervention (and their parents) with a control group receiving standard services. This presentation describes the context of the research, the overall research design used, and the practical problems encountered. The latter (which included under-recruitment children with autism; difficulties in tutor recruitment, retention and training; parental commitment; and geographical spread) led to substantial changes in the original design of the study. Nevertheless, we have continued successfully to address our initial research questions. It is instructive to consider difficulties we encountered in delivering an effective research and intervention package in a public service context because a fuller understanding of the processes can inform the design of future services.
 
Development and Validation of a Standardized Curriculum for Early Behavioral Intervention
FRANCESCA DEGLI ESPINOSA (University of Southampton, UK), Bob Remington (University of Southampton, UK), Erik Jahr (Akershus University Hospital, Norway), Richard P. Hastings (University of Wales, Bangor), Monika Lemaic (University of Southampton, UK), Paula Filby (University of Southampton, UK), Hanna Kovshoff (University of Southampton, UK)
Abstract: This paper describes the initial development and validation of a standardized Early Behavioral Intervention Curriculum (EBIC). The EBIC centers around eight main skill areas drawn from the behavioral and developmental literature, thus providing a detailed structure for monitoring children’s development, within which progress can be assessed in terms of behavioral objectives introduced and achieved. Empirical support for the EBIC is presented using data from 14 children with autism who participated in the Southampton Childhood Autism Program (SCAmP). Correlations observed between these children’s performance across the EBIC’s domains and standardized outcome measures indicate that the EBIC may provide a preliminary stage in the development of a comprehensive curriculum for early behavioral interventions for children with autism. The research presented is discussed in terms of relations between EBIC data and standardized measures of intellectual functioning, and with regard to use of the EBIC as a supplementary indicator of the SCAmP intervention’s internal validity.
 
Clinical Significance of Outcome After 24 Months in Early Intensive Behavioural Intervention
HANNA KOVSHOFF (University of Southampton, UK), Bob Remington (University of Southampton, UK), Richard P. Hastings (University of Wales, Bangor), Francesca Degli Espinosa (University of Southampton, UK), Erik Jahr (Akershus University Hospital, Norway), Tony Brown (University of Southampton, UK), Paula Filby (University of Southampton, UK), Monika Lemaic (University of Southampton, UK)
Abstract: This paper examines key outcomes for children with autism after 12 and 24 months of intensive Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) intervention, applying principles of clinically significant change. Data from 46 pre-school children with autism, 24 on ABA programs and 21 in a standard services control group, were gathered at baseline, 12, and 24 months. Standard tests of intellectual functioning, and adaptive behavior were applied. ANCOVA analyses for data after 12 months of intervention revealed significant increases in IQ and MA for the ABA group. Using the Reliable Change Index to identify clinically significant change in IQ scores showed that four children in the ABA group met criteria for clinically significant improvement while one child met criteria for clinically significant regression. Conversely, one child in the comparison group improved while two children regressed significantly. Thus both group and individual child results to date support the effectiveness of ABA intervention over the comparison group. Results from our two year follow-up will also be discussed in relation to the one year follow up data. Further research is needed to address longer term outcomes, and to identify program, child, and family variables that predict clinically significant improvement.
 
Outcomes for Families of Children with Autism in Early Intensive Behavioural Intervention
RICHARD P. HASTINGS (University of Wales, Bangor), Hanna Kovshoff (University of Southampton, UK), Corinna F. Grindle (University of Southampton, UK), Bob Remington (University of Southampton, UK), Francesca Degli Espinosa (University of Southampton, UK), Erik Jahr (Akershus University Hospital, Norway), Tony Brown (University of Southampton, UK), Nicholas Ward (University of Southampton, UK)
Abstract: This paper describes the impact of Early Intensive Behavioural Intervention (EIBI) on parents of children with autism. Data from the families of 48 pre-school children with autism were gathered at baseline 12 and 24 months after SCAmP intervention began. Twenty-four were on EIBI program delivered by SCAmP or other providers, and 21 were a standard services control group. Measures of maternal and paternal mental health, stress and positive perceptions were obtained at each data collection point. ANCOVA comparisons showed no differences between the EIBI group and the control group at 12 months for mothers or for fathers. Although both EIBI and control groups showed elevated depression over the data collection period, this change was no more marked in either group. Results from our two year follow-up will also be discussed in relation to the one year follow up data and to social validity data obtained by interview. Consistent with previous research studies, the data to date show no additional burden on parents of engaging in EIBI. Nevertheless, parents reported high levels of stress indicating that they would benefit from further clinical support.
 
 
Symposium #331
Understanding Implementation Variables to Improve School-Wide and Classroom-Wide Behavior Support Strategies
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Williford C (3rd floor)
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Robert F. Putnam (The May Institute)
Discussant: Robert F. Putnam (The May Institute)
Abstract: Behavior analysts have the ability to critically determine what factors prevent schools and classroom teachers from implementing empirically supported methods of improving student behavior. Through data-based decision making and behavioral consultation we can examine the degree to which schools implement interventions as designed and then provide concrete methods to improve treatment integrity. This symposium will describe a comprehensive and systemic prevention program that provides training and consultation from a community-based organization to school staff. By systematically using data to design, implement and evaluate effective school-wide behavioral support practices, schools have improved outcomes for both students and adults. Data will be presented to demonstrate how schools enhance the effectiveness of school-wide and classroom-wide behavior support practices by examining treatment integrity data as they related to student (e.g., on-task behavior, discipline referrals) and adult (e.g., reinforcement, proactive monitoring) changes in behavior.
 
Examining the Effects of School-wide Implementation Strategies on Student Referral and Suspension Patterns
JAMES E. CONNELL (The May Institute), Kimberly S. Thier (The May Institute), Jeffrey Pisacreta (The May Institute), Marcie W. Handler (The May Institute)
Abstract: A fundamental part of implementing school-wide positive behavior support (PBS) practices is the ability of a school team to examine trends in student behavior in order to make data-based decisions. However, before student behavior outcomes can be evaluated and efficient and effective decisions made, it is necessary to establish to what degree practices are being implemented according to the intervention plan. Thus, data are measured through multiple assessment tools including interviews and observations of non-classroom locations (e.g., using an adapted version of the Systems-wide Evaluation Tool; Sugai, Lewis-Palmer, Todd, & Horner, 1999), knowledge surveys, and measurements of staff participation in training and consultation meetings. Specific examples will be provided of schools with varying levels of implementation as measured through these tools and the corresponding changes in student referral and suspension patterns.
 
Relationship Between School-wide Implementation Factors and Classroom Behavior Support Practices
JENNIFER A. MAUTONE (The May Institute), Jeffrey Pisacreta (The May Institute), James E. Connell (The May Institute), Kimberly S. Thier (The May Institute), Adam Feinberg (The May Institute), Marcie W. Handler (The May Institute)
Abstract: A primary focus of school-wide PBS consultation is to increase the consistency with which adults respond to students with the intention of reinforcing and shaping appropriate behavior. Given that behavior is a primary concern among school staff and resources are limited, it is critical that behavior supports be provided efficiently. Schools could use their resources more efficiently if applications of school-wide behavior supports could generalize to classroom teacher behavior. This presentation will examine the relationship between the implementation of school- and class-wide behavior supports by comparing data collected using an adapted version of the School-wide Evaluation Tool (SET; Sugai, Lewis-Palmer, Todd, & Horner, 1999) with the Classroom Observation System (COS; Handler & Putnam, 2000). In particular, it will discuss how changes in the levels of school-wide supports can affect the generalization of effective behavioral principles in the classroom by teachers and the corresponding changes in student behavior.
 
Applications of Behavioral Consultation to Improve Teacher and Classroom Behavior Support Practices
CHRISTINE M. DAVIS (The May Institute), Jannette Rey (The May Institute)
Abstract: The management of students’ classroom behaviors by educators is essential for effective instruction and high academic performance. Many teachers participate in professional development to develop effective behavioral support strategies for students with challenging behaviors. However, research indicates that the generalization of teachers’ skills following these trainings is greatly enhanced if they have opportunities during which their skills can be observed, and they receive direct and ongoing feedback on their performance. Data will be presented from general education classrooms in an urban middle school before and after teachers received both training and consultation. Outcomes include significant improvements in student on-task behavior and teacher behaviors (e.g., time spent actually instructing, preventing problematic behaviors, and reinforcing appropriate prosocial behaviors). A discussion will be provided on the importance of visual and written feedback as methods to improve the consultation process and the need for both effective training and consultation to improve classroom outcomes.
 
 
Symposium #332
Values in Organizational Change
Monday, May 30, 2005
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Marquette (3rd floor)
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Scott A. Herbst (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: A major challenge Faced by Organizational consultants is that the interest of the organization (and its stakeholders) and the employees responsible for producing its goods and services are often at odds. Regularly, the contracting individual represents the interest of the stakeholders with the interest of the employees being considered secondarily and as they relate to the interest of the stakeholders. This symposium will discuss individual and organizational values and how a consultant might approach organizational change without compromising values at either end of this spectrum.
 
Valuing Profit and Employees Without Compromise
SCOTT A. HERBST (University of Nevada, Reno), Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Though there is no general agreement on the matter, some have speculated that capitalism as currently practiced in America, will be unable to sustain current levels of economic prosperity. This paper will discuss reasons for this speculation and provide recommendations as to how behavioral principles might be applied within organizations to redress these problems.
 
Values and Individual Empowerment Within Organizations: An ACT Perspective
KARA BUNTING (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Attending to individual and organizational values may enable worker empowerment in a broader context as well as in the context of the organizational community. This session will examine a variety of opportunities for empowering individuals at the level of organizational structure, organizational culture, and the individual worker that are addressed by Acceptance and Commitment Therapy. Implications and benefits of this approach for the individual worker and the organization as a whole will be discussed.
 
Using Values to Bring Organizational Culture in Alignment with Organizational Strategy
DONALD TOSTI (Vanguard Consulting)
Abstract: Three case studies will be presented discussing the methodologies of value assessment, alignment, and change. This session will review what worked and what lessons were learned.
 
 
Invited Tutorial #333
2005 ABA Tutorial: “Verbal Behavior” and Autism: A Review and Call for Research
Monday, May 30, 2005
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
International North (2nd floor)
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Pamela H. Gorski (Reaching Potentials)
Presenting Authors: : GINA GREEN (San Diego State University)
Abstract: Intervention techniques derived from Skinner’s 1957 book Verbal Behavior are being promoted widely for learners with autism. Those techniques are often presented as if their effectiveness is well-established, and as if they are more effective than other techniques. In his book, however, Skinner presented conceptual analyses of the verbal behavior of typically developing humans, not a prescription for remediating deficient verbal repertoires in individuals with learning difficulties, nor even experimental analyses of typical verbal repertoires. Others have drawn implications from Skinner’s analysis for developing verbal behavior in learners with autism, but their interpretations need to be subjected to experimental testing to see if they are valid. This tutorial reviews some specific empirical questions that have been raised by those interpretations, and a number of claims that have been made about the “Verbal Behavior” approach to autism intervention. Peer-reviewed scientific studies addressing each question and claim are summarized. Questions that remain to be addressed through experimental research are discussed, and some suggestions regarding research methods are offered.
 
GINA GREEN (San Diego State University)
Gina Green received a PhD in Psychology (Analysis of Behavior) from Utah State University in 1986 following undergraduate and master’s degree studies at Michigan State University. She has been a faculty member in Behavior Analysis and Therapy at Southern Illinois University; Director of Research at the New England Center for Children in Southborough, Massachusetts; Associate Scientist at the E.K. Shriver Center for Mental Retardation in Waltham, Massachusetts; Research Associate Professor of Psychiatry and Pediatrics, University of Massachusetts Medical School; and Director of Professional Training and Research at The Institute for Effective Education in San Diego, California. Dr. Green is currently in private practice in San Diego as a consultant and serving as an adjunct faculty member for the University of North Texas and San Diego State University. She has authored numerous publications on the treatment of individuals with developmental disabilities and brain injuries, as well as the experimental analysis of behavior. Dr. Green co-edited the books Behavioral Intervention for Young Children with Autism and Making a Difference: Behavioral Intervention for Autism. She serves or has served on the editorial boards of several professional journals in developmental disabilities and behavior analysis. Dr. Green also serves on the Board of Trustees and the Autism Advisory Group of the Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies, the Board of Directors of the Behavior Analyst Certification Board, the Board of Directors of the California Association for Behavior Analysis, and the advisory boards of several autism programs and organizations. She is a Board Certified Behavior Analyst, former president of the Association for Behavior Analysis, and a Fellow of the American Psychological Association and the Council for Scientific Medicine and Mental Health. Psychology Today named her “Mental Health Professional of the Year” in 2000. Dr. Green lectures and consults widely on autism and related disorders, behavioral research, and effective interventions for people with disabilities.
 
 
Paper Session #334
Finding Common Ground Amid Educational Controversy
Monday, May 30, 2005
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Williford B (3rd floor)
Area: EDC
Chair: Daniel E. Hursh (West Virginia University)
 
No Child Left Behind: ABA Opportunity or Guilt by Association?
Domain: Service Delivery
DANIEL E. HURSH (West Virginia University)
 
Abstract: The contributions of Applied Behavior Analysis to Education have laid the foundations for evidence-based practices that assure adequate yearly progress for all learners. No Child Left Behind has incorporated these foundations and the evidence from the Project Follow Through evaluation and Meaningful Differences. The difficulties created by the testing and accountability mechanisms that have been put in place threaten to create such a political backlash that its benefits may be lost. Behavior Analysts can join with educators to revise and fine tune the procedures that have followed from the mandates of the act so as to assure its success. This address will suggest some aspects of the fine tuning and some collaborative consultation tactics to insure their impact.
 
Can Effective Teaching Methods be Used Harmoniously Without Unnecessary Competition?
Domain: Service Delivery
CHANG-NAM LEE (Whitworth College)
 
Abstract: The education community is fraught with arguments regarding the use of certain teaching methods over others. Such competitive arguments also occur even among proponents of methods with empirical evidence of success. Such a controversy culminated during a session of the 2004 Boston ABA Convention when three presenters presented their separate approaches including peer tutoring and Direct Instruction. I view that such controversies are frequently counterproductive and therefore will present a way to use all research validated methods more harmoniously and productively. Based on the literature and professional views, I will suggest those methods be used in accordance with the continuum of students’ learning phases (i.e., mastery-fluency-maintenance-generalization) that educators generally agree upon. In this manner, I will propose proper uses of several instructional methods. Following this presentation, attendants will be asked to express their views.
 
 
 
Paper Session #335
Increasing Social Skills of Children with Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Continental B (1st floor)
Area: AUT
Chair: Mitchell T. Taubman (Autism Partnership)
 
Establishing Humor Related Skills in Children with Autism
Domain: Applied Research
MITCHELL T. TAUBMAN (Autism Partnership), Sasha Papovich (Autism Partnership), Kanon Riecks (Autism Partnership), Juliana Luna Hernandez (Autism Partnership), Ronald Leaf (Autism Partnership), John McEachin (Autism Partnership)
 
Abstract: There is much in the literature illustrating the difficulties experienced by individuals with autism in the social skills area. This is especially true in regard to nuanced social behavior, such as inferencing and providing and understanding humor. This study investigated the effectiveness of interventions designed to build humor related behaviors in three high functioning children with autism. All three participants were 6 years old, had a diagnosis of autism, and were placed in regular education classes. A multiple baseline design across targets was utilized. Targets included discriminating between jokes and joke-sounding, but non-humorous, material; being able to discriminate when someone is jokingly teasing; and responding to humorous story-telling with reciprocal humorous story-telling. Several behaviorally based teaching interventions were used including discrete trial teaching, teaching interactions, and group instruction. Discussion of results focuses on the complexity of the target area as well as generalization of skills within the response class.
 
Increasing Peer Interaction in Preschoolers with Pervasive Developmental Disorder During Play Using Video Modeling and Typical Peers
Domain: Applied Research
GRETCHEN A. DITTRICH (Northeastern University)
 
Abstract: The effects of using a video modeling procedure to increase peer interaction between preschoolers diagnosed with pervasive developmental disorder (PDD) and typical peers during play were evaluated in a classroom setting. Video models consisted of two typical age-matched peers engaging in natural, unscripted play during three play activities. The two typical peers also served as playmates for two preschoolers with PDD. During video modeling, random samples of the videos were shown to peer dyads. Dyads were then instructed to play with the same toys as seen on the video. Results demonstrated that video modeling was effective in increasing unscripted peer interaction for all participants, regardless of diagnosis, and increased peer interaction for the children with PDD to levels higher than the baseline levels of interaction for the typical peers. Results demonstrated that video modeling is an effective method of increasing unscripted peer interaction in preschoolers with PDD and typical peers.
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #336
CE Offered: None

Reinforcement: Is There Any Such Thing?

Monday, May 30, 2005
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
International South (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CE Instructor: Michael C. Davison, Ph.D.
Chair: John W. Donahoe (University of Massachusetts, Amherst)
MICHAEL C. DAVISON (University of Auckland), William M. Baum (University of California, Davis)
Michael Davison completed his BSC (Hons) at Bristol University, UK, and his PhD at Otago University, NZ. He has been a lecturer at Otago University, University College London, and Auckland University, where he is now a full professor and Director of the Experimental Analysis of Behaviour Research Unit. He is a Fellow of the Royal Society of NZ (from which he has been awarded a silver medal for research), and of the Association for Behavior Analysis International, and he recently served as Associate Editor of JEAB. He also holds an appointment at the NZ National Research Centre for Growth and Development and at The Liggins Institute. He served as International Representative on the ABA Executive. His real interest in life is growing herbs.
Abstract:

Two recent empirical results from the study of contingent food delivery on local choice may have implications for our basic understanding of reinforcement. First, in the within-sessions (Davison & Baum, 2000) procedure, and also in second-order schedules, brief stimuli that are paired with reinforcer delivery produce a preference pulse following the stimulus presentation; but so do brief stimuli that have never been paired with food delivery; and if stimuli that are paired with food delivery follow responses on the lower reinforcer-rate alternative, they are followed by a preference pulse on the other alternative. These results argue against the notion of conditional reinforcement and suggest that stimuli that signal higher subsequent conditional probabilities of food for a certain activity at a location are followed by increases in that activity at that location. Second, when food delivery itself signals subsequent higher conditional probabilities of food, a preference pulse follows to the alternative that gave food; but when food delivery signals a lower subsequent conditional probability of food, the following preference pulse is to the other alternative. If a contingent event that increases subsequent responding is a reinforcer, then sometimes an event paired with food is a reinforcer, sometimes it is not; sometimes, the reinforcer reinforces, and sometimes it does not. This unsatisfactory state of affairs is not alleviated by asserting that reinforcers and conditional reinforcers have discriminative properties additional to their reinforcing properties and that sometimes the discriminative properties may ablate the reinforcing properties. Rather, these results make us confront the possibility that we have been wrong about reinforcement for 100 years. Perhaps stimuli (including reinforcers themselves) simply signal to an animal where to look for more of the same, or where to avoid for fewer of the same. Perhaps a reinforcer, as we know it, is simply a punctate hedonic event (hedon) with some current valance, and perhaps behavior simply follows the signposts provided by discriminative stimuli. Such an approach has many theoretical and practical implications.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #337
The Necessity of a Multi-Scaled Approach for the Analysis of Verbal Behavior
Monday, May 30, 2005
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Stevens 3 (Lower Level)
Area: VBC; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Philip N. Hineline, Ph.D.
Chair: Paul D. Neuman (Bryn Mawr College)
PHILIP N. HINELINE (Temple University)
After completing his B. A. at Hamilton College and Ph.D. at Harvard University, Philip N. Hineline spent three years at the Walter Reed Army Institute of Research before moving to Temple University, where he is now a Professor. He routinely teaches both basic and advanced levels, and maintains a “teaching environment” in his research laboratory, where much of the mentoring occurs between graduate and undergraduate students. Thanks to the initiative of those students, he has received several awards for excellence in teaching: In the spring of 1999, he received the Eleanor Hofkin Award for Excellence in Teaching, from the Alumni Association of the College of Arts and Sciences of Temple University. The following year he received Temple's university-wide "Great Teacher Award," and the "Distinguished Teacher Award" from the College of Arts and sciences. Outside the University, he served first as Associate Editor, as Editor, and then as Review Editor of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior. He has been President of the Association for Behavior Analysis, International, as well as of Division 25 of the American Psychological Association. In 1995 he received the award for Distinguished Service to Behavior Analysis from the Society for the Advancement of Behavior Analysis, and in 2002, the Award for Outstanding Contributions to Basic Research, from Division 25 of the APA. His conceptual writing has focused upon the characteristics of explanatory language and the role of those characteristics in the controversies that have confronted behavior analysis. His empirical research has contained a consistent theme, to develop an understanding of behavioral and psychological processes as extended in time.
Abstract: If rate of occurrence is a fundamental dimension of behavior, it follows that behavioral process must be extended in time, for a rate cannot occur in an instant, and a slow rate is just as "real" as a rapid one. This implication seems difficult to grasp, perhaps because one can look right through a slow rate of occurrence, even when it is "right here, right now." In contrast, it is intuitively obvious that the organization of a spatial structure can be understood on multiple scales, each yielding particular characteristics that may or may not be evident when contemplated from a broadened or narrowed viewpoint. Verbal behavior provides examples that may make this general aspect of behavioral process more easily discerned. It should be a straightforward matter to demonstrate the functional independence of multiply-scaled aspects of verbal behavior, extended in time, by examining the co-extensive frequencies of utterances that range in scale from features such as the pronunciation of particular syllables (as in a regional accent) to types of conversations (such as arguments).
 
 
Poster Session #338
#338 Poster Session - AUT
Monday, May 30, 2005
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
1. Effects of Behavioral Checklist on Student’s Learn Unit Rate and Aberrant Behaviors
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KARI SASADA (Teachers College, Columbia University), JoAnn Pereira Delgado (Teachers College, Columbia University), R. Douglas Greer (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: Two 5-year-old students who were diagnosed with autism participated in this study. Those two students were identical twins and attended a special education kindergarten classroom in the suburb of a metropolitan area. During baseline, the students emitted high rates of aberrant behaviors including throwing objects, assaulting teachers, and climbing on tables. Non-compliance usually co-occurred with those aberrant behaviors and both of the student’s rate of instruction (on-task behavior) was low due to non-compliance, usually emitting socially inappropriate behaviors at the same time. Behavioral checklist was implemented to gain compliance and to provide visualized sheet working towards reinforcement as a consequence of completing instructions for both students. As the result of the intervention, both of the students showed great increase in rate of the total learn units (academic task) completed and decrease in socially inappropriate behaviors.
 
2. Using Fluency-Based Instruction to Improve the Bilateral Coordination and Functional Play Skills of a Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
HEIDI CALVERLY (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Krista Zambolin (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: Children with autism often have difficulty completing tasks that require fine motor dexterity, such as snapping snaps, doing up buttons, stringing beads, and playing with a wide range of toys. This poster shows the progress a young child with autism made in improving his fine motor abilities, specifically bilateral coordination, and the effect that this improvement in motor skills had on his functional play skills. Data were collected on all intervention sessions and showed an increase in rate and accuracy across skills.
 
3. Using Direct Instruction to Teach a Non-Vocal Student with Autism to Read Through Discrimination Training
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
KELLY J. FERRIS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Celeste Marion (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: This poster will present data on teaching a non-vocal 8-year-old boy with severe autism to read using direct instruction curricula and scripts modified so that they required no vocal output on the student’s part. We will present sample scripts, cumulative data demonstrating his progress through the curriculum, and a list of component skills he needed to benefit from the modified instruction.
 
4. Implementing an Attending Program to Decrease Learn Units to Criterion
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
SHIRA EISENBERG (Teachers College, Columbia University), Dolleen-Day Keohane (Teachers College, Columbia University), Jennifer Longano (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: This study measured the effects of implementing an attending program on the number of learn units to criterion for the identification programs of two autistic students in a CABAS® run classroom for students with disabilities. Both students emitted high numbers of learn units to criterion on there identification programs. The instructor used a pre and post design to measure the number of learn units to criterion prior to the implementation of the attending program and compared them to the number of learn units to criterion post attending program. Baseline was measured for two weeks prior to the introduction of the intervention and two weeks post. The identification programs for the first participant were discontinued during the attending procedure but were not discontinued for the second student, to determine whether this caused an effect on the attending procedures effects on the learn units to criterion. Following the attending program the students number of learn units to criterion decreased for both students from the initial pre-intervention measurement.
 
5. Assessing the Differential Outcomes Procedure with Children Diagnosed with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
IVY M. CHONG CRANE (Western Michigan University), James E. Carr (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The differential outcomes effect (DOE) refers to the phenomenon whereby discrimination learning is enhanced when a correct response to a specific sample stimulus is followed by its own unique reward (Savage, 2001). According to some researchers, the DOE is a consistent and powerful effect that enhances the acquisition and retention of conditional discriminations (e.g., Urcuioli, 1990). This series of experiments sought to extend research on the DOE. In Experiment 1, we examined the differential outcomes procedure (DOP) with four children diagnosed with autism across various task types commonly used in early intervention. In Experiment 2, we examined the DOP with three-choice conditional discrimination tasks. Based on phase means, in 7 out of 14 phases (3 in Experiment 1, 4 in Experiment 2), exemplars were acquired more quickly under the DOP. Although the aggregate data appear to be somewhat consistent with previous findings on the DOE, the question remains whether the current findings serve any practical value in the treatment of children with autism. The results are discussed in the context of the differences between the experiments and previous research that might have contributed to the discrepant findings.
 
6. Fluency Training and Skill Maintenance for Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
AMY SISLO (Summit Educational Resources), Amy L. Jablonski (Summit Educational Resources)
Abstract: This poster examines the effect of fluency training versus traditional maintenance programming on skill retention/acquisition for preschool children with Autism. Two groups of preschool students with autism, matched on key variables (including age, diagnosis, developmental level, and service length) will be examined. One group received fluency training once skills had been acquired in a traditional discrete-trial program, and the second group continued with discrete-trial maintenance procedures. Fluency training is a form of Applied Behavior Analysis that focuses on arranging instructional contingencies to promote high rates or responding. Discrete Trial Training emphasizes accuracy of responses that the student makes, where fluency training emphasizes rate of responding that the student exhibits. Data will be presented to show the durability of skill retention for each group.
 
7. Building Reading Comprehension Component Skills in Child with a Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
AMINATA DIAKITE (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Holly C. Almon-Morris (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Kristin N. Schirmer (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: Once a child with autism has mastered basic reading skills such as segmenting, blending, and letter-word identification, comprehension skills usually lag quite far behind most often because of the impoverished verbal repertoires of children with autism This poster outlines multiple methods of building comprehension component skills in a child with autism through precision teaching and fluency based instruction; skills targeted for development included word imaging, text reconstruction, and sentence translation. Along with data from each skill targeted, the poster will present the results of curriculum-based assessment measures used to document skill progress.
 
8. Reinforcing Appropriate Attending to Task Stimuli to Increase Correct Responding During Instruction Involving Visual Stimuli
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
TAMAR FRANKEL (Teachers College, Columbia University), Dolleen-Day Keohane (Teachers College, Columbia University), Claire S. Cahill (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: This study examined the effects of implementing a treatment program to reinforce looking at antecedent stimuli and responding to the salient part of the stimuli on 3 students’ Personalized System on Instruction programs using a multiple baseline design across participants. The participants, a 7-year-old boy at the pre-speaker/prelistener repertoire level and two 7-year-old girls functioning at the emergent-speaker/emergent-listener levels, were all diagnosed with autism and attending a self-contained classroom employing the CABAS® educational model. The students’ weekly mean number of learn units-to-criteria before, during, and after the implementation of a program were calculated to measure the effects on their academic programs involving visual stimuli. The program, designed to reinforce attending to task stimuli, had several phases. Students were required to visually track an object under one of multiple identical cups and lift the correct cup to reveal the item. Cups with varying pictures were later presented, which required the students to find the hidden object by selecting the picture described by the instructors to increase vocal antecedent control. Results showed an educationally significant decrease in the numbers of learn units-to-criteria, as well as a relationship between reinforcing attention to the salient portion of the stimuli and the students’ learn units-to-criteria.
 
9. The Use of Antecedent Manipulations and Monitoring Using the Standard Celeration Chart to Reduce Problem Behavior in a Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KRISTA ZAMBOLIN (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Kelly J. Ferris (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: This paper documents the effect antecedent manipulations had on reducing escape/avoidance behavior in a child with autism. The antecedent manipulations were monitored using the Standard celeration chart. Data shows the elimination of aggressive behavior and improved staff performance
 
10. Assessment of Discrimination Skills in Children with Autism: Basic Skills of "Eye Directions"
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KENJI OKUDA (Kibi International University)
Abstract: This study assessed the discrimination skills of others "Eye directions" in Children with Autism. First, the basic assessment tasks were prepared. Second, some participants were tested their performance. Third, teaching was conducted for the participants who had low performance in the tasks. And then, effectiveness of teaching procedures and generalization are assessed. Finally, the basic discrimination skills of "Eye directions" in relation to "theory of mind" are discussed.
 
11. Encoding Words: Part:Whole Relations and Curriculum for Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
DONALD E. EISENHART (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Helen C. Sykes (Bancroft NeuroHealth)
Abstract: The language of many autistic children lacks the dymanic quality of typical peers including impaired gestalt perception (part:whole reations), limited conditional discrimination, and inability to utilize phonemes in encoding novel words.The following procedure has been utilized to teach word encoding and sight word reading in two learners aged five who had received early intensive behavioral intervention (EIBI) for approximately eighteen months. Despite several curricular strategies (object:word correspondence, phonics, sight words)each learner presented distinct overselectivity in sight word reading and impaired encoding of novel words.The procedure utilizes letter blend cards (e.g., sn) of prefixes and suffixes which were taught expressively in isolation. Subsequently, cards were presented together to produce correct word reading based upon phonetic composition. Performance based breaks were utilized during the shaping (teaching) phase. Results indicated the acquisition of over 200 words and the demonstation of encoding of novel words with identical prefixes and suffixes.The authors propose that over exposure to whole word sight reading in curriculum for children with autism could compromise word encoding at later stages. Addtionally, part:whole perception may serve as a prerequiste to word encoding indicating the need for increaded training at the foundational stage of skill building.
 
12. The Use Of Written Language to Promote Academic Performance
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ALICIA MEDEIROS (Crossroads Center for Children), Rachel Frederick (Crossroads Center for Children), Helen Bloomer (Crossroads Center for Children)
Abstract: Written language as an instructional support was evaluated as an intervention for promoting academic performance in two children with a diagnosis within the pervasive developmental disorder spectrum. Both children attended Crossroads Center for Children in New York, a school incorporating techniques of applied behavior analysis. One child was enrolled in the school-age program; the other child was enrolled in the preschool program. The results will reflect the effectiveness of the relationship between written language support and academic performance.
 
13. Assessing Children's Progress in an ABA-Educational Program: Results from the ABLLS and the Vineland
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ROBIN P. GOIN-KOCHEL (Virginia Institute for Psychiatric & Behavioral Genetics), Dawn Hendricks (VCU Autism Center), Staci Carr (VCU Autism Center), Shirley Wiley (VCU Autism Center)
Abstract: Archival data from a private-day school for preschoolers with autism (n = 18; mean age at program entry = 44 months; 94% male) were analyzed to understand (a) how children’s skills, as measured with the Assessment of Basic Language and Learning Skills (ABLLS), developed longitudinally as a result of their participation in an ABA-based educational program and (b) how the ABLLS compared to the Vineland Adaptive Behavior Scales, Classroom Edition (VABS). Program coordinators had completed the ABLLS on children at baseline and subsequent 6-month intervals and the VABS at 2 time points that coincided with 2 ABLLS administrations. Items on the ABLLS were organized into 5 domains: language, social/play, academics, self-help skills, and motor skills. Pairwise t-tests revealed significant improvements between all contiguous ABLLS assessments across each of these 5 domains except for self-help and motor skills, for which significant improvements were not evidenced from the ABLLS third assessment to the fourth. Pearson correlations were used to assess the relationships between comparable domains on the ABLLS and VABS. Significant relationships were noted between all like-domain pairs (r = .757, p = .003) except between the ABLLS self-help domain and the VABS daily-living skills domain. Implications of these findings are discussed.
 
14. Generalized Negatively Reinforced Manding in Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JANET YI (California State University, Los Angeles)
Abstract: Individuals with developmental disabilities are often unable to communicate in traditional ways (i.e., vocal language) and frequently rely on challenging behaviors (e.g., aggression and self-injury) to express their needs for positive and negative reinforcement. While the area of positive reinforcement manding has been well documented and empirically validated, there is a paucity of research to support the area of negatively reinforced manding. Using a multiple baseline across participants design, this study sought to teach three children with Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD) to replace their challenging/pre-vocal behaviors with more socially appropriate ways to request the removal of nonpreferred items. Results showed that all participants were able to learn the negatively reinforced mand response and generalized this response to other untrained items. In addition to extending the research in the area, the study empirically defined a procedure for teaching negatively reinforced manding. Moreover, teaching the mand response resulted in quality of life improvements for all the participants and their families.
 
15. The Effects of Timed Readings on Comprehension in a Child with Asperger’s Syndrome
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
CHRISTINA A. YOUNG (University of North Texas), Jesus Rosales-Ruiz (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Many children with Asperger’s Syndrome read well but have difficulty with comprehension or recall. This study examined the effects of the amount of time a child read on the amount of related material remembered immediately afterwards. A multiple baseline with a reversal design was employed in this study. The baseline condition consisted of timing the child for two minutes of reading followed immediately by a 20 second timing in which the child “recalled” out loud what she just read for two separate books. The next condition in Book 1 consisted of shortening the reading time to one minute and continuing with a 20 second recall-time. The preliminary results show that shortening the time required to read increases the number of relevant facts recalled by the participant.
 
16. Video Modeling to Increase the Verbal Behavior of an Adolescent with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
D. REED BECHTEL (Bechtel Behavioral Services), Susan J. Heatter (Sue Heatter & Associates), Tereasa Stuckey (Springhill College)
Abstract: The poster presents the use of video modeling to increase the conversational skills of an adolescent with autism. A combination sequential and multiple baseline design was used to teach the boy how to initiate varied topics of conversation with other people at the dining table during mealtimes. Generalization probes for school and community settings also are presented.
 
17. The Effects of Video Feedback on Mand Training in Young Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
BOBBI KAEPPLER (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Noelle M. Green (Bancroft NeuroHealth)
Abstract: Mand training involves capturing and/or contriving establishing operations (EO). Specifically, this entails the identification of "relevant" EO's in effect and can often be a challenge. A goal in the treatment of children with Autism is to establish and maintain multiple mands. The authors propose that teacher improvement in EO identification leads to an increase in student mands. A multiple baseline across three teachers is presented to illustrate the effects of video feedback on mand training.
 
18. Performance of Children Diagnosed with Autism on Progressive Ratio and Conditioned Position Response Tasks
Area: AUT; Domain: Basic Research
LENELL E. KELLEY (The Matthew Reardon Center), John J. Chelonis (University of Arkansas, Little Rock), Merle G. Paule (National Center for Toxicological Research), Eldon Schulz (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences)
Abstract: This study compared motivation and simple visual discrimination in children ages 5 to 12 years diagnosed with autism (n=12) and control children (n=9). Motivation was measured using a Progressive Ratio (PR) task that required children to press a response lever to earn candy. The first lever press was reinforced and the number of lever presses required for each additional reinforcer was incremented by 10. Visual discrimination was measured using a Conditioned Position Response (CPR) task. For this task, the center of three press-plates was illuminated with one of four colors. The child pressed the center press-plate and then pressed the left press-plate to earn candy if the original color was red or yellow, and the right press-plate if it was blue or green. Results indicated that for the PR task children with autism tend to be slower to respond, make fewer responses, and tend to complete less of the task than controls. Results indicated that for the CPR task, children with autism were significantly less accurate, significantly slower to respond, and completed significantly less of the task than controls. These results indicate that motivation may be effected and tasks that involve complex behaviors are significantly affected in individuals with autism.
 
19. Verbal Intelligence and Adaptive Communication in Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ALLISON SERRA TETREAULT (University of Houston, Texas Young Autism Project), Courtney Ferguson (University of Houston, Texas Young Autism Project), Ehsan Bayat (University of Houston, Texas Young Autism Project), Gerald E. Harris (University of Houston, Texas Young Autism Project)
Abstract: While research has demonstrated a relationship between adaptive behavior and intelligence in children with autism, it has not been examined specifically within the language domain. In addition, very little research has explored the relationship between subjective and objective accounts of language ability. Among 42 children with autism, the current study looked at the correlation between parent reports of child communication ability (Communication Domain on the Vineland Adaptive Behavior Scales) and an objective measure of verbal intelligence (Verbal Subtest on the Wechsler Preschool and Primary Scale of Intelligence – Third Edition) across a one-year time interval in which each child received discrete trial ABA. At initial testing, it was found that the two scores correlated significantly. In addition to offering evidence of convergent validity for the two measures of language ability, it was found that when the sample was analyzed longitudinally, the strength of the correlation increased, indicating that child treatment may lead to greater accuracy for parent’s perception of child language ability. Implications for the diagnosis and treatment of autism are discussed.
 
20. Establishing Mands Using a Physical Prompt Procedure with Fading on a Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KRISTINA WILLIAMS-MASIBO (Gonzaga University), Piaget G. Pauli (Gonzaga University), Kimberly P. Weber (Gonzaga University)
Abstract: A multi-probe design across behavior was used to increase the usage of signed mands with a child diagnosed with Autism. The researchers selected the participant based on her limited vocal responses, moderate aberrant behavior, and ability to imitate motor movements. The procedure used to develop the mand responses included fading physical prompting from a full to no prompting. Inter observer agreement data were recorded on every session with agreement of 100%. Results for increased independent sign usage in a mand condition were obtained for all of the signs taught. During the study aberrant behavior was also studied and the results showed a significant decrease as child acquired mands.
 
21. Teaching Elementary Abstract Concepts and How to Construct Basic Sentences to Children with Autism Using the Reading and Writing Program
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MARI SASAKI (Sophia University), Yoshiaki Nakano (Sophia University), Maiko Miyazaki (Nakayoshi Kids Station), Akiko Kato (Nakayoshi Kids Station), Takahiro Yamamoto (Sophia University)
Abstract: We developed the Japanese Reading and Writing Program based on the original R&W Program developed at UCLA to help developmentally disabled children improve functional communication skills using solely visual stimuli (Lovaas & Lovaas, 1999). “Reading” means responding to written instructions by selecting pictures, objects, persons etc., and “writing” means responding vice versa. Sasaki, Nakano, Kato & Yamamoto (2003) reported that a 4-year-old child with autism acquired 20 items of “reading” and “writing” labels within 3 months. We expanded the R&W Program to further teach such tasks as elementary abstract concepts, how to construct basic sentences, etc. In this study, we applied the expanded R&W Program to two 4-year-old children with autism who had difficulties in using vocal language, as a part of an early intensive behavioral intervention. We analyzed outcomes of 80 weeks intervention by numbers of tasks and items the children mastered. We also analyzed rates of stimulus generalizations from 2D to 3D objects, from actions in pictures to actions in vivo, etc. Social validity questionnaires were administered to parents and therapists who taught them. We discussed how to expand their “reading” and “writing” skills acquired in treatment settings to their natural environment.
 
22. Using a Textual Prompt to Establish Sequellic Responding with a Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
SARA J. PAHL (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Lesley Lucas-Pahl (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: This poster will show that despite after a series of interventions that created little or no change, the implementation of a texutal prompt increased the effects of high rates of responding for answering personal questions with a school-aged boy with severe autism. Textual prompts included partial to full answers to personal questions. The use of textual prompts decreased the number of instructional sessions to aim and displayed little drop in rate of performance when the prompt was removed.
 
23. The Use of Marionets for the Generalization of Skills in Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ANA PASTOR SANZ (Centro Al-Mudaris), José Julio Camerero (Centro Al-Mudaris), Teresa Lara (Centro Al-Mudaris), Rosa Cuesta (Centro Al-Mudaris), Sandra Roman Cerezo (Centro Al-Mudaris), Vanesa Soldado (Centro Al-Mudaris)
Abstract: The generalization of skills is one of the specific objectives that we take into consideration when we design programs for children with autism. The use of marionets presents the opportunity to teach under natural contingencies that facilitate the generalization of skills. We taught five children with autism to follow a series of tasks presented by a marionet. Through a structured story narrated by the marionet, the children had to respond to motor imitation, following instructions, matching identical objects, and to social questions.
 
24. The Effects of an Auditory Trainer on the Speech Sound Acquisition of Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
LAURA M. HUTT (New England Center for Children), Beth O. Bellone (New England Center for Children), Jaime Cohen (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Seven children with autism and moderate to profound phonological disorders received speech intervention, with and without an auditory trainer, a wireless system with a microphone to amplify the speech signal and headphones to receive the signal and reduce background noise. Target isolated sounds or sounds-in-words were derived from assessment, counterbalanced across participants, and trained using an alternating treatment design. Only one of seven participants met criteria for words trained in the auditory trainer condition with no improvement demonstrated in the condition without the auditory trainer. One child initially achieved rapid improvement in the target sound trained with the auditory trainer, however a marked decline in performance was noted and mastery criteria were not achieved in either condition. The remaining five children showed no significant difference in acquisition with or without the auditory trainer. Interobserver agreement was collected for 35% of sessions with an average agreement of 82% (range, 50 – 100%). Results suggest that most children with autism would not benefit from use of an auditory trainer during speech acquisition training, however further research is needed to replicate these results with a greater number of participants.
 
25. From Secluded to Included: Teaching a Child with Autism to Use a Time-Out Chair
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
MELISSA A. FOTI HOFF (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center), Rena Sorensen-Burnworth (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center), Jamie M. Lentz (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center)
Abstract: Intensive outpatient treatment was conducted with an 11-year-old female diagnosed with autism. Patient entered treatment after being removed from her educational placement due to significant aggressive behavior. Functional assessment of behaviors indicated multiply maintained behavior with escape and tangible as the primary functions. However, a secondary attention function (primarily physical attention) precluded the use of block and redirection strategies and dense reinforcement schedules were not effective in consistently reducing problem behavior. Effective treatment strategies included the use of a padded room time-out and a dense reinforcement schedule which were successfully faded to the independent use of a time-out chair and intermittent and token reinforcement over the course of 7 months. Behaviors were reduced from a baseline rate of 11 aggressions per hour to zero for more than 3 months.
 
26. Promoting Independence in School Settings for Children with Autism Using Tactile Prompting
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
HEATHER M. ANSON (Eastern Michigan University), James T. Todd (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: Verbal responses, gestures and other physical stimuli are often used to prompt attention to the teacher, group responding, and engagement by children in independent activities in the classroom. However, these stimuli are often intrusive. In the current study, unobtrusive vibrating pagers were used to discretely alert children that they were misbehaving or acting in an improper way, thus reducing the amount of disruptions the children and their teachers created in their classrooms. The children were then able to learn more naturally with less interference from more overt prompts. Specifically, five male children, between 4 and 7 years old, who attended a regular education preschool or regular education first grade classroom, participated. All participants were selected from Central Valley Autism Project, INC (CVAP, INC). An ABAB design was used in which periods of traditional prompting were alternated with periods of tactile and traditional prompting. The data showed that tactile prompting was successful in replacing traditional prompting for attention to teacher and independent activities. However, tactile prompting was not successful in replacing traditional prompting during group responding activities.
 
27. Comparison of Teaching Procedures when Assessing Rate of Acquisition of Discrimination Skills in Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER MUSOLFF (Barber National Institute), Robert Gulick (Barber National Institute), Thomas P. Kitchen (Barber National Institute), Phillip J. Belfiore (Mercyhurst College)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to compare two teaching procedures, No-No-Prompt and Errorless Learning in the discrete trial format. Although much research has been conducted to test the effectiveness of the Errorless Learning procedure, there has been little done on No-No-Prompt and also on a comparison of the two procedures. Using a withdrawal design (ABCACB), the study tested the rate of acquisition of receptive discrimination skills with 3 children with autism. Each session was conducted at the Barber National Institute, where all 3 children attended school. Data collected showed that criterion was met at a faster rate using the Errorless Learning procedure than the No-No-Prompt procedure.
 
28. Multiple-Cue Discrimination in Children with ASD: Examining the Relationship between Adaptive Behavior and Deficits in Discrimination
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
DEREK D. REED (Syracuse University), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (Syracuse University), Laura Lee McIntyre (Syracuse University)
Abstract: Teaching discrimination skills to individuals with autism spectrum disorders (ASD) may have widespread impact to other learning environments. As such, these skills are often referred to as “pivotal behaviors” (Koegel et al., 1989). Evidence suggests that individuals on the autism spectrum often have difficulties discriminating multiple component stimuli and may exhibit stimulus overselectivity (Matthews, Shute, & Rees, 2001). More specifically, it is observed that as the complexity of a stimulus increases from one component to two, three, and four components, the frequency of response errors also increases when participants are asked to discriminate between items (Burke & Cerniglia, 1990). The present study assessed the salience and prevalence of multiple-cue discriminatory deficits in children with ASD. Six preschool children were asked to select an object from an array of 16 items when given the instruction, “Give me the (name of object)”. The participants were presented with a variety of multiple component tasks (e.g., stimuli varying in color, size, shape, and texture). Results of the discrimination tasks will be described as they relate to the children’s adaptive functioning on the Vineland Adaptive Behavior Scales. Discussion will focus on implications for teaching multiple-cue discrimination to children with ASD.
 
29. The Relationship Between Allotted Response Time and Compliance in a Girl with Rett’s Syndrome
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MELISSA SCOGGINS (Munroe-Meyer Institute), Susan Wilczynski (Munroe-Meyer Institute), Keery Wolf (Munroe-Meyer Institute), Joshua Needelman (Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract: Rett’s Disorder is a pervasive developmental disorder characterized by early normal development followed by a loss of specific skills (e.g., hand skills, interest in social interactions). A common characteristic of Rett’s Disorder is stereotypic hand movements such as hand-wringing or hand-clapping. Severe impairment in both expressive and receptive language development, psychomotor delays, and severe or profound mental retardation are also frequently present. In the present investigation, the participant was a 5-year-old girl diagnosed with Rett’s Disorder who exhibited apraxia, psychomotor delay, and frequent hand-clapping. The goal of the investigation was to determine the appropriate response time allowed for independent compliance during teaching sessions that utilized a discrete trial format. An alternating treatments design was used to assess compliance with 4 s, 7 s, and 10 s latency periods allowed for independent compliance before prompting by the experimenter. Independent compliance was defined as initiation of the required task without prompting by the experimenter within the designated time period. Conditions were 5 min in length with one task presented every 30 s. Tasks included tacts, motor imitation, intraverbals, one-step directions, and receptive identification. The 10 s condition resulted in the highest level of independent compliance. Implications of the results will be discussed.
 
30. Effects of Video Self-Monitoring on Teaching Performance: Enhancing Staff Discrete Trial Instruction (DTI) in Autistic Support Classrooms
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KEVIN M. FRITTS (Barber National Institute), Brian Herman (Barber National Institute), Phillip J. Belfiore (Mercyhurst College)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to examine the effects of staff video self-monitoring training on the accuracy of delivering Discrete Trial Instruction (DTI) to students in an autistic support classroom. Following baseline, staff were trained to criteria in scoring, from videotapes, their DTI delivery. Specifically, staff were trained to self-monitor their (a) delivery of discriminative stimulus, (b) wait time for student response, (c) immediacy of feedback, (d) delivery of specific feedback, and (e) latency before delivery of next discriminative stimulus. The dependent measure was the accuracy of completing the total DTI trial, using a multiple baseline design across staff. In addition to accuracy of the complete DTI trial, data was also collected on each individual step of the DTI trial. Results showed that video self-monitoring increased the accuracy of DTI for staff when working in an autistic support classroom.
 
31. Increasing Learn Unit Presentations
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
TATIANA P. OCHOA (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: This study was conducted to test the effects of increasing the numbers of learn unit presentations during instruction on aberrant behavior (self-injurious behavior during instruction). The dependent variable was the number of occurrences of aberrant behaviors emitted for the entire session of instruction. The independent variable was increasing the number of learn unit presentations during instruction. The participants of this study were two 7-year old females who functioned at the pre-listener and pre-speaker level of verbal behavior. A multiple baseline across subjects design was employed for self-injurious behaviors and showed a functional relation between the numbers of learn unit presentations and the number of aberrant behaviors emitted during instruction. During baseline sessions, participant A emitted relatively high rates of aberrant behaviors. Participant B emitted lower occurrences of aberrant behavior, however, it interfered during the entire time of instruction. The learn unit presentations were then increased due to the student emitted high number of occurrences of self-injurious behavior which interfered with instruction. The results showed that increasing learn units decreased aberrant behaviors during instruction and it also decreased the participant's learn units to criterion. After we increased the learn unit presentations during the entire session, student A and student B emitted relatively lower occurrences of aberrant behaviors. During baseline, the learn unit presentations were decreased to the same number of learn unit presentations that were implemented in the previous baseline phase for both students. The results suggested that increasing the learn unit presentations was an effective teaching tactic for treating aberrant behaviors in a school setting for both students.
 
32. Efficacy of a Social Story as a Primary Intervention in Teaching Appropriate Social Behavior
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
VICTORIA A. GALLANT (Pathways Strategic Teaching Center), John C. Briggs (Pathways Strategic Teaching Center), Erik A. Mayville (Pathways Strategic Teaching Center)
Abstract: Social skill development is an essential part of the programming for children with autism. One method of teaching social skills is to use social stories (Gray, 2003). Using a multiple treatment design we evaluated the effectiveness of social stories to teach appropriate greetings to an eleven year old boy diagnosed with autism. The dependent variables were appropriate greetings paired with sustained eye contact throughout a social interaction. The independent variables were: 1.The use of social stories alone, 2. The use of social stories paired with edible reinforcers and 3.The use of social stories with systematic fading of edible reinforcer. The social story alone was not effective as an intervention, however when combined with the use of edible reinforcement the student’s social interaction skills showed marked improvement.
 
33. Teaching Independent Classroom Routines to Children with Autistic Spectrum Disorder
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
DANA SALINGER (Northwest Behavioral Associates), Amy L. Barnhill (Northwest Behavioral Associates), Melissa Liotti (Northwest Behavioral Associates)
Abstract: Children with Autistic Spectrum Disorder (ASD) often struggle following multi-step independent classroom routines, a skill critical for success in inclusive educational environments. For the purposes of this study, the investigators plan to teach approximately 8 students with ASD to independently follow multi-step independent classroom routines in small group settings with increasing complexity using a changing criterion experimental design. Acquisition data will be visually summarized from the small group setting and generalization data from their general education classrooms will be shared as well.
 
 
 
Poster Session #339
#339 Poster Session - OBM
Monday, May 30, 2005
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
34. An Application of Behavioral Economic Principles to the Treatment of Food Selectivity
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
ALLISON L. MARTIN (Marcus Autism Center), Cathleen C. Piazza (Marcus Autism Center), Gregory K. Reed (Marcus Autism Center), Melanie H. Bachmeyer (Marcus Autism Center), Stephanie Bethke (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Behavioral economic theories evaluate the interaction between reinforcer schedules (price) and response allocation. In the current case study, behavioral economic principles were applied to the treatment of a young male who exhibited food selectivity by type and texture. Initially, the child could choose either to consume or expel a bite of table-textured target food. The price of expelling was increased by requiring the child consume a bite of the same food prepared at a lower texture contingent on expels. The cost of expelling continued to increase, both in terms of texture and number of bites required, while the price associated with target bites remained the same. Independent observers achieved over 80% agreement for over 26% of treatment sessions. Results suggested that increasing the price of expels altered the child’s response allocation toward consumption of target bites. However, the price (texture and number of bites required) at which the child changed his response allocation differed across food types. These data are discussed in relation to economic theory, operant conditioning, and the treatment of pediatric feeding disorders.
 
35. Increasing Chewing Skills in Children with Feeding Problems
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
KAREN RADER (Marcus Autism Center), Cathleen C. Piazza (Marcus Autism Center), Gregory K. Reed (Marcus Autism Center), Melanie H. Bachmeyer (Marcus Autism Center), Stephanie Bethke (Marcus Autism Center), Amanda Bosch (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Children with feeding disorders often display deficits in oral motor skills. These deficits may result in the inability to chew or insufficient chewing skills for safely swallowing higher textures. The purpose of the current study was to systematically evaluate several treatment components designed to increase chewing behavior for two children with feeding problems. In order to increase the number of chews per bite, each child was systematically trained to exhibit a chew response using a non-nutritive implement (chew tube). Following successful non-nutritive chew training, each child was trained to chew on a cutout plastic tube containing a small portion of food. Two independent observers achieved over 90% agreement on over 25% of sessions. Post training chewing increased to acceptable levels for both children. Results showed that once chewing reached acceptable levels for one food on a tube, treatment effects generalized to three novel foods in the absence of tube training. These data are discussed in relation to oral motor skill development and treatment of texture selectivity.
 
36. A Comparison of the Effects of Behavioral and Sensory-Integrative Treatments on the Food Consumption of Children with Pediatric Feeding Disorders
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
HEATHER KADEY (Marcus Autism Center), Cathleen C. Piazza (Marcus Autism Center), Allison Martin (Marcus Autism Center), Michele Walker (Marcus Autism Center), Stephanie Bethke (Marcus Autism Center), Melanie H. Bachmeyer (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: A treatment comparison was conducted to evaluate the effects of sensory integration therapy versus a behavioral treatment for increasing food acceptance in two children with pediatric feeding disorders. Effects were evaluated using a reversal design. Prior to treatment, an occupational therapist evaluated each child and designed individualized sensory integration-based treatment packages. In addition, behavioral-based treatment packages were designed based on functional analysis results that suggested that each child’s inappropriate mealtime behavior was maintained by negative reinforcement. Two independent observers achieved over 80% agreement on over 21% of sessions. Results for both subjects indicated that the children’s food acceptance during the sensory integration-based treatment remained at low baseline levels; however, the children’s food acceptance significantly increased during the behavioral-based treatment. Implications for the treatment of pediatric feeding disorders and areas of future research will be discussed.
 
37. An Analysis of the Combined and Isolated Effects of Differential Reinforcement and Extinction on the Treatment of Multiply Maintained Food Refusal Behavior
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
KRISTI MURPHY (Marcus Autism Center), Gregory K. Reed (Marcus Autism Center), Cathleen C. Piazza (Marcus Autism Center), Melanie H. Bachmeyer (Marcus Autism Center), Heather Kadey (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Prior research on the functional analysis of feeding problems has suggested that negative reinforcement is primarily responsible for maintaining inappropriate mealtime behavior. However, this research also suggests that feeding problems may be multiply maintained (i.e., sensitive to multiple sources of reinforcement). In terms of treatment, this brings to question the relative importance of each maintaining function for increasing food consumption. Yet to date, no studies have systematically examined this question. The current study examined the efficacy of function-based treatments for multiply maintained feeding problems, particularly with regard to the relative contribution of each maintaining variable during treatment. In addition, given that few studies have examined the effectiveness of negative reinforcement-based alternatives to escape extinction (e.g., differential negative reinforcement), a second purpose was to evaluate the effects of a negative reinforcement contingency (both with and without positive reinforcement) for increasing food consumption in the absence of escape extinction. Two independent observers achieved over 80% agreement on over 25% of sessions. Results will be discussed in terms of functional-based feeding treatments for multiply maintained food refusal, and the role of positive and negative reinforcement contingencies in the treatment of feeding problems.
 
38. The Examination of Constipation as an Establishing Operation for Pediatric Feeding Disorders
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
PEGGY S. EICHER (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Merrill J. Berkowitz (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Paul Tokar (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Tara McDonough (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital)
Abstract: An establishing operation is any event that alters the effects of a reinforcer. The etiology of pediatric feeding disorders have been classified as organic, non-organic or a combination of the two (Budd et al., 1992). One common organic cause of feeding difficulties in infants and toddlers is gastroesophageal reflux (GER). Medical management of GER has been found to improve these children’s food consumption (Hyman, 1994). Many children referred to an outpatient clinic for the assessment and treatment of pediatric feeding disorders also present with constipation. There is some anecdotal support suggesting that increasing the frequency and consistency of the bowel movements of children exhibiting feeding difficulties may improve their food consumption and mealtime behaviors. The current study examines 1) the effects that medication has on the frequency and consistency of bowel movements in children exhibiting feeding difficulties and 2) the relationship between the frequency and consistency of bowel movements and children’s food consumption and mealtime behaviors under treatment conditions. Four children admitted to an intensive day treatment program for feeding difficulties with a history of constipation participated in the study. Results of the study and their implications will be provided. Directions for future research will be offered.
 
39. Evaluating Food Acceptance and Occurrence of Emesis in Two Children with Feeding Problems by Systematically Manipulating Establishing Operations
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
BARBARA S. WIMBERLY (Marcus Autism Center), Cathleen C. Piazza (Marcus Autism Center), Gregory K. Reed (Marcus Autism Center), Melanie H. Bachmeyer (Marcus Autism Center), Lindsay S. Hauer (Marcus Autism Center), Deshanda Dow (Marcus Autism Center), Stephanie Bethke (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Children diagnosed with pediatric feeding disorders often require supplemental feedings in the form of daily tube feedings to sustain their growth. As oral feedings are introduced, tube feedings may continue during the day and co-occur with oral feedings. Under these conditions, the likelihood of satiation-related effects during mealtimes may increase (e.g., decreased motivation to consume foods, increased refusal, etc.). Alternatively, reducing the overall volume of tube feedings and altering the tube-feeding schedule (e.g., to overnight feeds) may minimize satiation-related effects and increase motivation for consumption (via deprivation). This study evaluated food consumption and occurrence of physiological responses (emesis and gagging) during meals while the volume and schedule of tube feedings were systematically manipulated. During deprivation phases, the total volume of daily tube feeds was reduced (15-19%). By contrast, during satiation phases, children received tube feeds during the day, even during oral feedings. Two independent observers achieved over 80% agreement on over 20% of sessions. Results indicated no differences in children’s oral consumption across deprivation and satiation phases. However, decreases in emesis and gagging were observed under deprivation conditions. Results will be discussed in terms of the role of biologic establishing operations on the treatment of pediatric feeding disorders.
 
40. Systematic Evaluation of Behavioral Distress in a Young-Adult Patient with Cerebral Palsy Undergoing Post-Orthopedic Rehabilitation
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
DEBORAH KRUGLAK (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Adrianna M. Amari (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Kimberly D. Bellipanni (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Melissa H. Beck (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Keith J. Slifer (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Applied Behavior Analysis methods can assist medical teams in assessing pain behaviors. Distress behaviors during rehabilitation demands may be associated with medically treatable pain or be maintained by environmental contingencies. Discriminating between these behaviors in children with neurological impairments may be challenging. Behavioral idiosyncrasies and neuromuscular impairments may mask expression of pain. Signs of pain may be inconsistent and difficult to interpret. Self reported symptoms of pain may be missed or unavailable because of physical and communication disabilities. Operationally defining and systematically measuring pain behaviors then comparing measurements across environmental situations and in relation to interventions can elucidate the nature of distress behavior.This case study describes a 23-year-old with spastic quadriplegic cerebral palsy and severe mental retardation who, after post-orthopedic surgery, exhibited distress behaviors during rehabilitation therapies. Systematic data collection and analysis across conditions differentiated behaviors associated with environmental contingencies from behaviors associated with positioning and medication changes. Throughout hospitalization, differential reinforcement decreased some, but not all, distress behaviors, indicating pain requiring medication management was present. Combining differential reinforcement with appropriate medication resulted in increased tolerance for rehabilitation demands and decreased negative behaviors. Availability of behavioral data assisted the medical and rehabilitation team in making successful treatment decisions.
 
41. Shaping Alternative Pain Expression in a Young-Adult Male with Traumatic Brain Injury During Rehabilitation from Orthopedic Surgery
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
GINA W. BASEY (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Keith J. Slifer (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Adrianna M. Amari (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Crystal Chappell (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Malorie Malloy (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Following orthopedic surgery, patients experience pain with movement and weight bearing. Crying, screaming, verbal complaints, and protective posturing are pain expressions that limit rehabilitation and may be exacerbated by cognitive deficits.Data will be presented on a 21-year-old male with cognitive deficits from a brain injury at age 19. These deficits appeared to intensify expression of pain and anxiety, which interfered with medical care and physical therapy. Intervention included antecedent management (systematic presentation of demands, a structured therapy schedule, rehearsal of coping strategies, distraction during painful therapies), placing yelling and verbal avoidance on extinction, and prompting deep breathing, growling, humming and counting as alternative pain expressions. Differential reinforcement of other behavior was implemented, and yelling resulted in a response cost (starting over on the task). Intervention decreased negative vocalizations, yelling and verbal avoidance from mean session frequencies of 31.7, 22.2 and 17.7, respectively, to means of 10.4, 2.8 and 7.8. When reinforcement was made contingent on the alternative pain expressions these means were 12.2, 1.7 and 7.0.Results will be discussed in relation to the impact of brain injury on pain and coping, and the importance of teaching alternative pain expressions to facilitate rehabilitation.
 
42. Behavioral Intervention to Shape Functional Independence in a Young Adult Male Following Traumatic Brain Injury
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
JESSICA TISCHNER (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Ethan Benore (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Gina W. Basey (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Keith J. Slifer (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Melissa H. Beck (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Individuals who sustain traumatic brain injury (TBI) often develop chronic behavioral sequelae (inattention, impulsivity, poor emotional regulation, etc.). Health care providers typically advise increased supervision by family caregivers to promote safe behavior and avoid further injury. Over time, as improved ability to make safe decisions and avoid dangerous choices is demonstrated by the patient, the degree of supervision is gradually weaned to allow for more age appropriate functional independence.Data will be presented on an 18-year-old male who was referred for outpatient behavioral intervention two years post severe TBI for treatment of aggression. Behavioral assessment identified parental hypervigilance, and excessive supervision as antecedents of aggression. Treatment consisted of developing a hierarchy of increasingly independent activities. Compliance with safety rules was differentially reinforced with advancement toward greater independence and unsafe behavior was punished with temporary loss of independence. The intervention was implemented using a behavioral contract and resulted in decreased aggression as well as greater functional independence. Patient and caregiver training will be discussed along with challenges to generalization and maintenance of behavioral gains in post TBI young adults.
 
43. Assessing the Impact of Behavioral and Pharmacological Interventions on the Disruptive Behavior of a Child with Pre-Morbid Attention Deficits Undergoing Rehabilitation for Traumatic Brain Injury
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
KIMBERLY D. BELLIPANNI (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Keith J. Slifer (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Melissa H. Beck (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jessica Tischner (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Shannon L. McIntyre (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Children with Traumatic Brain Injury (TBI) present challenges in rehabilitative settings. Pediatric patients often exhibit aggressive and disruptive behavior after a TBI in response to therapeutic demands and/or other environmental contingencies. Behavior Analysis can assist medical teams in identifying environmental contingencies maintaining problem behaviors and making data-based treatment decisions.Data will be presented on the disruptive behavior and compliance with rehabilitation therapy of an 11-year-old male diagnosed with TBI, microcephaly, plumbism, and ADHD-Combined type. Systematic data collection and analysis across treatment phases were used to evaluate the effectiveness of differential positive reinforcement of compliance with and without medication (i.e., Concerta). Although differential reinforcement alone decreased some but not all of the problem behaviors during rehabilitation the addition of medication resulted in further decreases in disruptive behaviors and increases in compliance across all therapies. Results will be discussed in relation to the impact of premorbid behavior problems on the probability of sustaining a TBI, developing disruptive behavioral sequalae during rehabilitation and importance of using systematic behavioral data to make treatment decisions and evaluate treatment effectiveness.
 
44. Measuring Outcomes of Anger Management Treatments in an Acquired Brain Injury Outreach Program Using Goal Attainment Scaling
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
KELLEY D. ANSTEY (ABI Behaviour Services, West Park Healthcare Centre), Gary J. Gerber (ABI Behaviour Services, West Park Healthcare Centre), Andrew W. McNamara (George Brown College), Judy Gargaro (ABI Behaviour Services, West Park Healthcare Centre)
Abstract: Brain injury rehabilitation has undergone tremendous growth and development in recent years. Applied behaviour analysis is a treatment option that has increased in prominence for this client group (Ducharme, 1999; Davis & Goldstein, 1994). Applied behaviour analysis has been used to increase adaptive skills that are part of an individual’s rehabilitative goals (Grinspun, 1993; Test, Spooner, Kuel & Grossi, 1990). Such procedures have also been used to decrease maladaptive behaviours that are seen as barriers to rehabilitation (Wroblewski, Joseph, Kupfer & Kalliel, 1997; Eames & Wood 1985; Zahara & Cuvo, 1984). Difficulties with controlling and managing anger are not uncommon following moderate/severe brain injury.The authors will present data on a cohort of 31 individuals who received treatment for anger excesses. The efficacy of treatment will be examined using outcome scores on goal attainment scaling. These data will be presented to illustrate the effectiveness of ABA treatment strategies across a broad group of individuals with acquired brain injury and anger excesses. The authors will present select examples of goals and treatment strategies. The authors will discuss the implications of the data by examining commonalities among those individuals and treatments that illustrate the effectiveness of applied behaviour analysis. Additionally, the authors will present information on those individuals who left treatment to determine if they shared any common factors.
 
45. Behaviour Disorder and Acquired Brain Injury: An Applied Behaviour Analytic Approach Using Lag Sequential Analysis
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
BARZAN RAHMAN (University of Birmingham, UK), Christopher Oliver (University of Birmingham, UK), Nick Alderman (St. Andrew's Hospital)
Abstract: Victims of acquired brain injured may present with severe behavioral difficulties, which can hinder effective rehabilitation. The notion that challenging behaviors may serve a functional purpose has been clearly articulated within the field of intellectually disabilities. Given the similarities in behavioral disorders exhibited by some with developmental disabilities and brain injury, it was proposed that methods of descriptive functional analysis would be applicable in the field of acquired brain injury. The aims of the study were to decipher the behavioral functions of verbal and physical aggression of three severely brain-injured patients during post-acute rehabilitative treatment. Staff members completed questionnaires and were interviewed to provide preliminary analyses of participants' behavioral repertoires. Eight hours of live observational data were collected for each participant using a handheld computer, which facilitated the recording of continuous behavior streams in real time. Time-based lag sequential analysis was conducted on the behaviors. For each participant behavioral function was evident and the streams of behavior evidenced a high degree of organization. Implications for future research and the clinical utility of the approach to inform and individualize intervention strategies are discussed.
 
46. Behavioral Treatment of Severe Behavior Problems of a Young Adult Male with Down Syndrome and Obsessive Compulsive Disorder Receiving Medical Care for Sleep Apnea
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
SHREYA P. HESSLER (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Kristin T. Avis (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Keith J. Slifer (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Leanna J. Herman (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Down Syndrome is a disorder characterized by chromosomal abnormalities that affect physical and mental development. Individuals with Down Syndrome often have co-morbid cardiac, respiratory, and/or intestinal problems, requiring frequent medical care. Because of their limitations and behavior problems medical procedures may be difficult for these patients.Data will be presented on a 20-year-old male with Down Syndrome and Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder who was treated in a Pediatric Psychology Outpatient clinic. He had a history of obstructive sleep apnea, severe tantrums, and non-compliance with caregiver instructions. Initial intervention focused on compliance with respiratory assistance for sleep apnea. The behavior necessary for wearing a positive airway pressure device was task analyzed into its component steps. Compliance with sequential steps in the task analysis was increased using differential positive reinforcement for each step completed. DRO programs were subsequently implemented to reduce several longstanding ritualistic and compulsive behaviors. Caregivers were trained using verbal instruction, modeling, behavioral rehearsal and corrective feedback.Results show clinically important medical and behavioral improvements including increased compliance, reductions in respiratory distress, tantrums, and ritualistic behavior. Behavioral gains maintained over the course of one year are documented and will be discussed in relation to parents’ skills at generalizing applications of behavior principles.
 
 
 
Poster Session #340
#340 International Poster Session - CSE
Monday, May 30, 2005
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
47. Evaluation of Family Perception of Turkish Children's Pictures Who Live in Germany and Participated in the Joining (Integration) and Normal Instruction
Area: CSE; Domain: Theory
S. SUNAY YILDIRIM-DOGRU (Selcuk University), Cengiz Celik (Selcuk University), Suleyman Dogru (Ministry of National Education)
Abstract: In this study, it was aimed evaluation of family perception of Turkish children’s pictures who live in Germany and who benefit from care of joining (integration) and normal instruction. 371 children participated to the study as 220 girls and 151 boys with 6-12 ages. 101 of these children still continue the joining instruction. In the study, a 10 minutes pre-conversion was realised to evaluate family perception of children. The children were asked to draw a family picture.In the end of the study, girls were found more successful than boys, when the difference was looked at between drawing picture and perceiving family and also it was observed that the children who continued normal instruction were more willing and more successful than the children who continued joining instruction.
 
48. Diagnosis and Interventions of Educational and Social Problems Presented in a Marginal Mexican Community
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
MARCO WILFREDO SALAS-MARTINEZ (University of Veracruz, Mexico), Esperanza Ferrant-Jimenez (University of Veracruz, Mexico), Ana Estela Kay Cacho (University of Veracruz, Mexico), Dinorah Leon Cordoba (University of Veracruz, Mexico), Pilar Gonzalez Flores (University of Veracruz, Mexico), Laura Oliva Zarate (University of Veracruz, Mexico), Andree Fleming-Holland (University of Veracruz, Mexico), Jose Luis Colorado Hernandez (University of Veracruz, Mexico)
Abstract: The objective of the present study was to do a series of diagnostic evaluations and interventions in the marginal community of “Colonia revolucion” of Xalapa, Veracruz, México. Once the principal problems had been identified a group of psychologists and researches of the Universitiy of Veracruz and the State Department of Education and Culture implemented the following programs: The identifying and treating of school children with attention deficit hyperactivity through the participation and training of the (children), parents, and teachers; training adolescents in self prevention against risk factors (in substance abuse); identifying and treating kindergarden children with behaviour problems; treating asmatic children to prevent them not attending classes or quitting school; and the prevention of environmental deterioration using an educational program given to middle school students. Results obtained from each of these investigations are presented.
 
49. Chewing Gum: A Hard Behavior to Swallow
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
RAYMOND O. SACCHI (Washington State University), Ryan Sain (Washington State University), Thomas A. Brigham (Washington State University), Sean Greene (Washington State University)
Abstract: Improper disposal of gum in Washington State University’s Student Recreation Center costs the university $4,500 annually in maintenance worker wages and removal chemicals. A baseline of gum usage was obtained through trained observers who recorded the number of students using the facility and the number chewing gum. A baseline measure of number of pieces of gum removed and time spent removing the gum from the floors, equipment, and pool filters was obtained through charts distributed to the maintenance staff. Increased gum activity occurred on Mondays and Saturdays, and the intervention will be run on those days. A 3.5’ x 2’ receptacle with a sign reminding students to dispose of gum and telling them the cost of improper disposal in terms of equipment that could have been purchased will be placed in front to the turnstiles entering the center. After implementation of the intervention, observations of number of gum chewers, pieces of gum removed, and time spent removing gum will be obtained to determine if the intervention was effective in reducing gum usage and improper disposal. An additional series of interventions are planned if necessary.
 
50. Increasing Condom Use in College Students: A Modification to the Psychology 106 Program
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
RYAN SAIN (Washington State University), Raymond O. Sacchi (Washington State University), Julie Carrier (Washington State University), Thomas A. Brigham (Washington State University)
Abstract: Sexually transmitted diseases continue to be a major problem in the United States. The CDC estimates that more than 830,000 people were infected with Chlamydia in 2002 alone. Research has shown that condoms are one of the most effective methods for preventing the spread of sexually transmitted diseases. However, research has shown that condoms are still rarely used, especially among the highest risk populations. This study explores the effectiveness of a 16 week peer instructed sexual decision making skills course compared to a control group. Additionally, the current study explored the effectiveness of an additional intervention imbedded in the same course. Results of the study indicate that the additional intervention did little increase the effectiveness of the 16-week intervention. Further results indicate that the 16-week intervention was successful as a whole at decreasing unsafe sex acts when compared to a control group.
 
51. Teach the Drivers Well: Using Positively Reinforcing Signs to Impact Motorists’ Behavioral Safety
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
THOMAS G. SZABO (Imagine! Colorado)
Abstract: Empirical studies investigating the impact of positive reinforcement versus aversive control on behavioral safety have been conducted over the last half-century. An exciting avenue of current research interest is the use of signs to generate safe practices. Coercive signs that warn of naturally and artificially derived consequences for unsafe behaviors abound throughout modern culture, whereas fewer signs offer positive reinforcement for safe behavior. At a cultural level, little is known as to the potential benefits of signs offering positive reinforcement for accepted safe practices. Study 1 examines the role of hand-held signs that provide positive reinforcement for driving within the posted speed limit in a residential neighborhood. Study 2 contrasts the effects of signs offering positive and negative reinforcement on drivers’ speed compliance. Results suggest that speed compliance increased using signs based on positive reinforcement. Follow-up studies are indicated to compare longevity and generalization of speed compliance to both sets of conditions.
 
52. Programmatic Approach to Source Separation of Household Organic Residuals
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
BENJAMIN VAN HANDEL (Northern Michigan University), Paul Thomas Andronis (Northern Michigan University)
Abstract: Over 200 million tons of garbage is produced annually in the United States. Of this, approximately 45% is recovered in some fashion, i.e. recycling, composting, or waste to energy. The remaining 100 million tons travels to landfills, where it stays to slowly decay. As the remaining capacity at existing sites diminishes, and both the costs of permitting and public outcries against more facilities grow, solutions to the waste problem are being sought elsewhere. Composting has been used for centuries to produce a usable soil amendment from biodegradable discards, but has not become economically feasible on a large scale; much of this can be attributed to the costs of separating waste into organic and inorganic streams. Source separation has been employed, and even subsidized, to shift the burden of separation from processors to generators, but mainly only on the pilot scale. Often, the supposedly separated streams received from participants in these projects still require further sorting. This poster details the developmental stages of a programmed guide targeted at the residential sector designed to educate naïve subjects how to properly separate organics from the waste stream. Data from developmental testing will be provided and discussed
 
53. Community-Based “Flashing” Applied to Cell Phone and Seat Belt Usage
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
MICHAEL C. CLAYTON (Jacksonville State University), Jeremy M. Hof (Jacksonville State University)
Abstract: Automobile crashes are the leading cause of death for those aged 5 to 34, with 45,000 (123/day) Americans killed each year. Seat belt usage and refraining from using the cell phone while driving would significantly decrease fatalities. An active prompting procedure was utilized to increase seat belt usage and decrease cell phone use among drivers exiting a university parking lot. A reversal design was used to evaluate the presentation of two signs: “Please Buckle Up, I Care” and “Please Hang Up, I Care”. The proportion of drivers complying with the seat belt prompt was high and in line with previous research. The proportion of drivers that hung up their cell phones in response to the prompt was about equal to that of the seat belt prompt. The use of a cell phone while driving increases the accident rate by 400%, and leads to 2600 fatalities each year. A procedure that reduces cell phone usage among automobile drivers is a significant contribution to the behavioral safety literature.
 
54. Decreasing Public Smoking Among Youth
Area: CSE; Domain: Service Delivery
LEONARD A. JASON (DePaul University), Steven Pokomy (DePaul University), Paul Turner (DePaul University), Margaret Freeland (DePaul University), Sarah Corbin (DePaul University), Mark Driscoll (DePaul University)
Abstract: This brief poster reports the results of two observational studies examining the impact of fines for youth tobacco possession on public smoking among youth. Preliminary findings are presented that suggest that when police issued warnings and tickets to reduce underage youth possession of tobacco, in both towns the number of youth smoking in public declined. The study focused on an important health behavior; application of a potentially powerful, community-wide intervention; the use of two distinct communities; and unobtrusive assessment of adult and youth smoking rates.
 
55. Generational Trend of Several Psychological Issues in Adolescents of Mexico
Area: CSE; Domain: Service Delivery
NORMA COFFIN (National Autonomous University of Mexico), Arturo Silva Rodríguez (National Autonomous University of Mexico)
Abstract: Generational Trend of Several Psychological Issues in Adolescents of MexicoNATIONAL UNIVERSITY OF MEXICOCoffin, NormaSilva, ArturoIndustrialized countries have developed statistics in Economy for many years. Efforts have taken place in order to standardize economic measures, such as unemployment data. However, very small attention has been focused in terms of temporal trend on social and psychological issues. Therefore, the potential of these studies becomes a research methodology that rarely has been exploded by the Mexican Behavioral scientists. In contrast, broad ranges of social and economic changes have emerged. Hence, this methodology let us realize and observe toward psychological disorders in our adolescents are being directed through time. Our major goal should be to improve the efficiency and efficacy of the prevention programs in Welfare and Health areas. Time- trends studies allow us to identify the non-studied and non-answered topics, which are immersed in every problematic area, pointing out what must be changed to help and prevent common disorders during Adolescence. The present study has collected in 4 different generations (over 3000 participants), of adolescent students (Secondary level), in different cities of Mexico for the last 14 years. The psychological issues were: Study Habits, Phobias, Depression, Drug Abuse, Aggression, Family Conflicts, Anxiety, Sexual Information & Assertive Skills. The results clearly show significant differences among generations. Thus, while Study Habits and Phobias remain stable in time, trends of other areas show significant differences: some of them worsened, like Sexual Information and Drug Abuse (no matter how many resources and efforts have been improved in the last years, in order to prevent disorders). Results show the importance of analyzing, existing or new data, through this Methodology.
 
56. "Pick of the Litter:" Quantifying an Environmentally Harmful Behavior
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
PHILIP K. LEHMAN (Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University), Ian J. Ehrhart (Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University), Angela Krom Fournier (Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University), Takashi Hirota (Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University)
Abstract: In order to define the nature and extent of littering behavior on the New River in Southwest Virginia, we conducted a content analysis of the litter from a .5-mile section of shoreline that is heavily used for recreation. Twenty volunteers spent two hours collecting the litter. The litter was then transported to a location where it was sorted into 10 categories, and placed in a life-size bar graph with 3-foot wide bars. This was done to measure the total surface area of shoreline covered by each category of trash, and gain a quantitative measure of its negative visual impact. In descending order, the totals for the ten categories were: 1) alcoholic beverage containers and packaging: 183 sq. ft., 2) non-alcoholic beverage containers and packaging: 96 sq. ft., 3) miscellaneous metal: 81 sq. ft., 4) food-related items: 81 sq. ft., 5) miscellaneous containers: 78 sq. ft., 6) clothing: 60 sq. ft., 7) automotive-related items: 54 sq. ft., 8) camping and sporting goods: 39 sq. ft., 9) general miscellaneous: 32 sq. ft., 10) miscellaneous paper and reading materials: 10 sq. ft. Implications of the findings will be discussed, along with potential interventions to reduce future litter.
 
57. Encouraging Dog Waste Disposal through Public Posting and Waste Disposal Sites
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
WILLIAM J. WARZAK (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Jeff May (Westside Schools), Brad Dufrene (Mississippi State University)
Abstract: Dog waste in communities is host to a number of health hazards to humans including infections, parasites, and diseases. Excessive dog waste may also be aesthetically displeasing for a community. Behavioral strategies including prompting (i.e., signs), modeling (i.e., demonstration of bag usage for dog droppings), decreasing response effort, (i.e., providing bags and waste receptacles) and reward (i.e., financial remuneration) have all been used to increase pro-social community behaviors (Jason, Zolik, & Matese, 1979). The present study used a small n design to demonstrate the effectiveness of a local community effort, an Eagle Scout community service project, to reduce dog waste in an urban community park. An A-B-C (baseline – signage – receptacles) design (with follow-up) was used to assess the effectiveness of placing dog waste receptacles in an urban community park popular for walking dogs. Baseline date indicated that approximately 30% of dog walkers picked up after their dogs prior to intervention. Post-signage approximately 40% of dog walkers picked up after their dogs. The introduction of receptacles (and bags) increased the rate of pick-up to approximately 66%. At one month follow-up dog waste pick-up persisted at approximately 60%. The data suggest that providing signage, bags, and receptacles reduces the amount of dog waste in an urban community park popular for walking dogs.
 
 
 
Poster Session #341
#341 Poster Session - DDA
Monday, May 30, 2005
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
58. The Effects of Supervisor Feedback to Group Home Staff on the Behavior of Clients with Severe Intellectual Disabilities and Behaviour Disorders
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
KAREN CHARTIER (Lake Ridge Community Support Services), Dan Fishman (Lake Ridge Community Support Services), James J. Reaume (Lake Ridge Community Support Services), Maurice Feldman (Brock University)
Abstract: This poster examines the effect of supervisor feedback to 30 group home staff on the behaviour of 6 clients with severe intellectual disabilities (ID) and behavior disorders. While previous studies have shown a relationship between supervisor observations and feedback on staff behavior, oftentimes the effects on client behavior are not reported or demonstrated. In this study, supervisors observed interactions between clients and frontline staff, and provided feedback to staff on the quality of interactions observed. The supervisor and the consulting behaviour therapist, using an observation record observed client behaviour. Interobserver agreement was 92%. An ABAB reversal design was used over 25 months, in which the behavior therapist only-feedback condition alternated with behavior therapist + supervisor-feedback condition across two different supervisors (same behavior therapist, staff and clients). We found that supervisor feedback increased the number of staff-client engagements and clients’ positive client behavior, and decreased client negative behavior, as compared to feedback from the behaviour therapist.
 
59. Can the Vineland Communication Subscale Predict Instruction-Following for Children with Developmental Delays
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER R. THORSTEINSSON (University of Manitoba), Lysianne D. Kolt (St. Cloud State University), Garry L. Martin (University of Manitoba), Dickie C. T. Yu (St. Amant Research Centre), Sara M. Spevack (University of Manitoba)
Abstract: We examined the relationship between the Vineland communication subscales and compliance to instructions, with and without gestures, in eight 2-year-old children with developmental disabilities. The children were sorted into two groups according to high or low communication scores on the Vineland communication receptive and expressive subscales. Compliance to instructions with and without gestures was observed through videotapes of parent-child interactions in the home. It was hypothesized that children with higher communication scores would show higher rates of compliance to instructions without gestures than children with lower communication scores, but rates of compliance to instructions with gestures would not differ between groups. A strong, positive correlation was found between the Vineland communication subscales and compliance to instructions. The group with high Vineland communication subscale scores complied nearly twice as often to instructions than the group with low Vineland communication subscale scores. When instructions were provided with gestures the groups complied at an equal rate. We derive from these results a recommendation for parents of children with developmental disabilities to include gestures when giving instructions, and a recommendation that the Vineland assessment be used to identify children for whom special training for instruction following may be required.
 
60. Analysis of a Child´s Cognitive Achievements as a Function of the Mother’s Teaching Strategies Using a Multidimensional Observational System
Area: DDA; Domain: Basic Research
CARMEN QUINTANA (University of Guadalajara), Emilio Ribes Iñesta (University of Guadalajara), Luis Arroyo (University of Guadalajara), Laura Correa Patiño (University of Guadalajara), Eduardo Montes (University of Guadalajara), Ivette Rosa Vargas (University of Guadalajara)
Abstract: We present longitudinal data on the observation of the cognitive development of one child as a function of the teaching strategies applied by her mother. A 29 to 54-month-old child and her mother were filmed in a free-play situation at home. The recordings were analyzed with a categorical system developed to observe patterns of mother-child linguistic interactions and their relations with specific settings. We discuss the possible relationship of those patterns with the achievement of cognitive skills in different episodes.
 
61. The Effects of Repeated Readings and Prediction on the Reading Performance of Students with EBD
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
SHEILA R. ALBER-MORGAN (University of Southern Mississippi), Ellen Ramp (University of Southern Mississippi), Christa Martin (University of Southern Mississippi), Lara Anderson (University of Southern Mississippi)
Abstract: This study examined the effects of repeated readings and repeated readings plus a prediction strategy on the reading fluency and comprehension of four middle school students with emotional/behavioral disorders. Data were collected in the students’ self-contained classroom three days each week over the course of 12 weeks. Data collectors worked individually with each student for approximately 10-15 minutes per session. Mean IOA, assessed on 23% of the experimental sessions, ranged from 98% to 100% for each student. A multiple baseline across students design demonstrated a functional relationship of repeated readings and repeated readings plus prediction on number of words read correctly and incorrectly by each student. During baseline, mean correct words per minute ranged from 38.8 to 91.6. The reading fluency of all four students substantially increased during repeated readings and continued to increase when prediction was added. The mean number of correct words per minute ranged from 95.6 to 133.7 during repeated readings, and 117.0 to 154.5 during repeated readings plus prediction. At the end of the experiment, the average gain across students was 59.4 correct words per minute. This study supports and extends the findings of repeated readings research to middle schools student with emotional and behavioral disorders.
 
62. Maintaining Mands Using a Graduated Multiple-Schedule Arrangement
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
BECKY KELSO (Marcus Autism Center), Daniel B. Shabani (Marcus Autism Center), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Functional communication training (FCT) is a common treatment for aberrant behaviors exhibited by individuals with mental retardation. Following a functional analysis, the individual is taught an alternative communication response that serves the same function as the aberrant behavior. This typically involves continuous reinforcement for the alternative response and often times results in undesirably high rates of responding. Individuals may request reinforcers at rates that are not practical for caregivers to maintain. The purpose of the current investigation was to evaluate the effectiveness of a multiple schedule arrangement in maintaining rates of the alternative response at a level more practical for caregivers to maintain. Results indicated that the multiple schedule arrangement was effective in reducing responding to a low and stable rate.
 
63. A Multielement Treatment for Reducing Challeging Behavior in a Boy with Brain Injury: A Case Study
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
LISA DUNN (Melmark New England), Heather Mercier (Melmark New England)
Abstract: This study assessed the effectivness of using a variety of different procedures in combination with each other to decrease challeging behavior in young boy with anoxic brain damage with autistic features. Pervasive developmental disorder and a seizure disorder. Descriptive analysis indicated that his challeging behavior was maintained by a duel function; escape from demands and access to tangibles. A multicomponent intervention including differential reinforcment extinction, punishment and functional communication. The data is displayed graphically, demonstrating the effectivness of treatment
 
64. The Facilitation of Reinforcement Schedule Thinning Using a Discriminative Stimulus
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JOHN DAVIS (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Kyong-Mee Chung (Kennedy Krieger Institute), SungWoo Kahng (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Denise Kurek (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Brian Crawford (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Monica Gaines (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Functional analyses conducted on individuals with developmental disabilities often suggest problem behavior to be positively reinforced by access to preferred activities. Treatments that are effective in reducing problem behavior typically include a phase during which the reinforcement schedule is altered. In many instances, a discriminative stimulus is used to signal the availability or unavailability of reinforcement (i.e., S+ or S-) to facilitate reinforcement schedule thinning. In the present study, we examined the effectiveness of using a discriminative stimulus to signal the absence of reinforcement (e.g., a wristband) in a 15-year-old male with autism and moderate mental retardation. The treatment consisted of extinction and DRA for compliance (FR1). During reinforcement schedule thinning, the amount of time in which he had access to his preferred activities was gradually decreased. The participant wore a wristband, which was removed while he had access to his preferred activity. The results showed that problem behavior increased when he did not have the wristband during the periods in which he did not have access to his preferred activities. These data suggest that the wristband functioned as a discriminative stimulus (i.e., S-) that was integral in the thinning of the reinforcement schedule.
 
65. An Application of Herrnstein's Matching Law in the Failure to Eliminate Severe Behavior Disorders: The Need for Extinction
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
MAUREEN LACERTE (Nashoba Learning Group), Michael F. Dorsey (Vinfen Corporation), John Stokes (Melmark New England), Michael J. Cameron (Simmons College)
Abstract: A review of those studies published in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis over the past twenty years that present treatment options for maladaptive behaviors often demonstrate a failure to eliminate the target behaviors from the repertoires of the individuals treated. The current study reviews these articles with respect to their use of an analogue functional analysis diagnostic procedure to evaluate the maladaptive behaviors and identify those reinforcers responsible for their maintenance. Results indicate that, while many behavioral treatment procedures are highly successful in significantly reducing these targeted behaviors, the critical component absent from many studies is the elimination of access to those reinforcing stimuli identified as serving as positive reinforcers for the target behaviors. As such, the procedures under investigation often do not include a treatment component of extinction in their overall treatment package. The present study discusses these issues relative to Herrnstein’s Matching Law, both with respect to positive as well as aversive treatment procedures and the effect on behavior of having those original maintaining variables available the in subject’s environment during otherwise effective behavioral interventions.
 
66. Destructive Behavior Maintained by Automatic Reinforcement: Hypothesis Testing and Treatment
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
MANDY TRIGGS (Kennedy Krieger Institute), David E. Kuhn (Kennedy Krieger Institute), April Stachelski (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Automatic reinforcement refers to a contingency where a behavior produces its’ own reinforcer. This contingency is most commonly observed with stereotypic and self-injurious behavior. Based on the results of functional analyses, clinicians may interpret results as the behavior functions to produce some form of sensory stimulation. With a few exceptions, little research has demonstrated destructive behaviors, other than SIB, to be maintained by automatic reinforcement. In the current study, high rates of disruptive behavior, in the form of toy destruction, persisted during an FCT treatment evaluation for behavior maintained by access to tangibles. Hypotheses were tested that the 8-year-old boy diagnosed with Conduct Disorder and Attention-Deficit / Hyperactivity Disorder would destroy his toys independent of social contingencies. Additional preferred toys were identified that were designed to be taken apart and reassembled (unbreakable). Subsequent analyses demonstrated that noncontingent access to breakable toys was associated with high levels of destructive behavior and minimal appropriate interaction. Conversely, noncontingent access to unbreakable toys was associated with zero levels of disruptive behavior and high levels of appropriate interaction. Unbreakable toys were introduced into the FCT treatment evaluation and treatment efficacy was demonstrated. Reliability data were collected during 67.2% of sessions and averaged over 90%.
 
67. Functional Communication Training
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CARRIE JO MCMILLAN (The Learning Tree, Inc.), Jackie Scott Kines (The Learning Tree, Inc.), Robert A. Babcock (Auburn University), Robert W. Montgomery (Reinforcement Unlimited), Jerre R. Brimer (The Learning Tree, Inc.)
Abstract: The presenters propose to teach functional communication to two children diagnosed with Mental Retardation and Autism. The two children are both seven years old, and one is female and the other is male. The ABLLS will be used to evaluate each child before teaching begins to decide which areas of language to focus on. One presenter proposes to teach spoken language/sign language to a nonverbal child. The other presenter proposes to teach spoken language to a nonverbal (with some echoics) child. Both incidental teaching and discrete trial teaching will be used in the teaching process. Both presenters will evaluate the effect of the acquisition of functional communication on maladaptive behaviors.
 
69. The Application of Brief Preference Assessments in a Clinic Setting
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
AMANDA MARLIN (Gonzaga University), Jennifer Neyman (Gonzaga University), Anjali Barretto (Gonzaga University)
Abstract: We conducted a series of brief preference assessments and manipulated the presence of attention and demands when the participants had access to the item. Hypotheses regarding the function of problem behavior were developed during the brief preference assessments and tested during the brief functional analysis. Assessment and treatment data will be presented for 3 participants. Interobserver agreement data were collected for at least 33% of the sessions and averaged 90%. Results of the brief preference assessments were useful in developing hypotheses regarding the function of problem behavior and were confirmed during the functional analysis. Outcomes will be discussed in terms of the utility of brief preference assessments in developing hypotheses.
 
70. Assessment and Treatment of Food Selectivity in A Child Diagnosed with Autism
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
DEBORAH L. BORDEN-KARASACK (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Melanie DuBard (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Julia T. O'Connor (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Children diagnosed with autism may display aberrant eating habits such as food refusal or texture selectivity that severely restricts their daily caloric intake (Ritvo & Freeman, 1978; Farrell, Amari, & Hagopian, 1996). A review of the behavioral literature shows little systematic evaluation and treatment of this problem behavior with caregivers of children who do not meet medical necessity criteria for admission to feeding programs. In this study, a child who participated outpatient behavioral services for the assessment and treatment of aggression was observed during school and home observations to eat a very limited diet. In subsequent interviews, his mother confirmed he exhibited an aberrant eating pattern but was not at risk for malnutrition. Baseline data were collected on food refusal defined as head turns and disruptions when foods from the four food groups were presented (Ahearn, Castine, Nault, & Green, 2001). A multiple baseline across food groups design was used to evaluate the treatment which consisted of shaping and reinforcement for compliance. At baseline, George accepted very few bites of fruit and vegetables. Initial treatment sessions resulted in an increase in acceptance. Interobserver agreement data was collected for 33% of sessions with a minimum of 80% reliability across behaviors.
 
71. Use of a Full-Session DRL Contingency to Decrease Problem Behavior Associated with Task Transitions
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
KENNETH W. ATKINS (Marcus Autism Center), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: A full-session differential reinforcement of low rates (DRL) schedule is one in which reinforcement is delivered if a response rate is at or below a criterion level. In the current investigation, a full-session DRL was used to decrease the occurrence of problem behavior that was associated with transitions between academic tasks. Results of an initial assessment showed that destructive behavior (self-injury and aggression) was more likely to occur when it produced access to the participant’s high-preference activities. An extinction procedure was next implemented in which the participant did not receive contingent access to preferred activities following destructive behavior. This procedure produced large increases in the occurrence of destructive behavior. Thus, the extinction procedure was augmented to include a DRL contingency in which the participant received post-session access to preferred activities following a session in which destructive behavior did not exceed 80% of its level during extinction. Results of DRL analysis produced an overall reduction of 70% relative the extinction-only condition. Reliability data were collected with two independent observers for over 20% of sessions and averaged over 90%. Results are discussed in terms of using DRL schedules to moderate against extinction-induced behavior.
 
72. Conditional Probability Analyses as a Method to Identify Response-Response Relations: Implications for Assessment and Treatment
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
TIA PANEET (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Stephanie A. Contrucci Kuhn (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Interventions that target precursor behavior (behavior that has been demonstrated to precede the problem behavior) have been effective in reducing problem behavior in individuals with developmental disabilities. There are several potential advantages in targeting precursor behaviors. By targeting precursor behaviors, potentially dangerous problem behaviors could be avoided. In addition, if behaviors occur in a response chain, targeting earlier behaviors in the chain may be more effective in reducing responding in later links of the chain than directly targeting the terminal response. One method of determining the probability of an event (e.g., problem behavior) given another event (e.g., precursor behavior) is through a conditional probability analysis. In the current investigation, the conditional probability of self-injurious behavior (SIB) given the occurrence of self-talk was calculated for an individual with autism and severe mental retardation who displayed severe SIB (e.g., had sustained multiple nose and arm fractures as a result of SIB). Results indicated that the probability of SIB given the occurrence of self-talk was much higher than the probability of SIB alone, self-talk alone, and the chance co occurrence of self-talk and SIB. Next, an intervention targeting self-talk consisting of verbal interruption (i.e., counting to 10) was implemented. Results demonstrated reductions in self-talk and SIB. Reliability data were collected for at least one third of sessions and averaged above 80%.
 
73. Effects of DRO and Enriched Environment on Ripping
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
SEAN P. MURPHY (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Frances A. Perrin (Bancroft NeuroHealth)
Abstract: Ringdahl, et.al. (1997) found that when problem behavior persisted in the absence of social consequences, it was necessary to analyze the underlying idiosyncratic variables within an enriched environment in order to design the most effective treatment. In the current study, the ripping behavior of a 14-year-old boy diagnosed with autism and impulse control disorder was examined. The results of an analogue functional analysis suggested that ripping was maintained by automatic reinforcement. An assessment of three enriched environment variations and an assessment of differential reinforcement of other behavior with enriched environment were conducted to design the most effective treatment. Three variations of enriched environment were tested: single item enriched environment, multiple items enriched environment, or rotating items enriched environment. Interobserver agreement data were collected during 29% of sessions. The mean agreement for all measures was 96%. Results showed that when enriched environment was implemented alone, the participant’s rate of ripping continued at a high rate, but when multiple stimulus enriched environment was implemented in addition to differential reinforcement of other behavior the participant’s rate of ripping decreased.
 
74. The Evaluation of Trigger Words as Possible Precursors to Problem Behavior
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CAMILLE DANIELS (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Patrick R. Progar (Caldwell College)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to examine a trigger word as a possible precursor to problem behavior. The participant was a 14-year-old girl diagnosed with autism and impulse control disorder residing at a neurobehavioral stabilization unit for the assessment and treatment of aggression, self-injury and disruption. Anecdotal reports from parents indicated that use of the word “no,” resulted in high rates of problem behavior. An assessment was conducted comparing contingent use of the word “no” to a control condition. In the test condition an escape was provided contingent upon problem behavior that occurred following the therapist saying the word “no.” Inter-observer agreement data were collected for 25% of sessions with total agreement averaging 97.5%. Results indicated high rates of problem behavior occurred following the word “no” in the test condition. No problem behaviors occurred in the control condition. These findings suggest that clinicians may need to look to other variables in the environment that may elicit problem behavior.
 
75. A Comparison of Two Stimulus Fading Methods during Initial Acquisition of Identity Matching
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
AMANDA BANISTER (Marcus Autism Center), Joslyn Cynkus (Marcus Autism Center), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center), Wayne W. Fisher (Marcus Autism Center), Shukriti Kathuria (Marcus Autism Center), Aphrodite Foundas (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Children diagnosed with pervasive developmental disorder (PDD) often have difficulty making discriminations between and among two-dimensional pictures or stimuli. In this investigation, we compared two stimulus-fading procedures for establishing initial identity matching. In the size condition, we faded the size of the distracter stimuli (i.e., increasing their size in each fading step by 1/10th the size of the target stimuli until the target and distracter stimuli were the same size). In the contrast condition, we faded the level of contrast of the distracters (starting with black cards as distracters and then increasing the contrast in 10 (approximately) equal steps until the contrast was equal for the target and distracter stimuli). Reinforcement (praise and later edibles) was delivered contingent on correct responding. Results indicated that the discriminations during the first several fading steps were more accurate for the stimuli in the size condition relative to the contrast condition. However, these differences disappeared as fading progressed and both procedures produced mastery level discriminations with the terminal stimuli in about the same number of sessions. Finally, reversals were conducted to demonstrate that edible reinforcement was necessary to maintain accurate responding.
 
76. Examining Relations Between Patient Characteristics and Functional Analysis Outcomes
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
LISA M. TOOLE (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Katharine Gutshall (Kennedy Krieger Institute), David M. Richman (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Johns Hopkins University)
Abstract: Functional analyses have revealed that the problem behavior of individuals with developmental disabilities is often sensitive to varying environmental outcomes. However, little is known about how those behavior-environment relations emerge or why certain individuals are likely to be sensitive to one sort of outcome rather than another. As a small step towards examining those questions, we reviewed nearly 800 data sets published over a 10-year period to find relations between various subject characteristics and the outcomes of functional analyses of problem behavior. Among other results, we observed that individuals with extremely limited verbal abilities had problem behavior that was almost twice as likely to be maintained by automatic reinforcement than by any other category and the likelihood of automatic reinforcement in these individuals was far more likely than in individuals with more sophisticated verbal repertoires. Related patterns were observed with regard to cognitive disability, as the proportion of individuals whose problem behavior was maintained by socially mediated reinforcers rose in direct relation to increases in cognitive abilities. These results are discussed in terms of their comparison to the general distribution of function as reported in large-scale epidemiological studies and their implications for arranging functional analyses.
 
77. Exploring the Utility of Biofeedback for Decreasing Inappropriate Behavior in Adolescents with Acquired Brain Injury
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
PAMELA A. TIBBETTS (Southern Illinois University), Danyl M.H. Epperheimer (Center for Comprehensive Services/ The Mentor Network)
Abstract: This poster discusses the effects of using biofeedback to assist individuals with acquired brain injury in self-managing their behaviors during stress provoking situations. Adolescents with acquired brain injury attending a residential treatment program received weekly biofeedback sessions. Data were collected on measures of physiological responses, as well as frequency of inappropriate behaviors, including physical and verbal aggression. Results suggest biofeedback has great value in assisting individuals in self-managing their own behavior when exposed to stress eliciting stimuli.
 
78. The Current Status of Behavior Analysis and Special Education in Singapore
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
RANGASAMY RAMASAMY (Florida Atlantic University)
Abstract: There are 20 Special Education Schools in Singapore that are run by ten "Voluntary Welfare Organizations" catering to over 4000 children with different disabilities. These schools come under three categories namely, Schools for Children with Intellectual Disabilities, Schools for Children with Physical and Multiple Disabilities, and Schools for Children with Sensory Disabilities. For the purpose of this study, the researcher selected all 12 Schools for Children with Intellectual Disabilities to identify the use of behavior principles in those schools to teach students with intellectual disabilities. Review of the Ministry of Education documents indicated that these schools have full time psychologists on campus all day long. These individuals conduct assessment tests and also work with students and classroom teachers during behavioral outbursts. To identify their involvement in assisting teachers, the author interviewed 20 special education teachers that teach in these schools who were also enrolled in an undergraduate Intellectual Disabilities class at National Institute of Education in Singapore. Majority of these teachers indicated that they lack training in behavior analysis approach. When specifically asked about their practice to pinpoint a target behavior, and come up with intervention techniques, they all said that they rely on their school psychologist. When asked about their psychologists training in behavior analysis, 90% of them said they are not aware of their psychologist’s training. To avoid these teachers over reliance on their psychologists and to improve these teachers’ basic knowledge in applied behavior analysis, the researcher is developing a course to teach them during the spring semester in one of these schools to apply their learnt skills with the students on a day to day basis. Data will be collected and analyzed to show how these teachers learned some basic behavior principles and their comfort level in applying these principles to work with students with intellectual disabilities.
 
79. Collateral Effects of Intensive Behavioral Treatment of Severe Problem Behavior in Young Children
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
NICOLE B. CARMAN (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Patricia F. Kurtz (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Michelle D. Chin (Kennedy Krieger Institute), John M. Huete (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: While the efficacy of functional analysis-based interventions for severe problem behavior exhibited by young children with developmental disabilities has been demonstrated (e.g., Kurtz et al., 2003;Wacker et al., 1998), few studies have assessed collateral treatment effects. In the present study, function-based interventions were developed for 10 children receiving intensive outpatient services for self-injury and other problem behaviors. All children achieved a reduction in targeted problem behavior of at least 75% from baseline; reliability data were collected for all participants. To assess collateral effects of treatment, parents completed the Vineland Adaptive Behavior Scales, the Aberrant Behavior Checklist (ABC), and the Parenting Stress Index prior to treatment (pre) and at discharge (post). Paired sample t-tests were conducted to examine changes in the pre and post scores of these measures. Significant differences were found only for ABC Total Score, ABC Irritability Scale score and ABC Inappropriate Speech Scale score, although trends and means indicated improvements across all collateral measures for both parents and children. Although based on a small sample size, this preliminary analysis suggests that function-based treatments may hold additional benefits for children and parents.
 
 
 
Poster Session #342
#342 Poster Session - EAB
Monday, May 30, 2005
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
80. The Effects of Distraction on Performance during a Time Perception Task
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
PAMELA DIAZ (University of Arkansas, Little Rock), John J. Chelonis (University of Arkansas, Little Rock), Mark C. Edwards (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences), Eldon Schulz (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences), Ronald L. Baldwin (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences), Brian M. Kubacak (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences)
Abstract: Previous research has found that distracters can significantly affect children’s perception of the passage of time. The current study was designed to specifically explore some possible underlying mechanisms of this effect. A sample of eight children, ages 8 to 12 years, was recruited from clinics at Arkansas Children’s Hospital. Each child participated in two sessions, lasting twenty minutes each. Time perception was measured using a differential reinforcement of low rates (DRL) procedure. The DRL procedure required children to produce inter response times (IRT) between 10 and 14 s to earn a nickel. The distracter, present for one of the tasks, consisted of an illuminated press-plate that the child could press to earn nickels on a variable-interval 15 s schedule. The mean percent correct was significantly lower with the presence of a distracter and there was also a trend towards more variability in the IRTs produced on the DRL schedule, however there was no shift in the mode for the IRTs. These data suggest that the presence of a distracter affects precision of timing responses on the DRL schedule, but does not consistently increase or decrease the perceived duration of the interval.
 
81. Effects of Glucose Concentration in Water on Body Weight and Water and Food Intake After Food Deprivation
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ALBA GABRIELA MARTINEZ (University of Guadalajara), Antonio Lopez-Espinoza (University of Guadalajara), Hector Martinez Sanchez (University of Guadalajara)
Abstract: Twenty-four albino rats (3-month-old at the beginning of the experiment) divided in four groups, were exposed to fifteen days of free access to water and food, followed by 3 days of food deprivation. On the next five days every group were exposed to one of three kinds of water concentration of glucose. The first concentration had 180 calories, the second had 120 calories, and the third had 60 calories. Caloric food concentration remained the same. Food was available at all times during free access periods. These results suggest that modification of caloric concentration in water affects the feeding behavior after food deprivation period. Key words: glucose, food deprivation, post-deprivation period, body weight, water and food consumption, rats.
 
82. Relative Reinforcer Value of a Species-Typical Call Compared to an Artificial Sound for Northern Bobwhite Hatchlings
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
SUSAN M. SCHNEIDER (Florida International University), Robert Lickliter (Florida International University)
Abstract: Using both reversal single-subject and repeated-measures group designs, we demonstrated the reinforcing efficacy of both a species-typical maternal assembly call and an artifical beep in one- to four-day-old Northern bobwhite hatchlings. The control condition was exposure to a variable-time schedule of reinforcement at a rate similar to that produced in the corresponding response-dependent conditions. Comparative changes in reinforcer efficacy over time will also be examined.
 
83. Varying Reinforcer Ratio and Changeover Response Requirement
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JORGE ARTURO BALDERRAMA TRAPAGA (University of Guadalajara, CEIC), Carlos F. Aparicio (University of Guadalajara, CEIC)
Abstract: It has been shown that choice doesn't require steady state to show sensitivity to reinforcement (Davison and Baum, 2000). The present study assessed this idea with rats in a situation where seven reinforcer ratios and five changeover response requirements were manipulated within sessions. Every day a different reinforcer ratio provided 50 pellets in two levers. Within sessions five different changeover response requirements (1, 4, 8, 16 or 32 responses) were presented in random order, each lasting for 10 reinforcers. Then, the same reinforcer ratio and one changeover requirement remained in effect for 21 days; after that, a different reinforcer ratio was selected. This cycle was repeated until all ratios were tested with all changeover requirements. The last phase was a redetermination with all changeover requirements arranged to occur within the same session. The results were consistent with those of previous studies, responses distributions favored the alternative associated with the highest probability of reinforcement. Sensibility increased with increasing changeover requirement, and it was not affected by the rats’ experience in such dynamic environment.
 
84. Extinction of Behavior Maintained Under CRF with and without Interposed Intermittent Reinforcement
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
PAUL THOMAS ANDRONIS (Northern Michigan University), Robert Belonga (Northern Michigan University), Christopher Leith (Northern Michigan University), Scott Martin (Northern Michigan University)
Abstract: Introductory textbooks in behavior analysis commonly state that behavior maintained by continuous reinforcement is less resistant to extinction than behavior maintained under intermittent schedules. In applied settings, this is conveyed in admonitions that intermittently reinforced behavior may be highly resistant to extinction, and may take longer to decelerate than continuously reinforced behavior. Several laboratory investigations have examined the effects of extinction on intermittently reinforced behavior brought back under control of CRF before extinction is applied. These studies suggested that CRF-maintained behavior that was previously reinforced intermittently is more resistant to extinction than behavior simply maintained under CRF with no history of intermittent reinforcement. The present poster describes experiments in which pigeons were trained to peck a key under intermittent reinforcement schedules, followed by a return to CRF for various periods, and then subjected to extinction of keypecking. The numbers of responses made under extinction, rates, celeration changes, and propensity, were related to the number of response units reinforced prior to extinction. The investigators discuss some possible implications of these findings for the effective use of extinction in applied settings.
 
85. Sub-optimal Preference Patterns Between Fixed and Random Schedules: A Situation of Preference for "Pure" Risk?
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
MICHELLE D. ENNIS (Temple University), Claudia D. Cardinal (University of Nevada, Reno), Philip N. Hineline (Temple University)
Abstract: All previous theoretical accounts of the robust preference for variable over fixed schedules of reinforcement have appealed to the occasional quick payoffs within the variable schedule's distribution. We have found a situation in which variable schedules are preferred almost equally to fixed alternatives even when the smallest value obtainable on a variable schedule is never smaller, and often longer, than the fixed alternative. Four pigeons were exposed to this concurrent-chains procedure with fixed interval (FI) 30" and random interval (RI) 60" terminal links. The likelihood of the RI value equaling the FI value on any given trial was manipulated across conditions as the RI rate of reinforcement was held constant. The preference for the RI increased as the percentage of RI trials that equaled the FI value increased. More surprisingly, in a condition in which 75% of the RI trials equaled the FI value, an overall preference for the RI schedule developed. This occurred even though 25% of the RI trials were longer than the FI, and thus is a finding that no theoretical model of choice can currently account for. These data are discussed in terms of behavioral models of choice, behavioral contrast, and schedule discriminability.
 
86. The Effects of Click + Continuous Food Versus Click + Variable Food on Maintenance of Dog Behavior
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
PAM WENNMACHER (University of North Texas), Rachel Dunham (University of North Texas), Joan M. Engel (New England Veterinary Behavior Associates), Jesus Rosales-Ruiz (University of North Texas), Ami L. Miller (University of North Texas), Chad Scott Hunter (University of North Texas)
Abstract: In clicker training, dog trainers often use the term “intermittent reinforcement” when a click is delivered after every correct behavior, but food is delivered only occasionally. However, when behavior analysts use intermittent reinforcement, the click and food reinforcement are always delivered together and the click never occurs without the food being delivered. Many dog trainers believe that there is no difference between the two procedures. The purpose of this study is to determine the effects of maintaining behavior with a click + continuous food reinforcement (CCF) versus a click + variable food reinforcement (CVF). Two dogs will be trained to lay-down and stand-up on hind legs until a performance criteria of 90% correct is reached during baseline. Once at criteria, one behavior (either stand-up or lay down) will continue to receive continuous food, while the other behavior will receive food delivery every other click. One dog will receive continuous food for stand-ups, while the other dog will receive continuous food for lay downs. The clicker will be used to mark every occurrence of the correct behavior for both dogs, regardless of food delivery. Results are in progress.
 
87. Effects of Reinforcement on Performance in the Serial Reaction Time Task
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
NATASHA A. BUIST (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), Maree J. Hunt (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), David N. Harper (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand)
Abstract: According to the cognitive literature, the Serial Reaction Time Task (SRT) involves both implicit and explicit learning processes. The first experiment of this study examined the effects of reinforcement on these two aspects of performance. Results indicated that some aspects of performance that are said to reflect explicit learning improved with continuous reinforcement. Measures of performance said to reflect implicit learning did not. This lack of effect may have been the result of the relative simplicity of the task rather than a failure of reinforcement processes to affect implicit learning. In four subsequent conditions reinforcement schedules were employed to investigate whether the pattern of behavior could be influenced by reinforcement.
 
88. Behavioural Efficacy of Enironmental Enrichment in the Reduction of Stereotypy in Captive Vicugna (Vicugna Vicugna)
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
MATTHEW PARKER (University of Southampton), Ed Redhead (University of Southampton), Deborah Goodwin (University of Southampton)
Abstract: The proliferation of stereotypies in inhabitants of zoological parks is a major consideration in the assessment of welfare, and can cause severe management problems for zoo keepers. It has been suggested that stereotypies in captive animals are indicative of an abnormal animal-environment interaction and that systematic, controlled alterations to the environment can help to decrease the rate of the behaviours through multi-stimulus enrichment (Shepherdson, Mellen, & Hutchins, 1998). The current study used an ABACA design to investigate the efficacy of increasing forage substrates and foraging opportunities in the reduction of stereotypy in captive vicugna (vicugna vicugna). When browse were added the incidence of stereotypy increased, but when the animals’ existing forage was split, stereotypy decreased. Increase during the browse condition may have been a result of over-stimulation of the DA system, owing to super-normal stimuli (Appleby, 1996). The decrease seen during the split-feed condition may have resulted from an opportunity to perform a natural response. In the wild, vicugna are reported to eat and sleep in different areas. In the present study, the vicugna were being ordinarily fed solely in their sleeping quarters. The relative reinforcing value of stereotypy may have been lower than that of performing a wild-type behaviour.
 
89. Effects of Coextensive Stimuli Correlated with TD and T? and Variation of T-cycle Length in Limited-Hold Temporal Schedules
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CARLOS TORRES (University of Guadalajara), Emilio Ribes Iñesta (University of Guadalajara), Edgar Montes (University of Guadalajara)
Abstract: An experiment was conducted to evaluate the effects of the coextensivity of the stimuli correlated with the different sub-cycles of a temporally defined schedule. In this experiment, four rats were exposed to three experimental phases and one redetermination phase with different values of the parameter T. The T values used were 60, 80 and 120 s.. The probability of water delivery was 1.0 in the tD subcycle, and 0.0 in the t? in all the experiment. The results of this study do not replicate previous findings about the effects of the absolute value of T-cycle length on response frequency. There were no differences of responding in both subcycles, and the reduction of water delivery frequency decreased responding in t? exclusively. The results are discussed in terms of stimulus control and correlation of coextensive stimuli with water deliveries.
 
90. The Role of Higher-Order Place Conditioning in the Appearance of Positive Induction
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JERI NURNBERGER (University of North Dakota), Brent C. Hanson (University of North Dakota), Jeffrey N. Weatherly (University of North Dakota)
Abstract: Our research has shown that rats increase their rate of responding for 1% sucrose reinforcement when food-pellet reinforcement will be upcoming (positive induction). We have also demonstrated that this effect likely occurs because the 1% sucrose becomes more reinforcing in that situation than when food-pellets are not upcoming. The present experiment investigated whether that increase in reinforcer value occurs through higher-order place conditioning. Rats pressed a lever for 1% sucrose reinforcement in the first half of the session and, in different conditions, for 1% sucrose or food-pellet reinforcement in the second half. In one treatment condition, the sucrose and food pellets were delivered to the same location. In another, they were delivered to different locations. A larger induction effect was observed when the reinforcers were delivered to the same location than when they were delivered to separate locations, indicating that higher-order place conditioning plays a role in the size of induction. However, induction was still present when different locations were used, indicating that other factors also contribute.
 
91. Open Versus Closed Economies: The Role of Post-Session Income
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
RYAN R. ROWE (University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire), Kasey Stephenson (University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire)
Abstract: One of the distinctions between open and closed economies is the presence and absence, respectively, of response-independent (free supplemental) feeding outside the experimental chamber. Behavioral economists (e.g., Hursh, 1980) have held that these supplemental sources of income decrease motivation to work for food during the session (these findings have been likened to the effects of welfare as a variable that decreases recipients’ motivation to seek out a job). Previous research conducted by Timberlake and colleagues, however, has shown that animals discount the value of delayed response-independent feedings such that these feedings do not affect motivation to work for response-contingent food. Specifically, Timberlake et al. (1987) reported that supplemental feedings occurring 32 minutes or more after the session had no effect on progressive-ratio breakpoints. A shortcoming of the Timberlake studies is that they were not conducted in a closed economy. That is, Timberlake’s studies have, with the exception of one rat for 8 days, always included supplemental feedings (they simply varied the time to these feedings). In our study, pigeons worked under PR schedules with no supplemental feedings. Baseline consumption under the PR maintained the subjects at approximately 80% of their free-feeding weights. In subsequent conditions, the number of food pellets delivered per session was the same as that obtained in the stable baseline sessions, but any pellets not earned under the PR were delivered response independently across delays ranging from 4 to 64 minutes. Consistent with behavioral-economic predictions, PR breakpoints were consistently lower when unearned pellets were delivered response-independently.
 
92. Social Foraging: The Ideal Free Distribution and Differences in Competitive Ability
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JOSHUA BECKMANN (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Katarzyna Grabowska (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Eric A. Jacobs (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale)
Abstract: We are examining human choice and decision-making process in groups of humans “foraging” for points. Specifically, we are testing predictions of the Ideal Free Distribution (IFD), a quantitative model of foraging behavior that was developed in field observation. The IFD predicts that forgers be distributed among multiple “patchy” resource sites such that the overall rate resource acquisition is equal among all foragers. Previous research in the field and the laboratory has supported the predictions of the model. One restrictive and unnatural assumption of the model is that the competitive ability of all of the foragers is equal. In field studies, where data do not conform to the predictions of the IFD, researchers often attribute the discrepancy to differences in competitive ability. Introducing the “competitive unit” post hoc has extended the model to accommodate these discrepant cases. For example, if one forager can obtain food at twice the rate of another, then that forager will count as two “competitive units”. The extended model predicts that foragers will be distributed such that the rate of return per competitive unit is equated across research sites. In the current study, we are attempting to experimentally validate this model by manipulating competitive ability across participants. Participants forage for points, but a select number earn points at a proportionally higher rate than other participants. Preliminary results are consistent with the expanded model.
 
93. Extinction in S- is the Hallmark of Discriminated Operant Responding
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
MATTHEW E. ANDRZEJEWSKI (University of Wisconsin-Madison), Curtis D. Ryals (University of Wisconsin-Madison)
Abstract: The acquisition of an operant discrimination has been shown to be a function of the number of reinforcers earned in S+, or the cumulative amount of time in S-. Often, experiments designed to investigate the role of one allow the other to vary. In the present research, the role of extinction in S- was investigated further in a within-subject design, thereby exploring one of the limitations of experiments showing support for the extinction hypothesis. Concurrently, the role of cumulative reinforcers was investigated. Sixteen rats were exposed to a successive discrimination procedure where amount of time in S- varied across 4 conditions, but programmed rate of reinforcement in S+ was constant. In every individual case, irrespective of the order of exposure, the acquisition of an operant discrimination was a function of time in S-, even though cumulative reinforcers were roughly the same. These results confirm the prediction by Skinner that extinction of S- responding was the “hallmark” of a discrimination.
 
94. Role of the Suprachiasmatic Nucleus in Habituation of the Headshake Response in Rats
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
KELBY HOLTFRETER (Washington State University), John Wright (Washington State University)
Abstract: Four rats received bilateral radio frequency lesions of the suprachiasmatic nucleus (SCN). A second group of four rats served as sham lesion controls. Subjects responded to four different intersession intervals (ISIs= 5 min, 2, 24, & 48 hr) during habituation of the headshake response (HSR). Subjects were exposed to 24 trials during the first habituation session, followed by an additional 24 trials during a second session. SCN-lesioned animals revealed a decrease in responsiveness as compared with controls. Both groups revealed comparable habituation of the HSR. The SCN-lesioned rats did not reveal spontaneous recovery of the HSR after 24 hr; however, recovery was established at 48 hr. The results of the present experiment suggest that lesions of the SCN do not alter habituation, although lesions of the SCN delay the 24 hr spontaneous recovery property of habituation (e.g., Groves & Thompson, 1970) to 48 hr.
 
95. Using the Spontaneously Hypertensive Rat (SHR) as an Animal Model to Examine the Effects of Delay-of-Reinforcement in Attention Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JONATHAN M. SLEZAK (James Madison University), Sherry L. Serdikoff (James Madison University), Kristina T. Austin (James Madison University), A. Charles Catania (University of Maryland, Baltimore County)
Abstract: Recent research suggests that Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) may be the result of an altered reinforcement mechanism characterized by shorter and steeper delay-of reinforcement gradients. The current study investigates this possibility in the spontaneously hypertensive rat (SHR), an animal model of ADHD. SHR and Wistar Kyoto rats (WKY) were trained to emit sequences of responses on two levers, A and B, such that a fixed number of presses on lever-A must be accompanied by a fixed number of presses on lever-B in order to produce a reinforcer. As the overall number of responses separating lever-A responses from the reinforcer were systematically altered, rates of responding on lever-A decreased. Data are discussed in terms of the extent to which the shapes of the delay-of-reinforcement gradients differ for SHR and WKY. These data provide additional evidence for SHR as animal model of ADHD and for the for the altered reinforcement mechanism view of the disorder.
 
96. Effects of a Non-verbal Object-Categorization by Signaling Task and Feedback in Kindergarten Children
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
EMILIO RIBES IÑESTA (University of Guadalajara), Alejandra Marquez (University of Guadalajara), Ivette Vargas (University of Guadalajara), Antonia Padilla (University of Guadalajara)
Abstract: Sixteen 3 and 4 year-old children participated in a study evaluating the effects of the exposure to a human model in a non-verbal object-categorization task. Children were randomly assigned to one of four groups: 1) observation of a model’s performance with feedback, 2) observation of a model’s performance without feedback, 3) observation of the outcomes of a model’s performance with feedback, and 4) a control group, in which subjects did not have any contact with the model or feedback on their performance. The task consisted in grouping objects according to the material from which they were made (e.g. plastic, wood, metal, and mixed material). The children had to indicate in which group objects were to be included. The design involved a) pre-training; b) pre-test; c) four sessions of categorization, and, d) post-test. The results suggest that category boundaries cannot be learned merely by observing the performance of a human model, or by feedback on performance during the task.
 
97. Progressive Ratio in Children Exhibiting Symptoms of Depression
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CHRISTIAN LYNCH (University of Arkansas, Little Rock), Brian M. Kubacak (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences), John J. Chelonis (University of Arkansas, Little Rock), Ronald L. Baldwin (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences), Mark C. Edwards (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences), Merle G. Paule (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences)
Abstract: A primary impairment in individuals diagnosed with depression is a lack of motivation to complete or initiate tasks. Previous research has failed to directly investigate motivation in children with depression using behavioral tasks. The current study examined differences in motivation to earn money among children ages 7 to 13 years with and without depressive symptoms on a progressive ratio task. During the task participants were required to press a lever in order to earn nickels. The number of presses required to earn each nickel increased with each nickel that was earned. Children were considered to exhibit symptoms of depression if they met DSM-IV criteria for Major Depressive Disorder or Dsthymia based on parent report (n=13) or if the child scored greater than or equal to one standard deviation above mean on the Child Depression Inventory (n=17) or both (n=5). Surprisingly, no significant differences were found in the number of responses or reinforcers earned between the children exhibiting depression based on any of the above criteria and control children. In fact, depressed children made slightly more responses than the controls. These results suggest that the clinical deficit in motivation observed in depressed individuals may not generalize to all tasks.
 
98. The Effects of Brief Delays and Non-differential Verbal Replies on the Performance of Verbal Conditioning
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
KANAME MOCHIZUKI (Teikyo University, Japan), Hitoshi Ohnishi (National Institute of Multimedia Education)
Abstract: We examined the effects of brief delays on the performance of verbal conditioning and found that 300m-sec delay of reinforcement disturbed the conditioning. In this experiment we also examined the effect of"meaningless" words such like "Uh" on the conditioning. During the conditioning phase, participants' echoic verbal responses were reinforced by a verbal praise of computer "Uh... Correct!", when they were recognized properly by a speech recognition system on a computer.When they were not recognized properly, the computer replied"Uh... Wrong!". In this procedure, the echoic performances were significantly increased compared to the baseline. But when were placed the "Uh..." with the sound less delay of the same length, the echoic performances were significantly decreased. The functions of"meaningless" words as a mediator of delay in daily conversation is discussed.
 
99. The Effects of Teacher Questions Versus Student Questions on Academic Responding and Total Learn Units to Criterion
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
GENEVA SCHAUFFLER (Teachers College, Columbia University), Grant Gautreaux (Teachers College, Columbia University), R. Douglas Greer (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: The study examines the effects of teacher questions versus student questions on the academic responding of three middle school students. During the teacher question phases of the study, the teacher wrote 5 questions for the students to answer pertaining to a science chapter. During the student question phases of the study, the students were responsible for writing their own set of 5 questions for the next science chapter. The study also examines the effects of the student questions versus teacher questions on the students’ correct responding to an additional 5 bonus questions, written by the teacher and asked following the original 5 questions. The data show that each student’s required number of learn units to criterion on the information from a given science chapter decreased when students wrote their own questions. The data also show a decrease over time in the students’ overall required number of learn units to criterion, regardless of who wrote the 5 questions. Finally, the data show an increase in the students’ correct responding to the 5 bonus questions over time, regardless of who wrote the original 5 questions. Suggestions to explain the reasoning behind these results and implications for future studies are discussed.
 
100. Maternal Responsiveness: An Alternative to Treating Child Abuse
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
ARIEL VITE SIERRA (National Autonomous University of Mexico), Erika Aguirre (National Autonomous University of Mexico)
Abstract: Empiric evidence that demonstrates that the approval and the maternal reflection generally work as positive reinforcement, thus, the mothers that offer contingent feedback on the child’s prosocial behavior strengthen this behavior. These reactions to appropriate and opportune have been characterized under the term of maternal responsiveness. Presumably, the maternal congruence creates a harmony or synchrony that fosters child reciprocity, in general, as well as specifically fostering compliance. For what the interest of the present study was to evaluate the effect that has the mirroring and the social reinforcement in promoting the maternal responsiveness in dyads mother-child with history of physical abuse. Participated seven dyads mother-boy with this problem, an experimental design of the type ABC was used, and in the intervention such procedures of behavioral change were applied as shaping, visual feedback and instructions. The results are analyzed with relationship to if the maternal responsiveness is a class of behavior that it include to the reflection and the social reinforcement or it is a wider construct that can have an effect on the restructuring of the interactions in dyads mother-child with antecedents of physical abuse.
 
101. Conditional Relations with Compound Stimulus: Improving Test Performances
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
PAULA DEBERT (Presbyterian University Mackenzie), Paulo Toshio Missão (University of Sao Paulo, Brazil), Jonas de Oliveira Boni Jr. (University of Sao Paulo, Brazil), Maria Amelia Matos (University of Sao Paulo, Brazil)
Abstract: Past studies established emergent conditional relations using a go/no-go procedure with compound stimuli. These emergent relations were observed only in the last block of Transitive and Equivalence Test. In the present study compound stimuli remained on computer screen for a longer time during test to evaluate whether emergent relations would be detected early in the first test block. This evaluation was conducted with three naive college students. During training, each compound stimulus was presented successively at the computer screen for four seconds. Responses emitted in the presence of certain compound stimuli (A1B1, A2B2, A3B3, B1C1, B2C2 and B3C3) were reinforced; while responses emitted in the presence of others (A1B2, A1B3, A2B1, A2B3, A3B1, A3B2, B1C2, B1C3, B2C1, B2C3, B3C1 and B3C2) were not. During tests, new configurations (BA, CB, AC, and CA) were presented resembling tests usually employed in equivalence studies. Each of these compound stimuli was presented for eight seconds during tests. All participants showed emergent relations and two in three participants revealed emergence of Transitivity and Equivalence relations in the first block of the tests. These results indicate that emergent relations may be detected early in testing when compound stimulus remained for longer time on the screen.
 
102. Investigating the Celebratory Drinking Style of College Students: Implications for Prevention Interventions
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
ELISE A. DRAKE (Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University), Ryan C. Smith (Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University), Sarah Thornton (Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University), Megan Progen (Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University)
Abstract: The present work describes two field studies supporting the occurrence of celebratory drinking behavior among students, and measured consequences of this behavior using participants’ Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) levels. For each study, students’ BACs were assessed using handheld breathalyzers. Study 1 was conducted on the night of an NCAA Division 1 football game. BAC data were analyzed by self-report of Tailgating. The one-way ANOVA reached significance, F (1, 86) = 24.96, p < .001. Those participants who tailgated for the game reached a mean BAC of .091, while those that did not reached a BAC of .034. Study 2 was conducted on Halloween night, also a Thursday. BAC data were analyzed using a 2 Costume X 2 Gender ANOVA. The main effect for costume reached significance, F (1, 87) = 5.94, p < .05. Those in costume reached a mean BAC of .089, while those not in costume reached a BAC of .055. These results support the belief that students consuming alcohol with a reason to celebrate drink to higher levels of intoxication, reaching BAC levels which can put them at risk for alcohol-related problems. Students’ celebratory style of drinking should be considered when designing prevention interventions for this population.
 
103. Teaching Children to Respond to the Relevant Stimulus Dimensions: Figure, Feature, or Background
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
TANYA BAYNHAM (University of North Texas), Jesus Rosales-Ruiz (University of North Texas), Lisa G. Falke (University of North Texas)
Abstract: This research examined several methods to assess and teach non-verbal children with autism generalized identity matching. The first phase of the study demonstrated that the participants could show generalized identity matching with some stimulus dimensions but not others. That is, children were more likely to match by figure than by feature or background. The second phase consisted of teaching children to respond to the stimulus dimensions under conditions in which they had previously failed. Procedures involved arranging the stimulus presentations such that responding to the target stimulus dimension (figure, feature, or background) was likely to be reinforced. Results will be discussed in terms of current procedures used to teach generalized identity matching. Results are in progress.
 
104. Investigation of the Role of Entering Histories on the Performance of Human Operant Tasks
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
IAN STEPHENS (University of Nevada, Reno), Michael R. Johnston (University of Nevada, Reno), Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Much experimental work conducted with animals tends to show regularity in terms of schedule controlled behavior. The results of human operant work tend to be much more variable and are often disparate from animal patterns. One potential explanation for this lies in the methodological differences between human and animal experiments. This may include the role of participants’ entering repertoires or histories with respect to certain human operant tasks. Many of these tasks involve the use of computers and mouse clicking, a skill that may vary widely among the common population of this type of research: college students. This study attempted to discover any correlations among the entering repertoire of human participants (such as high or low computer use, and high or low video game use) and performance on simple operant tasks such as sensitivity to low or high-rate schedules of reinforcement. Results will be discussed from the perspective that the entering repertoire of college students needs to be better accounted for and controlled if we hope to reduce some of the variability observed in the human operant literature.
 
105. Teaching Preschool Students To Mand
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
SONJA GALIC (Teachers College, Columbia University), Mapy Chavez-Brown (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: The purpose of this experiment was to investigate the effect of echoic to mand procedure and an establishing operation on instructing three preschool males to ask questions. A multiple baseline design across three target responses was implemented. Data were collected during instructional time in the participants’ classroom in a one-on-one setting. Responses to the learn units served as a measurement of learning in the treatment phase in which the students received an object from the box for the appropriate response or a correction in the form of an echoic response. The baseline data indicate students’ deficit in the repertoire of asking questions. The first question – What is it? – functioned to gain information as to what was hidden in the box, whereas “Can I see it?” served to obtain a view of the item. The last form of question – Can I have it? – functioned to receive an object. Data show that these procedures taught all participants these skills.
 
106. The Effects of Outcome-Reversal Training on Equivalence Performances
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
NATALIE JACOME (University of North Carolina, Wilmington), Carol Pilgrim (University of North Carolina, Wilmington)
Abstract: It has been shown that class-specific reinforcers are critical not only to the establishment but also to the maintenance of conditional discriminations. However, this effect has yet to be tested with humans. Thus, one purpose of the present study is to see if this effect will extend to humans. Children were taught two arbitrary conditional discriminations (AB and AC) such that selections of B1, B2, or B3 given A1, A2, or A3, respectively, produced R1, R2, or R3, respectively. Likewise, selections of C1, C2, or C3 given A1, A2, or A3, respectively, produced R1, R2, or R3, respectively. During subsequent training, reinforcement contingencies were reversed such that selections of B1, B2, or B3 given A1, A2, or A3, respectively, produced R2, R3, or R1, respectively; selections of C1, C2, or C3 given A1, A2, or A3, respectively, produced R3, R1, or R2. Upon mastery of baseline conditional discriminations, equivalence probes were administered to evaluate the formation of stimulus-equivalence classes. Participants also completed reinforcer probes in order to ascertain whether the class-specific reinforcers had become class members. To date, baseline conditional discriminations have shown no disruption following outcome reversals, equivalence performances are strong, and responses on reinforcer probes are random.
 
 
 
Poster Session #343
#343 Poster Session - EDC
Monday, May 30, 2005
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
107. The Effects of Using Teacher Scripts on the Efficiency of Delivering Instruction to Students at Risk for Reading Failure
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
SHAWNNA S. HELF (University of North Carolina, Charlotte), Monica C. Campbell (University of North Carolina, Wilmington), Nancy L. Cooke (University of North Carolina, Charlotte)
Abstract: Direct Instruction reading programs embrace explicit, systematic instruction and provide the critical components of instruction for students who are at-risk. Direct Instruction programs are constructed through a rigorous analysis of both the instructional design of curricula and exactly how the materials should be presented. Over 25 years of research support their various programs, components of these programs, and their presentation strategies, across students of various ages and abilities. Proponents of Direct Instruction believe that instruction should be so structured and clear that misinterpretation is impossible. To ensure tight control over the presentation, these programs provide detailed scripts for teachers to use. It is this component, the use of scripted text, that causes the most controversy and draws the most criticism. Although the scripts used in Direct Instruction programs are rigorously tested in combination with other design features, there have been no studies that specifically examine the impact of teacher scripts on the efficiency of delivering instruction using Direct Instruction programs. This presentation will report the findings of a single-subject study (i.e., multiple baseline across participants) that examined two methods of teacher presentation support (i.e., scripted vs. non-scripted) to determine which allowed students to more quickly reach mastery of reading skills.
 
108. Effects of Teaching Your Child to Read in 100 Easy Lessons on a Preschooler's Reading
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
KARI GEESMAN (Gonzaga University), Colleen E. Kormann (Gonzaga University), Leiza Mandi (Gonzaga University), Randy Lee Williams (Gonzaga University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effects of Teach Your Child to Read in 100 Easy Lessons on the beginning reading skills of a four-year-old preschool boy. This program is phonetically-based, scripted, highly sequenced, fast paced, and included systematic review and practice. A multiple baseline design across three sets of sounds and words was used to evaluate the reading program. With the implementation of the intervention, Teach Your Child to Read in 100 Easy Lessons, the child increased his accuracy of letter sounds and words read. The procedure was practical in terms of time, money, and effort.
 
109. The Effects of Direct Instruction on Beginning Reading Skills of a Kindergartner
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
RANDY LEE WILLIAMS (Gonzaga University), Tiffany Florez (Gonzaga University), Janelle Babinski (Gonzaga University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study to evaluate the effects of Direct Instruction program, Teach Your Child to Read in 100 Easy Lessons, on the beginning reading skills of a five-year-old kindergarten boy. This program is phonetically-based, scripted, highly sequenced, fast paced, and included systematic review and practice. A multiple baseline design across three sets of sounds and words was used to evaluate the reading program. With the implementation of the intervention, Teach Your Child to Read in 100 Easy Lessons, the child increased his accuracy of letter sounds and words read. The procedure was practical in terms of time, money, and effort.
 
110. The Effect of Negative Reinforcement on a Student's Decoding Accuracy
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CHANG-NAM LEE (Whitworth College)
Abstract: This poster session will present a data-based study with an A-B-A-B design that investigated the effect of negative reinforcement on a student’s decoding accuracy. Prior to the study, the student had shown performance deficits due to “attention” problems when he did not show any evidence of skill deficits. His frequent errors negatively influenced his comprehension of the text. During the baseline and the treatment phases, using a Direct Instruction Corrective Reading program (which include “decodable” texts), the student first learned all the prerequisite skills to decode each text and then read the text. Then the researcher asked comprehension questions. During the negative reinforcement phase, the student was instructed that he would have to reread the text if he made more than a certain number of errors. If he made fewer errors, he did not have to reread it. The measure was “the percent of words read correctly.” The implication of the result will be discussed.
 
111. Teaching Sight Words to an Adult with Moderate Cognitive Impairments
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
LAURA E. RINDERKNECHT (University of Toledo)
Abstract: The ability to quickly read sight words helps improve a reader’s fluency and ultimately comprehension. The current single-subject research design looks at how an adult with moderate cognitive impairments who was never taught to read increased her sight word vocabulary. This extends the utility of using experimental analysis to determine appropriate instructional components to increase academic learning. In an assessment phase, a short assessment was conducted through experimental analysis of three sight word teaching methods. The best treatment was determined based on the level and trend of the data of the three test conditions. During an instructional phase, the best treatment was implemented across individual sets of words through a multiple baseline design. After mastery, data was collected on maintenance to examine word retention. Results add to the existing literature on how assessment of possible teaching strategies can aid in treatment selection, and in turn, increase performance. In essence, data was used to impact teaching and learning of sight words for an adult with moderate cognitive impairments.
 
112. The Effects of Peer Tutoring on Sight-Word Acquisition, Maintenance, Reading Fluency and Comprehension for Urban Learners
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
LEFKI KOUREA (The Ohio State University), Gwendolyn Cartledge (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: This study examined the effects of total class peer tutoring on the sight-word acquisition, maintenance, reading fluency and comprehension of six urban African-American students at risk for reading failure. Five of the students were assigned to the second grade and one to third grade. The students tutored their partners on sight words three times per week for 30 minutes each session for 17 to 20 weeks. Initially, only the targeted six students participated in peer tutoring. At the sixteenth week, the whole class participated in peer tutoring. A multiple baseline design across students was used to investigate the effects of the intervention over the four dependent variables. Data analyses showed that all students increased the number of sight words learned over baseline levels. Five of the six target students demonstrated high levels of sight-word retention of more than 89% during bi-weekly assessments. All students increased their reading fluency and comprehension over baseline levels. Greater gains were observed for fluency and comprehension on passages that included the tutoring sight words. More modest gains in comprehension and fluency were found in passages that did not contain words taught in the tutoring sessions.
 
113. Comparing Three Whole Word Recognition Techniques on Children's Cumulative Word Recognition Learning Rates
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
LINDSAY M. NIST (The Ohio State University), Laurice Joseph (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: The purpose of this poster presentation is to present a systematic replication study of comparing three whole word recognition techniques on the cumulative word recognition learning rates of three fifth grade children. Three fifth grade children were children who were referred by their classroom teacher as needing additional assistance with word recognition skills. Three whole word recognition techniques consisted of a less challenging ratio of interspersed unknown targeted words with known words flash card drill, a more challenging interspersal ratio of known to unknown targeted words flash card drill, and a traditional flash card drill of targeted unknown words. An alternating treatment design was employed to study differential effects of instruction. Dependent measures consisted of cumulative number of words recognized and cumulative learning rates.Results were consistent with previous findings that measured cumulative spelling performance (Cates et al., 2002). Specifically, results of the current study revealed that traditional flash card drill of targeted unknown words produced higher cumulative learning rates of words recognized. This finding has implications for making decisions as to which type of whole word technique is most efficient to use if your goal is to help children recognize as many words as possible during a given instructional time period.
 
114. Considering Comprehension Levels When Conducting an Experimental Analysis of Reading Interventions
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
GARY L. CATES (Illinois State University), Kelly Thomason (Valley View School District 365U)
Abstract: Brief experimental analyses (BEA) were conducted using two different dependent variables to evaluate the effectiveness of reading interventions. Specifically reading rate (words read correctly per minute) and mean reading comprehension levels for six students with reading difficulties were obtained using six different reading intervention/intervention combinations. These interventions included contingent reinforcement, listening passage preview, repeated reading, listening passage preview with contingent reinforcement, repeated reading with contingent reinforcement, and repeated reading with listening passage preview. Results suggested that no one intervention was best for all students regardless of the dependent variable used to measure effectiveness. In addition, the two dependent variables resulted in the same conclusion for only three of the six students. Discussion focuses on student-treatment interactions, measuring student reading performance, matching treatments to students, and directions for future research.
 
115. Small Group Reading: Effects on Student Active Engagement, Responding, Progress, and Teacher Praise Rates
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
MARY B. VEERKAMP (University of Kansas, Juniper Gardens Children's Project), Howard P. Wills (University of Kansas, Juniper Gardens Children's Project), Julie Stopulos (University of Kansas, Juniper Gardens Children's Project), Debra M. Kamps (University of Kansas, Juniper Gardens Children's Project), Carmen Arreaga-Mayer (University of Kansas, Juniper Gardens Children's Project), Mary Abbott (University of Kansas, Juniper Gardens Children's Project)
Abstract: This study used the Multiple Option Observation System for Experimental Studies-MOOSES (Tapp, Wehby, & Ellis, 1992) to obtain data for 96 second and third grade students during reading instruction over the course of three school years. One half of the students were enrolled in experimental schools involved in early screening and intervention for students at risk for reading failure, while the other half of the students were enrolled in control schools. Intervention consisted of small group (3-6 students) reading instruction using phonics driven curricula three to five times per week, in addition to core reading instruction. Differential effects favoring the experimental group were noted for frequencies of academic compliance (response opportunities) and teacher praise compared to the control group means. Also noted were differences in the percent of intervals spent actively engaged in reading aloud, with students spending more time actively engaged in reading aloud in experimental schools than comparison schools. Corresponding longitudinal student outcome data will be reported based on assessments using the Dynamic Indicators of Basic Early Literacy Skills-DIBELS (Good & Kaminski, 1998), a curriculum based measure of fluency. Note: All observers and assessors were trained to 80%+ reliability on a minimum of two occasions.
 
116. Improving the Literacy Skills of an Eighteen-Year-Old with a Learning Disability
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
KIKO RUSSELL (University of Toledo), Ralph Gardner III (The Ohio State University), Theresa Hessler (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: This is a data-based study involving a 18 year old African American student who reads and writes at an early elementary school level (i.e., 2nd grade). The student was interested in improving his literacy skills so that he could continue to pursue a promising athletic career. The experimenters along with the student developed an intense literacy program focused on reading and later writing skill development. The program included Direct Instruction Corrective Reading program, fluency training, and culturally relevant reading material (high-interest – low level). Journal writing with corrective feedback was also used to improve his writing skills. Data will be presented on the development of reading skill and writing skills. The data shows increased fluency and accuracy. The data also shows significant improvement on standardized tests. The student was able to read his first book and can more easily communicate with peer through email. The academic improvement has increased his ability to be successful in the classroom and allows him to maintain his athletic career ambitions.
 
117. Examining Approaches To Improve Oral Reading Fluency
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
AMY C. SCARBOROUGH (Georgia State University), Laura D. Fredrick (Georgia State University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to determine the impact of four skill-based strategies repeated reading (RR), listening passage preview plus RR, echo reading plus RR, and pencil tapping plus RR in combination with two performance-based strategies performance feedback and student graphing on the oral reading fluency of three second grade students. The brief analysis indicated equal effectiveness of all four skill-based strategies for all three students. Being the most parsimonious, RR was further examined by measuring and reporting generalization, the first read of unpracticed passages during the testing phase. The results of this study demonstrate the effectiveness of skill-based strategies in combination with performance-based strategies for increasing oral reading fluency on both practiced and unpracticed passages.
 
118. A Comparison of Three Group-Based Reading Fluency Interventions
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
JOHN C. BEGENY (Syracuse University), Jennifer M. Silber (Syracuse University)
Abstract: Recent national education statistics reveal that approximately one-third of US students read below the basic level by fourth grade. It has also been noted that typical reading instruction practices neglect reading fluency, which has been highlighted as a critical component in teaching individuals to read. Because of the large number of low-achieving readers in the typical classroom, group-based reading programs are important to consider since they can save teachers time and resources compared to individualized interventions. The primary purpose of this presentation is to report the differential effects of three group-based reading fluency interventions (repeated readings, listening passage preview, and learning difficult words in isolation via board-work practice). Participants included three third-grade children from an urban school in central New York. An alternating treatments design was used to examine the relative effects of the interventions on students’ words read correctly per minute (WCPM). Results suggested that for two of the students, repeated reading was the most beneficial group-based reading intervention, whereas for one student the listening passage preview intervention resulted in the largest WCPM gains. Limitations, implications, and future research questions related to this study will be presented.
 
119. The Effects of a Group-based Reading Intervention on Students’ Academic Engaged Time
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER M. SILBER (Syracuse University), John C. Begeny (Syracuse University)
Abstract: National education data reveal that approximately one-third of US fourth graders read below the basic level. Further, these data show that reading deficits are particularly prevalent for minority students. One way to address students’ reading problems is to design instructional strategies that allow them to be more actively engaged. Indeed, students’ opportunity to respond and be actively engaged during instruction has been shown to be positively correlated with student achievement. The primary purpose of this presentation is to report the effects of a group-based reading fluency intervention on students’ on-task behavior. In this study, 12 third grade minority students from an urban school in central New York participated in a group-based reading intervention. Students’ active engaged time, passive engaged time, total engaged time, and cumulative duration of active engaged time were measured during typical classroom reading instruction (provided by students’ regular classroom teachers) as well as during the group-based reading intervention (implemented by experimenters). Results indicated that students’ average engaged time on all measures were significantly higher during the group based reading intervention. Students also made academic gains as a result of the group-based intervention. Limitations, implications, and future research questions related to this study will be presented.
 
120. Generating Reading Interventions Through Experimental Analysis of Academic Skills: Demonstration and Evaluation of Long-Term Outcomes
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
MICHAEL PERSAMPIERI (University of Nebraska-Lincoln), Edward J. Daly III (University of Nebraska-Lincoln), Merilee McCurdy (University of Nebraska-Lincoln), Valerie J. Gortmaker (University of Nebraska-Lincoln)
Abstract: This report demonstrates the application of experimental analysis methods for identifying reading fluency interventions for two elementary school students (4th and 5th grade) referred for reading problems. For each student the experimental analyses examined use of rewards, instruction, and a treatment package containing both reward and instructional components across difficulty levels to determine the condition which led to the most efficient increases in reading fluency for each student. Based on the experimental analyses, individualized reading packages were developed that required a minimum of supervision. These interventions were carried out over time during normal instructional routines and progress monitoring data were gathered to determine the effects of the interventions. Progress monitoring data using generalization reading materials were collected for rewarded and non-rerewarded probe performance to determine trend over time. Results will be discussed in terms of how practitioners can use experimental analyses of academic skills within a broader response-to-intervention framework. Also, recommendations for future research in this area are made.
 
121. An Examination of Performance Gains and Trainings to Criterion at Different Levels of Oral Reading Fluency
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
BRIAN K. MARTENS (Syracuse University), Derek D. Reed (Syracuse University)
Abstract: Approximately 70% of the Nation’s fourth graders continue to function at or below the basic level in reading (NCES, 2004). For students who have already developed phonological awareness and sight-word vocabulary skills, oral reading fluency is “an essential link between word analysis and comprehension of text and is considered a necessary tool for learning from reading” (Chard, Vaughn, & Tyler, 2002, pp. 401-402). This study evaluated the effects of a fluency-based, after-school reading program on immediate gains in performance and number of trainings required to reach a criterion with 15 low-achieving 2nd and 3rd grade students. Training procedures consisted of phrase drill error correction, listening passage preview, and repeated readings along with goal setting, charting, and token reinforcement. Results indicated that as pre-training oral reading fluency levels increased, the magnitude of training gains as well as the number of trainings required to reach criterion decreased. Taken together, the results suggested that an optimal entry level for oral reading fluency in terms of maximizing gains and minimizing trainings to criterion was approximately 50 WCPM. The implications of these results for using sequentially-matched material for reading instruction will be highlighted.
 
122. Visual Goal and Progress Stimuli and their Affects on Students Reading Fluency Growth Rates
Area: EDC; Domain: Theory
ADEE REED (Utah State University), David E. Forbush (Utah State University)
Abstract: “National longitudinal studies show that more than 17.5 percent of children in U.S. schools will encounter reading problems in their first three years of schooling” (National Reading Panel Progress Report, 2000). In the book Preventing Reading Difficulties in Young Children, Snow, Burns and Griffen identify obstacles that account for the majority of early readers’ problems. A primary obstacle identified is difficulty understanding and fluently applying the alphabetic principle or sound symbol code, which over time results in significantly reduced reading fluency levels. One method supported by the National Reading Panel (NRP) for increasing fluency rates among readers is completion of repeated oral readings. Repeated oral reading have been found to show clear improvements among students across age and reading levels and appear to be most pronounced for poor readers. The NRP recommends that repeated readings be coupled with guidance and feedback but do not provide specific direction on either. Preliminary investigations suggest that feedback in the form of visible goal and jump stickers on reading stimulus materials positively affect students’ reading fluency rates. The purpose of this poster session is to display and describe the application and outcomes of these interventions for poor readers.
 
123. Comparison of Two Error Correction Procedures Within a Precision Teaching Framework During Learning to Read Words
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
ANGELA GALVIN (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Ed Langford (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Michelle Harrington (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Matthew L. Israel (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Abstract: At the Judge Rotenberg Center the implementation of much of the reading curriculum is based on the principles of Precision Teaching. This includes conducting multiple assessment timings with students on the reading of words until they reach a high rate-per-minute correct and a low rate-per-minute incorrect within each of a number of curriculum steps. This study examined how two different types of error correction methods affected retention of the proper pronunciation of words learned in a reading task. Curriculum material was from the Michael Maloney series Teach Your Children to Read Well and was presented in a number of timed tests one minute in length. One group of students was corrected during each timing, just as an error occurred. The other group of students was corrected at the end of each timing. Both groups received the same verbal correction procedure, but at different times. Subjects were similar in age and IQ. Both groups were tested on the material two weeks after mastery had been achieved to determine how their retention differed.
 
124. Addressing Concerns Related to “No Child Left Behind” and the Oral Reading Fluency Performance of Highly Diverse Fourth-Grade Students: A Cooperative and Coolaborative Teacher Training Model
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
WILLIAM J. SWEENEY (University of South Dakota), Doug Robbins (Smith Elementary School, Sioux City Community Schools), Jenny Wetz (Smith Elementary School, Sioux City Community Schools), Lauri Powell (Smith Elementary School, Sioux City Community Schools), Rise Tracy (Smith Elementary School, Sioux City Community Schools), Susan R. Sweeney (Smith Elementary School, Sioux City Community Schools), Paul Malanga (University of South Dakota)
Abstract: This demonstration project summarizes data related to the effectiveness of repeated reading techniques combined with daily goal setting to build oral reading fluency with fourth-grade students. This reading fluency demonstration project was a combined effort of a School of Education at The University of South Dakota with the Sioux City Community Schools to address some of the mandates of the federal governments 2001 amendments to the Elementary and Secondary School Act (i.e., No Child Left Behind or NCLB) as well as the reading performance of students enrolled in one of its elementary schools with a large population of academically at-risk students. Additionally, this demonstration project was designed to provide preservice special education teachers the opportunity to employ fluency-based procedures with Precision Teaching curriculum-based assessment techniques. Each year, approximately 60 to 65 fourth-grade students from three regular education classes work with 10 to 15 provide preservice special education teachers/tutors from the university. The preservice special education teachers/tutors worked with the students’ in-groups of 2 to 3 for roughly 45 minutes focusing on basic reading skills. The teacher/tutors met with their groups two days a week on average for approximately five weeks. The experimental design used is a behavioral dynamics (Cooper, 2004) approach that emphasizes an analysis of fluency celerations and learning pictures common to Precision Teaching programs. Precision Teaching measurement procedures are employed to evaluate the repeated readings procedures and assess the effectiveness of the teacher/tutor’s reading instruction. Results showed substantial fluency improvements with multiplying learning pictures for oral reading passages. The implementation of these procedures are effective at improving the student's reading fluency, are cost effective in terms of time and resources, and take little time to administer. Implications for classroom instruction and adoption of repeated reading procedures for both students academically at-risk and teacher training are discussed.
 
125. The Effect of Performance Rate on Retention
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
MICHELLE HARRINGTON (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Robert W. Worsham (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Ed Langford (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Matthew L. Israel (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Angela Galvin (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Abstract: This study examined how performance rates at mastery affected retention of material. Subjects worked on a curriculum of graded vocabulary words, using precision teaching methodology, until they were able to read the words aloud at a certain rate-per-minute correct during each of a series of one-minute timings. The subjects were divided into two groups, one of which worked toward a high rate final aim and the other which worked toward a lower rate final aim. After two weeks each group was tested on retention of the materials. Data on differences in retention are presented for the two groups to see whether final rate-correct-per-minute had an effect on retention.
 
126. Retention Knowledge after Multiple Parts of Curriculum Practice
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
EMILY BURKE (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Michael J. Santopietro (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Sean Bresnahan (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Matthew L. Israel (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Abstract: Two groups of students from the Judge Rotenberg Center worked on a series of vocabulary SAFMEDS. SAFMEDS is a fluency based method which is an acronym for “say all facts one minute each day shuffled”. It is a structure to use, which specific curriculum is then implemented into. Students that participated in the study were between the ages of 16 and 20. One condition of students worked through a curriculum of learning how to say the word, learning the definition of a word, and learning how to use the word correctly in a sentence. The second condition of students worked only on learning how to say the word and learning the definition of the word. Students in one condition were matched in ability to the students in the other condition. Students worked on the curriculum three to five times a week doing at least three one-minute timings a day. Frequency data were then plotted on the standard celeration chart. After students completed the SAFMED curriculum, the materials were removed for one month and then a check for retention was completed. Another retention check was completed again three months later. The study showed that the students who worked on the full curriculum of SAFMEDS had greater retention knowledge.
 
127. Increasing Acquisition of Target Vocabulary Words through Manipulation of Correction Procedure
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
NIRVANA PISTOLJEVIC (Teachers College, Columbia University), Grant Gautreaux (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: A multiple baseline and multiple probe across participants design was utilized to investigate the effects of manipulating the correction procedure on acquisition and the use of grade appropriate vocabulary in students functioning several grade levels below same age peers. Students A,B and C were 14 year-old 8th grade students, functioning several grades below same age peers. Students A and C were females, while student B was a male, all diagnosed with behavior disorder. Students attended a classroom implementing Comprehensive Application of Behavior Analysis to Schooling (CABAS®) model of instruction in a public middle school for at risk youth. This procedure was implemented to bridge the gap between students’ limited verbal repertoires and vocabulary required for the 8th grade level according to New York State Standards. The target words were selected from the pre-baseline probes as not being in any of the students’ repertoires. Students’ work was graded with target vocabulary words, which created an establishing operation for them to look up the words in the provided glossary in order to find out what grade they have received. After being exposed to each of the 4 sets of 5 words, 3 positive and 2 with negative connotation in each set, students were given an opportunity to use the words in correcting other students work. In addition, students were probed on whether they have acquired the words in the academic repertoire, by asking them a definition and if they can use them in the sentences. The results showed a functional relationship between the manipulation of correction component and acquisition of target vocabulary words. In addition, students acquired the target words in academic repertoire as well. Number of different words and number of sentences used has increased with implementation of the procedure.
 
 
 
Poster Session #344
#344 Poster Session - OBM
Monday, May 30, 2005
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
128. A Multifaceted Intervention Package for Improving Staff Performance in a Small Business Setting
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
JEREMY M. HOF (Jacksonville State University), Michael C. Clayton (Jacksonville State University)
Abstract: Organizational Behavior Management attempts to remediate organizational deficiencies by using behavior analytic tools to affect change in the antecedents and consequences of behavior and bring about organizational change. To this end, the present study used the Performance Diagnostic Checklist (PDC) to identify specific areas of need in a small, local business. After interviewing the management and employees it was determined that there were deficiencies with respect to completed tasks, as well as insufficient feedback provided to employees. We also incorporated a customer feedback system to collect additional data to aid our analysis. The data analysis suggested a multifaceted approach involving task lists, performance feedback, and an employee lottery to improve customer service, task completion, and employee morale. Results are discussed in terms of the improved accuracy of interventions utilizing the PDC and the value of a multifaceted intervention plan.
 
129. Identifying Effective Computer-Based Learning Strategies in Self-Directed Exploration of a Map Display
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER L. BREDTHAUER (Auburn University), Jean Dyer (U.S. Army Research Institute)
Abstract: Previous research compared the effectiveness of structured training and learner-driven exploration using prototype Army software (Dyer & Salter, 2001). In general, soldiers who received training performed better than those who explored the software. However, exploratory training took significantly less time, with some soldiers learning the necessary skills on their own. Soldiers manipulated a map interface consisting of seven functions: Zoom In, Zoom Out, Pan, Find Me, Find X, Display, and Range/Azimuth. Two were one-step, while the others were multi-step that had to be learned by trial and error. Find X and Display involved complex hierarchical menu structures. In the present study, no procedural instructions were provided. Instead, soldiers were encouraged to explore the map display on their own before proceeding to the final exam. No minimum time requirement emerged as a clear predictor of performance. In general, exam success was directly related to the thoroughness to which the soldier explored the map display and its functions. Simply clicking on each was not enough, the relatively more complex functions of Display and Find X required additional investigation of lower submenu levels. Computer experience and proficiency on symbol and code training also related to the effectiveness of exploratory learning.
 
130. The Behavioral Research Supervisory System: Preventing Procrastination in Undergraduate and Graduate Psychology Students
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
ANASTASIA M. OSREDKAR (Western Michigan University), Jennifer Skundrich (Western Michigan University), Christen Rae (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The Behavior Analysis Training System (BATS) is a system within the Psychology Department at Western Michigan University. The Behavioral Research Supervisory System (BRSS) is a subsystem of BATS that uses behavior analysis, organizational behavior management, and systems analysis techniques to eliminate procrastination and keep graduate and undergraduate psychology students on track through their educational careers, as well as enabling them to achieve an extensive and well rounded understanding of behavior analysis. Point contingencies are placed on tasks to ensure that students make timely progress on quality products. BRSS managers monitor graduate and undergraduate students on a weekly basis to verify completion of weekly preset tasks. This is accomplished via a weekly BRSS meeting that graduate and undergraduate students attend. The managers also distribute points accordingly, provide feedback, and accumulate data on task and hour completion. At the end of every semester the BRSS mangers compile the points and calculate a grade for each student based on the total points possible.
 
131. An Attempt to Vitalize in Vivo or Incidental Teaching in an MR/DD Residential Facility
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
JASON T. OTTO (Greene Valley Developmental Center), Eric J. Chubb (Fort Wayne State Developmental Center)
Abstract: Program authors write specific, skill-based training objectives and language-based communication objectives to support people with developmental disabilities and mental impairment. However, a maintenance system is often necessary once the skill-based and language-based objectives are met and discontinued. In order to maintain the contingencies initiated by those target programs, natural yet functional, on-going interactions between service providers and service recipients must continue once the objective is met. Effective performance management and staff training for incidental teaching are required. This poster describes the details of such an intervention for maintaining incidental teaching.
 
132. Process Improvement in a Clinic Setting: An Application of OBM
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
CHELSEY A. SUTTON (University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire), Karin L. Rasmussen (University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire), Valori N. Berends (University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire), Gregory J. Madden (University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire)
Abstract: Research clearly indicates that the appropriate conveyance of expectations and goals is a necessary factor in the ability of an organization to perform at its highest level. The current sutdy analyzed the influence of standardized forms and feedback on the improvements in work output, speed, and accuracy in a medical clinic setting. The goal of the study was to increase the speed with which lab orders were processed relative to the time in which they were ordered. The use of standardized lab order forms as well as regular feedback on progress made was utilized to determine their effects on the accuracy and speed of lab request processing. The effects of the intervention were evaluated using a multiple-baseline design across departments.
 
133. Unobtrusive Observations of Job Performance in a Manufacturing Company: Union and Nonunion Comparisons
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
CARL MERLE JOHNSON (Central Michigan University), Monica Filipkowski (Central Michigan University)
Abstract: Unobtrusive time-sampling recordings of employee performance in both a union and a nonunion plant of one manufacturing organization were carried out. The company was in Chapter 11 Bankruptcy at the time. Behavior was measured as “on task” (i.e., working at machine on plant floor) or “off task” (i.e., standing away from machine or not working during a non-designated break time). Observations were made weekly at the same time. Interobserver reliability measures were 93% agreement. Halfway through the study the company announced the closing of a union plant in another state. Before the announcement employees from the union plant were on task 85.3% (SD = 6.44) and employees from the nonunion plant were on task 92% of the time (SD = 1.47). After the announcement employees from the union plant were on task 86.6% (SD = 3.29) and employees from the nonunion plant were on task 89.7% (SD = 4.11). Observations following the announcement demonstrated an increase of on task behaviors in the union plant; however, no substantial change in on task behavior for the nonunion plant. This implies that the announcement might have influenced the union employees who felt more of a threat towards the possibility of a plant closure.
 
134. The Effect of a Weighted Checklist and Weekly Feedback on University Housing Staff Performance
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
ERICK K. A. MARMOLEJO (University of the Pacific)
Abstract: The use of aversive control measures in the form of punishment and negative reinforcement are widely used in business and organizations. The purpose of the present study was to systematically evaluate an alternative. The effect of a package intervention consisting of a weighted checklist, weekly graphic feedback, and contingent social positive reinforcement in the form of praise was used with a university housing staff to increase duty performance. Five undergraduate Resident Assistants served as participants. A multiple baseline across staff members was used to evaluate the effect of the intervention. Results indicate that the intervention increased performance by an average of 45% and decreased variability in performance. These results suggest that interventions based on feedback and positive reinforcement are effective, cost efficient, and represent a practical alternative to aversive control measures.
 
135. Daily Data Collection: A Comparison of Two Data Sheets
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
WILLIAM A. FLOOD (May South, Inc.), Stephen T. North (May South, Inc.)
Abstract: This study evaluated the systematic changing of data sheets in group home environments with 6 homes for consumers with intensive behavioral needs. Originally, staff were required to complete daily data on a monthly data collection sheet. With this system, data was completed infrequently. Data collection was switched to daily data sheets and requiring staff to carry the sheets with them around the home. Preliminary data analysis reveals that the overall monthly frequency increased across all group homes.
 
136. The Effects of an Employee Retention Program on Therapist Turnover and Therapist Morale
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
CECILIA KNIGHT (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Rachel S. F. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Doreen Granpeesheh (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.)
Abstract: Maintaining a well trained staff is essential for any human service organization to be productive. Unfortunately, therapist turnover and poor therapist morale can interrupt this process. Behavior analytic research demonstrates that procedures that include feedback, training, and incentives can impact employee behavior. Therefore, an employee retention program was developed in an attempt to decrease staff turnover and to improve employee perceptions about their jobs. This retention program includes staff training, public posting, and token rewards that are typically preferred by employees. The purpose of this study is to measure the effects of this employee retention program on therapist turnover and morale across several clinical sites.
 
137. Getting a Little Worm Out of an Eagle is No Easy Task! Increasing Frequency of Direct Program Observation and Feedback by Executive Level Staff in an Agency Serving Individuals with Autism
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
EILEEN HOPKINS (Eden II Programs), Carnella McDonald (Eden II Programs), Joanne Gerenser (Eden II Programs), Randy I. Horowitz (Eden II Programs)
Abstract: While the task of direct program observation and provision of feedback to program managers/staff is critically important to the delivery of quality services to individuals with autism, the realities of competing responsibilities can make it difficult for upper-level staff to carry out these tasks as frequently as they feel would be appropriate. The current study examined baseline levels of program observations by executive level staff in an agency serving individuals with autism across several sites and programs (including educational, residential, after-school, and adult day program sites). An intervention consisting of setting individual and group target frequency of observations and written follow up reports was then implemented, with peer feedback as the only consequence for meeting or failing to meet defined objectives. A response cost was then applied, with interesting results initially and after return to baseline. Study results demonstrate a creative way to encourage and support lead agency staff to share their knowledge and expertise through direct program observation.
 
138. An Evaluation of Training Outcomes: A Look at Two Methods of Staff Training
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
JASON T. CAVIN (The Learning Tree), Carrie Smiley (The Learning Tree), Carrie Kirk (The Learning Tree), Jerre R. Brimer (The Learning Tree)
Abstract: The purpose of this poster is to illustrate the efficacy of two new-hire orientation training programs and their correlation to the rates of staff turnover. Both training programs were offered to individuals seeking employment at The Learning Tree, a private educational and residential program. Program efficacy was measured through the utilization of data collection systems to track changes in client data across all settings. A time line of intervention changes will be presented along with discussion of what led to each change. Data graphs will be presented on various maladaptive behaviors as well as rates of client reinforcement.
 
139. Program Evaluation: Measuring Quality of Care in an Inpatient Brain Injury Rehabilitation Program
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
BRIDGET A. SHORE (Florida Institute of Neurologic Rehabilitation), Tara L. Batchelor (Florida Institute for Neurologic Rehabilitation), Claudia L. Dozier (Florida Institute for Neurologic Rehabilitation), Daniel D. Knittel (Florida Institute for Neurologic Rehabilitation), Shannon L. Root (Florida Institute for Neurologic Rehabilitation)
Abstract: In the health care industry, information and outcomes management has become an increasingly important aspect of organizational performance for accreditation organizations such as CARF and JCAHO. This shift in emphasis from process to outcome has resulted in many health care organizations adopting objective behavioral measures as indicators of quality health care. The purpose of this poster is to describe the use of measurable data across a wide variety of service areas to monitor, assess, develop and implement interventions to improve the quality of care provided in a brain injury rehabilitation program. Each department identified areas of concern in their service delivery and subsequently developed objective measurable indicators to track changes in quality of service delivery following interventions recommended by the interdisciplinary quality of care committee. Example measures included proportion of client falls due to transfers (PT), percentage of observed appropriate modified diets (SLP), and percentage of clients engaged in appropriate on-task behavior (Behavior), and percentage staff turnover rate (HR). Quarterly review of the indicator trends showed most departments meeting their goals and improving service delivery. The results suggest that applied behavior analysts have much to offer in developing a technology for quality organizational management.
 
 
 
Invited Tutorial #190
2005 ABA Tutorial: The Science of Science
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
International North (2nd floor)
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno)
Presenting Authors: : LINDA J. PARROTT HAYES (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: The sciences are cumulative, consequential enterprises through which we become more effectively oriented to the things and events of the natural world. Scientific enterprises are also cultural enterprises, the implication being that while they may influence the societal conditions out of which they arose, they are also never free of influence from those conditions; and the greater the influence on science from nonscientific sources, the less effectively we are oriented to the natural world. While it is important for scientists of every variety to be watchful of undue influence from non-scientific sources, the science of behavior is especially vulnerable to corruption by this means due to the ubiquity and intimacy of its subject matter. It is, thereby, incumbent upon behavior scientists to periodically examine their work and its products for signs of damage, and to take whatever actions are needed to undue it. This tasks falls to the logician of science and the task itself is what is meant by the science of science. The aim of the tutorial is to provide an overview of this science, including its materials, methods, and products, and to consider its value for the long term well-being of the science of behavior.
 
LINDA J. PARROTT HAYES (University of Nevada, Reno)
Linda J. (Parrott) Hayes received her bachelor’s degree from the University of Manitoba and her master’s and doctoral degrees from Western Michigan University. Prior to her present position, she held faculty appointments at West Virginia University and St. Mary’s University in Canada. Linda is a professor at the University of Nevada, Reno where she co-founded a graduate program in Behavior Analysis and served as its director for over a decade. Linda has been active in the Association for Behavior Analysis throughout her entire career and is currently serving as its President. She is best known for her work in behavior theory and philosophy.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #346
CE Offered: None

Clinical Behavior Analysis for Experimental Behavior Analysts

Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
Boulevard C (2nd floor)
Area: CBM; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Kelly G. Wilson, M.D.
Chair: Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi)
MICHAEL J. DOUGHER (University of New Mexico), Carol Pilgrim (University of North Carolina, Wilmington)
Dr. Michael Dougher is currently a Professor and Director of Clinical Training at the University of New Mexico, where he started his academic career in 1980. He received his bachelor’s degree from UCLA in 1974, and his Ph.D. from the University of Illinois at Chicago in 1980. Dr. Dougher played an important role in the development of the now rapidly growing field of clinical behavior analysis. He conducts basic laboratory research on stimulus equivalence, relational responding and the transformation of functions in an attempt to identify and articulate the complex verbal process that underlie the development and treatment of clinical problems. Dr. Dougher is a Fellow of the American Psychological Society and is currently serving as associate editor for both the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior and The Behavior Analyst.
Abstract:

Clinical behavior analysis has made great strides over the last ten years. It can be distinguished from the larger field of applied behavior analysis in at least three ways. First, it is generally used with verbally competent, free-ranging humans who voluntarily seek treatment for the kinds of problems addressed by mainstream psychotherapy, e.g., depression, anxiety, and interpersonal distress. Second, these clinical problems are not easily understood or explained in terms of basic behavior analytic concepts, such as the three-term contingency. They require a more complex analysis, often involving verbal processes including stimulus equivalence, transformation of function, and relational responding. Third, treatment interventions with these types of clients are typically verbal and do not involve direct manipulation of reinforcement contingencies. The purpose of this talk is to acquaint basic behavior analysts with recent developments in clinical behavior analysis, the basic research that has been most helpful in formulating treatment interventions, and some of the research issues that remain to be addressed. This session was designed to foster dialogue between clinical behavior analysis and the experimental analysis of behavior. In order to facilitate this interaction, Dr. Doughers paper will be followed by approximately fifteen minutes of discussion by Dr. Carol Pilgrim.

 
 
Paper Session #347
Data Collection for Effective Decision-Making
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
Williford B (3rd floor)
Area: EDC
Chair: Benjamin W. Smith (University of Texas, Austin)
 
Washoe County Public Schools Project SAVE: Development and Implementation of a Behavior Systems Approach to K-12 Student Services Assessment
Domain: Service Delivery
JODY M. SILVA (Positive Behavior Support), Thomas L. Sharpe, Jr. (University of Nevada, Reno), Amanda N. Adams (Washoe County School District), Daniel W. Balderson (University of Nevada, Las Vegas)
 
Abstract: An ongoing challenge with applied behavior analysis (ABA) efforts in highly interactive education settings exists with respect to (a) inclusive recording of multiple behavior and stimulus events that typify most educational settings, and (b) capture of the time-based interaction effects across multiple stimuli and response functions among teacher, student, and setting events (Sharpe, in press; Sharpe, Balderson, & So, 2004). This challenge is particularly salient when developing and implementing assessment instruments for children with special needs (Sprague & Horner, 1992, 1994). In response, special education is one area of education that has provided a host of research and evaluation examples in which use of quantitative direct observation and the applied analysis of behavior have been the predominant methods of data gathering and analysis. To this end, this presentation details one district-wide development and implementation effort in relation to how daily assessment tools and long-range Individual Evaluation Plans (IEPs) were constructed using a behavior systems approach. Termed Project SAVE: Special Assessment and Verification of Educational Progress, and designed to serve the Student Services arm of the Washoe, Nevada School District, conceptual summary of this project’s behavior systems approach to assessment is first provided. Next, immediate and long range assessment tools are presented in the context of how these instruments were developed in relation to prioritized district-wide education objectives. Last, select anecdotal and behavioral data are presented in support of assessment tool use in relation to how implementation has benefited (a) students served, and (b) teacher and teacher aide service delivery, (c) student services professional staff service delivery, and (d) district wide research and development efficacy. Implications for educational policy are last provided in the context of the development and implementation activities summarized.
 
Using Computer Technolgy During Educational Observations: A Potential Efficient Alterative to Experiemental Analysis of Behavior
Domain: Applied Research
GARY L. CATES (Illinois State University), Rebecca Chambers (Johnson Elementary School)
 
Abstract: AbstractSchool personnel are often required to conduct functional behavior assessments. Two problems exist. First, experimental analyses in public schools and other natural settings are not always feasible. Second, traditional direct observations methods (i.e. paper and pencil) do not provide information with regard to behavioral function. The current study investigated the functional utility of a computer based observation data collection system in a public educational classroom setting as an alternative. Specifically three students of an alternative school for students with behavior disorders were referred for behavior problems. The school psychologist investigated the extent to which the computer technology could be used to a) collect data in such an environment, b) facilitate hypothesis generation of behavioral function, c) facilitate in the validation of the generated hypothesis d) facilitate in the development of a e) facilitate in the evaluation of the treatment, and f) provide treatment integrity data. The three cases provide evidence for the utility of such technologies for school personnel who conduct behavioral observations. Discussion focuses on the implications for practitioners and directions for future research.
 
Sequential Analysis of Student-Teacher Interaction Patterns
Domain: Applied Research
BENJAMIN W. SMITH (University of Texas, Austin)
 
Abstract: This presentation presents findings from several studies that examined the problematic interaction patterns between elementary school students with significant behavior support needs and their teachers. Predictable escalation patterns and teacher use of ineffective strategies were documented through the use of sequential analyses. These findings were used to develop ongoing training and teacher support plans to increase teacher use of more effective antecedent and consequence-based strategies. IOA statistics were calculated using Cohens-k and were above .65 for all behavioral codes.
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #348
CE Offered: None

EAHB-SIG Distinguished Career Award: J. Grayson Osborne, Ph.D.

Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
Boulevard C (2nd floor)
Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Richard W. Serna, M.Ed.
Chair: Richard W. Serna (E.K. Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts Medical School)
GRAYSON OSBORNE (Utah State University)
Dr. J. Grayson Osborne received his Ph.D. in psychology from Arizona State University in 1968 under the mentorship of Lee Meyerson. In 1969 Dr. Osborne joined the Department of Psychology at Utah State University in Logan, Utah, where he became Emeritus Professor in 2004. Dr. Osborne has served multiple terms on the editorial boards of Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, The Behavior Analyst, Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, and Behavior Interventions, and was consulting editor for Rehabilitation Psychology (formerly Psychological Aspects of Disability). Dr. Osborne has served as a teacher, mentoring 4 masters students and 18 doctoral students; as a clinician, working as a consultant for schools in Utah and Canada and designing behavioral interventions for individuals with developmental disabilities and hearing impairments; and as a scientist, publishing over 43 research papers, theoretical papers, and monographs, as well as co-authoring four books, including Fundamentals of behavior (with Richard Powers) and Psychology, adjustment, and everyday living (with Garry Martin). His empirical research, spanning nearly four decades, has focused on behavioral interventions and on stimulus control, particularly conditional discrimination and stimulus equivalence in children and adults.
Abstract:

The author reflects on 40 years in the field from its (western) beginnings at Arizona State University circa 1960 to his retirement as Emeritus Professor at Utah State University in 2004. In between he discusses early applied behavior analysis; experimental child psychology; and the experimental analysis of behavior program at Utah State University, including its students, who, it can be presumed, are at least partially responsible for the present award.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #349
Observations and Recommendations on the Interaction of Behavior Analysis and Developmental Psychology
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
Lake Michigan (8th floor)
Area: DEV; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Martha Pelaez, Ph.D.
Chair: Martha Pelaez (Florida International University)
PETER HARZEM (Auburn University)
Peter Harzem was educated at the Universities of London and Wales. Together with T.R. Miles he was founder of a new Department of Psychology at the University of Wales-Bangor, where he established the “Experimental Analysis of Behavior Unit”. In 1978 he moved to Auburn University where, again, it fell on him to found a graduate program in the Experimental Analysis of Behavior. He is now the Hudson Professor of Psychology at that university. He has been an Associate Editor of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior responsible for papers reporting human research and has processed the early papers on stimulus equivalence including Sidman’s seminal papers. Together with Emilio Ribes he is founder of the biennial series, “International Congress on Behaviorism and the Sciences of Behavior”. The 9th in the series will be held in 2006 He has lectured in many countries, and his works have been translated into several languages. He is working on two books: a biography of John B. Watson nearing conclusion after many years of work, and a book tentatively entitled, “The Search for the Mind” on the history of the concept of mind and the place of the behavioral perspectives in that search. (Dr. Harzem’s picture, left, is a detail of a portrait painted by Denise Ross.)
Abstract: The basic concepts and techniques of behavior analysis have had a presence in developmental psychology for some 70 years. Although that presence has increased in recent decades, and some of the basic behavioral techniques have tacitly been adopted, explicit recognition of the place of behavior analysis in developmental literature remains scanty. This needs to be corrected--not, of course, merely in pursuit of fame and fortune but because recognition of the significance of behavioral principles should lead the deveopmental theorist/researcher/practitioner to go to the literature of behavior analysis in search of conceptual and practical solutions, with untold consequent benefit to theory and practice. To that end there are two fundamental questions that need answers: Given that behavioral contingencies naturally operate everywhere, and the effectiveness of the techniques of behavior analysis have been shown, why does behavior analysis still not have a broad place in developmental psychology? And how can this be corrected? This paper briefly reviews the roots and entry of the behavioral perspective into developmental psychology and its subsequent progress, and explores answers to the questions posed here.
 
 
Paper Session #349a
The Experimental Synthesis of Behavior: Toward Unification of Psychology
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
Private Dining Room 1 (3rd floor)
Area: EAB
Chair: Ruben Ardila (National University of Colombia)
 
The Experimental Synthesis of Behavior: Toward Unification of Psychology
Domain: Applied Research
RUBEN ARDILA (National University of Colombia)
 
Abstract: N/a
 
 
 
Symposium #350
BACB Exam Preparation and Issues
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Lake Erie (8th floor)
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Stephen E. Eversole (Behavior Development Solutions)
Abstract: As the number of BCBAs/BCABAs approaches 4,000 and the influence of certification on the field of behavior analysis grows, it is appropriate to discuss issues related to the certification process and methodologies being used to qualify candidates to sit and prepare for the BACB exam. Programs to be discussed include one specializing in criminal justice for practitioners working to prevent and treat childhood and adult offenders (St. Joseph's University), along with the unique and experience this program provides. In addition, start-up, admission criteria, and the admission process for an associate level behavior analysis curriculum for undergraduate students (St. Joseph's University) will be discussed. We will also present survey data on a computer program designed to help individuals prepare for the BACB exam (CBA Learning Module Series). Issues to be discussed include the recent BACB policy related to the phase-out process of independently taught courses, maintaining quality and integrity of independent courses, and the plans for a new curriculum to meet BACB course hour requirements that go into effect with the Fall, 2005 exam.
 
St. Joseph's University's Applied Behavior Analysis Masters Subtrack in Criminal Justice
JOSEPH D. CAUTILLI (St. Joseph's University), Dziewolska Halina (St. Joseph's University), Richard Weissman (St. Joseph's University), Patricia Griffin (Saint Joseph's University)
Abstract: St. Joseph's University offers the only applied behavior analysis subtrack in criminal justice. This program is designed for those who wish to function providing behavioral intervention in the prevention and treatment of childhood and adult offenders. The ABA subtrack has been BCBA approved for the last three years. This symposium explores the courses offered in the program and the unique training and experience that this program offers to students. Faculty will present the program and the admission process.
 
The Undergraduate Behavior Analysis Program at St. Joseph's University
DZIEWOLSKA HALINA (St. Joseph's University), Joseph D. Cautilli (St. Joseph's University), Richard Weissman (St. Joseph's University), Patricia Griffin (Saint Joseph's University)
Abstract: With the ever growing popularity of applied behavior analysis in Pennsylvania, St. Joseph's University is beginning the process of developing an associate level behavior analysis program for undergraduate students. This program will offer the students the opportunity to learn behavioral principles and how to apply those principles to children and adults from various populations including autism, developmental disability, and children with emotional and behavioral disorders. Careful emphasis will be placed on demonstrating how each of the techniques utilized encompass behavioral principles. This symposium will focus on the first year start up issues for the program as well as the admission criteria and process.
 
Survey Results on the CBA Learning Module Series
STEPHEN E. EVERSOLE (Behavior Development Solutions)
Abstract: Development of the CBA Learning Module Series began in 1995. Since it went on sale in 1998, it has been used by hundreds of individuals to prepare for the Florida CBA exam and the BCBA/BCABA exams. Results of a recent survey conducted support the programs efficacy with respect to helping candidates pass the exam. The instructional design model employed and educational content development will be discussed. Other applications of the instructional design model will be entertained, as will features on the new version to be released next year, and tips on taking the exam.
 
Behavior Analyst Certification Training
MICHAEL WEINBERG (Southbury Training School)
Abstract: In the past year, there have been significant changes in policies by the BACB pertaining to independent courses pre-approved by Florida DCF, which are now accepted by the BACB towards certification requirements. A discussion of issues pertaining to the phase-out process of these courses and continuing to maintain quality and integrity of independent courses, plus the plans for a new curriculum to meet BACB course hour requirements that go into effect with the Fall, 2005 exam will be presented.
 
 
Paper Session #351
Behavior Analysis and Community Service: Challenges and Successes
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Lake Huron (8th floor)
Area: CSE
Chair: Elizabeth A. Granucci (Infinite Possibilities in Behavior Support, LLC)
 
Reducing Waste and Increasing the Selection of Reusable Dinner-ware in a High Volume Cafeteria
Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER C. MANUEL (New York University), Ryan B. Olson (Santa Clara University), Mary Anne Sunseri (Santa Clara University)
 
Abstract: Customer choices in a University cafeteria were observed during peak lunch time periods for half hour sessions across two academic quarters. Direct observation and informant assessment techniques informed the intervention plan to increase the selection of reusable dinner-ware. During baseline an average of 2.85% (SD = 1.23) of patrons selected reusable cups and 33.86% (SD = 4.76) selected reusable plates, bowls, or baskets. Environmental rearrangement and small signs increased reusable cups to 9.21% (SD = 2.80, d = 4.48) and increased reusable plates, bowls, and baskets to 37.92% (SD = 8.18, d = 1.59). Control by the first intervention was demonstrated with a reversal to baseline and additional improvements were created through feedback and more intrusive interventions. Environmental rearrangement was partially maintained across academic quarters without researcher involvement. The results are discussed within the context of striving for techniques that result in sustainable community level behavior change.
 
Legal and Ethical Issues Facing Direct Care Staff Working with People with Developmental Disabilities
Domain: Theory
ZHANKUN CHENG (The Habilitation Corporation), Lisa M. Boisvert (Behavior Management for Adults and Children), Benny Howard (Behavior Service of Tennessee)
 
Abstract: Some legal and ethical issues facing direct care staff working with people with developmental disabilities are examined. The four highly regarded ethical principles (autonomy, beneficence, non-maleficence, justice) and some key legal guidelines in the ADA are discussed through integrating the presenters’ real case analyses. Implications for training direct care staff are provided.
 
The Analysis of Natural Support Strategies for Young People with Behavior Problems in Work Settings
Domain: Applied Research
ELIZABETH A. GRANUCCI (Infinite Possibilities in Behavior Support, LLC), Robin Wagner Hogsholm (University of South Florida), Debbie Westerlund (Westerlund and Associates), Hewitt B. Clark (University of South Florida)
 
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to demonstrate the effectiveness of coworker mentors on improving employment-related verbal behavior, task performance, and productivity of young people (ages 16 -18) with behavior disorders and/or learning disabilities. Participants were training for cosmetology in a vocational/technical school. Each coworker mentor conducted training with participants by demonstrating the correct task, providing corrective feedback, and delivering descriptive praise on targeted work-related verbal behaviors or task performances; or used a goal setting procedure (included prompts and feedback) to increase targeted productivity. A multiple baseline design across behaviors analyzed the effects of coworker mentor training on their ability to improve participant’s target behaviors. Each of the six participants had a separate mentor. Findings are illustrated through one participant. Figure 1 shows the multiple baseline for Nicoletta across two verbal behaviors: a) inquiries about comfort and b) suggestive selling statements. Nicoletta rarely used comfort or suggestive selling statements during baseline. Once the coworker mentor was trained in the intervention methods, the participant’s behavior improved as the intervention was applied. The inter-observer agreement for Nicoletta’s verbal behaviors ranged from 80% to 100%, with a mean of 98%. In a post-intervention questionnaire, Nicoletta expressed satisfaction with the coworker mentor teaching her new skills and attributed greater confidence in her work to this experience. Similar findings, although not all as pronounced as that of Nicoletta, occurred across all participants. The authors will discuss the implications of the study findings regarding the use of natural supports in the work place to assist young people with challenges in learning and applying new work skills.
 
 
 
Symposium #352
Behavioral Assessment and Treatment for Sex Offenders with Mental Retardation
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Stevens 1 (Lower Level)
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
CE Instructor: Timothy R. Vollmer, Ph.D.
Abstract: This symposium will include four papers describing an assessment and treatment model for developmentally disabled sex offenders. The first presentation given by David Pyles will present some prevalence data from the state of Illinois and will highlight many of the administrative and clinical challenges that arise in developing programs for this population. The second presentation given by Robert Reed, is a historical program overview of the Seguin Unit, a program designed for the aforementioned assessment and treatment. The third presentation given by Kimberly Sloman, is a data based description of the collaborative effort between the University of Florida and the Seguin Unit. This collaboration is designed to evaluate the efficacy of existing and proposed procedures. The final presentation given by Jorge Reyes shows some of the outcome data associated with the respondent arousal assessment procedures.
 
An Evaluation of the Need for Behavioral Services for Sex Offenders with Developmental Disabilities on a Statewide Level
DAVID A. PYLES (Behavior Intervention Systems, Inc.)
Abstract: The goal of the current presentation is to draw attention to the need for an organized program to deal with developmentally delayed sex offenders in the state of Illinois. Currently, no specific program exists to deal with this population. General prevalence statistics will be presented in addition to representative individual case studies where relevant. The presentation should show the need to develop a centralized, behaviorally based treatment program that would deal with all members of the population across the state.
 
Overview of the Seguin Unit
ROBERT H. REED (The Seguin Unit), Astrid Hall (The Seguin Unit), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Jorge Rafael Reyes (University of Florida)
Abstract: This presentation will provide a detailed description of the historical development of the assessment and treatment of sex offenders and the Seguin Unit. The Seguin Unit provides behavioral assessments and treatments for developmentally disabled individuals who have committed felony offenses. The focus of the current presentation is on the approaches that have been developed to assess and treat behavior related to sexual offenses toward children. These assessments and treatments take place in a larger context of skill development and behavioral teaching. The use of plethysmograph technology, portable plethysmograph technology, and the various assessment instruments used for testing of deviant arousal will be described.
 
University of Florida/Seguin Unit Collaboration
KIMBERLY SLOMAN (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Jorge Rafael Reyes (University of Florida), Astrid Hall (The Seguin Unit), Robert H. Reed (The Seguin Unit), Gregory Jensen (The Seguin Unit), Sam Carr (The Seguin Unit)
Abstract: The Seguin Unit provides behavioral assessment and treatment for developmentally delayed sex offenders who have committed crimes against children. Recently, the University of Florida has collaborated with the Seguin Unit to evaluate existing procedures and develop new assessment and treatments. This presentation will describe the proposed model of assessment and treatment and some preliminary outcome data. The model will include classical conditioning approaches related to deviant sexual arousal and operant approaches to skills training. The skills training component is designed to teach appropriate avoidance behavior to situations that may result in dangerous contact with children. This will be described in the context of existing published research.
 
Assessment and Treatment of Deviant Sexual Arousal
JORGE RAFAEL REYES (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Kimberly Sloman (University of Florida), Astrid Hall (The Seguin Unit), Gregory Jensen (The Seguin Unit), Sam Carr (The Seguin Unit)
Abstract: Participants at a treatment facility for adult developmentally delayed offenders were tested for deviant arousal. Data were evaluated to identify differential response patterns to child stimuli (e.g., children wearing bathing suits) in comparison to “normal” arousing stimuli (e.g., adults wearing bathing suits). A system of evaluation was used involving a plethysmograph, designed to measure penile tumescence in the presence of various stimuli. Results showed three general patterns: a) deviant arousal to a specific age category and gender, b) deviant arousal across a range of child age groups, and c) deviant arousal. To our knowledge, this is the first demonstration of repeated measurement of deviant sexual arousal using visual analysis of stability over time. Assessments also included tests of appropriate responding in situations described as high risk. Implications for intervention will be presented, including classical conditioning approach, manipulation of establishing operations, and operant avoidance training
 
 
Symposium #353
Designing Alternate Assessment to Improve Educational Outcomes for Students with Significant Cognitive Disabilities
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Stevens 2 (Lower Level)
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Timothy A. Slocum (Utah State University)
Discussant: Fred Spooner (University of North Carolina, Charlotte)
Abstract: Federal legislation requires every state to administer an alternate assessment to students who, due to significant cognitive disabilities (SCD), are unable to participate in the general accountability testing. If these alternate assessments are well conceptualized and carefully designed, they can offer educational benefits beyond simply meeting a federal reporting requirement. The information provided by alternate assessments is critical to ensuring that educational programs and outcomes for these students remain visible and important to parents, community members, and those in the position to allocate resources. Further, a well designed alternate assessment can support ongoing progress monitoring and can be linked to curriculum materials and instructional practices. The papers in this symposium will describe Utah’s Alternate Assessment and discuss the (a) rationale underlying design decisions; (b) results from a validity study of this assessment, including content, performance standards, implementation fidelity, scoring reliability, and generalization; and (c) behavioral principles involved in large-scale alternate assessment, including the effects of contingencies attached to the alternate assessment outcomes.
 
Utah’s Alternate Assessment: Design and Rationale
BARBARA FIECHTL (Utah State University), Karen D. Hager (Utah State University), Timothy A. Slocum (Utah State University)
Abstract: Federal legislation mandates that each state implement an alternate assessment system for students with significant cognitive disabilities who are unable to participate in the general accountability testing. Alternate assessments must be appropriate for a small, yet widely diverse population, making the design of alternate assessments a challenging undertaking. Thus, it is critical to provide a clear rationale for the choices made during the design of these assessment systems. This paper describes the underlying rationale for decisions made during the design of a performance-based alternate assessment system, including (a) negotiating a balance between standardization and individualization, (b) developing specified assessment tasks from which assessment targets are selected, (c) identifying performance criteria, (d) requiring independent performance of the tasks, (e) requiring evidence of generalization, and (f) administering the assessment in naturally occurring routines.
 
Validity of an Alternate Assessment: Research Results
KAREN D. HAGER (Utah State University), Timothy A. Slocum (Utah State University)
Abstract: This paper will describe results from a comprehensive validity study of a performance-based alternate assessment system. The design of this study reflects the current understanding of validity as a unified concept, comprised of many different aspects that must be evaluated together in order to make a judgment. Validity questions in this study focused on (a) the relevance and representativeness of the content of the assessment, (b) the appropriateness of the performance standards, (c) the reliability of testers following the administration and scoring procedures, (d) the stability of the performances across time and other variables, and (e) the likely effects of implementation of this assessment. The results will be presented, including overall conclusions regarding the validity of this instrument for assessing adequate yearly progress for students with significant cognitive disabilities.
 
Behavioral Principles Involved in Large-Scale Alternate Assessment
TIMOTHY A. SLOCUM (Utah State University), Karen D. Hager (Utah State University)
Abstract: This paper examines alternate assessment for students with significant cognitive disabilities from the perspective of contingencies. Alternate assessment is a component of the No Child Left Behind Act (NCLB). NCLB can be seen as a set of rules that describe a set of contingencies. These contingencies include some very significant aversive consequences for schools contingent upon failure to achieve “adequate yearly progress” (AYP). Alternate assessment results contribute to AYP and therefore maximizing these results would be expected to be highly motivated. The key question regarding the impact of NCLB on students with significant cognitive disabilities is whether the behaviors that maximize AYP also improve educational outcomes for the students. To the degree that alternate assessment results reflect actual improvements in students’ skills, the contingencies specified by NCLB would be expected to motivate behavior that improves students’ skills. However, to the degree that these assessment results reflect factors other than improvements in students’ skills, NCLB may motivate behavior that does not improve outcomes for these students. Thus, the validity of alternate assessments, that is the degree to which they reflect student learning of important skills, is a critical factor determining the impact of NCLB on students with significant cognitive disabilities.
 
 
Symposium #354
Edward F. Malagodi Symposium One: Experimental Analyst, Philosopher, Radical Behaviorist
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
International South (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Jeff Kupfer (Jeff Kupfer, PA, and Florida Residential Solutions, LLC)
CE Instructor: Jeff Kupfer, Ph.D.
Abstract: These symposia are devoted to celebrating the works of E. F. Malagodi (1935 – 1996), and recognizing his contributions to the science of behavior. The contributing speakers are behavior analysts who were graduate students under Malagodi, and colleagues that worked closely with Malagodi at the University of Florida. The two symposia are classified into areas in which Malagodi had significant influence upon behavior analysis. The first symposium consists of four papers devoted to human and non-human experimental analyses in sensory and conditioned reinforcement, and experimental psychopathology. The second symposium consists of three papers and a discussion devoted to Radical behaviorism, extending behavior analyses to cultural issues, and Malagodi’s impact on the development of graduate training at the University of Florida.
 
Shedding Light on the Problem of Conditioned Reinforcement
RONALD F. ALLEN (Ivy Street School), Jeff Kupfer (Jeff Kupfer, PA)
Abstract: A series of experiments with pigeons explored stimulus conditions under two- and three-link second-order chained schedules of food presentation. In each study, illumination of a houselight during a component schedule produced rate enhancement effects in the component preceding it.This “houselight effect” had not been examined explicitly in previous studies; however, a review of the literature suggests uncontrolled houselight conditions may account for discrepancies between experimental findings. Kupfer, Allen & Malagodi (1980) conducted a replication of Stubbs (1972) study on conditioned reinforcement. Systematic manipulation of brief-stimulus presentations, both with and without the houselight illumination accounted for Stubb’s general. Results support the general notion that brief-stimuli paired with food presentation enhances response rates and generates patterns of responding similar to those generated when component schedules terminate with food delivery.
 
E. F. Malagodi's Work on Shock-Maintained Behavior: A Case History in Scientific Method
RAYMOND C. PITTS (University of North Carolina, Wilmington)
Abstract: In this presentation, I will review some of Ed’s work investigating the maintenance of behavior by the presentation of electric shock and use it to illustrate his experimental approach to addressing perplexing problems.
 
What's the Response Requirement Got to Do with It: Ed Malagodi's Contribution to the Nature of Adjunctive Behavior
ANNE S. KUPFER (Arizona State University)
Abstract: Adjunctive behavior is considered by some to be just another instance of either operant or respondent behavior. But to Ed, it was clearly different and worthy of a separate classification. The nature of adjunctive behavior and its relation to establishing operations and emotions will be discussed.
 
Back to the Future: E. F. Malagodi's Enduring Contributions to Token Reinforcement
TIMOTHY D. HACKENBERG (University of Florida)
Abstract: The field of token reinforcement was substantially enriched and refined by the work of Malagodi and students in the 1960s and 1970s. Prior to this, the laboratory study of token reinforcement had been conducted exclusively with chimpanzees as subjects and poker chips as tokens. Malagodi extended token reinforcement to a different species (rats) and a different token (marbles). But more importantly, Malagodi's research laid the groundwork for a systematic exploration of variables operating within a token reinforcement system, while at the same time, established connections to broader issues in the analysis of behavior--conditioned reinforcement, chaining and temporal organization, response units, to name a few. In this talk I will summarize Malagodi's enduring contributions to the field of token reinforcement, including some recent research to illustrate the extent to which his legacy survives on the contemporary scene.
 
 
Symposium #355
Ethanol Self-Administration
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Lake Ontario (8th floor)
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: This symposium will examine reinforcement parameters that affect ethanol self-administration. The first paper by Jimenez-Gomez and Shahan will describe how the resistance to change of ethanol self-administration in rats is affected by behavioral and pharmacological disruptors. The second paper by Fox and Reilly will report data regarding the effects of work requirement on ethanol polydipsia in rats. The third paper by Flory and Woods will describe the effects of dose and infusion speed on intravenous ethanol self-administration in rhesus monkeys. In the fourth paper, Martinetti and colleagues will examine matching functions in alcohol-preferring, non-preferring, and randomly bred rats.
 
Resistance to Change of Ethanol Self-Administration: Effects of Behavioral and Pharmacological Disruptors
CORINA JIMENEZ-GOMEZ (Utah State University), Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University)
Abstract: Drug self-administration has proven to be an adequate model for assessing variables that contribute to the maintenance of drug taking. The present experiment is concerned with the persistence of drug self-administration, a defining characteristic of drug dependence and abuse. Findings from studies of the resistance to change of food-maintained responding may contribute to a better understanding of the persistence of drug abuse and dependence. Using an animal model of alcohol self-administration, this study evaluates the effects of rate of reinforcement on the persistence of ethanol self-administration in rats in the face of behavioral (i.e., extinction) and pharmacological (i.e., naltrexone) disruptors. Four naïve Long Evans rats were trained to respond for a 10% (vol/vol) ethanol solution on a multiple variable-interval (VI) 15-s VI 45-s schedule of reinforcement. Baseline response rates were higher for the component that provided higher rates of ethanol delivery. Consistent with behavioral momentum theory, responding was more resistant to extinction in the component with higher rates of ethanol delivery. Disruption with naltrexone (1.0, 3.0, 10.0 mg/kg, sc), injected one hour before the session, is currently being conducted. Results will be discussed in terms of the utility of behavioral momentum theory in understanding the persistence of drug taking.
 
Periodic Food Delivery Induces Greater Ethanol Polydispia When Rats Have to Work for Food
ANDREW T. FOX (Central Michigan University), Mark P. Reilly (Central Michigan University)
Abstract: The following study was undertaken to determine the relative contributions of effort and interreinforcement interval in determining the level of ethanol polydipsia in rats. Rats were trained to lever press for food under ratio schedules. Two procedures were employed. In the first, rats lever pressed for food according to a modified progressive ratio schedule that increased geometrically every ten reinforcers or two minutes. In the second, rats lever pressed for food according to a fixed ratio schedule that increased geometrically across sessions. In both procedures, a liquid delivery spout containing a ten percent solution of ethanol was freely available during sessions. Licks on the spout were recorded. After training on these procedures, half of the rats were yoked so that food was delivered independently of their behavior and according to the rate of food earned by the master rats. Preliminary results indicate a lawful relationship between inter-food interval and ethanol consumption. Ethanol consumption was reduced when rats received response-independent food compared to response-dependent food. Results will be discussed in terms of the importance of work in predicting polydipsia and also how the scheduling of alternative reinforcers affects drug consumption.
 
The Reinforcing Efficacy of Intravenously Self-Administered Ethanol by Rhesus Monkeys as a Function of Dose and Infusion Speed
GRAHAM FLORY (University of Michigan), James H. Woods (University of Michigan)
Abstract: It has repeatedly been found that when the dose of orally self-administered ethanol is varied, total session intake remains relatively stable. This has led many to believe that ethanol self-administration is motivated by the attainment of a threshold level of circulating drug in the brain. If this is in fact correct, then animals should orally self-administer the same amount of ethanol as they self-administer intravenously. However, when given the opportunity to intravenously self-administer ethanol, rhesus monkeys will invariably consume 300-400% more ethanol than they will by the oral route. By examining a sufficiently broad range of doses, it has become apparent that the attainment of a threshold level of ethanol in the brain is not a necessary component of an animal’s motivation to self-administer it. The differences seen between the oral and intravenous routes of self-administration are simply one of dose, with larger doses engendering greater levels of intake. This phenomenon can be understood by viewing consumption as a measure of reinforcing efficacy, which increases with the more rapid onset of pharmacological effect that characterizes larger drug doses.
 
Matching Law Analyses of Ethanol and Sucrose Consumption in Alcohol-Preferring (P), Non-Preferring (NP), and Randomly Bred Rats
MARGARET P. MARTINETTI (The College of New Jersey), Sally R. Vona (The College of New Jersey), Alison Wichnick (The College of New Jersey), Matthew E. Andrzejewski (University of Wisconsin-Madison)
Abstract: Recently, quantitative models of choice have been applied to the study of drug and alcohol consumption. Specifically, the matching law has been used to describe the nature of ethanol as a reinforcer. This talk will include data from several studies conducted using the matching law to assess relative consumption of differing ethanol and sucrose solutions in a limited-access, two-bottle choice procedure. Our earliest work examined relative consumption of unsweetened ethanol solutions in Sprague-Dawley rats. The ratio of ethanol concentrations fairly reliably predicted relative consumption of those solutions for most of the animals, and g/kg ethanol consumption was positively correlated with sensitivity to the ratio of concentrations. In a second study, P and NP rats were given access to differing ethanol solutions in the same paradigm and relative consumption was assessed as a function of relative ethanol concentration.In that study, P rats consistently overmatched, showing high sensitivities, while NP data were variable. Current research to be presented at the meeting includes two additional matching law studies investigating 1) differing concentrations of sucrose and 2) saccharin-sweetened ethanol solutions containing differing amounts of ethanol. Both of these studies will use P, NP, and Wistar rats.
 
 
Symposium #356
Int'l Symposium - Experimental, Computational, and Observational Analyses of Complex Language Behavior
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Stevens 4 (Lower Level)
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Denis P. O'Hora (University of Ulster)
Abstract: Behavioral accounts of complex language responding have sharply increased in complexity in recent years with the analysis of derived relational responding. In a landscape previously dominated by Skinner’s (1957) Verbal Behavior, novel behavioral approaches such as Relational Frame Theory (Hayes, Barnes-Holmes & Roche, 2001) have emerged. These new approaches ask new questions about human language behavior and to answer these new questions, new techniques are emerging. The current symposium includes four studies that employ a variety of techniques in the analysis of such behavior. The first two papers employ a basic experimental approach. The first paper examines interference effects that may occur due to functional equivalences between words in the English language, the second examines syntactic and semantic bootstrapping. The third paper employs computer modeling to examine productive sequential responding and highlights the advantages of this technique. The fourth paper introduces a time-dependent statistical technique called recurrence quantification analysis that will allow behavior analysts to deal with much larger corpora of behavior than typically possible in laboratory or applied settings.
 
Orthographic and Phonological Interference in Derived Relational Responding
IAN THOMAS TYNDALL (American College, Dublin), Denis P. O'Hora (University of Ulster)
Abstract: In human language, words have visual (orthographic) and auditory (phonological) features that vary in similarity of function. Previous research suggests that the provision of formally (Stewart, Barnes-Holmes, Roche & Smeets, 2002) and functionally (Tyndall, Roche & James, 2004) similar incorrect comparisons may impede the establishment of equivalence classes. In the current study, four three-member equivalence classes were established using real words and then four conditions were employed during testing. In the first condition, incorrect comparisons (e.g., bug) were visually similar and rhymed with the sample (e.g., rug). In the second, incorrect comparisons (e.g., tow) rhymed with the sample (e.g., hoe) but were not visually similar. In the third, incorrect comparisons (e.g., rough) were visually similar to the sample but did not rhyme (e.g., bough). In the final condition, incorrect comparisons (e.g., bun) neither rhymed nor were visually similar to the sample (e.g., tip). Findings demonstrated that both orthogonal and phonological similarities interfered with demonstration of equivalence relations. These findings have implications for early language training and for a behavioral understanding of dyslexia.
 
Semantic and Syntactic Bootstrapping: Experimental analyses
DENIS P. O'HORA (University of Ulster), Richard Dale (Cornell University)
Abstract: O’Hora and Dale (2004) outlined a behavioral model of syntactic and semantic boot strapping in terms of derived relational responding. The current paper reports two experiments in which such responding was examined. In Stage 1 of Experiment 1, participants were trained to choose an arbitrary shape (circle, square or triangle) in the presence of three nonsense syllables, A1, A2 and A3. In a second stage, participants were trained to choose the sequence, A1 then A2 then A3. Participants were then trained to choose B1 in the presence of A1, B2 in the presence of A2 and B3 in the presence of A3 and were tested for the derived sequence, B1 then B2 then B3. Novel stimuli were then included in this new derived sequence and acquired sequential functions by exclusion; N1 then B2 then B3, B1 then N2 then B3, B1 then B2 then N3. In a final test, participants were presented with N1, N2 and N3 and were required to choose one of the arbitrary shapes from Stage 1. A number of participants demonstrated this performance. Experiment 2 examined these performances in further detail. These procedures suggest alternative sources of productivity in early language training.
 
Modeling Sequential Response Classes Sequentially: A Connectionist Approach
RICHARD DALE (Cornell University), Michael Spivey (Cornell University)
Abstract: Jordan (1989) and Elman (1990) devised neural network architectures for exploring behavior extended in time and are now widely applied in the cognitive sciences (Botvinick & Plaut, 2004; Christiansen & Chater, 1999; Gaskell, Hare & Marslen-Wilson, 1995). There is also a budding literature within behavior analysis on applying connectionist techniques to complex human behavior (e.g., Barnes & Hampson, 1994; Cullinan, Barnes, Hampson & Lyddy, 1994). These network architectures are particularly well suited to capture the properties of generalized sequential response classes (Green, Stromer & Mackay, 1991; Lazar, 1977; Wulfert & Hayes, 1986). In this paper, I present a series of simulations that produce generalized sequential responses in a simple recurrent network (Elman, 1990). By building models that map onto current theory and empirical findings, the model may serve a predictive role. For example, one may ask about limitations on the length of sequential response classes. Because experimenters are subject to considerable limitations on how long and persistently human participants can be trained, these models offer access to experimental circumstances not readily available to researchers.
 
Uncovering Temporal and Structural Patterns in Complex Behavior: Categorical Recurrence Analysis
RICHARD DALE (Cornell University), Michael Spivey (Cornell University)
Abstract: In this paper, we review and extend a time-dependent statistical technique, recurrence quantification analysis (Zbilut & Webber, 1992), for observing patterns of behavior as they are organized in time. We adapt this technique with the goal of drawing general quantitative characterizations of complex behavior, and demonstrate its utility in studying language learning and structure. Initial analyses indicate this technique provides rich opportunity for investigating the development of language structure and performance. Despite the apparent noisiness of the child-caregiver interaction databases used, the analysis generates results consistent with previous research, and offers insight into the temporal organization of language acquisition in context. In particular, the temporal properties of the analysis reveal constraints on language learning unexplored in more common, static analyses (i.e., frame-based structural analyses, Mintz, 2003). This statistical method may be used across many areas of the behavioral sciences as a categorical technique for finding structure in units of measure at a higher time scale than what has yet been offered. These techniques are of particular interest to behavior analysts because of the explicit focus on the historical and dynamic nature of behavior.
 
 
Paper Session #357
Improving School-Wide Behavior Support Programs
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Williford C (3rd floor)
Area: EDC
Chair: Shanna Hagan-Burke (University of Georgia)
 
School-Wide Positive Behavioral Support
Domain: Applied Research
SHANNA HAGAN-BURKE (University of Georgia), Mack D. Burke (University of Georgia), Tracy L. Blankenship (University of Georgia), Maria F. Wynne (University of Georgia)
 
Abstract: Addressing the social-behavioral issues presented by children from diverse backgrounds is of great social significance. States across the nation are serving students who are entering school who are more different than similar to one another. Many of these learners are exposed to risk factors that place them at-risk for developing antisocial behavior patterns. To address the needs of at-risk students, effective and efficient prevention and intervention approaches should be implemented focused on preventing the occurrence and development antisocial behaviors. The purpose of this presentation is to provide results from a cohort of elementary and middle schools who are implementing School-Wide Positive Behavioral Support. Initial results will be provided focused on fidelity of implementation measures and office discipline referrals. Challenges of implementing positive behavioral support on a large scale will be discussed.
 
When School-Wide Behavior Support is Not Enough: Implementing the Behavior Education Program to Reduce Problem Behavior
Domain: Applied Research
LEANNE HAWKEN (University of Utah), Katherine Sandra MacLeod (University of Utah)
 
Abstract: The BEP is a targeted intervention that can be implemented school-wide to support students who demonstrate persistent but not dangerous patterns of problem behavior and who do not respond well to school-wide behavioral expectations. This paper will present preliminary results of an OSEP funded three year research project examining the effects of the BEP at the elementary school level. An overview of the BEP will be discussed with a framework for how it fits into a school's overall system of behavior support. The presentation will include the effects of the BEP on office discipline referrals as well as data on fidelity of implementation. For example, 9 of the 12 (75%) students included in the study showed reductions in office discipline referrals. Social validity informationas it relates to program acceptance, efficiency and effectiveness of the program will also be presented. Examples of schools currently using the BEP will be discussed.
 
An Application of the Behavior Education Program (BEP): Procedures, Suggestions for Set Up and Monitoring
Domain: Applied Research
KATHERINE SANDRA MACLEOD (University of Utah), Linda Rawlings (Academy Park Elementary School)
 
Abstract: The Behavior Education Program (BEP) is a targeted intervention that can be implemented school wide to support students who demonstrate persistent but not dangerous patterns of problem behavior and who do not respond well to school-wide behavioral expectations. This session will provide details of an application of the BEP in a 655 student elementary school with a high "at risk" student population. Strategies on fitting the BEP into a schools overall system of behavior support will be provided. Procedures for intervention development, methods of program evaluation and methods for ensuring on going teacher support will be discussed. This session will provide researchers and educators with practical information on setting up the BEP and ensuring continued effectiveness.
 
 
 
Symposium #358
Joint Control: Analysis, Applications and Implications
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Stevens 3 (Lower Level)
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Joyce C. Tu (Center for Behavioral Science)
Discussant: David C. Palmer (Smith College)
Abstract: There are three data-based studies presented in this symposium. In the first study, joint control training was applied when teaching selection responses to four non-vocal children with autism. In the second study, joint control training was applied when teaching five adult females to acquire a generalized sequencing behavior using an unfamiliar language. In the third study, the role of modeling and automatic reinforcement was explicated when teaching passive voice to six typically developed children. All three studies attempted to explore the role of joint control in the acquisition of complex human behavior.
 
The Role of Joint Control in the Manded Selection Responses of Non-vocal Children with Autism.
JOYCE C. TU (Center for Behavioral Science)
Abstract: In the present study, joint control training was applied when teaching selection responses to four non-vocal children with autism. This study is a systematic replication of Tu (2001). The children were two males (ages six and seven), and two females (ages twelve and thirteen). The result showed that it was only after the joint tact/self-mimetic/sequelic control training that the symmetrical performance of manded selection responses appeared with no additional training.
 
The Role of Rehearsal in Joint Control
RICK GUTIERREZ (Applied Behavior Consultants, Inc.)
Abstract: Behavior analysis is missing a behavioral account of complex human behavior. Behavior analysis have offered accounts of the behavior involved in matching to sample tasks and delayed matching to sample tasks. Joint control was used as a behavioral account of generalization matching to sample behavior. The present study used joint control to train five adult females to acquire a generalized sequencing behavior using an unfamiliar language. The results showed that after joint control training the participants were able to produce untrained picture sequences. Further analysis revealed that response blocking the mediating response of the participants during the sequencing task directly correlated with the reduction of accurate sequences produced. This study provides additional support for response mediation as a precurrent behavior to complex human behavior.
 
The Role of Modeling and Automatic Reinforcement in the Construction of the Passive Voice
ANHVINH PHUNG (Applied Behavior Consultants, Inc.)
Abstract: Language acquisition has been a contentious topic among linguists, psycholinguists, and behaviorists for decades. Although numerous theories on language acquisition have surfaced, non have sufficiently accounted for the subtleties of language that children acquire. The present study attempts to explicate the role of modeling and automatic reinforcement in the acquisition of the passive voice. Six children, ages three to five, participated in this study. The results indicate that the children began using the passive voice only after the experimenter modeled passive sentences. Furthermore, the usage of the passive voice increased with repeated exposure to training and novel stimuli. Given that the children were not explicitly reinforced, it is proposed that their behavior was automatically reinforced for using the passive voice.
 
 
Paper Session #359
Int'l Paper Session - Language and Children with Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Stevens 5 (Lower Level)
Area: AUT
Chair: Julian C. Leslie (University of Ulster)
 
Equivalence Classes in Children with Autistic Spectrum Disorder and Language Limitations
Domain: Applied Research
JULIAN C. LESLIE (University of Ulster), William Mowlds (University of Ulster)
 
Abstract: The role of language in stimulus equivalence class formation continues to be controversial. Matching-to-sample, with errorless training with fading of prompts, was used to teach four children (aged 5-7 years) with Autistic Spectrum Disorder and moderate learning difficulties to match two three-member classes of stimuli, comprising abstract visual forms. On subsequent tests for emergent performances, three participants displayed symmetry and two also showed transitivity. There was thus evidence of stimulus equivalence class formation in these two participants. All participants had poor language development and communication skills and were taking part in home-based ABA educational programmes. The role of these programmes in enhancing performance on equivalence tasks is discussed, as is the possible use of equivalence tasks for assessing the current abilities of children with Autistic Spectrum Disorder.
 
Receptive Vocabulary Levels Compared to Rate of Echolalic Responses in Three Youngsters with Autism Spectrum Disorder
Domain: Applied Research
JOCELYN MILLS (Cleveland Clinic Center for Autism), Leslie Sinclair (Cleveland Clinic Center for Autism)
 
Abstract: Currently there is little research identifying the development of echoic behavior as it presents in individuals with autism. The purpose of this study is to compare increasing rates of receptive language and the rate of echoic behavior in three children with autism spectrum disorder. This paper will report initial receptive language scores and initial rates of echoic behavior. The paper will report data accumulted from students echolalia behavior prior to discrete trial teaching in relation to their individual receptive language scores, as well as receptive language scores post disrete trial implementation. The data will report the percentage of echolalia within a timed language sample in correspondence with receptive language scores prior to discrete trial intervention. Data will reflect the same subjects' receptive langugae scores and percentage of echolalia of a language sample subsequent to diescrete trial intervention. The assessment battery will consist of The Recptive One-Word Picture Vocabulary Test and The Expressive One-Word Picture Vocabulary Test in conjunction with formalized timed language samples. Intervention will consisit of each subject recieveing two half-hour individual sessions with a speech language pathologist utilizing discrete trial teaching methodology for a minimum of six months. Outcome data reported.
 
Acquisition Rate of Expressive Language Targets Comparing Verbal Behavior Teaching Versus Traditional Discrete Trial Instruction
Domain: Service Delivery
LESLIE SINCLAIR (Cleveland Clinic Center for Autism), Jill Little (Cleveland Clinic Center for Autism)
 
Abstract: Recent controversy has evidenced itself in the practice of applied behavior analysis regarding the use of techniques which are specific to "verbal behavior" instruction and the use of more "traditional discrete trial" instruction. This papers aim is to report data accumulated from instruction of students with autism in two groups, with closely matched Vineland scores and evenly compared autism symptom rating and language s. Subjectgroup consisted of 8 students with an age range of 8-12 years. Each subject was administeredthe following assessment battery:Assessment of Basic Language and Learning Skills(ABLLS), Vineland Adaptive Scale(Classroom edition), Test of LanaguageDevelopment(TOLD-I)and the Autism Behavior Checklist(ABC) for matching subject sample. Subjects were evaluated prior to intervention. Intervention consisted of each subject receiving two 15 minute sessions per day until criterion levels were acheived for selected targets. Study prcedures will be described. Reported outcomes compared rate of acquisitiontrained targets using both methodologies.
 
 
 
Symposium #360
Methods for Establishing and Maintaining Staff Performance in a Variety of Human Service Agencies
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Joliet (3rd floor)
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Bethany L. McNamara (New England Center for Children)
Discussant: Richard M. Foxx (Pennsylvania State University)
Abstract: This symposium presents research detailing how to establish and maintain staff performance in a variety of contexts. The first study demonstrated how the implementation of an obstacle course was successful in decreasing van accidents in a residential program. An accident analysis was conducted and an obstacle course was set up to mimic those conditions in which accidents were likely to occur. Three hundred and fifty staff participated and data revealed that the use of an obstacle course was successful in decreasing the rate of accidents. The second study compared the effectiveness of traditional staff training techniques with the use of self-monitoring techniques to increase the amount of teacher delivered reinforcement in loosely structured settings. The study demonstrated that the use of self-monitoring techniques was responsible for increasing and maintaining teacher delivered reinforcement across unstructured settings. The third study compared staff training interventions designed to increase the student teachers ability to change infant positions. Data revealed that the use of a positioning chart alone with the absence of supervisor feedback was successful in maintaining the variety of positions experienced by the infants. These papers all demonstrate effective techniques for maintaining a variety of staff behaviors with the absence of supervisor feedback.
 
Increasing Driver Safety in a Residential Program Setting
MICHELE F. KLEIN (New England Center for Children), Bethany L. McNamara (New England Center for Children), Richard M. Foxx (Pennsylvania State University)
Abstract: The safe transportation of children is of the utmost importance. This study investigated the effectiveness of an obstacle course as a retraining method to decrease van accidents in a residential program. Three hundred-fifty staff members of the New England Center for Children, for whom driving the Center’s vans was a job requirement, participated. A multiple baseline across groups was used. Baseline data showed an average rate of 0.73 accidents occurring monthly across the 3 groups. Each staff member participated in a brief obstacle course training following baseline. Interobserver agreement data was collected in 59% of driving trials, and was 100%. Results showed that for all 3 groups, accident rates decreased to 0 immediately following obstacle course participation for at least 4 months, and averaged 0.28 per month for the remainder of the study. These results demonstrated the effectiveness of an obstacle course as a deterrent to accidents.
 
The Use of Self-Monitoring to Increase Staff Delivery of Positive Reinforcement in Loosely Structured Settings
JAMIE L. GRANATINO (New England Center for Children), Bethany L. McNamara (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Effective staff training can influence client success. The literature demonstrates supervisor follow-up is a necessary variable. Self-monitoring is a simple way for individuals to monitor their performance and increase targeted behaviors. The present study compares the effectiveness of traditional in-service training and self-monitoring to increase staff delivery of positive reinforcement to children with developmental disabilities and assess generalization in a second setting. A multiple probe design across 2 residential teams was used. Percentages of teacher-delivered instructions, reinforcement deliveries, and no interaction intervals were calculated for 10 min observation periods, using a 10s partial interval recording procedure. Interobserver agreement (IOA) was conducted in 35.5% of sessions. IOA averaged 92%-97.5% for all measures. Following the in-service training, data showed little change in rates of reinforcement as compared to baseline (Team A at lunch: M=20%, Team A at gym: M=46%; Team B at lunch: M=13%, Team B at gym: M=28%). Following the implementation of self-monitoring procedures, data showed a marked increase in reinforcement delivery (Team A at Lunch: M=74%; Team A at gym: M=80%; Team B at lunch: M=72%; Team B at gym: M=78%). Data showed moderate generalization effects when self-monitoring was implemented in the lunch setting before implementation in the gym setting.
 
Increasing the Frequency and Variety of Positions Infants Experience in a Childcare Setting
NICOLE M. COTNOIR (University of Kansas), Rachel H. Thompson (University of Kansas), Paige M. McKerchar (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Child development experts recommend infant repositioning to allow children to fully experience their environment, to provide opportunities for motor development, and to prevent skull deformities. Three experiments were conducted using reversal designs to evaluate the effects of the intervention on infant repositioning behavior of student teachers. Exact interobserver agreement was calculated for at least 30% of sessions for each experiment, with mean agreement of at least 90% for infant repositioning. Nine student teachers, and 13 infants participated. Results of Experiment 1 showed that an intervention consisting of a positioning chart and feedback was effective in increasing the variety of positions experienced by the infants, as well as the percentage of correct position changes made by all three student teachers. Results of Experiment 2 showed that the positioning chart alone was effective in maintaining performance with teachers who had a history of feedback for repositioning. Results of Experiment 3 showed that the positioning chart alone was effective with student teachers with no prior history of feedback for repositioning.
 
 
Symposium #361
Int'l Symposium - Minimal Verbal Units Control in Reading: What We Know So Far
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Boulevard B (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Martha Hübner (University of Sao Paulo, Brazil)
Discussant: Deisy de Souza (Federal University of Sao Carlos, Brazil)
Abstract: The present symposium has the objetive of presenting three experimental studies that have the general same aim: to analyze and install minimal verbal units control in reading, with a systematic manipulation of the minimal units, either the letter or the syllable.Working in a basic research context but with applied implications, two of the studies have preschool children as participants and one with mental retarded adults; application of matching to sample procedures, reading comprehension tests (called equivalence tests by two of the studies) and generalization and accuracy tests. Although two of the studies are with Brazilian participants (Portuguese speakers), and the third are with american participants (English speakers) similar results have been founded and similar processes have been discussed, which can constitute a representative picture of this kind of research. Some of the common results founded are: - minimal verbal units control emerge after a certain amount of word sets, taught in sets of words;- naming of the trained words also emerge after the recombinative reading training, as well as equivalence or reading comprehension.Writing behavior has also been seen as an emergent behavior, and some improvement was observed in the so called “phonological awareness” and “ alphabet principle” tests, specially the sub-tests measuring syllabical transposition.
 
Recombinative Reading: Effects of Repertoire´s Augment and Oralization of Words
MARTHA HÜBNER (University of Sao Paulo, Brazil), Renata Gomes (University of Sao Paulo, Brazil)
Abstract: The present study follows previous studies that search procedural variables that produce recombinative reading that show verbal minimal units control. The studies conducted with preschool children revealed that the increasement in the recombinative repertorie was efficient in reducing the number of errors in generalization tests with the fourth set of four words. Some variability was observed, showing that other procedures were necessary to get near 100% performance during generalization tests. Oralization of words was introduced during training of textual behavior and 90 percent correct responses media was obtained with the participants.This results are interpreted in terms of the occurrence of speaker and listener behavior at the same time, contrasting with j listener behavior only that occurred in previous studies.
 
Recombinative Reading and Syllable as a Reading Unit
ALESSANDRA AVANZI (University of Sao Paulo, Brazil), Maria Amelia Matos (University of Sao Paulo, Brazil), William J. McIlvane (E.K. Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts Medical School)
Abstract: In several studies Matos, Hubner and colls investigated the possibility of recombinative reading in pre-school children by teaching to read Portuguese words using the equivalence paradigm. The words were fragmented into syllables and those syllabes recombined into new words. Special and basic procedures (AMTS) were used with some success but with too variable effects. Recently we tried to teach the syllable as a reading unit and then tested recombinative reading. Using a conditional discrimination training of syllable topography and position in the word, where ST stimuli were syllables and CO were two syllables words; the participants were instructed to chose one of four words which start or ends with the ST syllable. After the syllables discrimination training a copy-by-construction training of four words using the thaught syllables, a test for reading with comprehention of those words and another test of recombinative reading with four new words (same syllables)were done. Then another conditional discrimination training of syllables was done with three new syllables and a test for reading comprehension with four words composed by these new syllables. After another test/training of copy-by-construction of these words the participants were submited to a new test of recombinative reading with eight new words. Results obtnained 90% or more scores in all tests.
 
Developing Prerequisites for Reading and Spelling in Adults with Mental Retardation
KATHERINE L. STEWART (University of Kansas), Monika M. Suchowierska (University of Kansas), Kathryn Saunders (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Individual-word recognition and spelling share a major skill component, the alphabetic principle. The term refers to the knowledge that individual letter-sound correspondences can be general to many words. In a previous study, three adults with mental retardation demonstrated generalized spelling skills after matrix training on a word construction task that ensured exposure to all the necessary within-word components. One limitation, however, was a lack of stimulus control by the vowel sound. In this study we attempted to arrange conditions to force a discrimination between vowels. Sixty consonant-vowel-consonant (CVC) words were divided into 12 sets of 5 words each. Each set included all five vowels and the same final consonant. The onset for the words with a, e, i, and u in any given set was the same. The onset for “o” words differed, so as to provide experience with the onset for the next word set. For one of the three participants, accuracy of vowel selection was 100% on all vowels but “o”. For the other two accuracy of vowel selection increased from approximately 40% to 85% correct.
 
 
Symposium #362
Int'l Symposium - Overcoming Core Deficits in Autism Spectrum Disorders: Stimulus Overselectivity and Perspective-Taking
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Continental B (1st floor)
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Yors A. Garcia (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: This series of presentations will discuss behavior analytic approaches to understanding stimulus overselectivity and perspective-taking deficits, which are common features of autism spectrum disorders.
 
An Empirical Analog of Over-Selectivity Using Normal Participants
LAURA J. BROOMFIELD (University of Wales, Swansea), Phil Reed (University of Wales, Swansea), Louise A. Mchugh (University of Wales, Swansea)
Abstract: Stimulus over-selectivity is a phenomenon often displayed by individuals diagnosed with autistic spectrum disorders or learning disabilities in which control over behavior is exerted only by a limited subset of the total number of stimuli present. In the current study fifteen undergraduate participants, who were pre-screened on the autism spectrum quotient, were trained on a simple discrimination task using picture cards and then tested for the emergence of over-selectivity. Responding under the control of the over-selected stimulus was then extinguished. In subsequent tests, control of behavior by the previously under-selected response re-emerged. The results are discussed in relation to the implications for the development of a model of memory deficits in autism.
 
Overselectivity and Implications of the Matching-to-Sample Training Procedure
TIMOTHY M. WEIL (University of Nevada)
Abstract: Given the behavioral characteristics of autism, it is not surprising to discover that many with this disorder tend to respond to a narrow set of stimuli in the environment. These stimuli that come to control responding could be certain aspects of a discriminative stimulus, or worse, irrelevant stimuli present in the environment. When this ‘overselective’ behavior occurs consistently and thus affects the acquisition of adaptive responses, it is imperative to identify what particular components of a complex stimulus affect the probability of emitting a correct response. Lovaas and colleagues (1971; 1979) have documented the phenomena of overselectivity and offered suggestions as to it prevention and/or remediation in a variety of situations (e.g. prompting, generalization, social behavior). As such, this paper will include a short discussion of the overselectivity concept and history of research in this area. In addition, examples of training techniques commonly employed in autism training (matching-to-sample) will be used to illustrate potential setting factors that may promote overselective responding. Finally, some case examples will be reviewed.
 
Assessing Relational Learning Deficits in Children with High-Functioning Autism
JEFFREY E. DILLEN (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Ruth Anne Rehfeldt (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Megan M. Ziomek (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale)
Abstract: Perspective-taking is a skill that requires a child to demonstrate awareness of informational states in himself or herself and in others. The ability to change perspective may result in successful interpersonal relationships, as perspective-taking facilitates comprehension of another person’s position. Research has shown that children with autism spectrum disorders often perform poorly on perspective-taking tasks, putting such children at a disadvantage in social situations. Behavioral psychologists have recently suggested that perspective-taking emerges as generalized operant behavior following a reinforced history of relational responding. A procedure for evaluating perspective-taking skills from this perspective, known as the Barnes-Holmes protocol, was implemented with typically-developing children and adults; it was found that errors decreased as a function of age (McHugh, Barnes-Holmes, & Barnes-Holmes, 2004). The purpose of this study was to extend the findings of McHugh et al. (2004) by using a computerized version of the Barnes-Holmes protocol to evaluate relational learning deficits in perspective-taking in children with high-functioning autism and their age-matched peers. We also correlated scores on the task with scores on standardized assessments commonly used in the diagnosis of autism. Results showed that children with autism demonstrated a greater number of errors on the task.
 
An Event Related Potentials Measure of False Belief Understanding as Generalised Operant Behavior
LOUISE A. MCHUGH (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Simon Dymond (APU, Cambridge, UK), Robert Whelan (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Ian T. Stewart (National University of Ireland, Galway)
Abstract: Understanding true and false belief has been documented as a precursor to the developmental of a theory of mind by mainstream developmental psychologists. This interest has been enhanced by the possible role of theory of mind deficits in autism. One recent strand of this research has employed the Event Related Potentials (ERPs) methodology to index the activity of neural systems engaged during ToM reasoning in adults. Specifically, neural activity elicited by belief based tasks as compared with photograph controls was characterized by a focally enhanced positivity over left frontal areas, which was diminished over left parietal areas. Recent Relational Frame Theory research (RFT) has suggested the possible utility of approaching false belief understanding as generalized operant behavior. According to RFT, the deictic relational frames of I and YOU, HERE and THERE, NOW and THEN and logical NOT are central to the development of complex belief understanding. The aim of the current study was to index the activity of neural systems that are engaged during RFT based false belief tasks involving these relational frames in an attempt to demonstrate the functional similarity of the RFT and ToM approaches. Results suggest a neurobiological link between traditional Theory of Mind tasks and relationally based false belief tasks.
 
 
Symposium #363
Professional Development Series: On Being a Board Certified Behavior Analyst
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Private Dining Room 3 (3rd floor)
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Cade T. Charlton (Utah State University)
Discussant: Jon S. Bailey (Florida State University, BMC, FABA)
Abstract: The advantages of receiving behavior analytic services are quickly becoming evident to a large population of consumers. However, with the increased number of service providers, it is becoming more difficult to be certain that consumers are receiving the best possible service. To help alleviate this concern, many consumers are recognizing the importance of working with a board certified behavior analyst (BCBA). This symposium unites some of the top experts on the certification process to discuss what is involved with becoming board certified, the advantages of certification, and the process of becoming a board certified behavior analyst. This is a student committee organized event.
 
Background and Rationale for Certification of Behavior Analysts
JAMES M. JOHNSTON (Auburn University)
Abstract: This presentation will review the background for certification ofbehavior analysts, the rationale for certification, and the advantagesof certification for individuals and the field. In addition, thebackground and organization of the Behavior Analyst Certification Boardwill be reviewed.
 
Application for the BCBA Examination
FAE MELLICHAMP (Professional Testing, Inc.)
Abstract: This presentation will cover the issues surrounding application to sit for the BCBA examintion. The discussion will include issues surrounding standards for both levels of board certification.
 
Certification Versus Licensure and the Status of BACB Certification
GERALD A SHOOK (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
Abstract: This presentation will cover issues related to the issue of certification versus licensure. Included in the discussion will be the current status, future directions, and the impact of the board certification process.
 
 
Symposium #364
Int'l Symposium - Relational Frame Theory and Education for Children with Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Private Dining Room 2 (3rd floor)
Area: EDC; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Carol Murphy-Ball (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: The symposium deals with issues relevant to education for children diagnosed with autism. The first paper examines derived transfer of more/less mand functions in accordance with trained conditional discriminations with 3 children diagnosed with autism. The aim of the second study was to examine the effects of generalized versus differential consequential control across mands and tacts with 3 children diagnosed with autism. This is followed by a paper that attempts to identify key relational frames involved in effective negotiation with 30 children aged between 3 and 5 years. Finally, skills involved in symmetrical relations between name-item and item-name with preschool children are examined.
 
Derived Transfer of More/Less Relational Mand Response Functions in 3 Children Diagnosed with Autism
CAROL MURPHY-BALL (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: The current research examined derived more/less relations with three children with autism. The experimental procedure commenced with a matching-to-sample procedure, and participants were trained to select ‘more’ in the presence of arbitrary stimulus A1 and to select ‘less’ in the presence of stimulus A2. Subsequently, conditional discriminations were trained with the A stimuli and other arbitrary stimuli, as follows: A1-B1, A2-B2, B1-C1, B2-C2. Finally, a test was conducted to determine if the students derived more/less relations in accordance with the trained conditional discriminations. That is, they were required to present C1 to mand for ‘more’ and C2 to mand for ‘less’. The criterion for a successful derived transfer of more/less response functions (A1-C1, A2-C2) was 20 correct responses. Implications arising from the data for language training with autistic populations will be discussed.
 
Comparing the Acquisition of Mands and Tacts with Generalized Reinforcement, and Tacts with Differential Reinforcement
CLAIRE E. EGAN (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: The aim of the present study was to examine the effects of generalized versus differential consequential control across mand and tacts. The study compared the acquisition of mands and tacts with generalized versus differential reinforcement. In Experiment 1, 3 participants were trained to mand or tact using arbitrary timui. During mand training, participants were taught to present the arbitrary stimulus as a mand for a particular coloured token. During tacts (with generalized reinforcement) participants identified the arbitrary stimulus when presented with particular coloured tokens. Correct responses were reinforced with colour specific tokens. Each participant was taught across ech condition, which was counterbalanced. The number of trials to acquire the response in each condition was compared across participants. Results showed that 2/3 participants had the highest numbers of trials to criterion during the tacts with generalized reinforcement condition. Experiment 2 replicated the procedures of Exeriment 1, except that a second differential reinforcement condition was added. The first differential reinforcement condition used tokens that were the same colour as the antecedent tokens, while the second used different colours. Follow-up performances on each condition were evaluated.
 
Teaching Negotiation Skills to Young Children
CAROLYN SWEENEY (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: The relation frame theory account of human language as derived relational responding provides the perspective for an investigation of the negotiation activities of young children in a classroom context. Thirty children from mainstream schools participated in the study. All of the participants were aged between three and five years of age. This paper attempts to identify key relational frames involved in effective negotiation. The participants received training using deictic frames, possession functions and comparative functions and the effect on negotiation outcomes were assessed. The findings are discussed in the context of RFT and directions for future research are considered.
 
Derived Naming and Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder
JOHN D. MCELWEE (N/a)
Abstract: Derived naming refers to the symmetrical relation between a heard word for an item (name-item) and the spoken word for an item (item name). The skill to tact items after hearing their names without direct training is viewed as a key to the explosion of language in young children. The present paper investigated this skill with preschool children with a diagnosis of Autistic Spectrum Disorder. All participants had components skills of listening, tacting and echoics. If derived naming was found to be absent, a multiple-exemplar training regime was employed to establish the skill.
 
 
Symposium #365
Scorecards out the Wazoo: Designing Scorecards Linked to Pay for Administrative Units in an Accounting Firm
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Marquette (3rd floor)
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Cloyd Hyten (University of North Texas)
CE Instructor: Cloyd Hyten, Ph.D.
Abstract: Multidimensional scorecards were designed for administrative (non-revenue generating) personnel in an accounting firm that already had a performance system using scorecards tied to performance pay for its revenue-generating personnel. This symposium will review the mechanics and theory of scorecards using categories based on the Kaplan & Norton model. How these scorecards are indexed to profitability metrics to yield bonus pay in a model similar to Abernathy’s Profit-Indexed Performance Pay will be explained. We will also compare this system to a similar existing system for production personnel. Challenges and solutions involved for adapting this system to fit the performance aims of administrative departments will be discussed. Several administrative departments’ (e.g., Human Resources, Information Technology, Practice Management, Secretarial Support) scorecards will be discussed to illustrate the final system and the metrics chosen will be explained. In addition, issues involved in the design of metrics and compensation for the senior management of operations will be discussed.
 
Performance Scorecards and Performance Pay: Theory and the Mechanics of Design
CLOYD HYTEN (University of North Texas), Bellann D. Morales (Travis Wolff, L.L.P.)
Abstract: This paper will review the design of scorecards that are tied to performance pay plans. The theory of using scorecards tied to pay as the foundation of the performance system will be explained. How measurement categories are chosen as well as how to cap and balance the scorecard will be discussed. The Kaplan & Norton model will be explained. The rationale and mechanics of tying scores to measures of profit as in Abernathy’s PIPP system will also be explained. We will also discuss firmwide operational and financial metrics and how they are linked to the firm’s strategy.
 
How Do You Measure Performance Without Product? Special Challenges of Administrative Scorecards
BRYAN SHELTON (University of North Texas), Sarah C. McDaniel (University of North Texas), Joseph L. Cermak (University of North Texas), David Mallari (University of North Texas), Cloyd Hyten (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Issues in the design of performance systems for administrative units will be discussed. Specifically, comparisons will be made to such systems used for the revenue-generating production side of the firm, where production and financial measures are more obvious. Contrasts with the administrative units, where the important results are not tied as directly to external revenue, will be made. We will discuss how we addressed these problems in adapting the existing system to the administrative units from a strategic standpoint. Tactical decisions regarding how to obtain necessary data and compromises we made will also be discussed. We will also discuss considerations in designing systems for the top management of the entire administrative unit.
 
Scorecards for IT and the Secretarial Support Team
DAVID MALLARI (University of North Texas), Joseph L. Cermak (University of North Texas), Bryan Shelton (University of North Texas), Sarah C. McDaniel (University of North Texas), Cloyd Hyten (University of North Texas)
Abstract: The design of the scorecards for the Information Technology and Support team units will be described in detail, along with how they are linked to performance pay and other evaluation components.
 
Scorecards for HR and Practice Management
SARAH C. MCDANIEL (University of North Texas), Bryan Shelton (University of North Texas), Joseph L. Cermak (University of North Texas), David Mallari (University of North Texas), Cloyd Hyten (University of North Texas)
Abstract: The design of the scorecards for the Human Resources function and the Practice Management function will be described in detail, along with how they are linked to performance pay and other evaluation components.
 
 
Symposium #366
The Use of Prompting and Fading in Intensive Treatment Programs for Children with Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Continental A (1st floor)
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: John James McEachin (Autism Partnership)
Discussant: Mitchell T. Taubman (Autism Partnership)
CE Instructor: John James McEachin, Ph.D.
Abstract: N/a
 
A Comparison of Constant Time Delay Versus a Lovaas-Ttype Flexible Prompt Fading Procedure
DORIS SOLUAGA (Autism Partnership), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership), Mitchell T. Taubman (Autism Partnership), John James McEachin (Autism Partnership)
Abstract: Constant time delay (CTD) is a highly prescriptive prompting procedure that has been studied widely, demonstrated as effective and has been used in several comparative studies. A prompting procedure that is more flexible has been described by Lovaas and although it was an integral part of the landmark studies on early intensive treatment, there has been very little attempt to conduct comparative studies of Flexible Prompt Fading (FPF). In this study, CTD was compared with FPF for teaching five students with autism a variety of receptive labels. A parallel treatments design demonstrated that overall the FPF procedure resulted in a higher number of receptive targets acquired, and fewer trials to criterion. However there were important differences across students and the implications for selecting instructional strategies for students with autism will be discussed.
 
Prompting, Shaping, Science and Practice: Toward a Better Understanding of the “No-No-Prompt” Error Correction Procedure
STEIN LUND (Perspectives Corporation), Robert F. Kidd (Perspectives Corporation), Kristy C. Hallam (Perspectives Corporation)
Abstract: One version of Discrete trial instruction (DTI) that is widely used and widely misunderstood is referred to colloquially as the “No-No-Prompt” (NNP) procedure. This procedure should be viewed as a complex system of teaching that includes a segment where learners are given explicit opportunities to “switch” based on feedback following an error as well as opportunities to respond independently after a prompted trial. The “No-No-prompt” sequence should be seen as a latter stage component of a more inclusive instructional system and should therefore not be understood in essential isolation. It will be be further argued that NNP, as well as other procedures aimed at shaping behavior should be understood as a process that involves art as well as science and a clinician should master many procedures and be able to shift flexibly between them as the situation demands.
 
Looking Beyond Controlling Prompts: The Quest For Teaching Procedures That Actually Teach
JOHN JAMES MCEACHIN (Autism Partnership)
Abstract: The research literature is replete with studies that demonstrate the efficacy of a variety of prompting procedures. Many of these studies have aimed simply to find prompts that result in a very high probability (e.g., 90%) of the student making the correct response. These are called controlling prompts. However, for children with severe learning difficulties, merely identifying a controlling prompt is no guarantee that it can be readily faded. It will be argued that we should not be seeking prompts that merely produce the correct answer, but should be looking for sequences of learning experiences that lead a student to actually understand the concept we are trying to teach. Several examples will be provided from a curriculum for children with autism.
 
 
Panel #367
University Based Autism Treatment and Professional Training Programs
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Continental C (1st floor)
Area: AUT/TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Linda A. LeBlanc (Western Michigan University)
JAMES E. CARR (Western Michigan University)
ANTHONY J. CUVO (Southern Illinois University)
PATRICK M. GHEZZI (University of Nevada, Reno)
DENISE E. ROSS (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: Several U.S. Univerisities provide clinical serviced to children with autism and their families. These clinical services are a means of dissemination and intervention and also serve as an avenue for training future professionals in the are of autism. Several program directors will describe their unique service delivery and training models highlighting common principles for and exploring unique strengths of each model
 
 
Symposium #368
Variables that Influence Equivalence Classes, Linked Perceptual Classes, and Partially Elaborated Generalized Equivalence Classes
Monday, May 30, 2005
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Boulevard A (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: This symposium includes four presentations, One paper illustrates how training structure influences the formation of equivalence classes and class formation for participant of different ages. Another paper illustrates how the inclusion or exclusion of baseline trials influences the formation of generalized equivalence classes, on a 100%-0% basis. A third paper illustrates how the failure of equivalence class formation can be attributed to a failure to generalize a transitivity repertoire from the stimuli in one domain to the stimuli in another domain that were used as the members of the putative equivalence classes.. Finally, the last paper shows that a linked perceptual.class acts as function transfer network, as do other categories.
 
The Non-effect of Transitivity Induction on Equivalence Class Formation
MICHAEL E. MARROQUIN (Queens College, City University of New York), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York), Danielle Tittelbach (Queens College, City University of New York), Erica Doran (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: A trace stimulus-pairing/ yes-no procedure was used to establish equivalence classes among sets of stimuli that consisted of nonsense syllables. In this procedure, a sample was presented, was remove, and a single comparison is then presented. If the two were from the same set, pressing a YES key was correct. If they are from different sets, pressing a NO key was correct. During training, AB and BC relations were established by reinforcing the YES response in the A1-B1, A2-B2, B1-C1, and B2-C2 trials, and reinforcing the NO response in the A1-B2, A2-B1, B1-C2, and B2-C1 trials.Class formation was evaluated with emergent relations probes that were presented in the same format. For example, the transitivity probes for which the YES response was correct were A1-C1 and A2-C2, while the transitivity probes for which the NO response was correct were A1-C2 and A2-C1. 50% of subjects formed equivalence classes. The others did not, all of which were based on failures of transitivity. This finding replicated those reported by Fields et al (1996). To solve the problem, we induced a generalized transitivity repertoire with a multiple exemplar training and testing procedure that used many new sets of A, B, and C stimuli, all of which were glyphs. Subjects were given AB and BC training with one set of glyphs and then given AC transitivity tests. If failed, AC was trained, If passed, AB and BC training was conducted with another new set of glyphs. The cycle of AB/BC training-AC testing, and optional AC training was repeated until subjects passed the transitivity tests for three consecutive set of new stimuli, which defined the presence of a generalized transitivity repertoire. Thereafter subjects were given AB and BC training with the original nonsense syllables and were then presented with the original AC probes with the nonsense syllables. Subjects still did not pass the transitivity tests. These results cannot be attributed to the absence of a transitivity repertoire since it was demonstrated with many glyphs sets. It would appear, then, that the failure was due to a lack of generalization of the transitivity repertoire from the glyphs to the nonsense syllables. Perhaps, other failures of equivalence class formation can also be attributed to the absence of generalization of symmetry and transitivity repertoires among stimulus sets found in the natural environment to the rather arbitrary stimuli used in experimental settings, as proposed by Fields and Reeve (2002).
 
The Effect of Baseline Priming on the Formation of Generalized Equivalence Classes
PATRICIA A. MOSS-LOURENCO (Queens College, City University of New York), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: The stimuli in perceptual classes A` and B` do not resemble each other. If a conditional discrimination is established between Xa, one stimulus in perceptual class A`, and Bx, one stimulus in perceptual class B`, all of the stimuli in the A` and B` classes will occasion the selection of each other, and will be functioning as members of a single linked perceptual class A`=B`. If another conditional discrimination is then established between Bx and a C, a third stimulus that does not resemble the stimuli in the A` or B` classes, C will become related to all of the stimuli in the A` and B`classes. I.e., the A`, B`, and C stimuli would be functioning as a partially elaborated generalized equivalence class, A`=B`=C. When the entire procedure was conducted in the same session, all subjects formed partially elaborated generalized equivalence classes. When the linked perceptual classes are expanded in a subsequent session, class expansion did not occur for any subjects if the session began with Bx-C training. In cotrast, class expansion occurred for all subjects if Bx-C training was preceded by Ax-Bx retraining. Ax-Bx retraining showed the conditional discriminations to be intact. Thus, the inclusion of Ax-Bx retraining acted to prime the expansion of linked perceptual classes to partially elaborated generalized equivalence classes.
 
Transfer of Responding in Linked Perceptual Classes
MICHELLE C. GARRUTO (Queens College, City University of New York), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: The stimuli in perceptual classes A` and B` do not resemble each other. If a conditional discrimination is established between Xa, one stimulus in perceptual class A`, and Bx, one stimulus in perceptual class B`, all of the stimuli in the A` and B` classes will occasion the selection of each other, and will be functioning as members of a single linked perceptual class A`=B`. According to this set of measurements, the classes are defined in terms of a selection based performances conducted in a matching to sample format. Once formed, and defined in this manner, other categories such as perceptual classes, equivalence classes, and generalized equivalence classes also come act as function transfer networks. A response trained to one class member are occasioned with very high probabilities by the other class members. The present report will describe the transfer of responding among the members of linked perceptual classes. After the establishment of two linked perceptual class, A1`=B1` and A2`=B2`, one member of each class, A1x and A2x were used as Sds for different keyboarding responses. After discrimination training, many other stimuli in the A` and B` classes were presented separately and under extinction conditions. In each case, the response trained to A1x was also evoked by new stimuli in the A1`-B1` class only, and the response trained to A2x was also evoked by new stimuli in the A2`-B2` class only. In addition, the likelihood of responding did not differ among Ax and the other stimuli in the A`-B` class. These results demonstrated that linked perceptual classes act as function transfer networks, as do the stimuli in other categories.
 
The Establishment of Equivalence Classes with One-to-Many and Many-to-One Training Structures by Children, Youths, and Adults
ERIK ARNTZEN (Akershus University College)
Abstract: There have been some discrepancies in the literature about the outcome of different training structures and some have argued that the different probabilities reported in the literature of obtaining equivalence after baseline training with MTO (many-to-one) and OTM (one-to-many) protocols could be attributed to individual differences. Therefore, the present study was set up to investigate the responding in accord with equivalence as a function age. Different age groups of participants were tested for equivalence indicative responding after MTO and OTM training protocols. The participants which did not respond in accord with equivalence were given training with delayed matching to sample (3 s) and retested with a new set of stimuli, but following the original training protocol.
 
 
Invited Tutorial #345
2005 ABA Tutorial: The Utility of Teaching Self-Control and Tolerance for Delayed Reinforcement to Persons with Disabilities
Monday, May 30, 2005
2:30 PM–3:20 PM
International North (2nd floor)
Area: DDA; Domain: Theory
Chair: Kent Johnson (Morningside Academy)
Presenting Authors: : MARK R. DIXON (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Many advances have been made in the basic operant laboratory towards understanding delayed reinforcement and how non-optimal preferences for sooner smaller reinforcers can be reversed. Such choices, between smaller immediate and larger delayed reinforcers can be seen everywhere in clinical settings. When a client chooses to engage in a problem behavior for the immediate small reinforcer of escape from a demand versus engaging in a life enhancing behavior for the larger delayed reinforcer of successful rehabilitation he/she is making a non-optimal choice. However, easy applications of basic principles can alter these initial preferences dramatically. Unfortunately, applied behavior analysts do not frequently capitalize on adopting techniques that teach tolerance for delayed reinforcers. The present tutorial will trace the various developments on altering response allocations from sooner smaller reinforcers to larger delayed reinforcers and illustrate the utility of application for various clinical populations. Data will be presented demonstrating changes in persons with developmental disabilities, autism, mental-illness, and traumatic brain injuries. Implications for greater synthesis between basic laboratory research and successful clinical interventions will be discussed.
 
MARK R. DIXON (Southern Illinois University)
Dr. Dixon holds a Ph.D. (1998) and a M.A. (1996) in Psychology from the University of Nevada and his B.A. (1993) in Psychology and Philosophy from the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee. He has authored 55 journal articles, 5 book chapters, 2 books and over 200 papers and presentations in a variety of areas including choice and self-control, verbal behavior, gambling, organizational effectiveness, computer programming for psychological research, and developmental disabilities. Dr. Dixon is currently the coordinator for the Behavior Analysis and Therapy Graduate Training Program at Southern Illinois University and is also the director of the Behavioral Consultation Group - a service project designed to place graduate students in human service agencies as behavior analysts or organizational consultants. He is a current editorial board member of The Behavior Analyst, the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, and the Journal of Organizational Behavior Management. Some of Mark's current research projects include designing of effective behavioral interventions for persons with acquired brain injuries using delayed reinforcement training techniques and examining the choice variables involved in maintaining or terminating gambling behavior. Mark’s research on self-control and delayed reinforcement has been repeatedly published in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis.
 
 
Paper Session #370
Animal Training I
Monday, May 30, 2005
2:30 PM–3:20 PM
Boulevard C (2nd floor)
Area: EAB
Chair: Eduardo J. Fernandez (Indiana University)
 
Marian Breland Bailey Award Winner: The Functional Value of Enrichment: Determining Environmental Enrichment Effects in Lemurs Through the Use of Paired-Choice Preference Assessments
Domain: Basic Research
EDUARDO J. FERNANDEZ (Indiana University), William D. Timberlake (Indiana University)
 
Abstract: Over the past several decades, a number of captive animal settings have begun to focus more on the use of environmental enrichment to promote the “well-being” of their animals, (Markowitz and Aday, 1998). One of the purposes of environmental enrichment is to produce more naturalistic behaviors on the part of the captive animal(s), (Mellen & MacPhee, 2001). The purpose of the current study was to examine the use of a preference assessment in determining potential items to be used as food enrichment. 8 food items were initially run in a paired-choice preference assessment, similar to the procedures used by Fisher et al. (1992). The preference assessment was conducted with 4 species of lemur, and then tested as enrichment for 2 of the 4 species: Ring-tailed and collared lemurs. During the enrichment condition, items were split into low- (LP) and high-preferred (HP) items, and tested in bamboo feeding devices. In general, both LP and HP produced greater activity and area use in both species compared to baseline, and HP produced greater effects than LP. The results suggest that paired-choice preference assessments could be used to systematically evaluate potential environmental enrichment, thereby increasing the likelihood of discovering successful enrichment strategies.
 
Marian Breland Bailey Award Winner: A Functional Reconceptualization of Aggressive Behavior in Dogs
Domain: Basic Research
SUSAN D. KAPLA (West Virginia University)
 
Abstract: Accurate diagnosis and classification of aggressive behavior in dogs is considered the first step in developing interventions, however, a standardized classification system does not exist Most existing classification schemes are structural rather than functional. The utility of an approach that emphasizes behavioral function to inform effective treatment has been demonstrated in human populations and suggests the utility of such an approach for dog behavior problems. This paper will present a general overview of the current status of aggressive behavior in dogs, a description of current classification systems, a discussion of the assumptions such classification systems require, and their utility in developing effective interventions. It will be argued that a better understanding of aggressive behavior will come from understanding behavioral function.
 
 
 
Paper Session #371
Int'l Paper Session - Behavior Analysis and Physical Education
Monday, May 30, 2005
2:30 PM–3:20 PM
Williford B (3rd floor)
Area: EDC
Chair: Thomas L. Sharpe, Jr. (University of Nevada, Las Vegas)
 
The Application of Precision Teaching to Point Accuracy in Fencing
Domain: Applied Research
CHRIS SHIELDS (University of Ulster), Denis P. O'Hora (University of Ulster), Robert Bones (University of Ulster)
 
Abstract: Much research has investigated the applicability of precision teaching within such areas as education and industry. However, relatively little research has examined the possible role of precision teaching within the world of sport. The benefits of precision teaching, which include greater retention, endurance, application and stability, suggest that such an intervention could prove useful within the field of sport. The current study examined the effectiveness of precision teaching at improving fencers’ performance on a point accuracy task using a group of 6 adult fencers from a local university club. Participants were exposed to a precision teaching intervention for 2, 4 or 6 weeks and improvement was measured on the standard celeration chart. Retention was examined after a period of one month of non-practice. Results demonstrated that precision teaching was effective in improving point accuracy within fencing. Retention was also observed for the 6-week condition. A number of issues for further investigation and analysis will be discussed.
 
Toward a Behavior Systems Approach to Postsecondary Coaching Certification: Programmatic Description and Data Support
Domain: Service Delivery
THOMAS L. SHARPE, JR. (University of Nevada, Las Vegas), Darian A. Parker (University of Nevada, Las Vegas), Daniel W. Balderson (University of Nevada, Las Vegas)
 
Abstract: The importance of professional training and certification activities in relationship to ensuring quality control of professional caregiving in structured sport and athletic settings are receiving greater attention in postsecondary education. Within this growing attention, is focus on documenting the behavioral characteristics of effective coaching practice (e.g., Partridge & Franks, 1996; Smith & Smoll, 1997; Stewart & Bengier, 2001). Currently, university-based undergraduate programs in collaboration with relevant professional accreditation organizations are involving in the development and implementation of professional coaching certification programs designed for the training of professionals toward effective behavioral practice when engaged in structured youth to adult coaching settings. These initiatives have substantive implications for the applied behavior analysis profession, given the potential contributions of a behavior analytic approach to research and training in this emergent postsecondary academic area. To these ends, this presentation first summarizes the appeal of a behavior systems approach (Sharpe & Koperwas, 2003) to the study of, and training in, coaching effectiveness. Next, one professional training protocol is demonstrated, including (a) observation system development for instructional purposes, (b) video-based laboratory design in relation to behaviorally-based educational objectives, (c) data-based on-site assessment strategies in relation to feedback and goal-setting professional practice instruction, and (d) research activity recommendations relative to assessing the general effectiveness of recommended professional training protocols. This presentation closes with a data report supporting the importance of a behavior analytic approach to coaching education, using behavior systems data descriptions across coaches of variable educational and experiential backgrounds as a function of exposure to recommended professional training protocols.
 
 
 
Paper Session #372
Bringing Celeration Charts to Behavioral Health
Monday, May 30, 2005
2:30 PM–3:20 PM
Williford A (3rd floor)
Area: CBM
Chair: Paul Malanga (University of South Dakota)
 
Dying and Death
Domain: Applied Research
ABIGAIL B. CALKIN (Private practice & consulting)
 
Abstract: Collections of Standard Celeration Charts display three different behaviors regarding reactions to dying and death: the behaviors of a dying person; the behaviors, including inner behaviors, of survivors before, during, and after the losses; and the feelings of survivors during and after the losses. Discussion of the data will include analyses and similarities between the charts.
 
Perfomance Management Meets Precision Teaching: Using the Standard Celeration Chart to Monitor Strength and Endurance on a Minute-by-Minute Basis
Domain: Applied Research
PAUL MALANGA (University of South Dakota)
 
Abstract: Obesity has become a national epidemic. Type II diabetes is now being diagnosed in some children as young as 15. A primary cause of this epidemic is a lack of physical activity on the part of our children. The benefits of daily exercise include improvements in body composition, cardiovascular health, stress reduction, increase in strength and endurance, and delay (if not prevention) of the onset of coronary heart disease (Haskell, 1984). However, exercise produces only small and cumulative health benefits for each instance of exercise behavior. More effective performance management contingencies, therefore, need to be established to maintain consistent exercise behavior. Goal setting and daily measurement of behavior have been shown to be effective performance management mechanisms to increase the frequency of behavior (Sweeney, Ring, Malanga, & Lambert, in press). The Standard Celeration Chart (SCC), a direct extension of Skinner’s Cumulative Record, represents a simple yet effective motivational tool to monitor daily progress toward fitness goals. Combining performance management contingencies with daily monitoring and charting of exercise on the SCC represents a powerful package for developing a regular exercise routine. Data will be presented showing ongoing monitoring of exercise behavior on a minute-by-minute basis demonstrating increases in strength and endurance.
 
 
 
Panel #373
Observations and Recommendations on the Interaction of Behavior Analysis and Developmental Psychology: Discussion of Dr. Peter Harzems Invited Address
Monday, May 30, 2005
2:30 PM–3:20 PM
Lake Michigan (8th floor)
Area: DEV/EAB; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Jacob L. Gewirtz, Ph.D.
Chair: Hayne W. Reese (West Virginia University)
HAYNE W. REESE (West Virginia University)
LEWIS P. LIPSITT (Brown University)
GARY D. NOVAK (California State University, Stanislaus)
Abstract:

Observations and Recommendations on the Interaction of Behavior Analysis and Developmental Psychology: Discussion of Dr. Peter Harzems Invited Address

 
 
Symposium #374
Behavioral Activation and Depression
Monday, May 30, 2005
2:30 PM–3:50 PM
Private Dining Room 1 (3rd floor)
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Laura Dee (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee)
Abstract: This symposium will present theory and research on Behavioral Activation (BA) for the treatment of depression. BA is a promising behavioral approach that has gained considerable research support. First, Jonathan Kanter will present an overview of BA and a comparison with Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, with which it shares several features. Second, Patrick Mulick will present data on the efficacy of Behavioral Activation for the treatment of co-morbid Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder and Depression. This data will include a case study, a multiple-baseline single-subject design, and a recent group study. Third, Scott Gaynor will report their attempt to tailor BA to an adolescent population. This includes data from an outreach program they have implemented in a public high school where they offer free BA treatment to adolescents with depressed symptoms. Fourth, initial reliability and validity of the Behavioral Activation Scale, a self-report measure to track client progress during Behavioral Activation for use in single-case or group research, will be presented.
 
Modern Behavioral Activation, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy and Depression
JONATHAN W. KANTER (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Laura Dee (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Andrew Busch (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Sara J. Landes (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee)
Abstract: Behavioral Activation (BA) as a treatment for depression has undergone several transformations over the last 30 years since its development by Lewinsohn, incorporation in Cognitive Therapy, and subsequent isolation as an active, stand-alone treatment. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) as applied to depression also has historical roots as an elaboration of a component of Cognitive Therapy, namely Comprehensive Distancing. Both modern BA and ACT target avoidance but important differences remain, especially concerning the underlying conceptualization of depression, the goals of treatment and the role of values.
 
Behavioral Activation in the Treatment of PTSD and Depression: A Developing Line of Research
PATRICK S. MULICK (Gonzaga University), Amy E. Naugle (Western Michigan University), Matthew Jukupcak (VA Puget Sound Health Care System, Seattle Division), Miles McFall (VA Puget Sound Health Care System, Seattle Division)
Abstract: As Behavioral Activation (BA) becomes a more established depression treatment, questions of its effectiveness with other psychiatric populations have emerged. Strong empirical evidence supports cognitive-behavioral treatments to treat PTSD when it occurs alone, with exposure therapy typically being the most frequently utilized. While the success of exposure treatments is well established there are factors which may hinder their use in real world settings (i.e., poor treatment compliance, high drop-out rates, the aversive nature of the procedures). Thus, more palatable psychological interventions are needed. The results of three separate studies support BA as one such treatment. An initial case study demonstrated BA could be used to treat co-morbid PTSD and depression in an adult police officer/military veteran. These results influenced the development of a study utilizing a nonconcurrent multiple baseline across four participants design. At post-assessment, two of the participants no longer suffered from either PTSD or depression, while an additional participant no longer suffered from depression. Based on these studies, a larger empirical study (N = 11) was designed to explore the effectiveness of BA in the VAMC setting. Over half of the participants demonstrated significant improvement across measures. Implication for this line of research will be discussed.
 
Application of Behavioral Activation with Adolescents
SCOTT T. GAYNOR (Western Michigan University), Amy E. Naugle (Western Michigan University), Amanda M. Harris (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Behavioral activation (BA) prompts depressed individuals to reengage their lives, countering avoidance and withdrawal and increasing contact with naturalistic reinforcement. BA has demonstrated efficacy in clinical trials with depressed adults, an exciting development because BA is relatively straightforward to implement. Thus, it may be especially amenable to dissemination and implementation by beginning therapists. The Report of the Surgeon General’s Conference on Child Mental Health concluded there is a crisis in mental healthcare for youth and called for dissemination of empirically supported treatments to children and delivery of such services in settings where youth congregate. The authors’ will report on their attempts to tailor BA to an adolescent population and provide data from an outreach project they have implemented in a large public high school wherein clinical psychology graduate students, as part of their practicum, offer free BA treatment to adolescents with depressive symptoms.
 
The Behavioral Activation Scale: Results of an Initial Administration
ANDREW BUSCH (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Ellen Shaw (Gonzaga University), Jordan T. Bonow (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Patrick S. Mulick (Gonzaga University), Jonathan W. Kanter (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Christopher Martell (University of Washington)
Abstract: Recently, the psychotherapeutic treatment for depression Behavioral Activation (BA) has received considerable attention in the psychotherapy research community, and it is likely that considerable research will be conducted on this treatment in the future. An important initial step in this research is to devise a measure of the degree to which clients are becoming more activated over the course of BA. Such a measure has immediate utility for therapists conducting this treatment as a way to assess treatment progress and for researchers aiming to study psychotherapeutic processes in BA. The current study presents results of testing an initial version of such a scale, called the Behavioral Activation Scale (BAS). The scale performed well, evidencing high internal consistency (? = .92) and test-retest reliability (one week later, r = .81). Significant correlations with measures of depression and anxiety provide evidence for its construct validity. In addition, single-case data with depressed clients receiving treatment for depression will be presented.
 
 
Symposium #375
Int'l Symposium - Philosophical Foundations of Behavior Science: The Psychological Unit of Analysis and Related Concepts
Monday, May 30, 2005
2:30 PM–3:50 PM
Astoria (3rd floor)
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Jonathan J. Tarbox (University of Nevada, Reno)
Discussant: Michelle Ennis Soreth (Temple University)
Abstract: Any body of work in science rests on its own collection of philosophical assumptions. When such assumptions are not thoroughly analyzed and organized into a coherent system, confusion and unnecessary complication at all levels of analysis within the field often result. Such appears to be the case in the field of behavior analysis today. This symposium includes three papers and a discussion on various issues pertaining to the basic assumptions that comprise the foundation of behavior analytic work, including the unit of analysis in psychology and related concepts.
 
The Molar-Molecular Debate and the Role of the Scientific Verbal Community Within Behavior Analysis
THOMAS J. WALTZ (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Molar and molecular approaches to the experimental analysis of behavior are disputing over how to best characterize the unit of analysis. Each approach holds its own unit as fundamental. This paper will show how adherence to a fundamental unit of analysis disregards the pragmatism of Radical Behaviorism. The role the scientific verbal community plays in determining appropriate units of analysis will also be discussed.
 
On Cause, Effect, and Function in Behavior Science
JONATHAN J. TARBOX (University of Nevada, Reno), Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: B.F. Skinner conceptualized the subject matter of psychology as a dichotomy between the behavior of whole organisms and the environmental events which cause them. The work of the science of behavior was conceptualized as the discovery of lawful functional relations between behavior and environment. Skinner explicitly conceptualized such relations as cause and effect relations, where an organism’s behavior is the effect of the environmental events which the organism contacted in its history. This basic philosophical position on behavior analytic subject matter largely persists today. Other psychologists (e.g., J. R. Kantor) and work in other sciences (e.g., complexity) take other positions on the nature of the relations between the events which comprise their subject matter. The interbehavioral perspective posits an interactional multiplicity of factors (including responding and stimulating) as the subject matter of psychology, where each factor is a mutually interdependent, and notions of cause and effect are therefore irrelevant. The core difference between these perspectives is the nature of the relation between the various factors which comprise a psychological event. This relation is termed “functional” in both systems, but the concept has very different meanings in each. The current paper will contrast the two perspectives and will relate both to more recent perspectives on function from other natural sciences. Implications for work in behavior analysis will be discussed as will implications for interdisciplinary collaboration with other sciences.
 
Discovering Ernst Mach’s Footprints in B. F. Skinner’s and J. J. Gibson’s Works
CLAUDIA CARDINAL (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: B.F. Skinner (1979) acknowledged the influence of Ernst Mach’s (1938-1916) The Science of Mechanics on Skinner’s development of the operant as the unit of analysis. Gibson (1950) adopted Mach’s illustration of the visual field, first published in the Analysis of Sensations. This paper will demonstrate how Mach’s work affected Skinner’s and Gibson’s non-mediational theorizing beyond these explicit references. Citations from Mach’s work will illustrate parallels to Skinner’s conceptualization of the scientist’s behavior and to Gibson’s rejection of the traditional distinction between exteroception and proprioception as separate channels of sensation.
 
 
Symposium #376
Int'l Symposium - The Implicit Association Test (IAT): Behavior Analytic Research Applications and Interpretations
Monday, May 30, 2005
2:30 PM–3:50 PM
Waldorf (3rd floor)
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Maria R. Ruiz (Rollins College)
CE Instructor: Maria R. Ruiz, Ph.D.
Abstract: The Implicit Association Test (I.A.T.) developed by Anthony Greenwald is said to measure unconscious cognitions that influence attitudes and preferences towards a wide range of social phenomena including race, politics and views on sexual orientation.Interestingly, the Implicit Association Test is based on a methodology that can be easily incorporated in behavior analytic research. Specifically, the I.A.T. technique bears a striking similarity to behavioral methods of attitude and behavior assessment that rely on the concept of stimulus equivalence and derived relational responding. Our symposium provides an overview of the I.A.T and outlines its relevance to behavioral research in the social sciences. We will present a behavioral model of the IAT in terms of derived stimulus relations and data supporting the behavioral account will be outlined. Data illustrating the operant nature of results obtained with I.A.T preparations that are sufficient to account for processes described as “attitudes” and “racial prejudice” will be presented. Finally, an update on a behavioral model of the I.A.T as a screening test for sex offenders will be described.
 
The Implicit Association Test (IAT): Conceptual Analysis of “Unconscious Cognitions” as Explicit Verbal Histories
MARIA R. RUIZ (Rollins College), Bryan T. Roche (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: The Implicit Association Test developed by Anthony Geenwald exposes participants to two-element compound stimuli consisting of a face (Caucasian or African American) and either a positive or negative word (good/bad), and asks them to categorize novel stimuli (faces and positive/negative words) accordingly. A significant proportion of participants respond with greater accuracy in the categorization of novel stimuli when the positive word is combined with the Caucasian face. This effect (which we are referring to as the IAT effect) is said to illustrate racial preference (read racial bias). Greenwald suggests that the categorization errors are evidence of implicit associations and unconscious cognitions. Our research presents an alternative behavioral model from which to consider the problem based on derived stimulus relations. We suggest that categorization “errors” in the IAT are likely related to pre-experimental histories of relational responding prevalent in the participants ’verbal community.
 
Implicit Associations: An Experimental Analysis of Explicit Learning Histories: An Update
KEVIN M. MIRAGLIA (Rollins College), Maria R. Ruiz (Rollins College), Bryan T. Roche (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: We will present an experimental analysis of explicit learning histories sufficient to generate the IAT effect equivalent to that produced in Anthony Greenwald’s Implicit Association Test. After mastering arbitrary equivalence relations involving nonsense syllables participants are exposed to the Implicit Association Test. Specifically, four sets of individually acquired 3-member (nonsense syllables) equivalence classes associated with four colors are linked to form two separate superodinate (6-member) classes. These conditions model the race-word combinations in the Greenwald test. Categorizations of novel stimuli with derived color functions replicate Greenwald’s IAT effect. Subjects categorize novel stimuli with derived color functions “Within” superordinate classes (corresponding to pre-experimental culturally reinforced relational responding) with great accuracy. Participants consistently commit errors when categorizing these “Across” superordinate classes (corresponding to equivalence relations typically not selected by the verbal community). Implications of this research for understanding ‘implicit associations’ as explicit behavioral processes will be discussed.
 
A Derived Relations Approach to Screening Tests for Sex-Offenders: An Update
BRYAN T. ROCHE (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Maria R. Ruiz (Rollins College), Martina O'Riordan (National University of Ireland, Cork), Ethel Quayle (National University of Ireland, Cork), Maxwell Taylor (National University of Ireland, Cork)
Abstract: Behavior analysts working in the fields of stimulus equivalence and Relational Frame Theory have already provided the conceptual and technical foundation for the development of screening tests for a range of normal and pathological behavior patterns. These tests are based on the broad idea that individuals' verbal history will impact on their performance in laboratory-based training in derived relations in predictable ways. These procedures come strikingly close to the core processes that appear to be at work in the Implicit Association Test (I.A.T). The current study will outline how the concept of derived stimulus relations has been used to develop a screening procedure for the assessment of pedophiles. More specifically, an I.A.T-type procedure was used in a single-blind study to examine differences in relational responding between contact sex-offenders against children, internet paedophiles, sex offenders against the adult, non sex-offender criminals, and a random sample from the general population. The results suggest that while contact sex offenders are distinguishable from the normal population using these tests, convicted users of child pornography are not. The utility of the IAT as a behavioral assessment tool and the theoretical implications of these findings will be discussed.
 
The IAT: A Measure of Relational History or Attitudes?
AMANDA GAVIN (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Bryan T. Roche (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Maria R. Ruiz (Rollins College), Carmel Gormley (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: In Experiment 1, Subjects were exposed to a word-picture association training phase using a respondent conditioning preparation. Specifically, two nonsense syllables were paired with sexual and disgusting images, respectively. The nonsense syllable paired with the sexual images was blue in color, while that paired with the disgusting images was red in color. Subjects were then exposed to an equivalence training procedure which led to the formation of two three-member equivalence relations, each containing one of the two nonsense syllables. Subjects were then exposed to an IAT-type test consisting of red, blue, sexual, and disgusting images. Subjects were also exposed to a more complex IAT-type test consisting of sexual and disgusting images, and all members of the trained equivalence relations. Results suggest that the IAT is sensitive to the respondent conditioning history employed in phase one and the verbal relations established by the experimenters. These findings suggest that the IAT may not be a reliable measure of attitudes but more correctly provides an indication of subjects' relational histories that may or not be indicative of attitudes.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #377
Applications and Value of Behavior Systems Engineering
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Marquette (3rd floor)
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: William B. Abernathy, Ph.D.
Chair: John Austin (Western Michigan University)
WILLIAM B. ABERNATHY (Abernathy & Associates)
William B. Abernathy, founder of Abernathy & Associates, received his doctorate in Organizational Psychology from Ohio State University and was an Associate Professor at Ohio University. He has twenty-five years of performance improvement consulting experience. Dr. Abernathy is an editor of the Journal of Organizational Behavior Management and a member of the Association for Behavior Analysis, the International Society for Performance Improvement, and the American Compensation Association. He has spoken on the topic of performance pay to hundreds of professional and trade associations including the American Management Association, American Compensation Association, American Banking Association, American Psychological Association, International Institute of Industrial Engineers, International Quality and Productivity Center and The Executive Committee. He has provided seminars for the executives of over 2,000 companies on the design of performance improvement systems. Dr. Abernathy has published dozens of articles on performance pay and his work has been cited in the Wall Street Journal, Business Month, Washington Post, U.S. News and World Reports, and others. Dr. Abernathy is the author of Managing Without Supervising: Creating an Organization-Wide Performance System and The Sin of Wages. In 1981, he founded Abernathy & Associates whose exclusive business is designing and managing performance measurement and incentive pay systems. Abernathy & Associates' clients include financial, manufacturing, distribution, retail, hospitality, health care, and education. The OBM Network is pleased to recognize his many contributions as both a scientist and practitioner to behavior analysis by awarding him the Outstanding Contributions Award. In this invited address, Dr. Abernathy presents both the theoretical foundations of his work and applications to business and industry.
Abstract: Behavior Systems Engineering (BSE) is the modification and management of macro and micro organizational reinforcement contingencies to increase the success of the organization. An effective behavior system should benefit the organization’s customers, stockholders, management and workers. The presentation will describe how a behavior system is reengineered, implemented and maintained. A discussion will follow regarding system results and how BSE and performance management can be integrated.
 
 
Paper Session #378
Int'l Paper Session - EAB II
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Private Dining Room 3 (3rd floor)
Area: EAB
Chair: Mark E. Berg (University of Canterbury, New Zealand)
 
A Lifespan Investigation of the Delay Discounting of Monetary Rewards
Domain: Basic Research
LOUISE A. MCHUGH (University of Wales, Swansea), Carla Thompson (University of Wales, Swansea), Robert Whelan (APU, Cambridge, UK)
 
Abstract: Temporal discounting refers to the weakening of consequence effects due to delay. The aim of the current study was to investigate temporal discounting across three age groups: 12, 16, and 20-yr olds. In the current study, the delay of the larger later reward and the amount of the smaller sooner reward were varied. Results showed that all three age groups demonstrated temporal discounting and that the level of delay discounting, the k value, was inversely related to age. Thus, the results from the current study demonstrated developmental trends that reflect previous findings in this area, such as those described by Green, Fry and Myerson (1994). The current study is novel in that an automated procedure was employed, and the addition of the 16-yr old group represents an extension of Green et al.’s research.
 
Effects of Initial-Link Duration on Molecular Measures of Initial- and Terminal-Link Performance
Domain: Basic Research
MARK E. BERG (University of Canterbury, New Zealand), Randolph C. Grace (University of Canterbury, New Zealand)
 
Abstract: Four pigeons responded in a concurrent-chains/peak procedure in which the terminal links were FI 8 s and FI 16 s and the initial links were either short (VI 8 s) or long (VI 24 s) across conditions. The terminal links were equivalent to trials in a peak procedure (Roberts, 1981): On 75% of the trials, food was available after the FI value had elapsed, but on the remaining 25% the terminal link lasted for 48 s and ended without food delivery. We recorded both molar and molecular (i.e., single trial) measures of performance in both the initial- and terminal links. Molar analyses showed that preference for the FI 8 s was less extreme with long initial links, consistent with many prior studies (e.g., Fantino, 1969). Measures of single-trial peak performance (e.g., start time, stop time, peak response rate) did not vary with initial-link duration. Molecular analyses showed that the attenuation of preference in the long initial-link conditions was primarily due to an increase in visit duration to the lean alternative. Regression analyses showed that measures of initial-link performance contributed unique variance, above and beyond terminal-link delay, to the prediction of stop times. Overall, these results show that trial-by-trial variation in temporal measures of initial- and terminal-link performance are correlated, suggesting that an integrated account of choice and timing may be justified.
 
 
 
Paper Session #379
Int'l Paper Session - Effects of MDMA ("Ecstasy") on Discrimination Performance
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Lake Ontario (8th floor)
Area: BPH
Chair: David N. Harper (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand)
 
The Effects of Acute MDMA Administration on Discrimination Performance
Domain: Basic Research
DAVID N. HARPER (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), Maree J. Hunt (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), Charlotte Jane Kay (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), Susan Schenk (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand)
 
Abstract: Recent evidence in our laboratory indicates that the disruptive effects of acute MDMA ("ecstasy") on discrimination performance in discrete trial tasks might be the product of a disruption to the unchanging stimulus control elements of the task that remain constant across trials. This talk will cover the data from several different experiments (utilizing delayed matching-to-sample and radial-arm maze procedures). These studies indicate that although MDMA produces deficits in conditional discrimination performance (often characterized as deficits in 'working memory'), these deficits are dissimilar from those produced by a typical amnetic drug such as scopolamine and are better viewed as impairments with respect to what is often referred to as the 'reference' memory components of task performance.
 
The Effect of Chronic MDMA Treatment on Pre-trained DMTS Performance and Acquisition of a DNMTS Rule in Rats
Domain: Basic Research
LINCOLN S. HELY (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), David N. Harper (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), Maree J. Hunt (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), Susan Schenk (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand)
 
Abstract: Evidence from rats, non-human primates and humans shows that the drug of abuse, 3,4-methylenedioxmetamphetamine (MDMA or “ecstasy”) has a profound neurotoxic effect on serotonin (5-HT) neurons in the brain. Human users often report impairment of memory and mnemonic function after long-term MDMA use yet there is relatively little evidence of such impairments in experimental animal studies. In this study rats that had previously learned the delayed matching-to-sample (DMTS) task were treated with a large dose of MDMA (n=17) (four injections of 10mg/kg over 6 hours) or vehicle (n=13) on a single day. Two-weeks later animals resumed DMTS test sessions. A small but significant overall deficit in accuracy was found for MDMA-treated animals for the five sessions post-treatment. At the conclusion of DMTS testing, rats were changed to the delayed non matching-to-sample task (DNMTS) and acquisition of this novel task was measured for the subsequent twenty test sessions. MDMA-treated animals showed no significant impairments in acquisition of the novel DNMTS at any delay tested. Therefore, chronic exposure to a high dose of MDMA impaired accuracy on the pretrained DMTS task, but did not have any effect on acquisition of the new DNMTS rule.
 
 
 
Panel #380
Ethical Standards for Behavior Analysts: The Work of the Professional Affairs Committee
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Lake Huron (8th floor)
Area: CSE/TPC; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Thomas L. Zane, Ph.D.
Chair: Thomas L. Zane (The Center for Applied Behavior Analysis)
THOMAS L. ZANE (The Center for Applied Behavior Analysis)
KIMBERLY A. SCHRECK (Pennsylvania State University, Harrisburg)
W. LARRY WILLIAMS (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: The mission of the Professional Affairs Committee of ABA is to consider ethical standards and science-based guidelines for the work we do as behavior analysts, either in the basic or applied fields. The purpose of this panel discussion is to engage in discussion with the audience about ethical issues that are impacting our field, to recruit new members for the Committee, and have the audience direct the work of the committee.
 
 
Paper Session #381
Extending Behavioral Interventions for Addressing Problem Behavior
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Williford C (3rd floor)
Area: EDC
Chair: Kimberly R. Moffett (Lee University)
 
Short-Term Diagnostic Intervention with Positive Results: A Model Classroom
Domain: Service Delivery
KIMBERLY R. MOFFETT (Lee University), Patricia McClung (Lee University)
 
Abstract: This presentation will focus on the description and effectiveness of a specific transtional/ diagnostic behavioral classroom. The classroom comprised a general education teacher, exceptional education teacher, and a paraprofessional who work collaboratively to diagnose and transition students into appropriate settings. The primary goal is for the students to successfully return into the "sending" schools classroom. Positive Behavior Supports are implemented to gradually transition into general education curriculum and back to sending schools through completing functional behavior assessments, requesting special educaiton evaluations, teaching/ modeling acceptable behaviors, and training other adults who are interacting with the child. Issues addressed with the students are appropriate coping skills for anger and aggression while teachers are taught to proactively identify signs of emerging behaviors and techniques for de-escalationof various situations. The student is actively suppoeted from the transition staff until the child and teacher are comfortable. Data is collected on defined behaviors, time of day, frequency, etc. (charts and graphs will be used in the presentation). The effective intervention occurs within 18 to 20 weeks maximum. Participants of this program are continuing to be successful during the second school year.
 
Exporting Behavior Analytic Techniques for Taiwanese Teachers
Domain: Applied Research
LI-CHING HUNG (Mississippi State University), Cary S. Smith (Mississippi State University)
 
Abstract: A Taiwanese student’s behavioral problems once consisted of relatively innocuous activities like chewing gum, talking out of turn, or not showing a requisite amount of respect for one’s teacher. The methods Taiwanese teachers used for controlling misbehaviors like these remained constant for more than two millennia, with corporal punishment being used most often as the means for maintaining classroom discipline. Today, educators are facing students that do not subscribe to Confucian principles like filial piety and honoring one’s teacher; thus, their methods for dealing with student misbehavior is no longer cogent with Taiwanese youth in the 21st century. One method allowing school authorities to reverse the present situation would be the installation of a behavioral management program. An effective plan should address the following issues: how to create a structured environment, how to have appropriate developmental expectations for students, how to devise effective instructions, how to use attention in order to keep students’ interest, and how to respond consistently to problem behavior. How to design an efficacious behavior analytic system will be discussed in detail. Likewise, potential problems arising from the export of American behavior analysis techniques will be examined.
 
 
 
Symposium #382
Int'l Symposium - Analysis of Verbal Processes Relevant to Psychological Disorders and to Defusion Strategies Employed in Treatment
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Boulevard B (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: José Ortega-Pardo (University of Almeria, Spain)
Discussant: Eric J. Fox (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: This session presents three works that attempt to experimentally address the analysis of both the basic verbal processes involved in several psychological problems and the ones involved in the so-called defusion strategies that are employed as a therapeutic tool in recent behavioral therapies like Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT). Altogether, these papers explore the basic processes involved in defusion methods and discuss their implications for specific disorders. The first paper presents experimental research on the function-altering properties of language, with an experimental preparation for the study of establishing stimulus functions. It also presents some clinical implications relevant to an analysis of defusion processes. The second paper presents an experimental analogue of defusion clinical methods with a special focus in the transformation/alteration of behavioral functions of aversive private events. The last paper presents an experimental procedure to analyze the role of personal history of distress tolerance and clarification of personal values in regard to a brief defusion-based intervention for smoking-cessation.
 
Establishing Stimuli and Verbal Establishing Stimuli: Empirical Support and Clinical Implications
MARIA SONSOLES VALDIVIA SALAS (University of New Mexico), Michael J. Dougher (University of New Mexico), Carmen Luciano Soriano (University of Almeria, Spain), Francisco Cabello Luque (Universidad de la Rioja)
Abstract: The generalized and long lasting alteration of the reinforcing/aversive properties of the stimuli seems to be a key issue when dealing with the explanation and treatment of several anxiety related disorders. Although this alteration has been extensively explored within a direct conditioning approach, however the verbal implication on this phenomenon is just starting to be empirically demonstrated. With this research we aim to give empirical support to both the Establishing Stimuli function (Michael, 1993) and the verbal Establishing Stimuli function (Hayes et al, 1998). University students volunteered to participate. A matching to sample procedure was implemented for the formation of two three-member classes (A1-B1-C1/A2-B2-C2). Then, B1 was paired with aversive stimulation and B2 was paired with reinforcing stimulation. Finally, the pattern of choice of several stimuli was measured right before and after pairing them with the B stimuli and with the C stimuli. The altered pattern of choice after the pairing with the C stimuli is interpreted in terms of verbal Establishing Stimuli function. The involvement of this phenomenon in the extension of limiting repertoires, as well as the adequacy of defusion-based strategies to undermine these verbally maintained patterns of behavior, are discussed.
 
Transformation of Functions in Some Defusion/Perspective-Taking Clinical Methods in Acceptance and Commitment Therapy
OLGA GUTIERREZ MARTINEZ (University of Almeria, Spain), Carmen Luciano Soriano (University of Almeria, Spain), Michael J. Dougher (University of New Mexico), Brandi C. Fink (University of New Mexico), Miguel Rodriguez-Valverde (University of Almeria, Spain), Francisco J. Molina-Cobos (University of Almeria, Spain), Derek A. Hamilton (University of New Mexico), Maria Sonsoles Valdivia Salas (University of New Mexico)
Abstract: Interest in the processes that might be responsible for altering the functions of private events is increasing due to the strong impact of ACT methods that are intended to break down behaving with fusion with aversive functions (Hayes et al., 1999; Wilson & Luciano, 2002). This paper presents an experimental preparation that is thought to be an analogue of some defusion/perspective-taking clinical methods where the content and context of the self is enhanced to provide the conditions under which the person might take valued actions. The experimental procedure involves a basic preparation where the interest is focused in analyzing the derived effect of changing the context of aversive content across frames of coordination and opposition as analogues of either context-content as a unique/coordinated element or context and cognitive content as hierarchical and opposite contexts located in the same person. 20 subjects participated in two experimental conditions and 10 subjects participated in a control condition. Results are discussed in terms of the verbal relations involved in defusion/perspective-taking clinical methods.
 
The Role of Values Clarification and Defusion Strategies in Smoking Cessation
MONICA HERNÁNDEZ-LOPEZ (University of Almeria, Spain), Carmen Luciano Soriano (University of Almeria, Spain), Jesus Gil Roales Neto (University of Almeria, Spain)
Abstract: Many smokers report that despite their desires to quit smoking, they are not able to do it due to the feelings of anxiety and distress they experience when they are not smoking. Additionally, other smokers cannot identify any reasons why they would quit smoking. The present study attempts to analyze the influence of personal history of exposure to aversive private events in regard to quitting smoking, as well as that of personal values related to quitting.Twenty subjects took part in the study. All of them underwent an initial assessment in which they were asked about their history in regard to exposing themselves to aversive private events in several situations, as well as about the valuable things related to quitting smoking. In the first phase, participants in one group went through training in exposure to several unpleasant bodily sensations, remarking the value that exposure had in relation to their lives. The other group did not undergo this training. In a second phase both groups underwent treatment in which a values-clarification protocol was employed, and several defusion exercises were practiced. Results are discussed in terms of the importance that the assessment of the clients history has in order to introduce the therapeutic elements necessary for a higher efficacy in ACT-based smoking cessation.
 
 
Symposium #383
Conceptual Analysis and Experimental Evaluation of Skinner's Verbal Behavior
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Stevens 4 (Lower Level)
Area: VBC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Linda A. LeBlanc (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Four presentations will focus on different conceptual issues, experimental issues, and the existing experimental evidence for Skinner's analysis of Verbal Behavior. The first paper examines the perspectives of the speaker and listener. The second paper focuses on aspects of stimulus control evident in naturalistic language approaches to teaching children with autism. The third paper presents a quantitative review of experimental studies on verbal behavior with humans. The final paper presents experimental methodological challenges in the study of Skinner's analysis and ideas for future investigations.
 
The Role of Perspective in Classifying Speaker and Listener Behavior
GENAE HALL (Behavior Analysis & Intervention Services)
Abstract: Although Verbal Behavior is said to be a functional account of language from the perspective of an individual speaker, several elementary verbal operants sometimes mediate reinforcement for other individuals and may also be viewed as listener relations. For instance, Skinner writes: “A child in a toy store…asks What is that? and is told A doodler…the child immediately says Buy me a doodler!” (p. 188). From the child’s perspective, saying What is that? is a mand for information and A doodler is a verbal SD in the presence of which the child emits an echoic response (doodler) along with the autoclitic frame Buy me a _____. In saying A doodler, the adult provides the manded verbal SD and thus behaves as a listener. From the adult’s perspective, What is that? (plus pointing) may be a contextual stimulus for a specific type of verbal relation, whereas saying A doodler is a tact. Thus, the classification of a verbal response or response-product depends on the perspective taken. To resolve possible confusion, one might identify the verbal participants as persons A or B (rather than the “speaker” or “listener”), then identify the responses and relevant controlling variables from each perspective.
 
Conceptualizing Naturalistic Language Interventions from a Skinnerian Perspective
LINDA A. LEBLANC (Western Michigan University), John W. Esch (ESCH Behavior Consultants, Inc.), Tina Sidener (Western Michigan University), Amanda M. Firth (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Modern early intensive intervention programs typically include a mixture of structured teaching situations and naturalistic language interventions, which enhance spontaneity and generality of language of children with autism. The purpose of this paper is to describe naturalistic language interventions for researchers and clinicians who may not be familiar with all of them and to provide a conceptual analysis of these strategies from a verbal behavior perspective. Each strategy is described procedurally and in terms of the relevant verbal operants that are probably addressed (e.g., mands, tacts, intraverbals).
 
A Review of the Empirical Applications of Skinner’s Analysis of Verbal Behavior with Humans
RACHAEL A. SAUTTER (Western Michigan University), Linda A. LeBlanc (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: In 1957, Skinner provided a conceptual interpretation of the controlling variables of language. He defined a particular verbal operant by its functional relations to antecedents and consequences (rather than by topography). Although interest in this area has recently increased, Skinner’s conceptual framework has not yet fully impacted the experimental literature. In addition, there have been many limitations of those empirical studies that have been conducted on the application of Verbal Behavior. This review of the literature examined the studies on verbal behavior that were empirical in nature, concerned with human verbal behavior, and also addressed at least one of the verbal operants within the experiment (mand, tact, echoic, autoclitic, and/or intraverbal behavior). The results of this review suggest that many areas of verbal behavior research have yet to be addressed. Continued research in this area is crucial for the development and implementation of effective verbal behavior interventions.
 
Is There Empirical Support for Skinner's Analysis of Verbal Behavior?
MARK L. SUNDBERG (Behavior Analysts, Inc.)
Abstract: There has been a long-standing concern over the lack of empirical support for Skinner’s analysis of verbal behavior (e.g., Green, 2003; McPhearson, Bonem, Green, & Osborne, 1984; Salzinger, 1978). The question arises as to what type of support is necessary and sufficient to claim that there exists an empirical foundation for the analysis of verbal behavior? There appears to be at least two basic elements that are necessary for claiming that the analysis has empirical support. The first one involves the general scientific status of the basic concepts upon which the analysis is made, while the second addresses data supporting the various distinctions Skinner makes (e.g., the distinction between the elementary verbal operants). The current paper will address these issues, and suggest that even though a substantial amount of research now exists and support is growing, there is much more research that needs to occur before it could be said that the necessary and sufficient empirical support exists. Future research topics will be suggested that may provide further empirical support for Skinner's analysis of verbal behavior.
 
 
Symposium #384
Int'l Symposium - Developments in Training and Certification of ABA Practitioners in the UK and Ireland
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Lake Erie (8th floor)
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Gerald A Shook (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
Discussant: Gerald A Shook (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
CE Instructor: Gerald A Shook, Ph.D.
Abstract: In April 2002, The TreeHouse Trust, in conjunction with the ABA Lecturers’ Co-operative, established the first Behavior Analyst Certification Board (BACB) approved course sequence for training in ABA in the UK. The course, Applied Behaviour Analysis (with Developmental Disabilities) was designed to meet the coursework and experience requirements of the Board Certified Associate Behaviour Analyst (BCABA) examination. Subsequently there have been two BACB approved Masters programmes developed to meet the coursework and experience requirements of the Board Certified Behaviour Analyst (BCBA) examination. This symposium will discuss the development and delivery of these course sequences and the difficulties overcome in relation to establishing university programmes in the UK and Ireland that have also been designed to meet approval from the BACB.
 
Development and Evaluation of the First BACB Approved Course Sequence in the UK
NEIL T. MARTIN (TreeHouse School), Simon Dymond (APU, Cambridge, UK)
Abstract: In April 2002, The TreeHouse Trust, in conjunction with the ABA Lecturers’ Co-operative, established the first BACB approved course sequence for training in ABA in the UK. The course, Applied Behaviour Analysis (with Developmental Disabilities), course sequence FLBAC-CL-0075, was designed to meet the coursework and experience requirements of the Board Certified Associate Behaviour Analyst (BCABA) examination. The course was evaluated by the co-operative and TreeHouse in terms of the effect on the development of individual skills and competencies and general effect on practice. The course led to 100% success in terms of subsequent certification at both BCABA and BCBA level. The second course sequence will run from January 2004 to January 2005 and a third will begin in January 2005. Further funding has been obtained by TreeHouse for supporting this course as well as funding a National centre with the remit of expanding the currently very limited pool of ABA practitioners and adding to the growing number of BCBAs and BCABAs in the UK and Ireland
 
Development of Master’s Programme in ABA at the University of Wales, Bangor
STEPHEN NOONE (University of Wales, Bangor), J. Carl Hughes (University of Wales, Bangor)
Abstract: A new Master programme in ABA was established at the University of Wales, Bangor in the summer of 2003. It has since received BACB accreditation. The course has attempted to balance the requirements of accreditation with the traditions of a British University. The existing post graduate system in Wales offers opportunities for exiting a Masters programme after completing key modules, with either a post graduate certificate or a diploma (depending on how many successful modules were completed). This has allowed the course to be offered to a broader range of students other than those intending to achieve BCBA. The talk will reflect the impact of this structure on applications and the wider problems that face the Master’s Programme in attracting students.Data will be reported on the use of Precision Teaching principles in the delivery of the programme. A comparison was made between two groups of students who received the first module of the ABA course. The ABA Masters group followed Precision Teaching methods while the second group (from another applied psychology Masters course) did not. The data supports the use of precision teaching.Implications for the development of ABA within Britain will be reviewed.
 
Evaluating the Effectiveness of Teacher Training in ABA
IAN M. GREY (Trinity College, Dublin), Rita Honan (Trinity College, Dublin), Michael Daly (Trinity College, Dublin)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effectiveness of an accredited course in Applied Behaviour Analysis (ABA) in the Republic of Ireland. Eleven teachers undertook 90 hours of instruction in the basic principles of ABA over a seven month period. All were previously working with children with an autistic spectrum disorder. They each conducted a comprehensive functional assessment and designed a behaviour support plan targeting one behaviour or behaviour class for one child with autistic disorder. Target behaviours chosen included challenging behaviours and communication problems targeted for reduction, and compliance and skill based behaviours targeted for increase. Teachers recorded observational data for the target behaviour for both baseline and intervention sessions. Implemented interventions were found to bring about a 79.5% change in target behaviours in the desired/expected direction. Course assessment questionnaires were completed by parents and teachers, both of which evaluated the course as having a beneficial effect on both the target child and the educational environment. The potential benefits of a teacher implemented behavioural intervention model are discussed and course recommendations considered. Implications for ABA in the Republic of Ireland are discussed.
 
 
Symposium #385
Edward F. Malagodi Symposium Two: Experimental Analyst, Philosopher, Radical Behaviorist
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
International South (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Theory
Chair: Jeff Kupfer (Jeff Kupfer, PA)
CE Instructor: Jeff Kupfer, Ph.D.
Abstract: These symposia are devoted to celebrating the works of E. F. Malagodi (1935 – 1996), and recognizing his contributions to the science of behavior. The contributing speakers are behavior analysts who were graduate students under Malagodi, and colleagues that worked closely with Malagodi at the University of Florida. The two symposia are classified into areas in which Malagodi had significant influence upon behavior analysis. The first symposium consists of four papers devoted to human and non-human experimental analyses in sensory and conditioned reinforcement, and experimental psychopathology. The second symposium consists of three papers and a discussion devoted to Radical behaviorism, extending behavior analyses to cultural issues, and Malagodi’s impact on the development of graduate training at the University of Florida
 
On the Relevance of Cultural Processes to Behavior Analysis
KEVIN JACKSON (State of Florida)
Abstract: E.F. Malagodi appreciated the important relation of cultural processes to behavior analysis. Behavior analysis has much to gain by adopting this appreciation. Incorporating relevant, objective sciences into behaviorism's worldview remains an accepted part of behavior analysis. Unfortunately, social sciences often are viewed by behavior analysts as unworthy pseudosciences, superfluous to the far superior science and methods offered by behavior analysis. However, as suggested by Malagodi, rather than view cultural processes as reducible to individual contingencies, we need to recognize cultural science as unique and distinct from behavior analysis, much as we recognize biological science. We need to adopt objective cultural science into our own worldview. To do otherwise is to narrow the behavior analysis position on cultural change to a form of cultural idealism or cognitive anthropology in which thoughts and ideas, public or not, play a critical explanatory role in determining cultural practices. Behavioralizing our culture and bringing cultural practices under the control of long-term consequences was a major theme and objective of Skinner's work and remains an important part of our discipline. An understanding of cultural processes is a necessary component for achieving this objective. Such an understanding is critical for ensuring that humankind fully benefits from the sciences of human behavior.
 
Applications Approximating Malagodi's World View
MICHAEL STOUTIMORE (Florida Child Welfare Behavior Analysis Services Program)
Abstract: Per Ed Malagodi's world view and consistent with Cultural Materialism, Infrastructural meta-contingencies and associated practices drive Structural and Superstructural meta-contingencies and their corresponding practices. Scientific practices, including behavior analysis and the contingencies affecting the behavior of individual behavior analysts, are the least ultimate, most proximal, in this sequence of control. A depressing but logical conclusion is that individuals engaged in the design of cultural changes are "waving at windmills." As a result, Ed Malagodi appeared to many as a Don Quixote and, like Don Quixote, Malagodi was undaunted. Not unrelated, Malagodi was one of only a few behavior analysts who consistently recognized the interrelated, equally important functions of behavior analysis practitioners, and applied and basic behavior analysts.Malagodi's world view influenced the design of mini-cultures, residential programs and a statewide child welfare service delivery system. The child welfare system innovations are based upon the processes and procedures derived from basic research, populated by behavior analysis practitioners, and supporting and supported by applied and basic behavior analysis research. From a cultural perspective such innovations are primarily important because of the direct immediate benefits to the recipients of these improved contingencies. Because these innovations have produced a growth in the number of individuals using, practicing and benefiting from behavior analysis they may have contributed to the survival of behavior analysis, itself, as a cultural practice. Because child welfare practices do affect the election of Governors there is also greater potential for the expansion of behavior analytic practices at a statewide level into other socially meaningful areas. From a global cultural perspective these behavior analytic Superstructural changes alone are unlikely to alter the big picture of culture change in a meaningful way. However, Governors are in a position to beneficially affect Infrastructural contingencies (e.g., contingencies involved in the use and production of oil as opposed to the development of alternative resources and practices for obtaining energy). Competing with efforts at cultural change are the CEO's of corporate giants whose immediate interests are presently best served by existing Infrastructural practices. Although saying so may sound to some like "windmill waving," Malagodi's perspective towa
 
Where All the Behaviorists Went
MARC N. BRANCH (University of Florida)
Abstract: In 1979, at the annual meeting of ABA in Dearborn, Michigan, I presented a paper, co-authored with E. F. Malagodi, with the title, “Where Have all the Behaviorists Gone?” That presentation lamented the diminished role that behaviorism was playing in academic psychology and specified possible reasons for the decline. In this presentation, I shall recap the worries described in the 1979 presentation, and try to present a perspective on what has happened in the academic side of the behavioristic enterprise since that time. I shall also offer opinions on where behaviorists ought to go in the future.
 
Ed Malagodi: My Colleague, Teacher, and Friend
HENRY S. PENNYPACKER (University of Florida)
Abstract: I will act as a discussant, bringing together what the other contributors say in the context of the Ed I knew longer than anyone else.
 
 
Symposium #386
Expanding the Scope of Research in Precision Teaching
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Private Dining Room 2 (3rd floor)
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kimberly Nix Berens (University of Nevada, Reno)
Discussant: Kimberly Nix Berens (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: The current symposium will include papers that highlight the expanding scope of Precision Teaching research. The power of using standard measurement methodologies for conducting broad-scale research in behavior analysis will be illustrated.
 
Precision Teaching and Applied Research Methods: Trying to Fit a Square Peg into a Round Hole
KENDRA RICKARD (University of Nevada, Reno), Kimberly Nix Berens (University of Nevada, Reno), Jennifer Cicchi (University of Nevada, Reno), Thomas E. Boyce (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: In the behavior analytic community, one of the major concerns with Precision Teaching is the lack of systematic, controlled research. Current efforts to remedy this problem by conducting analog studies in Precision Teaching typically involve single-subject designs common in mainstream behavior analysis. It is unknown whether such methodological models are best suited for Precision Teaching research. The current paper examines this problem by evaluating a common clinical practice used by Precision Teachers to increase behavioral endurance. Aggregate clinical data obtained across a large number of learners exposed to this procedure in an academic setting will be compared with data obtained from participants included in a more controlled, analog study. Findings will be discussed with respect to the limitations involved in combining Precision Teaching practices with typical single-subject methodologies used in behavior analysis. Implications of these findings along with recommendations for future research will be offered.
 
Teaching Intraverbal Repertoires: Can Precision Teaching Help?
TRACI M. CIHON (University of Nevada, Reno), Fernando Guerrero (University of Nevada, Reno), Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: This paper offers a brief review of some of the literature exploring the most commonly employed methods of establishing intraverbal repertoires. A more in-depth review of the methods of Precision Teaching to teach intraverbal repertoires is included. A discussion of the effectiveness of each of the procedures employed follows. Finally, the implications of utilizing Precision Teaching to establish an intraverbal repertoire are discussed in detail.
 
Training Teachers with Precision: Development and Evaluation of a Teacher-Training Model to Produce Optimal Instructional Performance
KIMBERLY NIX BERENS (University of Nevada, Reno), Thomas E. Boyce (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Much of the research in staff training targets human service employees and their use of behavior management methods with disabled populations. Very little research has been conducted to investigate the impact of training educators to use behavioral educational methods such as Precision Teaching. It has been demonstrated that Precision Teaching methods produce exemplary performance outcomes with students. As such, it seems that these same methods could be used for training teachers to use more effective instructional strategies in their classrooms. It is the purpose of the proposed investigation to examine the use of Precision Teaching methods to train teachers to use Precision Teaching methods with their students. Specifically, the differential effects of a more traditional package will be evaluated against a training package where Precision Teaching and fluency-based instruction are used. The impact of these two training methods will be examined with respect to: (a) positive changes on teacher instructional behavior, (b) positive changes on student academic behavior, (c) general acceptance of the training package by teachers, and (d) generalization of training effects to novel instructional situations.
 
 
Paper Session #387
Innovative Instructional Techniques for Children with Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Continental C (1st floor)
Area: AUT
Chair: Christina Whalen (TeachTown)
 
TeachTown Software-Based Early Intervention Program for Children with Autism
Domain: Applied Research
CHRISTINA WHALEN (TeachTown), Lars H. Liden (TeachTown), Eric Dallaire (TeachTown), Sven Liden (TeachTown)
 
Abstract: Children with autism have been shown to respond best to ABA-based interventions and tend to respond well to visual-based teaching strategies such as pictures, videos, and computers. In this study, a software-based treatment program for children with autism developed by TeachTown was assessed. This program utilizes the science of ABA and includes effective teaching strategies from Discrete Trial Training and Pivotal Response Training. The program targets symptoms of autism including language, social skills, and cognitive skills in a format that is motivating for children and easy for parents to use and understand. A data tracking system is also included which helps parents, teachers, clinicians, and researchers to share data on the child’s progress. A manual with supplementary generalization activities is also included which provides adults with ABA hands-on activities that supplement target skills from the TeachTown program and assist with generalization through naturalistic routines. 15 adults (parents, teachers, and professionals) were assessed for social validity and 10 children received 2 months of training with the TeachTown program in a multiple-baseline study. Results of both studies will be discussed along with suggestions for further research in utilizing technology to make ABA more accessible and affordable to the consumers.
 
Teaching Touchable Perception Skills to Autistic Infants by the Direct Teaching Method
Domain: Basic Research
S. SUNAY YILDIRIM-DOGRU (Selcuk University), Arzu Ozen (Anadolu University), Bunyamin Birkan (Anadolu University)
 
Abstract: The aim of this study is search the effect of direct teaching touchable perceptional skill to autistic infants. In the study,4 or 6 –year- old three autistic infants who do not have tactile perceptional skills have composed the survey group. The infants are taking cobining education in a pre-school institute and also taking personal educational services in a private educational institute. The childeren are boys. One of the single subject desings,multiple probe desing with probe sessions across subject model,has been used. In the study, direct teaching method has been used in teaching flat and rough surfaces,which is among the touchable perceptional skills.Studies are stil being carried out in the surroundings built one by one. It is considered that a base for teaching expressive tongue skills will have been prepared by the time the infants learn these concepts. The result of the research will be ready in january 2005. During this period, generalization, follow-up and application, and reliability data between inspectors will be collected,and the survey results will be discussed in a congress atmosphere.
 
Teaching Sociodramatic Play Skills to Children with Autism in Small Group Instructional Arrangements
Domain: Basic Research
ARZU OZEN (Anadolu University), Bunyamin Birkan (Anadolu University), Sema Batu (Anadolu University)
 
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to examine the effectiveness of direct instruction on teaching sociodramatic play skills to childern with autism in small group instructional arrangements. The study was conducted with three participants with autis with the age of ten. They were all inclusion students in regular primary schools. A multiple probe design across behaviors study was conducted and was replicated with the participants of the study. The dependent variable of the study were playing a hospital game, playing a school game and playing a canteen game. Three undergraduate students of special education department were the models for the role of each participant in each game first and then asked the participants to play the role they were given. In the hospital game the participants were taught to play the doctor, patient and the nurse. In the school game, they were taught the teacher, student and the inspector, and in the canteen game, they were taught the salesman, cashier, and the customer role. During the study, the observation learning score of the students were taken. During the study, effectiveness, maintenance generalization and observational learning data were collected. Small group instruction was found to be effective on teaching sociodratic play skills. During the presentation the audience will be given information about the results of the study.
 
 
 
Symposium #388
Recent Advances in Preference and Reinforcement Procedures
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Stevens 1 (Lower Level)
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Eileen M. Roscoe (New England Center for Children)
CE Instructor: Eileen M. Roscoe, Ph.D.
Abstract: A great deal of research has demonstrated the utility of systematic preference and reinforcer assessments. The present series of studies detail refinements to current methods by evaluating the effects of including different types or quality of stimuli. The first study compared the effects of substituting tokens for high- and low-preference edibles both before and after token training. In the second study, preference and reinforcer efficacy for different magnitudes of one or two functional reinforcers (attention or escape) were assessed. The third study compared the effects of choice of task order during three conditions, a participant-selected condition, an experimenter-selected condition that was not yoked to the participant-selected condition, and an experimenter-selected condition that was yoked to the participant-selected condition. In the final paper, the role of reinforcer potency for correct responses was evaluated when task interspersal procedures were and were not in effect. Collectively, these studies extend the literature on preference assessments by examining the conditions under which novel and qualitatively different items may predict reinforcer effects.
 
Assessment and Training of Tokens Utilizing Preference Assessment Methodology
ELISA M. HEGG (New England Center for Children), Daniel Gould (New England Center for Children), Myrna E. Libby (New England Center for Children), Richard B. Graff (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Two adolescents participated in several phases of preference and reinforcer assessments. First, multiple-stimulus preference assessments were conducted with edibles, and preference hierarchies were generated. Novel tokens (without backup reinforcers) were substituted for the most- and least-preferred edibles, and preference assessments were again conducted; tokens (without backup reinforcers) ranked as the least preferred stimuli. Tokens (without backup reinforcers) did not function as reinforcers on subsequent reinforcer assessments. Next, token training paired one novel token with the most-preferred edible; the other token was paired with the least-preferred edible. Following token training, another preference assessment was conducted with the tokens substituted for the most- and least-preferred edible; however, when tokens were selected, they were now exchanged for the back-up reinforcer. The token paired with the most-preferred edible ranked highest in the preference hierarchy, while the token paired with the least-preferred edible ranked lowest. In the final reinforcer assessment, high-preference foods and tokens paired with high-preference foods both generated high rates of responding, while low-preference foods and tokens paired with low-preference foods both generated lower rates of responding. Interobserver agreement data were collected in at least 38% of preference and reinforcer assessment across participants, and was at least 97% for all assessments.
 
The Importance of Reinforcement Magnitude: An Examination of Preference and Reinforcer Efficacy
NICOLE M. TROSCLAIR-LASSERRE (Louisiana State University), Dorothea C. Lerman (Louisiana State University), Tiffany Kodak (Louisiana State University)
Abstract: Reinforcers that maintain problem behavior often are an integral part of treatment with differential reinforcement. However, the magnitude of the reinforcer (e.g., duration of attention) has varied widely across studies and seemed to be chosen arbitrarily. Relatively little is known about children’s preference for different magnitudes of functional reinforcers or the relationship between magnitude and treatment effectiveness. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the basic relation between reinforcer magnitude, preference, and efficacy. Preference for different magnitudes of one or two functional reinforcers (e.g., attention, escape) was evaluated with two children who engaged in problem behavior to identify values that were and were not associated with a relative preference. Next, the relation between preference and reinforcer efficacy was evaluated via progressive ratio schedules. Results indicated that children may show a preference for different magnitudes of reinforcement and that preference may be a predictor of reinforcer efficacy.
 
Effects of Choice of Task Sequence in Individuals With Developmental Disabilities in Public Schools
SHERRY STAYER SMELTZER (New England Center for Children), Richard B. Graff (New England Center for Children), Myrna E. Libby (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Although researchers have examined the effects of choice on responding, there is limited research on the effects choice of task order on responding. This study examined the effect of choice of task order on the on-task behavior, duration, and challenging behaviors in 2 children with autism and one diagnosed with Fragile X syndrome. Three low-preference tasks were identified for each child (using brief multiple-stimulus without replacement preference assessments) and then utilized in an experimental design that included alternating treatments and concurrent operants phases. During single operant phases, when participants selected the task order, all participants showed higher on-task behavior, decreased total duration, and decreased rates of challenging behavior compared to when the experimenter selected the task order. However, when the task order in the experimenter-selected sessions was yoked to the order selected by the participant, little difference in responding was noted. When given the ability to choose between two conditions in the concurrent operants phase, participants preferred the condition in which they could choose the task order. Interobserver agreement data (IOA) were collected in approximately 33% of sessions across participants; mean IOA was 96% across participants.
 
The Role of Reinforcer Preference in the Effectiveness of Task Interspersal Procedures
VALERIE M. VOLKERT (Louisiana State University), Dorothea C. Lerman (Louisiana State University), Nicole M. Trosclair-Lasserre (Louisiana State University), Laura R. Addison (Louisiana State University), Tiffany Kodak (Louisiana State University)
Abstract: Past research has demonstrated that interspersing known (i.e., maintenance) tasks with unknown (i.e., acquisition) tasks facilitates learning under certain conditions. However, little is known about factors that influence the effectiveness of this popular treatment strategy. In the current investigation, we evaluated the effects of reinforcer potency on interspersal procedures while teaching object labels to three children diagnosed with autism or with autistic-like features. The potency of the reinforcer delivered for correct responses on trials with unknown and/or known object labels was manipulated, and performance with and without the interspersal technique was compared. Performance was only enhanced under the interspersal condition when either (a) less preferred reinforcers (e.g., praise only) were delivered for all correct responses, or (b) more preferred reinforcers (e.g., praise plus food) were provided for performance on known trials than on unknown trials. This latter finding is inconsistent with recommendations for using the interspersal technique. Interoberserver agreement coefficients exceeded 80% or 90% for all participants.
 
 
Symposium #389
Recent Developments in the Use of Functional Communication Training with Individuals with Severe Disabilities
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Stevens 2 (Lower Level)
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Mark O'Reilly (University of Texas, Austin)
Discussant: Craig H. Kennedy (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: Functional communication training (FCT) is now a popular and effective method to treat socially mediated challenging behavior. In this sympopsium we present three empirical studies which attempt to extend our understanding of the uses of FCT for the treatment of behavior disorders. In the first paper the authors explore the influence of training a single topography of communication on the the development of untrained vocal communication skills. In the second paper the influence of various task fading procedures are examined during the treatment of escape-maintained problem behavior with FCT. The final paper examines examines the effects of training multiple topographies of cummunication and the influence of such in situations where communication breakdown may occur. Implications of the findings and avenues for future research will be discussed.
 
Evaluation of Manding Topography during Functional Communication Training
JAY W. HARDING (University of Iowa), David P. Wacker (University of Iowa), Wendy K. Berg (University of Iowa), John F. Lee (University of Iowa), Muska Ibrahimovic (University of Iowa), Lisa C. Winborn-Kemmerer (University of Iowa)
Abstract: We evaluated changes in manding during functional communication training (FCT). The participants were 3 preschool-aged boys who displayed severe problem behavior. All procedures were conducted in the children’s homes with their mothers serving as therapists. Multielement and multiple baseline designs were used to evaluate assessment and treatment results. Inter-rater agreement was assessed across 30% of sessions and averaged 98%. During assessment, functional analyses conducted for each participant showed that problem behavior was maintained by positive reinforcement. During treatment, the parents taught their children to mand for attention or tangibles via vocal requests, manual signing, and a picture card. Treatment results showed that problem behavior decreased for all 3 children and that the children initially performed vocal and non-vocal topographies of manding. Over time, the children’s use of signing and picture cards decreased but the children continued to perform vocal mands to obtain reinforcement. Results will be discussed regarding the development of reinforcement-based communication programs and their influence on vocal communication when augmentative approaches are used during treatment.
 
Further Analysis of Concurrent Schedules of Reinforcement Within Functional Communication Training Packages
STEPHANIE M. PETERSON (Idaho State University), Renee Koehler Van Norman (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: Functional communication training (FCT) can produce rapid suppression of problem behavior and increases in appropriate communication. However, an often-cited difficulty with FCT as treatment for escape-maintained problem behavior is that it allows the participant to have continuous access to reinforcement (cf. Marcus & Vollmer, 1995). As an alternative, some researchers have opted for differential reinforcement of alternative reinforcement (DRA) interventions that provide reinforcement for increasingly more task completion over time (also known as stimulus or demand fading; e.g., Zarcone, Iwata, Smith, Mazaleski, & Lerman, 1994). However, some researchers have found that extinction bursts are common when increases in task requirements are made. This study evaluated methods of combining FCT and stimulus fading packages to produce effective suppression of problem behavior (with fewer extinction bursts) while simultaneously reinforcing task completion. Specifically, concurrent schedules of reinforcement were applied to communication responses and task completion. Then, the effects of stimulus fading with and without an FCT component were compared. Results of the study will be discussed in relation to matching law and behavioral economics.
 
Functional Communication Training: Teaching Multiple Functionally Equivalent Responses to Young Children with Autism and Severe Language Delays
ERIK DRASGOW (University of South Carolina), Christian Atlas Martin (University of South Carolina), James W. Halle (University of Illinois)
Abstract: Historically, functional communication training (FCT) has replaced socially undesirable communication forms with a single alternative. In this study, weused a multiple baseline design to examine the effects of an intervention to replace the inappropriate communication of two young children with autism and severe language delays with multiple alternative forms. Our logic forproviding multiple functionally equivalent forms is that communicativebreakdowns often occur because social partners do not immediately respond to communicative attempts for a variety of reasons (e.g., not attending, don't understand). When a breakdown occurs and social partners do not respond,young children may resort to the original socially undesirable communicative behavior or they may stop communicating. Thus, our intervention was aimed atincreasing the children's response class of socially acceptablecommunication forms (a) to prevent them from resorting to undesirable communication and (b) to maintain their persistence during communication breakdowns.
 
 
Symposium #390
Int'l Symposium - Relational Conditioning Processes Relevant to Social Categorization and Self-Evaluation
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Stevens 3 (Lower Level)
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Rhonda M. Merwin (University of Mississippi)
Discussant: Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: Relational conditioning is a process by which stimuli acquire psychological functions in a way far less direct than operant or respondent conditioning principles would predict. Unlike direct learning processes, relational conditioning has not been demonstrated in nonhuman subjects. Thus, it is considered by some researchers to be central to complex human behavior (e.g., language, cognition, emotion) (Hayes, Barnes-Holmes, & Roche, 2001). Recent studies examining derived relational responding have found that stimuli that are emotionally salient or clinically relevant impact stimulus equivalence class formation (e.g., Barnes, Lawlor, Smeets, & Roche, 1996; Leslie, Tierney, Robinson, Keenan, & Watt, 1993; Plaud, 1995). Changes in acquisition appear to be related to subjects’ pre-experimental learning history. This symposium consists of three databased presentations. Each study examines basic behavioral processes relevant to social categorization or self-evaluation. Specifically, the three studies use stimuli that are either socially loaded or self-relevant and examine 1) equivalence class formation 2) merging of experimentally established competing classes and 3) transformation of psychological function.
 
Deriving Equivalence Relations Between Self-referential and Evaluative Stimuli: A Process Account of Self-Evaluation
RHONDA M. MERWIN (University of Mississippi), Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi), Chad E. Drake (University of Mississippi)
Abstract: This study examines the acquisition of equivalence classes when classes contain both self-referential and evaluative stimuli. It is a replication and extension of Merwin and Wilson (in press) and it addresses a number of limitations identified in the initial study. The current study consisted of two loaded conditions and a neutral condition. The neutral condition examined subjects’ ability to form equivalence classes with neutral stimuli. The loaded conditions included self-referential and evaluative stimuli. In one of the loaded conditions, subjects received conditional discrimination training that resulted in equivalence relations between self-referential stimuli and positive evaluation words; in the other loaded condition, subjects received training that resulted in equivalence relations between self-referential stimuli and negative evaluation words. The order in which the loaded conditions were presented was pseudo-random. Accuracy and latency data for the three conditions were examined. The performance of subjects that reported high distress and negative-self was compared to the performance of subjects that reported low distress and a positive-self. Findings and implications will be discussed.
 
A Behavior Analytic Approach to the Effect of Self-Relevance and Evaluation on Social Categorization
CHAD E. DRAKE (University of Mississippi), Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi)
Abstract: This study explores the effect of self-relevance and evaluative salience, separately and in combination, on derived relational responding to stimuli associated with social categories. Participants engaged in a matching-to-sample procedure that shaped up competing groups of socially loaded stimuli. After successful training, new training was administered that was incompatible with the previous training. Participants were then tested for inclusive or exclusive responding. Findings and implications will be discussed.
 
Stigmatizing Body Images and Relational Conditioning
JONATHAN WEINSTEIN (University of Mississippi), Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi), Chad E. Drake (University of Mississippi)
Abstract: This study examines the transfer of stigmatized stimulus functions to otherwise unrelated stimuli using a two-step sorting task (i.e., Implicit Associations Test; IAT) and a matching-to-sample (MTS) preparation. Subjects completed the IAT two times, once before and once after the MTS task. The pre-training IAT required subjects to sort stimuli that would later be used in the equivalence training of the MTS task. Conditional discrimination training of the MTS task resulted in the formation of stimulus equivalence classes that contained socially loaded stimuli (i.e., obesity images) and neutral stimuli. Testing examined whether the stigma function of the obesity images transferred to the previously neutral stimuli in the post-training sorting task. Data will be presented and implications discussed.
 
 
Symposium #391
Int'l Symposium - Studying the Neural Substrates of Equivalence Classes and Derived Relations
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Boulevard A (2nd floor)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: This symposium focuses on the neural substrates of equivalence class formation, derived relations, emergent relations, and nodal function. In addition to discussions of experimental strategies that can be used to obtain such information, the presentations will also describe empirical findings that illustrate how will evoked potential and fMRI technologies have been used to identify the neural correlates of these emergent performances. One presentation will illustrate how BOLD fMRI procedures have identified patterns of frontal-striatal-thalamic activation while responding to new relations that are derived from conditional discriminations.Another presentation will consider paradigms and measurement strategies that can be used to identify patterns of neural activation that are the substrates of nodal function in equivalence classes. A third presentation will consider how an evoked potential waveform typically associated with semantic processing (N400) is also correlated with equivalence relations. The final presentation will consider the neural substrates of stimulus equivalence and serial learning along with the effects of verbal instruction on these emergent performances and their neural substrates.
 
Electrophysiological Measures of Derived Stimulus Relations:What Can They Tell Us About Behavior That We Don’t Already Know?
DERMOT BARNES-HOLMES (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Ian T. Stewart (National University of Ireland, Galway), Robert Whelan (Anglia Polytechnic University, Cambridge, UK), Simon Dymond (Anglia Polytechnic University, Cambridge, UK)
Abstract: The current paper will argue that an important component of the research agenda for Relational Frame Theory involves studying the functional relations that obtain between environmental events and the physiological activity that takes place inside the brain and central nervous system, with a particular focus on human language and cognition. In support of this view, five separate experiments are outlined, which support the argument that there is a clear functional overlap between semantic and derived stimulus relations. Specifically, an evoked potential waveform typically associated with semantic processing (N400) is shown to be differentially sensitive to equivalence versus non-equivalence relations. Experiments 4 and 5 indicate that these reaction time and evoked potential effects are not restricted to traditional lexical decision tasks, but can also be observed using the implicit association test. Furthermore, preliminary evidence suggests that evoked potentials might constitute a more sensitive measure of derived stimulus relations than response time. The results obtained across all five experiments support the view that the study of derived stimulus relations, combined with some of the procedures and measures of cognitive psychology and cognitive neuroscience, may provide an important inroad into the experimental analysis of semantic relations in human language.
 
Measurement Strategies to Track Neural Substrates of Nodal Function in Equivalence Classes
LANNY FIELDS (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: When an equivalence class is formed, some stimuli serve as nodes that link together the stimuli in the class. When transitivity probes and equivalence probes are presented, stimuli that were linked by nodes occasion class consistent responding even though the linking nodal stimuli are absent. When equivalence classes are formed, there must be some changes in neural function that are acquired by the nodal stimuli. How can those neural functions of nodal stimuli be measured? Are those neural signatures of nodal function evoked by the stimuli in transitivity probes and equivalence probes? This paper will describe methodological factors that can provide answers to these questions. One strategy should permit the measurement of nodal function after classes have been formed. Another strategy should identify the patterns of neural activation that are acquired by nodal stimuli when a set of unrelated stimuli is transformed into and equivalence class.
 
Clinical Implications of Integrating Neuroimaging and Stimulus Equivalence Procedures
MICHAEL W. SCHLUND (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Michael F. Cataldo (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: A variety of clinical and neurodevelopmental disorders are characterized by deficits in forming conditional relations that stem from dysfunction in the frontal lobe, striatum and thalamus. Integrating neuroimaging technology and stimulus equivalence (SE) procedures creates the opportunity to (1) map the neurobiology of derived relational responding and (2) map principles of SE and relational frame theory onto frontal-striatal-thalamic regions. As first steps towards these goals, we will present BOLD fMRI data that show how several procedural variables (e.g., task type, stimulus type) modulate frontal-striatal-thalamic activation in humans during derived relational responding.
 
On Neuroimaging Derived Relations
DAVID W. DICKINS (University of Liverpool), Neil Roberts (University of Liverpool), Andrew Mayes (University of Manchester), Daniela Montaldi (University of Manchester), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Yvonne Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: Ingenious and seemingly powerful technologies have recently been developed enabling the visualization in some detail of events in the brain concomitant upon the ongoing behavioral performance of a human participant. The good behavioural control and conceptual parsimony characteristic of operant paradigms makes these attractive procedures for advancing the understanding of brain-behaviour relations. A start has been made in such research using two related paradigms - stimulus equivalence and serial learning – in which novel or emergent relations are derived from a baseline set of trained relations. Some published and prospective neuroimaging studies of these and related phenomena will be reviewed. It is argued however that these newly measurable brain events are more than just a new set of dependent variables in relation to which the independent variables familiarly manipulated in the operant laboratory may be explored. Verbal instructions and verbal reports, and chronometric studies, may provide useful adjuncts. We contend that a successful reductionist explanation of such behaviours will require their conceptual dissection into increasingly plausible suites of component processes. The aim is that these may ultimately map on to neural phenomena, which it is expected will be visualized with increasing precision by parallel developments in imaging and related technology.
 
 
Paper Session #392
Teaching Play, Recreational, and Leisure Skills to Persons with Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Stevens 5 (Lower Level)
Area: AUT
Chair: Stephanie K. Merker (University of North Texas)
 
The Effects of Play Materials on Social Interactions Between Children with Autism and Their Siblings
Domain: Applied Research
STEPHANIE K. MERKER (University of North Texas), Shahla S. Ala'i-Rosales (University of North Texas)
 
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to investigate whether the specific types of play materials affect the social interactions between children with autism and their siblings. Two sibling pairs participated in a multi-element analysis of the effects of certain toys and activities on the interactions between each dyad. Three conditions were assessed: free-choice of play materials, Child 1 preferred play materials only, and Child 2 preferred play materials only. Results of the assessment showed that more social interactions occurred between the sibling dyads in certain conditions. An intervention was implemented in the condition with the least amount of play interactions and carry-over into the other two conditions was measured. Reliability assessments of the taped sessions are currently in progress. The results are discussed in terms of the potential of setting events to affect intervention outcomes and the importance of improving relationships between children with autism and their siblings.
 
Use of Graduated Guidance to Teach Yoga Skills to Young Children with Developmental Delays
Domain: Applied Research
DEBORAH J. GRUBER (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Claire L. Poulson (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Ronald Lee (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City Unive)
 
Abstract: The purpose of the present study is to assess the effects of an intervention package to teach children with developmental delays individual exercise skills. These skills were taught with yoga as the method of exercise. The video-modeling baseline procedure consisted of presenting a videotape showing a certified yoga instructor providing verbal instructions and physical demonstrations of each step in a 24-step response chain that make up two yoga poses. The intervention package was implemented by yoga trainers, and consisted of graduated guidance, reinforcement, and instruction, which were introduced in a multiple-baseline-experimental design across three participants. Graduated-guidance procedures were provided to the participant, enabling the participant to execute the correct physical alignment for each step in the response chain. Upon completion of the intervention, results indicate that all participants matched the response chain with 70% accuracy or better. Data also demonstrate that one participant generalized these skills to a setting in which the treatment package was not implemented. Results from this study demonstrating an increase in skills related to physical activity, are consistent with previous research investigating treatment packages that improve physical performance. The need for future research is suggested, given the limited behavior-analytic research in this area.
 
 
 
Symposium #393
Treatment Integrity in Early Intensive Behavioral Services
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Continental B (1st floor)
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Peter C. Patch (Simmons College)
Discussant: Peter C. Patch (Simmons College)
CE Instructor: Peter C. Patch, Ph.D.
Abstract: Early intensive behavioral interventions are at the forefront of services to children newly diagnosed with a Pervasive Developmental Disorder. These services are generally provided in home settings in an individualized format by consultants, therapists, and instructional staff who travel among several children within a day. Given the increased costs associated with home based services, it is imperative that effective strategies be consistently implemented in order to maximize learning outcomes for each child. Research on treatment integrity has suggested that a gap often exists between services that are planned and services which are delivered, calling into question the effectiveness and efficiency of those services. While strategies for ensuring treatment integrity have appeared in the literature, very little research has examined the variables involved in ensuring treatment fidelity in home based services for young children with autism. This presentation examines several variables potentially impacting treatment integrity and child outcomes for children with autism in this environment. These variables include staff training procedures, prior experience of staff, duration of child sessions, and provision of staff feedback.
 
Assuring the Generalization of Teaching Skills for Home-Based Instructors
JANICE R. BOLTON (HMEA), Michele D. Mayer (HMEA)
Abstract: With the growing need to provide services to children with autism, many agencies have begun to offer home based instruction to young children with autism. Growth in this service has outpaced the existing pool of trained instructors, leading agencies to develop inservice training programs aimed at developing teaching skills in paraprofessionals. It is important to evaluate the effectiveness of these training programs: do they assure that participants (1) have mastered the teaching skills that they are being trained in, and (2) can generalize these skills to the teaching setting? This becomes a critical issue in home based services, where opportunities for frequent on the job practice, observation, and performance feedback are difficult to provide. This study focused on a training program designed to teach paraprofessionals to implement discrete trial training. Baseline measures showed that participants completing the existing training program were able to perform this skill with an average accuracy rate of 84%. When additional practice using multiple exemplars, specific performance feedback, and a predetermined mastery criterion were implemented, participants accuracy in performing discrete trials increased and was seen to maintain in on the job performance.
 
Investigating Treatment Integrity Differences Across Time Segments Within an Instructional Session
STACEY CONSIDINE (HMEA), Michele D. Mayer (HMEA), Sandra M. Beaton-Small (HMEA)
Abstract: Treatment integrity, defined as the extent to which the independent variable is implemented or carried out as planned, is a vital component when training staff to implement programs within home-based services for individuals with autism. However, once staff are working in the home setting, the assessment and monitoring of the independent variable is often overlooked. Practitioners frequently assume that trained staff will implement instructional strategies as planned and behavior change will result. While treatment integrity has been examined in a number of different settings, there is a dearth of research focusing on treatment fidelity in early intensive behavioral intervention for children with autism. There are a host of variables that may influence the fidelity of program implementation in a home environment. Two of those variables – length of the instructional session and prior staff experience – were examined in this study. Treatment integrity was measured across sessions of varying lengths with three instructors who differed in their amount of prior teaching experience with children with autism. All completed a standard agency in-service training program. Implications with respect to child performance and arrangement of instructional programming within a session will also be discussed.
 
Does Improved Treatment Integrity Effect Child Outcomes in Discrete Trial Programming?
SANDRA M. BEATON-SMALL (HMEA), Michele D. Mayer (HMEA), Stacey Considine (HMEA)
Abstract: In order to evaluate the efficacy of discrete trial programs one must ensure that the program is implemented accurately by staff. One way to measure staff accuracy is to monitor the level of treatment integrity. There is evidence in the literature suggesting that treatment outcomes change in desired directions when procedures are implemented with high fidelity. The purpose of the current presentation was two-fold: (1) to evaluate the effects of written and oral feedback on staff implementation of discrete trial programs and (2) to evaluate the relationship between staff performance and child performance. Direct care staff with varying levels of experience implementing discrete trial programs served as participants. Child participants included young children diagnosed with a Pervasive Developmental Disorder who were receiving home based services. Treatment integrity and child performance were measured across ten common instructional programs. Results will be discussed with respect to efficacy of feedback, generalization to non-targeted programs, and relationship to child improvement.
 
 
Panel #394
Trials and Tribulations: Directing an ABA School for Children with Autism
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Continental A (1st floor)
Area: AUT/OBM; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Mary Ellen McDonald, Ph.D.
Chair: Nicole Weidenbaum (Nassau-Suffolk Services for Autism)
MARY ELLEN MCDONALD (The Genesis School)
RANDY I. HOROWITZ (Eden II)
HELEN BLOOMER (Crossroads)
JUDITH L. PALAZZO (Connecticut Center for Child Development, Inc.)
Abstract: This panel will focus on the difficulties often faced when directing a school program based in the principles of Applied Behavior Analysis for children with autism. Specific areas to be discussed by the panelists will include topics such as: staff recruitment and retention, staff development including staff training models and models of staff evaluation, parental involvement and education, and motivating staff and families to be productive members of the team. Specific behavior-analytic principles will be discussed as they apply to these broad issues that we often face when trying to provide a quality program to individuals with autism. Specific systems that have been developed and have been shown to be effective will be discussed as they pertain to the challenges faced by the panelists.
 
 
Paper Session #395
Int'l Paper Session - Animal Training II
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:30 PM–4:20 PM
Boulevard C (2nd floor)
Area: EAB
Chair: Jennifer L. Sobie (Western Michigan University)
 
Analysis of Canine Stereotypic Behavior and Treatment
Domain: Applied Research
ELIZABETH ANNE MCBRIDE (University of Southampton, UK), Ed Redhead (University of Southampton, UK), Lewis A. Bizo (University of Southampton, UK), Matthew Parker (University of Southampton, UK)
 
Abstract: Problem behaviour may have a physiological basis; it may be conditioned to inappropriate stimuli; or it may be abnormal in terms of frequency or duration of display, known as stereotypic behaviour (SB), that is considered functionless (Mason, 1991). However, repetitive, invariant behaviours that are resistant to change are also characteristic of normal behaviours, and may have phylogenetic influences (Timberlake and Lucas, 1989). So, when does normal behaviour become a stereotypy? Whilst SB is not uncommon in animals that have had to live in severely impoverished or restricted environment, they are likely to be less common in companion animals, particularly dogs and cats who tend not to be caged for long periods. Yet many repetitive behaviours in these species are labelled SB and treated initially with drugs, rather than undertaking a complete case history which may indicate other motivations for the behaviour and that behavioural management is a more appropriate treatment. The case history needs to identify both initiating and maintaining factors, as well as breed specific characteristics and the relevant elements of the human – animal relationship. The rationale for behaviour modification programme and the pre-treatment and post-treatment data will be presented for clinical cases of repetitive behaviour in dogs.
 
Applied Animal Behavior Consultation and Treatment: A Review of the Field
Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER L. SOBIE (Western Michigan University)
 
Abstract: Animal behavior consultation is an emerging field dedicated to the treatment of behavior problems in companion animals. The field has seen exponential growth in the past two decades, and this growth can be attributed to the bridging of knowledge gained in both basic and applied branches of behavior analysis with that veterinary science. However, the disciplines of applied behavior analysis in human psychology and that of veterinary science necessarily have very different assessment, diagnostic and treatment design protocols. It can be questioned whether the field of animal behavior consultation has been able to successfully combine the expertise of these two disciplines. To date, no systematic review has sought to evaluate the published outcome literature on animal behavior interventions. Accordingly, the purpose of this review is to provide a quantitative and qualitative analysis of treatment in animal behavior consultation, an assessment of the utilization of behavioral principles in the treatment of behavior problems in pet animals, and to identify treatment and research strengths and inadequacies.
 
 
 
Paper Session #396
Clinical Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:30 PM–4:20 PM
Williford A (3rd floor)
Area: CBM
Chair: Stephen E. Wong (Florida International University)
 
Some Empirical Evidence and Conceptual Analysis for Dosed vs Prolonged Exposure Treatment of Fear and Traumatic Stress
Domain: Applied Research
C. RICHARD SPATES (Western Michigan University)
 
Abstract: This paper presents selected empirical evidence that suggest dosed exposure is superior to prolonged exposure along several dimensions in the treatment of fear and traumatic stress reactions. Recent literature also suggests there are major problems with the use of prolonged exposure in clinical practice. Dosed exposure occurs when the client confronts the conditioned aversive stimulus in brief intervals followed immediately by a brief intertrial interval free of CS. Prolonged exposure occurs when the CS confrontation is continuous without an intertrial interval free of confrontation. Both prolonged exposure and dosed exposure have shown efficacy as treatments for anxiety disorders. Recent empirical evidence suggests that dosed exposure is significantly more efficient in producing outcomes comparable to prolonged exposure, and there is greater uniformity of positive outcomes across dependent measures. This paper highlights the conceptual foundation for these differential observations, while drawing on data from clinical and basic research. It will be recommended that greater research attention be devoted to comparative efficacy and randomized clinical trials of these two procedures in the treatment of fear and traumatic stress. The outcome should be helpful to behavior therapists who wish to apply a demonstrably effective intervention without some of the drawbacks of prolonged exposure.
 
Biomedicalization of Social Problems, New Conquests of the Pharmaceutical Industry, and Implication for Behavior Analysis
Domain: Service Delivery
STEPHEN E. WONG (Florida International University)
 
Abstract: This paper examines the growing trend of characterizing and viewing putative physical diseases or biological defects as the cause of problems in human conduct and performance. This trend is manifested in the increasing number of DSM diagnoses, frequent television and other mass media advertisements for psychotropic drugs, rising drug sales to alleviate these concerns, and the expanding influence of biomedical concepts on professionals and lay persons when dealing with these difficulties. This paper briefly reviews some of the fallacies and pseudo-science supporting this movement, as well as the professional and industrial special interest groups that benefit from it. To illustrate these trends, three social problems -- schizophrenia, attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder, and depression – will be discussed showing how their reconstruction within a biomedical framework limits the future applications of behavior analysis.
 
 
 
Paper Session #397
Int'l Paper Session - Professional Competencies for Behavior Analysts and Psychologists
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:30 PM–4:20 PM
Williford B (3rd floor)
Area: EDC
Chair: Janet Ellis (University of North Texas)
 
Personality and Professional Competencies In Psychology Students
Domain: Service Delivery
SEBASTIAN FIGUEROA RODRÍGUEZ (University of Veracruz), Leticia Rivera (Universidad Cristobal Colon), Clara Olivia Romero Rodríguez (Universidad Cristobal Colon), Adriana Ordaz García (Universidad Cristobal Colon), Ilse Lara Cado (Universidad Cristobal Colon)
 
Abstract: This work’s objective is to analyze students personality profile, and relate it with their professional competencies, which are demanded as much in their university formation as in the labor world. Participants in this study were under graduate students (seniors) from Universidad Cristobal Colón in Veracruz, Mexico The method research is qualitative via interviews with professors with expert ices in different areas of psychology that helped select those students with higher levels of professional competencies in psychology different areas; personality profiles of select students were obtain through psychometric instruments. Once students specified their labor field interests, a relation was made to be able to establish if their personality and professional competencies are the ones required by the position profiles in their elected labor field.
 
 
 
Panel #397a
Professional Development Series: Effective Oral Presentations and Posters
Monday, May 30, 2005
3:30 PM–4:20 PM
Lake Michigan (8th floor)
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Shawn R. Charlton (University of California, San Diego)
NED CARTER (The Swedish Association of Local Authorities and Regions)
KENNETH NILSSON (Behavior Analysis Group, Sweden)
SHAWN R. CHARLTON (University of California, San Diego)
Abstract: This panel has been an ABA favorite for years! Participants will receive suggestions on how to present dynamic conference talks and how to prepare effective posters.
 
 
Special Event #398
Presidential Address: Follow Those Data: Ten Lessons in the Science and Application of Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 30, 2005
4:30 PM–5:30 PM
International North (2nd floor)
Chair: Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
 
Presidential Address: Follow Those Data: Ten Lessons in the Science and Application of Behavior Analysis
Abstract: Approximately 15 years ago, my students and I noticed that the rate of operant responding changes systematically within experimental sessions even when the programmed conditions of reinforcement are constant across the session. Subsequent research revealed that these within-session changes in responding are caused by systematic changes in the effectiveness of the reinforcer with its repeated presentation. Changes in reinforcer effectiveness are, in turn, produced by sensitization and habituation to the reinforcer. I will discuss the lessons that I learned while investigating this finding. These lessons include “when you run onto something interesting, drop everything else and study it” (Skinner, 1956); the first reaction to a new finding is denial (Bindra, 1978); any question you ask will be the wrong one; your worst enemies will be those who should be your best friends; reading other literatures will get you into trouble; people prefer complex to simple explanations; many data are needed to change opinions; and “in a cold world, you need your friends” (The Big Chill). Along the way, I’ll discuss the theoretical and applied implications of dynamic changes in reinforcer effectiveness for the field of behavior analysis.
 
FRANCES K. MCSWEENEY (Washington State University)
 
Dr. Frances K. McSweeney is Regents Professor of Psychology and Vice Provost for Faculty Affairs at Washington State University (WSU). She received her B.A., Summa Cum Laude, from Smith College (1969) and her Masters (1972) and Ph.D. (1974) from Harvard University. She joined the faculty at WSU in 1974 and has served as chair of the Psychology Department, as well as chair of the WSU Faculty Senate. Dr. McSweeney has published more than 100 papers on topics such as the Matching Law, behavioral contrast, and dynamic changes in reinforcer value. She has received grants from sources such as the National Science Foundation and the National Institute of Mental Health. She has served on the editorial boards of many journals such as Animal Learning & Behavior, the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, and The Behavior Analyst. She is currently Associate Editor of Learning and Motivation. Dr. McSweeney served two terms as Program Committee Chair for ABA and is currently a member of the ABA Executive Council. She is a fellow of the American Psychological Association (Divisions 3 and 25) and of the American Psychological Society. Dr. McSweeney has won many awards including the Sahlin Faculty Excellence Award for Research, the Samuel H. Smith Leadership Award, the Edward R. Meyer Distinguished Professor Award, and the Eminent Professor Award, WSU’s highest award for a faculty member.
 
 
 
Poster Session #399
#399 Poster Session - AUT
Monday, May 30, 2005
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
1. Teaching Teenagers with Autism to Answer Cell Phones and Follow Directions When Lost in Community Settings
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ANGELA RODRIGUEZ (Alpine Learning Group), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group), Hannah Hoch (The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Christina Kenny (Alpine Learning Group), Leah Scaglione (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract: A multiple baseline across participants was used to assess prompting and reinforcement procedures to teach three teenagers with autism to access assistance when lost in community settings. This study replicated a previous study (Taylor, Hughes, Richard, Hoch, & Rodriguez-Coello, 2004) in which participants were taught to respond to a vibrating pager to seek assistance. In this study however, participants were taught to answer a cell phone and to follow directions via the cell phone to seek assistance. In baseline, none of the participants were able to answer the cell phones to seek assistance. Following instruction at school and in the community all three participants learned to answer the cell phone, follow instructions to go to various locations and to seek assistance from a naïve adult when separated from their teachers in community settings. Generalization probes were conducted in non-training community sites. A second observer recorded IOA data for 30% of the sessions and averaged 95%.
 
2. The Use of Video Modeling to Teach Three Novel Vocational Tasks to a Student with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MICHELLE L. MATATHIA (The Genesis School), Erin Sparacio (The Genesis School), William J. Donlon (The Genesis School), Mary Ellen McDonald (The Genesis School)
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to examine the effectiveness of the use of video modeling to teach three novel vocational tasks to a student with autism. The participant was an adolescent with autism who was currently sampling jobs in the community. A mutiple-baseline across tasks design was used. During baseline video modeling was not used and the participant was simply presented with the materials and an instruction to do their work. During training, a video model of a vocational task was presented to the participant and the participant then completed the task. Generalization probes were conducted at the student's current work site. The present study demonstrated that video modeling can be an effective tool for teaching new vocational skills to individuals with autism.
 
3. Jared's Story: How a Fourteen-Year-Old Boy with Dual Diagnoses Survived the Harsh Realities of a Regular Education Public School
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
JOEL VIDOVIC (The Ohio State University), Pamela G. Osnes (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: Jared was a 14-yr-old boy with diagnoses of autism, Down Syndrome, and ADHD who attended a middle school classroom for students with moderate to intensive disabilities in a public school that served regular education students. Jared exhibited severe and challenging behaviors that were atypical for the classroom, including frequent attempts to aggress toward others, screaming, self-stimulation, and severe functional communication deficits. The classroom teacher had received training in behavior analysis in her Master's program, and had implemented a variety of strategies with Jared that had proven ineffective in meeting his individual needs. Because of Jared's intensive needs, an instructional aide provided most instruction in 1:1 format. School personnel reported being afraid of Jared, although his parents reported having very few difficulties at home. A BCBA completed a functional assessment, and determined that Jared's problem behaviors were caused by attention-seeking and escape/avoidance of demands with attempts to communicate driving much inappropriate behavior. This presentation will describe the complexities of providing effective intervention to Jared within the constraints of a public school that was unaccustomed to serving students with his level of disability. Functional assessment and intervention data will be provided.
 
4. Productivity and Publication Trends in Autism-Specific Journals
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
BERENICE DE LA CRUZ (University of Texas at Austin), Helen I. Cannella-Malone (University of Texas at Austin), Seung-Hyun Son (University of Texas at Austin), Chaturi Edrisinha (University of Texas at Austin), Daniel H. Robinson (University of Texas at Austin), Jeffrey S. Sigafoos (University of Texas at Austin), Mark O'Reilly (University of Texas at Austin)
Abstract: The purposes of this study were to (a) identify the most productive researchers and institutions and (b) document publication trends (e.g., type of articles, experimental designs) across the 3 major autism-specific journals (i.e., Journal of Autism and Developmental Disabilities, Focus on Autism and Other Developmental Disorders, Autism: An international Journal of Research and Practice). We reviewed every article published in these journals for the period 1999 — 2004. Articles were coded for author name and gender, institutional affiliations of authors, type of article (e.g., intervention study, assessment study), and funding support. For intervention studies we also coded the type of design (e.g., control group design, single-subject). A second individual scored 20% of the articles to establish inter-coder agreement, which was always above 80% Data analysis revealed that articles were contributed by a number of individuals (both males and females). Multi-authored papers was the norm, and authors were mainly affiliated with a relatively select group of universities, indicating concentrations of autism research in a few major centers. Intervention studies were less prevalent compared to assessment-oriented research studies. Results suggest a need for expanding intervention research using experimental designs, including single subject research designs.
 
5. Stimulus Masking in Skill Acquisition for an Individual with Seizure Disorder and Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MARK WILLIAMS (The May Institute), Adam J. Magee (The May Institute), Samantha Fisher (The May Institute), Jessica Everett (The May Institute), Melissa Demers (The May Institute)
Abstract: The use of visual prompting strategies in teaching new skills to students with PDD is widely recognized as good clinical practice. However, individual differences may limit the success of visual supports. The extent to which visual supports were beneficial as a prompting technique was explored in teaching receptive and expressive language skills to a 13 year old with Autism and Continuous Spikes and Waves during Sleep, a seizure disorder. A comparison was made between skill acquisition using verbal prompting techniques versus verbal prompting paired with a visual stimulus. Both of these prompting strategies were compared with the visual stimulus alone. Targeted skills were taught using a most to least prompting hierarchy. Results suggest that the visual stimulus may be masking the verbal prompt and hindering the ability to acquire skills.
 
6. A Classroom Intervention for Floor-Dropping in a Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JANE I. CARLSON (The May Institute), Amy Slyman (The May Institute), Melissa Stafford (The May Institute)
Abstract: This case study presents a functional assessment and intervention for floor dropping behavior in a 14 year old with autism. Functional assessment revealed that the child displayed two distinct forms of floor dropping; "happy" floor dropping, and escape-motivated floor dropping. During baseline the student displayed the behavior at a rate of 5 episodes per day. A multicomponent intervention was implemented that included a physical escort to his feet for escape-motivated floor dropping. During intervention, the behavior decreased to a rate of .1 episodes per day during the last month of intervention. The rate remained low during a three-month follow-up period. Inter-rater reliability was calculated on 25% of sessions (IRR = 92%).
 
7. Exploring the Relationship Between Staff Competencies and Rate of Skill Acquisition
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JESSICA EVERETT (The May Institute), Leslie Sutro (The May Institute), Mark Williams (The May Institute), Samantha Fisher (The May Institute), Lorrie Ann Perry (The May Institute), Rebecca Brumaghim (The May Institute)
Abstract: Best practice in intensive behavioral intervention for students with pervasive developmental disorders requires a team of highly trained professionals to implement teaching procedures. However, little research has documented the relationship between professional competencies and skill acquisition in individual students. In the present study, professional competencies were measured monthly over a four month period using a competency based checklist derived from behaviors identified in the field as being necessary for providing quality services. These competencies were compared to daily progress in two skill areas across ten students. All students had at least two staff working with them over the course of the study and received between 15 and 25 hours of direct service on a weekly basis. Results support a relationship between professionals who exhibit high competency levels and rate of skill acquisition within individual students.
 
8. Learning Horticultural Job Skills Through the Use of the Picture Task Analysis
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
MICHAEL R. MAYTON (Beacon Behavioral Consultants, Inc.), Anthony Menendez (Cleveland State University)
Abstract: A teenage girl with autism, severe mental retardation, no spoken language, and no previous work experience was taught a series of horticultural work tasks allowing her to be employed by a local plant nursery and earn money with which she could engage in preferred recreational and leisure activities. Using a multiple baseline design, data were gathered to demonstrate the efficacy of a picture task analysis as part of a program of systematic instruction incorporating a hierarchy of least-to-most prompts, positive reinforcement, and errorless learning, all couched within a series of discrete trials. After a 32-hour instructional program that took place across 16 days, the participant was able to independently perform her work tasks at the nursery through the use of the picture task analyses.
 
9. Asperger's Syndrome: Best Practices and Applications
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
COLLEEN ANN O'LEARY-ZONARICH (The May Institute), Sandra Pierce-Jordan (The May Institute)
Abstract: This poster will present critical components needed when programming for students diagnosed with Asperger's Syndrome. A brief review of best practices will be provided; such as thorough assessment, optimal program specifications, general behavior strategies, general academic strategies, speech components, and parent training and involvement as a part of the team process. Data will be presented demonstrating applications of critical components to students' programming that yield significant improvements in performance spanning across school and home environments (i.e., increases in on-task behavior, increases in work completion, decreases in maladaptive behavior, and improvements in social skills developed) as presented in an AB multiple-baseline design. Discussion points will include staff and parent training options and opportunities and the impact of strong programming in school systems.
 
10. The Effect of Speech-Generating Software on the Rate of Acquisition of Spelling Words in Teenagers with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MARIAJOSE BOWDEN (Alpine Learning Group), Barbara Potter (Alpine Learning Group), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group), Hannah Hoch (The Genesis School), Lauren Fredericks (Alpine Learning Group), Nina Cohen (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract: This study compared the effects of a speech output word processing program with a standard word processing program on the rate of acquisition of spelling words in teenagers with autism. The speech output program used was the Talking Word Processor (a product of Premier Assisted Technology). The standard word processing program was Microsoft Word. The participants were four teenagers with autism ages 13 to 19 with a history of slow acquisition of spelling words when using a standard word processing program. This study used an alternating treatment design. One set of words was taught on the Talking Word Processor and another set was taught on Microsoft Word. The results indicated that three of the participants learned new spelling words at a faster rate and corrected their errors more frequently using the Talking Word Processor. One participant showed no differentiation in the rate of acquisition between the two programs. IOA data were calculated for 40% of the sessions and averaged 95%.
 
11. Shaping Exercise Compliance in an Adolescent with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
LAUREN FREDERICKS (Melmark), Richard Cappo (Melmark), Larry Goins (Melmark)
Abstract: Physical fitness and health related issues are a concern for many individuals with developmental disabilities. Obesity was an ongoing concern for one adolescent male diagnosed with autism and mental retardation, residing at a comprehensive residential and educational facility. Dietary interventions alone did not result in weight reduction. In addition, maladaptive behaviors, such as aggression and self-injury, interfered with physical activity compliance. Baseline data indicated that the individual tolerated walking on a treadmill for an average of 30 seconds. A fixed interval reinforcement schedule with a visual feedback system was introduced to increase the duration of time spent walking on the treadmill. The effectiveness of this strategy was empirically evaluated using a changing criterion design. The intervention was successful in increasing the duration of walking time to 10 minutes in the last phase of treatment. The next phase of treatment included differential reinforcement of diminishing rates to decrease the number of step off or stopping attempts. Interobserver agreement data were collected, and generalization and further applications of the current intervention are discussed.
 
12. Increasing Appropriate Social Interactions of a Teenager with Asperger's Syndrome
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
DIPTI MUDGAL (University of Southern Mississippi), Erin Perry (University of Southern Mississippi), Kelly Turner (University of Southern Mississippi)
Abstract: The purpose of this poster is to discuss the data-based outcomes of social skills training procedure designed to increase appropriate interactions of a thirteen year old male diagnosed with Asperger syndrome. The training included didactic instruction, modeling, role-plays, and feedback (verbal and video). Data indicated that the social skills training package was successful in increasing appropriate interactions and decreasing irrelevant statements. The addition of video feedback further enhanced the results.Keywords: Asperger, social interactions, social skills training
 
13. Effects of Videotaped Versus Live Lecture Trainings on Employees' Test Scores
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
SHARI L. SCHATZMAN (Eden II Programs), Daphna El-Roy (Eden II Programs)
Abstract: Competence of direct-care staff working with individuals with disabilities is a critical component of improving the quality of life for the individuals they serve (Jahr, 1998). Staff need to be proficient in general teaching skills, such as providing clear instruction, the use of systematic prompting procedures, and reinforcement principles (Ducharme, et. al., 2001). Therefore, providing efficient and effective training to new personnel is a priority. Training procedures such as lectures, discussions, and written and/or verbal information are rarely effective to teach staff proper techniques when used exclusively (Jahr, 1998). Another possible training tool is videotaped lectures. Although this format may be more efficient than live lectures, it may not be as effective as a training tool. The purpose of this study is to determine whether training test scores for recently hired employees would be enhanced following live lectures vs. videotaped lectures. Employees attending the lecture series have been recently hired to a variety of positions in the agency, with varying degrees of related experience and education. Results of this study are expected to show that people who view videotaped lectures scored lower than those who attended live lectures.
 
14. Increasing Data Collection by Staff in a Residential Setting
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MEAGAN GREGORY (Eden II Programs)
Abstract: In behavior analysis, data collection on target behaviors is essential to determine the baseline rate of behavior and the effectiveness of any intervention put in place to increase or decrease behaviors. In applied settings, it may be difficult to ensure that direct care workers collect all necessary data. Staff data collection was analyzed by determining the percent of shifts across a week in which staff collected data on consumers in a group home setting. Following baseline, a meeting was held explaining the importance of data collection and why it is necessary. On the shifts following the meeting, praise was provided when the staff had their data books out and prompting was used to increase levels of data book carrying. In the next phase, staff had to sign a memo indicating their awareness of the consequences for not collecting data: a written warning for the first occurrence and written corrective feedback for all subsequent occurrences. In the final phase, the consequences outlined in the memo were implemented. Results indicated that praise and prompting were not sufficient to increase levels of data collection but that corrective feedback resulted in a clinically significant increase in data collection by staff.key words: performance feedback, residential
 
15. Acquisition of Cell Phone E-mail Use by Children with Autism in Community Settings
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KOJI TAKEUCHI (University of Tsukuba, Japan), Kasumi Sasaki (University of Tsukuba, Japan), Sigeki Sonoyama (University of Tsukuba, Japan)
Abstract: This study examined the acquisition of cell phone e-mail use by children with autism and moderate cognitive disabilities. While in community settings, children were taught to follow a set of procedures for using cell phone e-mail when they were received e-mail by their parents. For example, children gave their parents information about their location in several community settings by using cell phone e-mail. Through the use of a prompting system in conjunction with total task presentation, children acquired these new skills of cell phone e-mail. Furthermore, some children were able to generalization that skills to another new cell phone. For one child, a cell phone e-mail was used to reduce his inappropriate behavior in community settings (e.g., bus and train). Results indicated that all children successfully acquired the skills of using a cell phone to receive, read, and send e-mail.
 
16. A Comparison of Two Correction Procedures to Teach Tacts to Young Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MARY D. BELILE (Summit Educational Resources), Lori Romanek (Summit Educational Resources), Patricia Egan (Summit Educational Resources), Kristy L. Milczarski (Summit Educational Resources)
Abstract: The effectiveness of discrete trial instruction with young children with autism has been documented in several research studies to date (Anderson, et al 1978; Lovaas, 1978; others....). Most of the studies described very favorable outcomes for children, but not a thorough component analysis of the discrete trial instructional programs described in the studies. A closer analysis of these studies indicates that a variety of error-correction procedures are used across and within discrete trial instruction. The purpose of this study was to compare two widely used error-correction methods, i.e., "immediate prompt" and "no-no prompt." The study investigated whether one method of error-correction resulted in more rapid acquisition of the target skill for children with autism.
 
17. Decreasing Aggressive Behavior: Utilization of a Repetitive Task as a De-escalation Procedure
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ALTOVISE JACKSON (Melmark), Jessica Tyminski (Keystone Human Services), Patricia A. Neary (Melmark), Stephen C. Luce (Melmark)
Abstract: The present study examined the effectiveness of a de-escalation procedure on the aggressive behavior of a 14 year-old boy with a dual diagnosis of Autism and Mental Retardation. On the first occurrence of aggression, staff prompted the student to sit down and engage in a repetitive task (e.g., stacking rings). The student was required to complete the task calmly (no incidents of aggression) for a period of two minutes. If any incidents of aggression occurred, staff continued to present the task until he completed the task with no aggressive incidents for two minutes. Following the intervention, the student was directed back to the scheduled activity. Results showed that aggressive incidents decreased from 4.5% to 1.8% following the implementation of the de-escalation procedure in the student’s residential setting. Data is currently being collected on the effectiveness of this procedure in the student’s classroom environment. Results will be discussed in terms of generalization across settings and the influence of staff training.
 
18. Beyond Pennies and Smiley Faces: Behavior Management Plans for Middle School Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JUSTIN A. DIDOMENICO (Advance, Inc.)
Abstract: There exist numerous types behavior management plans to address the needs of students with autism in the educational setting. Unfortunately many educators not move to more sophisticated types of motivational systems as the students grow older. The researcher presents examples of effective behavior management plans used with 3 middle school children diagnosed autism as well as data based graphs. The results suggest that all three plans were effective in reducing non-compliance an off-task behavior.
 
19. Functional Analysis and Treatment of Aggression for an 11-Year-Old Boy with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MARIJKE P. CALLAHAN (Melmark New England), John Stokes (Melmark New England), Mike Conard (Melmark New England)
Abstract: This study reviews the implementation of a systematic manipulation for Aggression on a 11-year-old boy with Autism,. Initial results of descriptive Analysis indicated that aggression was maintained by positive reinforcement (attention). After initial success the rates of aggression began increasing. Systematic manipulation (Iwata et. al. 1982) was then implemented, results indicated that his aggression was maintained by negative reinforcement (escape from demands). A treatment package including escape extinction and functional communication was then implemented. Continued implementation resulted in decrease in aggression to near zero rates.. Overall IOA of rates of Aggression was 92% (range 83%-100%) Results are displayed graphically.
 
20. The Systematic Reduction of Risperidone in a Child with Autism through the use of a “Parent Friendly” Behavior Data System
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
FRANK R. CICERO (Eden II Programs)
Abstract: Issues of compliance with and accuracy of data collection by parents remain important issues in applied behavior analysis. The present poster describes a case in which a “parent friendly” data collection system was used in the home to systematically decrease Risperidone, prescribed for hyperactivity in a child with autism. At the time of the study, the family was being seen by the author, once per week as part of an outpatient ABA crisis program. Though the parents wanted to withdraw the Risperidone, they were unable to collect objective behavioral data on either an interval or frequency system due to practical constraints within the home. In an effort to maintain objective databased decision making, an intensity rating system was initiated in the home in which the parents rated their son’s hyperactive behavior at the end of each day. Operational definitions were provided for each intensity raking. Decreases in risperidone were made according to the daily intensity ratings of behavior provided by the parents. Risperidone was completely withdrawn by day 18 with no reported increases in hyperactive intensity ratings. Data presented in the current poster show evidence that objective treatment decisions can be made based on accurate, parent-collected data when the data system is carefully tailored to the practical constraints of the home environment.
 
21. Reduction of Stereotypy Through the implementation of Differential Reinforcement of Lower Rates of Behavior in a School Environment
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
PAM LONEGRAN (Melmark New England), Cynthia N. Catania (Melmark New England)
Abstract: This study demonstrates the use of differential reinforcement procedures to decrease multiple topographies of repetitive behavior. The subject of the study is a 15 year old male diagnosed with Autism and Pervasive developmental disabilities. Clinicians developed a Differential Reinforcement of Lower Rates of behavior (DRL) program to reduce rates of repetitive behaviors. The procedure was used across multiple topographies of repetitive behavior and was effective in reducing rates of the behavior to near zero levels at the student school environment. Data is displayed graphically.
 
22. Effect of Group Drawing in Training Reciprocal Social Interactions for Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KYONG BONG KIM (Lotus Flowers Children Center), KeeYeon Min (Lotus Flowers Children Center), Yunhee Lee (Lotus Flowers Children Center), Eun Hee Shon (Lotus Flowers Children Center), Jin Hwa Lee (Lotus Flowers Children Center), Jee Hae Lee (Lotus Flowers Children Center), Soo Ok Shong (Lotus Flowers Children Center)
Abstract: The present study examined the effect of group drwaing in training reciprocal social interactions for children with autism. Five children with autism and ten typically developing peers participated in the study. The resuts showed that the intervention program achieved increased rate of reciprocal social interactions for children with autism and improvement scores in social competence and school adjustment test for the typically developing children.
 
23. The Use of Computer Technology to Teach Students with Autism Receptive Language
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
LEAH STOVEL (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Lesley Lucas Pahl (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Alison L. Moors (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: As an intervention for receptively identifying pictures of objects, acomputer program was created and implemented for two non vocal-verbalemerging listeners. This poster will include the scope and sequenceand supporting data for transferring responding from the computer toflashcards and 3-D objects.
 
24. When the Big 6 Isn't Enough: Extending the Scope and Sequence to the "Little" Six
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
LESLEY LUCAS PAHL (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Amy King (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Ami Diakite (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: Beyond the big 6 + 6 skills, which are component skills for such activities as eating with utensils, playing with toys, and dressing;the "little" big 6 targets component skills for activities that require greater dexterity such as writing. This poster will scope and sequence the "little" big 6 skills. In addition, it will include data on the effects of the "little" big 6 skills.
 
25. The Use of Video Modeling in Children with Autism to Increase Compliance with Health-Related Tasks
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
FREDERICK W. HOOTS (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Kyong-Mee Chung (Kennedy Krieger Institute), SungWoo Kahng (Kennedy Krieger Institute), John Davis (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Elizabeth Abellon (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Individuals with autism and other developmental disabilities often require frequent medical procedures due to physical disabilities. If the individual is noncompliant with these health-related tasks (e.g., blood pressure monitoring, EEGs, EKGs), caregivers sometimes resort to the use of physical or chemical restraint to complete these necessary procedures. Unfortunately, these methods can be unsafe and are therefore, not always practical long-term solutions. An alternative approach to increasing compliance with health-related tasks may be video modeling. Video modeling involves presenting a video demonstration of the successful completion of a desired behavior. Video modeling was selected to increase compliance during blood pressure checks among 3 boys with autism and developmental disabilities who engaged in challenging behaviors. Video modeling combined with extinction was effective for one of the participants. This method was then successfully used for that participant to tolerate an EKG procedure. For the other 2 participants, either extinction or extinction with noncontingent reinforcement successfully increased compliance. The results indicated that video modeling has the potential to be effective in increasing compliance with medical procedures in some individuals with autism.
 
26. Teaching Strategy for Children with Autism to Play the Piano
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KASUMI SASAKI (University of Tsukuba, Japan), Koji Takeuchi (University of Tsukuba, Japan), Fumiyuki Noro (University of Tsukuba, Japan)
Abstract: The purposes of the present study were to examine effective strategy for two children with autism to increase piano performance. Children were taught to play the piano through two kinds of prompting system. 1) Visual prompting system and 2) auditory prompting system were used. In this study, percent correct of “pitch” and “rhythm” was measured to evaluate piano performance. As results, visual prompting system increased performance of “pitch” in all children, but did not increase performance of “rhythm” in only one child. The child who had difficulties in “rhythm” needed additional auditory prompting system. These results indicated that combining visual and auditory prompting system was effective when teaching piano skills for children with autism.
 
27. The Autism Sound Stimulability Assessment: A Novel and Effective Articulation Assessment for Individuals with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
KATHLEEN DYER (River Street Autism Program), Deirdre Lee Fitzgerald (Eastern Connecticut State University), Jori Harris (River Street School Autism Program at Coltsville), Ann Sullivan Harris (River Street School Autism Program at Coltsville)
Abstract: Children with autism often do not respond well to traditional assessment tools due to their characteristic language delays, excesses in problem behavior, and depressed motivation. Therefore, this study evaluated an assessment tool that was designed to respond to these problems by: 1) decreasing demands on expressive language production that are often intrinsic to standardized articulation assessment; 2) provide external motivation with child preferred items; and provide behavioral support through individual behavioral support plans. In additional, the assessment was delivered by a teacher who had stimulus control in a familiar setting, rather than a speech therapist that had limited contact with the child. The results of the study showed that this assessment method was more effective in providing information on the child’s articulation ability than traditional assessment in the context of ABA reversal designs for three children. Reliability data was collected across conditions and children for 44% of the sessions across children and condtions was calculated to have 92% agreement (range:.83%-100%).
 
28. Review of Video Modeling Techniques and Applications in Autism and other Developmental Disabilities
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
GEOFFREY D. DEBERY (Western Michigan University), Koji Takeshima (Western Michigan University), Linda A. LeBlanc (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Reviews the current literature in the area of Video Modeling for skill acquisition in Autism and other Developmental Disabilities. Video Modeling describes a teaching procedure wherein a learner is exposed to a videotaped model of a target behavior and subsequently instructed to imitate such a model with the goal of skill acquisition. Specific topics to be addressed include the range of skills taught using video modeling, procedural variations within video modeling techniques, and reports of skill generalization. The material will be thematically oriented towards both practitioners interested in employing video modeling, and applied researchers interested in extending our knowledge of video modeling.
 
29. Self-Monitoring of Social Initiations and Collateral Behavior Change
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
RACHEL L. LOFTIN (Children's School Success, Indiana University)
Abstract: Students with autism have difficulty initiating social interactions. Many also exhibit stereotypic or repetitive behaviors, such as body rocking and hand flapping, which can be socially stigmatizing. Self-monitoring strategies are an effective means for students with autism to increase their rate of initiating social interaction. When self-management strategies like self-monitoring are used, collateral reductions in problem behavior can result. The proposed poster will present data from a multi-component intervention involving direct training to teach and promote social initiations and a self-monitoring intervention to ensure continued use of the skills. Data on social interaction, initiation, and stereotypy or repetitive behaviors will be presented.
 
30. The Use of Schedules to Increase Appropriate “Break-Time” Behavior in Individuals with Autism across School and Vocational Settings
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
WILLIAM J. DONLON (The Genesis School), Erin Sparacio (The Genesis School), Michelle L. Matathia (The Genesis School), Mary Ellen McDonald (The Genesis School)
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to examine the effects of recreation schedules on break-time behavior for three individuals with autism. A multiple-baseline-across participants design was used. During baseline, schedules were not present and the participants were given an instruction to take a break. During training, schedules were present and the participant was given an instruction to take a break and then followed the recreation schedule provided. Generalization probes were conducted at the student's current worksite. The participants' break time behavior improved after the implementation of the schedule. The present study showed the effectiveness of schedules for increasing appropriate break time behavior.
 
31. Elimination of Aggression in a Girl Diagnosed with Autism via a Reversal of Sensory Contingency
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
BOBBY NEWMAN (Room to Grow)
Abstract: A girl with autism was engaging in serious aggression. This was primarily directed towards her mother and sibling, and included serious hair-pulling, pushing and hitting. The child’s school had suggested that such aggression was indicative of a sensory need and that such behavior should be considered a cue for the family to provide deep sensory pressure, massaging, and other sensory experiences. A functional behavioral assessment suggested that these sensory experiences might have been reinforcing the aggression. The contingencies were reversed such that sensory experiences were provided only if the girl had not aggressed for specified periods. If aggression did occur, the assaulted individual separated him/herself from the girl, behind a closed door if necessary. Data indicated that aggression dropped from over dozen instances a day pre-treatment to complete elimination within two days of treatment.
 
32. Conditioning Toys and Coloring to Decrease Stereotypic Behavior and Increase Appropriate Play
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
HEATHER GREEN (Teachers College, Columbia University), Robin Nuzzolo (Teachers College, Columbia University), R. Douglas Greer (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: The current study tested the effectiveness of a conditioning procedure to reduce the stereotypic behavior of one school-aged student. After training sessions, the student was observed to test the effects of the conditioning procedure to decrease stereotypic behavior by replacing the behavior with an appropriate play behavior to expand the students community of reinforcers. The participant showed response patterns that were consistent with the findings of other studies, suggesting expanding students community of reinforcers by pairing appropriate play decreases inappropriate behaviors.
 
33. Treatment of Self-Injury Maintained by Positive Reinforcement: Integration of FCT with Alternative Communication Modalities
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KATE E. FISKE MASSEY (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Robert LaRue (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), David J. Fischer (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutger), Diana Antinoro (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Aurelie Welterlin (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Karen L. Lenard (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Karitssa Fernandez (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Todd Frischmann (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University)
Abstract: The present study examined possible variables maintaining self-injurious behavior exhibited by a 5 year-old male diagnosed with autism. Prior to assessment, the student had been taught to communicate with a picture exchange communication system (P.E.C.S.). To evaluate the maintaining factors for hand biting, a functional analysis was conducted. Results of the functional analysis indicated that problem behavior was maintained by positive reinforcement in the form of access to preferred items (e.g., toys). Following these assessment procedures, functional communication training (FCT) with extinction was evaluated in a reversal design. Rates of communication increased (0.00 to 4.01 per minute) while a corresponding decrease maladaptive behavior was observed (2.78 to 0.21 per minute) during FCT treatment. During a reversal to baseline, inappropriate behaviors did not increase and rates of communication remained relatively high. The treatment was then reimplemented and the communicative response was then faded to be integrated into the student’s P.E.C.S. book (i.e., decreased card size, handing the card on a sentence strip). Overall, the FCT treatment decreased problem behavior by 92.4% relative to baseline. Results are discussed in terms of procedures to fade functional communication responses to make them compatible with different modalities of communication to enhance generalization.
 
 
 
Poster Session #400
#400 Poster Session - BPH
Monday, May 30, 2005
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
34. Food Deprivation and Oral Nicotine Effects on Mult FR Behavior
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
DOUGLAS D. BOE (South Dakota State University), Debra J. Spear (South Dakota State University)
Abstract: Aged female rats were well trained under a Mult FR 10 FR 50 schedule. Body weight was manipulated to produce a range of food deprivation levels (80, 85, 90, 95, and 100% free-feeding body weight). On selected days, nicotine (1, 3, or 10 mg/kg) was administered via gavage. As food deprivation increased, lever-pressing rate also increased. Response rates were dosed dependently decreased by nicotine. An interaction between dose and body weight was common with nicotine having a greater disruptive effect at higher body weights. Effects of both food deprivation and nicotine were more prevalent under the FR 50 than under the FR 10.
 
35. Changes in Social Status During Direct DA Agonist Exposure: Effects on Individual and Group Matching in an Optimal Foraging Paradigm
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
ELSA C. KRISHNASWAMY (Illinois State University), George Mucher (Illinois State University), William Thompson (Illinois State University), William J. Higgins (Illinois State University), Thomas Malcyk (Illinois State University), Valeri Farmer-Dougan (Illinois State University)
Abstract: Ideal free distribution predicts that the ratio of time spent by a group at two food patches will equal the ratio of obtained food at the patches. Unlike the matching law, however, it makes no prediction regarding individual member behavior. Indeed, previous studies show that group behavior conforms to the matching law, but individual behavior does not necessarily. Rather, competitive status of individual members correlates with undermatching values for individuals. Disruption of competitive status, then, should alter individual but not necessarily group matching. Status may be manipulated via drug exposure. Exposure to dopamine agonists has been shown to disrupt social status, thus it should also disrupt individual but not necessarily group matching. This is the focus of the present experiment. Baseline rates of matching and social status were obtained for two groups of rats using CONC FT FT schedules in a large foraging box. High and low status animals were identified. The high or low status rat was then exposed to apomorphine, a direct DA agonist, during a replication of the schedules. Apomorphine disrupted both status and matching for the high and low rats. However, group behavior adjusted to the changes in the high or low status animal.
 
36. Changes in Sensitivity to Reward During DA D1, D2 and D3 Receptor Agonist Exposure: Differential Effects of DA Receptor Subtypes
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
VALERI FARMER-DOUGAN (Illinois State University), Rachel Knight (Illinois State University), Michelle Toelle (Illinois State University), Thomas Lynch (Illinois State University), Elsa C. Krishnaswamy (Illinois State University), Seshanand Chandrashekar (Illinois State University)
Abstract: Dopamine D1, D2 and D3 receptors appear to have differential effects on reward behavior. DA D1 receptors may be part of a feedback loop about reward. In contrast, DA D2 receptors may regulate overall response rates, not reward sensitivity. The role of DA D3 receptors is less clear, but is likely motor control rather than reward-related. These differences probably emerge from the way different receptors regulate DA at the synapse and the particular location of the receptors. Research from our lab supports these hypothesizes: Changes in reward sensitivity during D1 and D2 agonist exposure were correlated with differences in behavioral topography produced by the two agonists. D1 agonist elicited behaviors (sniffing, grooming, general search) reduced sensitivity to reward. In contrast, D2 agonist exposure had less effect on reward sensitivity, but decreased overall response rates. To further examine these effects, the current experiment examined sensitivity to reward during exposure to incremental doses of a D1 agonist (SKF38393), a D2 agonist (quinipirole) and a D3 agonist (PD128095) across a series pf concurrent VI VI schedules. Effects on choice and the implications for the role of DA and in particular the role of specific DA receptors, in choice behavior is discussed.
 
37. Reinforcement Schedules Modulate Discriminative Stimulus Properties of 3,4-Methylenedioxymethamphetamine and Cocaine
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
DANIEL KUEH (Western Michigan University), Lisa E. Baker (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Drug discrimination procedures are used in behavioral pharmacology as a model of the subjective effects of psychoactive drugs. These procedures have been used to study different types of drugs such as cocaine and methylenedioxymethamphetamine (MDMA). However, results from MDMA discrimination studies have not been entirely consistent across different laboratories. Different investigators employ different approaches and techniques such as reinforcement schedules during drug discrimination training. The extent to which reinforcement schedule during discrimination training may influence discrimination acquisition and stimulus generalization has not been examined with MDMA and cocaine. Therefore, the present study compared two commonly used reinforcement schedules, fixed-ratio (FR) 20 and variable interval (VI) 15 s schedules, to determine their influence on discrimination accuracy, response rates, and number of reinforcers earned by rats trained to discriminate either MDMA or cocaine from vehicle. Preliminary data indicate that response accuracy, response rates, and number of reinforcers earned were greater under the FR20 schedule compared to the VI15 s schedule. MDMA (ED50 = 0.75 mg/kg) was also found to substitute for cocaine in rats trained to discriminate cocaine (10 mg/kg) from saline. Experiments to assess stimulus generalization from MDMA to cocaine are currently ongoing.
 
38. Effects of Cocaine Under a Response-Initiated fixed-Interval Schedule
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
MATTHEW T. WEAVER (University of Florida), Marc N. Branch (University of Florida)
Abstract: Daily administration of cocaine often results in the development of tolerance to the drug's effects. These effects have been observed to be more robust in small fixed ratio values, with less tolerance being observed in large ratios. This schedule-parameter-dependent tolerance has not been observed in comparable fixed-interval schedules. The present experiment examined the role that post-reinforcement pause patterning plays in the differences in the two schedules. Six pigeons were shaped to respond on a three-component tandem FR1 FI schedule. The fixed interval values were 5-, 15-, 60 seconds. Early observations of log survivor functions and quantitative analysis indicate an FR like pattern in the distribution of pauses. Effects of various doses were determined weekly, and the resulting dose functions determined chronic doses for individual pigeons. Chronic doses will be delivered prior to the session for a number of days until responding stabilized. Re-assessment of the drug doses will be performed and tolerance will be determined. The degree of parameter tolerance will be compared if systematic trends are revealed.
 
39. Stereoselective Behavioral Effects of NMDA and NMLA in the Rat: Assesment Under an IRT>t Schedule of Water Presentation
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
JOSHUA JOHNSON (Allegheny College)
Abstract: The present study was designed to assess the effects of the stereoisomers of NMDA and NMLA on schedule-controlled responding. Behavior was maintained under an IRT>5" schedule of water presentation. Of primary concern was the response rate and the temporal organization of responding. Rats were given sequential doses of NMDA,NMLA, Ketamine, and MK-801. Doses were counterbalanced and administered in a nonsequential order that varied across subjects. Injections of the NMDA antagonists Ketamine and MK-801 when administered alone yeilded considerable dose-related decreases in response rate while NMDA and NMLA did not substantially alter the response rates relative to saline controls. The temporal distribution of responses were, however, moved toward the end of the interval. Antagonists administered concomittantly with doses of NMDA produced an increase in premature responding. The antagonists administered with NMLA did not produce any alterations in the rate or temporal distribution of responses. these data are consistant with previous research indicating that NMLA was to a large extent inactive while NMDA had considerable effects on behavior.
 
40. Reduction of Ethanol Self-Administration by Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitors
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
CHRIS SCHMOUTZ (Allegheny College), Rodney D. Clark (Allegheny College)
Abstract: Previous research has established a role for both serotonin and dopamine in the self-administration of ethanol suggesting that medications that act upon these systems may have clinical efficacy in the treatment of alcohol dependence. Given that decreases in both serotonin and dopamine availability may contribute to increased ethanol intake, monoamine oxidase inhibitors (MAOIs) which increase the accessability of serotonin and dopamine by blocking their metabolism, may provide a means of decreasing operant ethanol self-administration. The purpose of the present study was to examine the effects of MAOIs on ethanol self-administration. Rats were trained to self-administer ethanol (10% v/v)through a sucrose-fading procedure. Two MAOIs, deprenyl and clorgyline were used as antagonists. Rates of ethanol self-administration decreased in a general dose-related manner.
 
41. Differential Effects of Amphetamine and Ethanol on Variable and Repetitive Behavior
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
ERICKA BAILEY (Utah State University), Ryan D. Ward (Utah State University), Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: This experiment examined the effects of amphetamine and ethanol on variable and repetitive behavior. Four white Carneau pigeons with a history of responding on a variety of related operant procedures pecked keys during a multiple schedule. Two components, REPEAT and VARY, were used. The REPEAT component required a four-response sequence of Left, Left, Right, Right to produce food. In the VARY component, a four-response sequence had to differ from one of the previous ten sequences to produce food. Acute administration of d-amphetamine produced a dose-dependent decrease in response rate. Amphetamine had little effect on the percentage of sequences meeting the contingency in both the VARY and REPEAT component except at the highest dose. Additionally, the variability measure for both components was little changed. For comparison purposes, we evaluated the effects of ethanol. Ethanol had little effect on the percentage of sequences meeting the contingency in the VARY component but did lower this percentage in the REPEAT component. Variability was increased in the REPEAT component and maintained in the VARY component. A final determination of the effects of amphetamine was added to replicate initial findings. Results indicate different effects of amphetamine and ethanol on variable and repetitive behavior.
 
42. Response Acquisition with Delayed Reinforcement in Lewis and Fischer 344 Rats
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
MIRARI ELKORO (West Virginia University), Karen G. Anderson (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Lewis and Fischer 344 rats have been shown to differ with respect to neurochemistry and behavior on various operant tasks, including choice between delayed and immediate reinforcers. The present study was designed to evaluate acquisition of a response with delayed reinforcement. Eight rats of each strain were exposed to a tandem fixed-ratio 1, fixed-time 20 s schedule of food reinforcement for pressing one lever in a two-lever chamber. Responses on the alternative lever were recorded but had no other scheduled consequences (extinction). During the single eight-hour session, two Fischer 344 rats and five Lewis rats acquired the response. Response rates for the Fischer 344 rats were significantly lower than those obtained for Lewis rats. These findings may suggest a role for genetic and neurochemical variables in determining sensitivity to delay of reinforcement during acquisition of a novel operant response.
 
43. Do High Rates of Cigarette Consumption Increase Delay Discounting? A Cross-Sectional Comparison of Adolescent Smokers and Young-Adult Smokers and Nonsmokers
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
BRADY A. REYNOLDS (State University of New York, Buffalo)
Abstract: The present report attempts to help clarify the causal or consequent relation between frequently reported high rates of delay discounting (DD) associated with cigarette-smoking status in adults. Delay-discount functions of adolescent smokers and young-adult smokers and nonsmokers from two earlier studies (Reynolds et al., 2003; 2004) were cross-sectionally compared. If a high rate of DD is a predisposing factor to future smoking status, adolescent and young-adult smokers were expected to have similar rates of DD, but both groups were expected to have higher rates of discounting than young-adult nonsmokers. Alternatively, if a high rate of cigarette consumption over an extended period is related to increases in DD, young-adult smokers were expected to discount more than adolescent smokers and young-adult nonsmokers. Results supported the hypothesis that a high rate of cigarette consumption is related to higher rates of DD, rather than the alternative hypothesis that smokers are predisposed with higher rates of DD. Also, after combining adolescent and young-adult smokers, self-reported number of cigarettes consumed per day was positively correlated with rate of DD; however, reported length of smoking history was not correlated with DD.
 
44. Laboratory Analog of Voucher Reinforcement with Smokers
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
BETHANY R. RAIFF (University of Florida), Jesse Dallery (University of Florida)
Abstract: Contingency management in the form of voucher reinforcement is used to decrease or eliminate drug use. There are several elements of the voucher reinforcement procedure that are poorly understood. We recently developed a laboratory model for studying the effects of voucher magnitude on smoking. The current study represented an initial step toward validating the laboratory model. Smokers attended three sessions, during which one of three conditions was implemented: 1) low magnitude, 2) high magnitude and 3) control. All subjects experienced each condition in a randomly selected order. During sessions, participants were given the opportunity to earn money for each 30-second period that they did not take a puff from a cigarette. A standard ascending schedule of reinforcement was used, with the high magnitude four times the value of the low magnitude. During the control session, participants earned money regardless of whether they took a puff. Subjects took fewer puffs during the high magnitude condition than during the low magnitude and control conditions. This is consistent with the effects of voucher magnitude on other drug taking behavior (e.g. cocaine).
 
45. Using Standard Celeration Charts as Evidence to Support Discontinuing Anti-Psychotic Medications with Individuals with Severe Behavior Disorders in a Residential Facility
Area: BPH; Domain: Applied Research
PATRICIA RIVERA (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Robert Von Heyn (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Anthony Joseph (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Lisa Northman (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Matthew L. Israel (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Abstract: Historically, individuals referred to residential facilities are often prescribed some form of psychotropic medication to address their behavior difficulties. These “behavior difficulties” include severe aggressive, disruptive, and health dangerous behavior that can sometimes be categorized as psychotic. Increasingly, antipsychotic medications are used when other medications fail to show significant results or as a supplement to mood stabilizers or anti-depressants. Over 50 % of the individuals admitted to the Judge Rotenberg Center, a residential facility for students with severe behavior disorders, were admitted on at least one anti-psychotic medication. Using a comprehensive behavioral support program we have been able to reduce, or in most cases completely eliminate the use of anti-psychotic medication with concurrent behavioral improvement in all of the individuals. Data will be presented in the form of standard celeration charts showing anti-psychotic medication reduction/elimination and behavioral improvement. Specific behavioral programming will also be discussed.
 
46. Comparison of the Effects of Nicotine and Non-Pharmacological Manipulations on Repeated Acquisition in Rats
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
KIMBERLY A. JAREMA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency), Robert C. MacPhail (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency)
Abstract: Non-pharmacological manipulations may be useful in identifying the behavioral mechanisms of drug action. We compared the effects of nicotine with several manipulations of reinforcer efficacy on the repeated acquisition of response sequences in rats. Adult male Long-Evans rats (N=18) were trained to emit three-response sequences using food reinforcement. Each daily session consisted of a two-component multiple schedule with a new sequence to be learned (i.e., repeated-acquisition) and a fixed sequence that remained invariant (i.e., a performance control). Following extended training, rats received a single injection of 0.6 mg/kg nicotine, s.c., 5-min prior to testing. Nicotine administration was preceded by manipulations of reinforcer efficacy that included pre-feeding, extinction and delayed reinforcement. Nicotine decreased response rates and accuracy in both the repeated-acquisition and performance components. Pre-feeding slightly decreased response rates but had no effect on accuracy in either schedule component. Extinction and delayed reinforcement decreased accuracy in both schedule components in a manner similar to that produced by nicotine. In contrast to nicotine, however, extinction and delayed reinforcement increased rates of responding in both schedule components, with greater increases in the performance component. Thus, the effect of nicotine on repeated acquisition could not be completely mimicked by pre-feeding, extinction or delayed reinforcement.
 
 
 
Poster Session #401
#401 Poster Session - CBM
Monday, May 30, 2005
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
47. Data Entry Performance of Chronically Unemployed Cocaine-Dependent Adults in a Therapeutic Workplace Business
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
KARLY N. DIEMER (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Carolyn Carpenedo (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Todd W. Knealing (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Conrad J. Wong (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Kenneth Silverman (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Abstract: The Therapeutic Workplace is a treatment that employs participants with histories of drug abuse and unemployment to serve as data entry operators. The intervention has two phases. The initial phase is designed to initiate drug abstinence and establish the needed job skills. Once abstinent and skilled, participants are hired to serve as data entry operators. In the initial evaluation of this intervention, participants were taught academic (e.g., reading, spelling) and job (e.g., typing) skills during the training phase. To reduce the duration and costs of training, the training phase was modified to focus only on teaching job skills. This presentation will report on the success of this focused program in preparing 25 adults with histories of drug addiction and unemployment to serve as data entry operators. A sample of the data entry performance of the first 11 participants showed that participants all maintained data entry accuracies above 99.6% correct, but there was nearly a two-fold difference in the number of characters entered per hour (1,882 to 3,697) and in the hourly productivity pay ($3.42 to $6.50). Preliminary data show that graduates of the focused training program generally served as competent data entry operators, although there was considerable variability in productivity.
 
48. Staff Training and Quality Assurance Procedures for Conducting Quantitative Urinalysis Testing for Cocaine Abstinence Reinforcement Procedures
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
MICK J. NEEDHAM (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Haley Brown (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Todd W. Knealing (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Conrad J. Wong (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Kenneth Silverman (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Abstinence reinforcement using qualitative urinalysis testing can be effective in promoting cocaine abstinence in many, but not all patients. Under qualitative testing, urine samples are considered negative if the concentration of the cocaine metabolite, benzoylecgonine, is below 300 ng/mL. However, toxicological studies suggest that some individuals may provide urine samples that exceed the 300 ng/mL threshold for several days after initiating abstinence. Reliance on qualitative testing may require that participants remain abstinent for several days before abstinence can be reinforced. Preston and colleagues (1997) developed a potentially more sensitive quantitative method that arranges abstinence reinforcement based on amounts of decreases in benzoylecgonine concentrations across days. Whereas most of the qualitative testing process is automated, quantitative testing requires additional manual dilutions of urine samples, which can introduce human error. Here we report the results of staff training and quality assurance procedures to ensure accurate and reliable quantitative cocaine urinalysis testing. The procedures were successful in maintaining reliable results across multiple staff members, although occasional human errors were made. These results suggest that quantitative testing can be used appropriately in arranging abstinence reinforcement, however, the occasional errors suggest that staff and patients should be encouraged to request retesting of questionable results.
 
49. Designing Sensitive Abstinence Reinforcement Procedures Based on Analyses of Urinary Benzoylecognine Concentrations in Regular Cocaine Users
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
TODD W. KNEALING (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Mick J. Needham (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Conrad J. Wong (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Kenneth Silverman (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Abstinence reinforcement using qualitative urinalysis testing can effectively promote cocaine abstinence in many, but not all patients. Samples tested qualitatively are considered negative if the concentration of the cocaine metabolite, benzoylecgonine, is below 300 ng/mL. However, toxicological studies suggest that some individuals may provide urine samples that exceed that value for several days after initiating abstinence. This makes the reinforcement of recent abstinence difficult. Preston and colleagues (1997) suggested a potentially more sensitive quantitative method that arranges reinforcement when benzoylecgonine concentrations decrease by about 30% per day. Although there is a reasonable basis for selecting this magnitude of decrease, little is known about the patterns of decreases typically seen in regular cocaine users, which could be available for reinforcement. The study examined the patterns of changes in urinary benzoylecognine concentrations in samples collected 3 times per week over 7 months in 56 cocaine-dependent methadone maintenance patients. Data show that decreases in concentration above 30% per day are common in this population. Larger decreases are more predictive that a participant will ultimately provide a sample that reaches the qualitative requirement for cocaine abstinence. The effects on admittance into the workplace are considered for different decrease requirements.
 
50. Professional Demeanor of Chronically Unemployed Cocaine-Dependent Methadone Patients in a Therapeutic Workplace
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
CAROLYN CARPENEDO (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Mick J. Needham (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Todd W. Knealing (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Conrad J. Wong (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Kenneth Silverman (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Unemployment among users of illicit drug is common, but the causes of this problem are not well understood. The purpose of this study is to assess the extent to which users of illicit drugs display unprofessional behavior in an employment setting, which might limit their success in the workplace. This research was conducted in a Therapeutic Workplace, a model employment-based treatment program for chronically unemployed adults who have long-histories of illicit drug use. Unemployed adults enrolled in methadone treatment in Baltimore City, who met DSM criteria for opiate and cocaine dependence, and who continued to use cocaine during methadone treatment were hired to work in the Therapeutic Workplace for 4 hours every weekday for 6-7 months. This study examined the frequency of undesirable workplace behaviors and violent, aggressive, and threatening workplace behaviors. Results show that while the overall incidence of many undesirable behaviors is low, there is a small percentage of participants that have serious workplace behavior problems. While substance abuse has been found to be a barrier to gaining and maintaining employment, this study shows that unprofessional behavior in the workplace could also contribute to chronic unemployment in this population.
 
51. A Treatment for Chronic Alcohol and Drug Users in Mexico: A Single Participant Design
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
MARIA JOSE MARTINEZ RUIZ (National Autonomous University of Mexico), Lydia Barragan (National Autonomous University of Mexico), Hector Ayala (National Autonomous University of Mexico)
Abstract: The National Addiction Survey (2002) reported that 30 million persons have problems with alcohol consumption in Mexico. A 10% of the population has severe alcohol dependence and 5.4 millions of Mexicans reported drug consumption. The National Development Plan (1995 – 2000) assumes the addictions as one of the principal health problems. The School of Psychology of the National University of Mexico offers a treatment program for alcohol and drugs chronic users. This program is based on cognitive and behavioral theories and techniques, and it’s an empirically supported intervention model for alcohol and drug dependence (Hunt & Azrin, 1973). This intervention model is supported on contingency management, Social Learning Theory and Behavioral economics. During treatment, clients are trained to establish a reinforcement system of alternative rewards for the incompatible behaviors to substance abuse (Bickel, DeGrandpre & Higgins, 1993, 1997; Carroll, 1993). We report the results of such an intervention.A drug user was trained under the treatment model described above; the results showed that the patterns consumption and the dependence levels of the consumer decreased after treatment and the auto efficacy and daily life satisfaction levels of the user increased. These positive outcomes were maintained during a one year follow up.
 
52. The Use of Correspondence Training as a Treatment for ADHD
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
BRIGITTE M. JOHNSON (University of Iowa), John A. Northup (University of Iowa), Terry S. Falcomata (University of Iowa), Kelly M. Vinquist (University of Iowa), Jason M. Stricker (University of Iowa), Brenda Engebretson (University of Iowa), Amanda Hornaday (University of Iowa)
Abstract: Correspondence is the degree of agreement between verbal and nonverbal behavior, or “saying” and “doing.” Correspondence training has been shown to be an effective method of increasing a variety of behaviors across a variety of populations. However, only one study (Paniagua, 1987) has demonstrated the effective use of correspondence training for children with ADHD. Correspondence training may be especially beneficial for children with a diagnosis of ADHD for several reasons. Correspondence may be taught across any number of problem behaviors, correspondence training might enhance generalization across settings, and the development of correspondence may aid in the development of self-regulation more generally.We conducted correspondence training for two children ages 5 and 6 with ADHD. Following assessment, correspondence training was conducted sequentially across three target behaviors; number of problems completed, hand raising for assistance, and delay (waiting). Following demonstrated correspondence, participants were prompted to state a progressively higher goal for each target behavior. Results showed that correspondence was maintained and target goals were achieved for each behavior for both children. Generalization data are being collected in the children’s classroom throughout the school year. Preliminary results suggest support an increased use of correspondence training for young children with ADHD.
 
53. The Use of Biofeedback in the Treatment of PTSD in a Girl with a Spinal Cord Injury
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
JESSICA TISCHNER (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Melissa H. Beck (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Deborah Kruglak (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Shannon McIntosh (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Spinal cord injury (SCI) affects a child with sudden physical and emotional changes. Emotional reaction to spinal cord injury may include depression, anxiety, and anger (King, C., & Kennedy, P., 1999).Data will be presented on a 17-year-old female inpatient who was referred due to difficulty coping with a SCI. Results from a behavioral assessment showed that the patient met DSM-IV criteria for Post Traumatic Stress Disorder (i.e. recurrent dreams regarding accident, impaired daily functioning for at least one month, avoidance of stimuli associated with trauma), which was causing her distress and limiting her rehabilitation gains. Skin conductance biofeedback was used to assess increased physiological arousal associated with memories of her accident.Treatment consisted of developing a hierarchy of anxiety-provoking stimuli associated with her trauma and systematic desensitization was used to help her cope with anxiety. Patient used deep breathing and distraction strategies to reduce her anxiety as she moved up the hierarchy. Treatment was practiced and generalized in various environments. The intervention resulted in decreased anxiety levels and ability to approach stimuli associated with the trauma. Skin conductance biofeedback post-treatment demonstrated a significant decrease in physiological arousal.
 
54. Diagnosing Depression: The Value of Syndromal Versus Functional Assessment
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
SARA J. LANDES (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Laura Dee (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Andrew Busch (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Jonathan W. Kanter (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Glenn M. Callaghan (San Jose State University)
Abstract: Major Depressive Disorder (MDD) is construed by the medical community as a pathological neuropsychiatric disease state that may co-occur with other mental disorders, such as Anxiety Disorders or Alcohol Dependence. However, efforts to identify this disease state independent of co-morbid disorders highlights problems with the syndromal model. The current study presents results of our effort to identify MDD using the major syndromal diagnostic system—the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IV-R)—for the purpose of evaluating inclusion and exclusion criteria for a study of behavioral treatment of depression. We found that in 0 of 8 cases do the screening and diagnostic interviews present a clinical picture of MDD in line with the disease state model. Instead, results suggest the phenomenon of depression may be better conceptualized as a hypothetical construct that does not exist independent of behavioral problems identified by the clinical interviews. The current study additionally presents initial data on an alternative, functional assessment system that leads to the direct identification of behavioral treatment targets and makes no assumptions about hypothetical disease state entities. These findings lead to the question of whether the participants currently included in this and other studies accurately reflect the population entering treatment.
 
55. Prevalence of Risk of Eating Disorders in Almería, Spain
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
INMACULADA GOMEZ BECERRA (University of Almeria, Spain), Ramon de las Heras Rodriguez (Fundación Unicodesa, Almería, Spain), Manuel Gonzalez-Abreu (Unidad de Pediatría, Hospital Torrecardenas, Almería, Spain)
Abstract: This is an epidemiological study of the prevalence of risk of the eating disorders (anorexia nervosa and bulimia), and other objective is to analyze different factors of risk. The sample (890 adolescents) is representative from all the adolescent population who were studying the first grade and the second grade school (12-17 years old) in the Almería town. This work focused mainly in the answer to a EAT-40 questionnaire (Eating Attitudes Test) and other questionnaire entitled FTCA (Search of possible factors related with eating disorders) elaborated with this proposal was used. In this study we found 8% prevalence of risk and different variables of relation (concern for the corporal image, desires to change the own body and excess to be looked in the mirror, influences of the media, excessive use of diets, the aesthetics as reason to make diets and sport, influences of the friends worried by the corporal image, bigger easiness to vomit, feelings and negative thoughts after eating, influence of personal conflicts not solved). The results are analyzed with preventive character.
 
56. Behavior Analytic Understanding of the Cognitive Therapy Rationale and Role of Demand Characteristics in Psychotherapy
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER LEONARD (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Jordan T. Bonow (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Andrew Busch (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Jonathan W. Kanter (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee)
Abstract: Behavior analytic understanding of the Cognitive Therapy rationale and role of demand characteristics in psychotherapy.Jennifer Leonard, Jordan Bonow, Andrew Busch, Jonathan Kanter,University of Wisconsin-MilwaukeeCognitive Therapy (CT) for Depression is the most widely-used and widely-researched of the empirically-supported psychotherapies for depression, but it can and needs to be improved as it does not help all who receive it. A behavioral analysis of CT calls into question many aspects of the approach. In particular, the current research focuses on the accuracy of the cognitive rationale that states that thoughts always lead to feelings. Instead, behavior analysis conceptualizes the relation between thoughts and feelings as behavior-behavior which suggests that feelings can lead to thoughts as much as thoughts can lead to feelings. The current research also points to unintended negative consequences if a therapist presents the CT rationale rigidly to clients without an appreciation for behavior-behavior relations and the larger environmental context in which they occur. The current study presents the cognitive rationale (thoughts cause feelings) and an alternative rationale (feelings cause thoughts) to undergraduate participants to determine if participants would be differentially influenced by these rationales, and presented the rationales in a high-demand and low-demand version to isolate the role of demand characteristics. Results provide support both for a behavioral view of the CT rationale and for the role of experimental and psychotherapeutic demand characteristics.
 
57. The Effects of the Homi.Info Web-Based Support Service System in Korea
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
EUN JUNG SEO (Daegu University, South Korea), Mi-Kyung An (Daegu University, South Korea)
Abstract: The study had two purposes to evaluate the effectiveness of Homi.info web-based support service system. First, it was to see if the Homi.info service could increase clients’ independent self-help skills in their daily contexts.Second, it was to see if the Homi.info service could increase clients’appropriate behaviors as well as decrease clients’inappropriate behaviors.The Homi.info web-based support service system in the study was consisted of four phases of the systems, such as Consultation, Counselling, Diagnosis, & Homi Info. support system.The first phase, consultation was consisted of parent's awareness of the child's problems and referral to the service facilities. The second phase, Counselling system was to counsell through counselling center, schools, hospitals, and universities. The third phase, Diagnosis was to diagnosis based on evaluations, diagnosis systems, and the clients' informations collected from the previous two steps. The last step, Homi.Info support services were included consulting system across cities through regional network, educational support system through evaluation of education and threapy, behavioral and medical support system through behavior analysis and medical network, rehabilitation and information support system through rehabilitation and social welfare, and the clients’ improvements & evaluation.The results of the study showed that 0%-5% stable levels of correct responses of the self-help skills before the introductions of the Homi.info support system were dramatically accelerated up to 80-100% levels for the clients after the introduction of the support systems. In addition, their inappropriate behaviors were decreased 0-10% level and also the appropriate behaviors were increased 80-100% level. Furthermore, the reliability of dependent variables was 92.5%, so the Homi.info support system was reliable for the improvement of the behaviors.
 
58. Clinical Intervention in the Age of Managed Care: Implications from a Behavior-Analytic Perspective
Area: CBM; Domain: Theory
SIMONE NENO (Universidade Federal do Para)
Abstract: The delivery of clinical services after the advent of the managed care system is examined in this work in order to highlight some of its outstanding features and the (in)compatibility of these with a behavior-analytic approach to psychological problems. Some of those features are: a) an increasing intervention of managed care companies in the definition of diagnosing references, basically through the use of the categories of DSM-IV; b) the selection, by managed care companies, of the type of therapy acceptable for each diagnostic category; c) the definition, by managed care companies, of the number of sessions adequate for the treatment of each “disorder”; d) the need to achieve the status of “empirically validated” treatment; e) the need to use DSM-IV criteria to estimate the success of interventions; f) the definition of treatment costs by managed care companies; g) the reduced autonomy of professional associations in the definition of treatments scope and costs. Besides the great impact in the delivery of clinical services in general, these features oppose to non-statistical designs in evaluating the efficacy of treatments, are incompatible with idiographic diagnostic procedures, and favor internalist (often organicist) perspectives in the interpretation and treatment of psychological problems.
 
59. A Hard Look at the "Biological Causation" Rhetoric: The Marshall Project One Year Later
Area: CBM; Domain: Theory
W. JOSEPH WYATT (Marshall University), Donna Midkiff (Marshall University)
Abstract: Our professional and popular cultures are awash with claims of biological causation of abnormal behavior. Turf battles between organized psychiatry and other treating professions, financial interests of the pharmaceutical industry and other factors account for much of the "hype." At Marshall University we have developed a three CE training package that addresses these issues, including a hard look at the relatively sparse data in support of biological causation of disorders such as the majority of depressions, anxiety disorders, child conduct disorders, ADHD and others. The poster will present the impact of the training on the verbal behavior of about 100 treating professionals who have completed the training. Data are presently being analyzed and are encouraging.
 
60. Behavioral Relaxation Training and Relaxation States
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
NICOLE RIEFESEL (Central Missouri State University), Michael Buermann (Central Missouri State University), Christopher J. Talley (Central Missouri State University), Amy Sanders (Central Missouri State University), Duane A. Lundervold (Central Missouri State University)
Abstract: Relaxation training methods emphasize bodily, cognitive or physiological aspects of relaxation. Behavioral Relaxation Training (BRT) targets training of overt motor behavior and covert observational responses. All relaxation training methods are assumed to produce change in subjectively reported states of arousal. However, little is known about these effects. Seven undergraduate participants, with no history of relaxation or biofeedback training, took part. Use of over the counter or prescription stimulant or depressant medication was controlled. Five sessions of BRT were conducted. A repeated pre-post training assessment single-subject research design was used. Following a brief adaptation period, baseline assessment of relaxed behaviors occurred followed by BRT and then post-training observation. Relaxed behaviors were taught according to Poppen (1998). Dependent variables were the Behavioral Relaxation Scale (BRS), a direct observation measure of relaxed behavior and Smith Relaxation States Inventory (SSRI), a self-report instrument. BRS reliability ranged from 80-100%. Systematic increases in relaxed behaviors occurred following BRT. Increases occurred among all 14 relaxation states with greater change (> 1.5 sd) in R-States of disengagement, physical relaxation, mental quiet, rested, strength, childlike innocence, and timelessness. Further research using a more rigorous experimental design and multiple biobehavioral measures is needed. Generality to clinical samples needs to be assessed.
 
61. Comparison of Three Stimulus Preference Assessment Methods in Adults Diagnosed with a Mental Illness
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
STACI L. SAYLORS (University of the Pacific), Holly Ayn White (University of the Pacific), Carolynn S. Kohn (University of the Pacific)
Abstract: The purpose of this study is to compare the results of three stimulus preference methods in verbal adults diagnosed with a mental illness. Past research has indicated that multiple-stimulus preference assessments can produce similar results to those achieved using the paired-stimulus presentation format. However, current research on stimulus preference assessments has focused on individuals diagnosed with severe or profound mental retardation, and individuals with developmental disabilities. Extensive research examining stimulus preference methods in adults diagnosed with a mental illness has not been conducted. This study compares survey preference assessments, paired-stimulus preference assessments, and multiple stimulus preference assessments without replacement with this population and is divided into two phases. During phase 1, a survey method, a paired-stimulus method, and a multiple stimulus without replacement method of assessing preference of edible reinforcers were administered. Phase 2 tested the reinforcement effects of the stimulus preference assessments administered in phase 1. During this phase the highest and lowest ranked stimuli were then delivered contingent on a target behavior in a multielement format. The results of these comparisons will be discussed in terms of application of stimulus preference assessment procedures in adult outpatient settings for community centers of the mentally ill population.
 
62. Reducing Anxiety in College Students in Public Speaking Situations
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
ANGELA M. DUARTE (Universidade Catolica de Goias), Maria Aparecida Oliveira (Universidade Catolica de Goias)
Abstract: The study was part of the master level thesis of the first author. A multiple baseline across subjects design was used in the study. Five college students presented high level of anxiety in public speaking situations and in situations where they were being evaluated. Intervention combined applied behavior analysis procedures and procedures of cognitive behavioral therapy to teach anxiety reduction strategies. The results show improvement in the responses measured.
 
 
 
Poster Session #402
#402 Poster Session - DDA
Monday, May 30, 2005
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
63. Using Social Stories With Developmentally Disabled Adolescent Sex Offenders
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
LOUIS VENEZIANO (Woodward Resource Center)
Abstract: Until recently, very little attention was paid to adolescents who committed sex offenses. Epidemiological studies now indicate that adolescents are responsible for 20% of rapes and between 30 to 50% of child sexual abuse cases. In addition, approximately 50% of adult sexual offenders report that their first sexual offense occurred during their adolescence. Research studies have repeatedly demonstrated that adolescent sex offenders are a heterogeneous population with diverse characteristics and different treatment needs. Adolescent sex offenders with developmental disabilities constitute a subpopulation with unique treatment needs. The present study used a multiple-baseline-across-subjects design to evaluate the effectiveness of using social stories with developmentally disabled adolescent sex offenders. Social stories are a tool for teaching social skills to individuals with autism and related disabilities. Social stories provide an individual with accurate information about those situations that he may find difficult or confusing. The goal of the story is to increase the individual’s understanding of, make him more comfortable with, and possibly suggest some appropriate responses for the situation in question. The results were discussed in terms of their theoretical and practical significance.
 
64. Investigating the Relationship Between Stereotypic Behavior and Learning
Area: DDA; Domain: Basic Research
DANIELLE LISO (Vanderbilt University), Mark Wolery (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to investigate the potential relationship between stereotypic behavior and learning. Young children with disabilities were taught to receptively identify common objects in two conditions. In the first condition, children were taught the receptive identification skill while their stereotypic behaviors were ignored. In the second condition, children were taught a comparable set of receptive identification skills, but all instances of steretoypic behavior were interrupted using a verbal and physical interruption procedure. All instruction was delivered during 10-min play sessions. Skill acquisition in both conditions was compared. In addition, procedural fidelity and social validity were measured.
 
65. Evaluating the Long-term Outcome of DRA in a Classroom Setting
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
TIFFANY KODAK (Louisiana State University), John A. Northup (University of Iowa), Laura L. Grow (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Previous research on differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA) has shown that DRA is effective in reducing problem behavior (Carr & Durand, 1985). However, studies reported in the literature do not typically provide follow-up data assessing the long-term effectiveness of treatment procedures. Furthermore, it’s unclear whether treatment procedures are extended to other settings and whether caregivers/teachers are trained to implement treatment once the study is completed. Treatment may be implemented under less than optimal conditions by caregivers or teachers who do not have training in applied behavior analysis. Research has shown that DRA may still be effective in maintaining low levels of problem behavior, even when it is not implemented under optimal parameters (Vollmer, Roane, Ringdahl, & Marcus, 1999). However, it remains unclear whether DRA will continue to be effective when implemented over an extended period of time under less than optimal conditions. The current investigation evaluated the effectiveness of DRA in maintaining low levels of problem behavior when implemented over a two-year period by lay people in a school setting. Results indicate that treatment was relatively effective in maintaining low levels of problem behavior and high levels of compliance, although treatment was not implemented with optimal integrity.
 
66. Deducing a Behavioral Function from an Inconclusive Brief Functional Analysis
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JEFFREY R. LUKE (Melmark), Sean D. Casey (Melmark)
Abstract: Previous investigations that have analyzed the maintaining conditions for problem behavior have extended functional assessment procedures. Often an extended functional analysis procedure is not practical due to time constraints, and as a result a clear and replicable response pattern does not emerge. We conducted a brief functional analysis with a young adult who engaged in self-injury. During the assessment, the client's self-injurious behavior occurred most frequently when they were provided with contingent access to preferred items in the tangible condition, suggesting that their inappropriate behaviors were maintained by gaining or maintaining access to preferred items. These results are discussed in terms of how a tangible function was deduced from an undifferentiated brief functional analysis. Also discussed are intervention efforts focusing on decreasing the child’s self-injury.
 
67. Assessment of Differential Task Preferences
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
APRIL N. KISAMORE (Marcus Autism Center), Ashley Glover (Marcus Autism Center), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Previous research has developed a variety of procedures to differentially identify preferred stimuli that function as effective positive reinforcers. In contrast to this research, few studies have examined procedures to identify differentially preferred tasks. Iwata et al. (1994) showed that many individuals display problem behavior that is maintained by negative reinforcement (i.e., escape or avoidance of aversive tasks). To assess negatively reinforced problem behavior, it is necessary that the task is sufficiently aversive to evoke problem behavior. Thus, in the current investigation conducted an assessment to identify the differential preference for a variety of tasks. We found that the intensity and frequency of problem behavior varied as a function of the type of task presented. Subsequent phases showed that the participants chose engagement in tasks that were associated with less problem behavior relative to those associated with high rates of problem behavior. Finally, results of functional analyses validated the result of the initial assessment and showed that higher rates of problem behavior were associated with the demand condition in which lower preference demands were presented. Specifically, the low preference demands produced increases in problem behavior that were greater than 80% the rate of problem behavior associated with high preference demands.
 
68. Acquisition of Systematic Behavior Relaxation Training (BRT) in Persons with Dual Diagnosis
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
J. HELEN YOO (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Theodosia R. Paclawskyj (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Julia T. O'Connor (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: BRT is a technique in which motoric behaviors associated with a relaxed state are objectively taught and measured. BRT aims to decrease anxious behaviors by teaching relaxation skills as replacement behaviors. Because BRT targets autonomic arousal, it may augment operant behavioral protocols in decreasing anxious behaviors (Paclawskyj, 2002). Previously, we presented BRT acquisition data for 10 persons with MRDD (Braud et al., 2002). Results from that study indicated an average time to acquisition of relaxation of 100 minutes. Moreover, systematic teaching resulted in more generalization across behaviors (m=5) than random order (m=1).In replication of this study, we present data from 3 additional participants trained in BRT. 1-2 behaviors were taught systematically using a 3-step prompt hierarchy in conjunction with modeling and differential reinforcement of target behaviors. Results indicate that an average of 3 relaxed behaviors necessitated training, while an average of 5 behaviors were acquired without training. Average time to acquisition was comparable to previous findings. Taken together, results indicate that the systematic training method is far more efficient in promoting acquisition due to generalization across untrained behaviors. Further research is needed to evaluate the treatment efficacy of BRT.
 
69. The Use of Competing Items to Decrease Socially Inappropriate Behavior
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
MICHELLE A. FRANK-CRAWFORD (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Lynn G. Bowman (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Kristie L. Arnold (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jennifer Lynne Bruzek (University of Kansas)
Abstract: The present study examined the effects of using competing stimuli to reduce socially inappropriate behavior in a 9-year-old male diagnosed with autism. “Penis pressing” was defined as the child pressing or touching his penis outside of his clothing with one or both hands, with objects, or against surfaces or people. Penis pressing was observed across all conditions of the functional analysis suggesting that the participant’s penis pressing was maintained by automatic reinforcement. Previous research suggests that competing stimuli have been successful in reducing aberrant behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement such as self-injurious behavior (Piazza et al, 1998; Piazza et al., 2000). A competing stimulus assessment was conducted with the participant and a slinky, lanyard with keys, and puzzles were identified as items with high levels of item interaction and low to zero levels of penis pressing. These items were then incorporated into the functional analysis across all conditions. Treatment effects were evaluated using an ABAB reversal design. Approximately 48% of sessions were conducted with two or more observers. Exact agreement for penis pressing was 94%. A treatment consisting of competing stimuli and redirection was successful in reducing penis pressing to near zero levels, resulting in an 87% reduction from baseline.
 
70. Is Choice a Reinforcer for Non-Verbal Persons with Severe or Profound Developmental Disabilities?
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
KRISTEN L. CAMPBELL (University of Manitoba), Tamara L. Ansons (University of Manitoba), Toby L. Martin (University of Manitoba), Garry L. Martin (University of Manitoba), Dickie C. T. Yu (St. Amant Research Centre)
Abstract: The current study examined the reinforcing value of choice. Three adults with severe or profound developmental disabilities who displayed limited verbal abilities participated. On each trial, a participant was offered a choice between two boxes. One box contained a single edible and the second box contained two edibles, in which case the participant chose one of the items. We predicted that participants would learn to display a preference for choice by selecting the choice box more frequently than the no-choice box, which received some support in only one of three participants. However, a positive relationship was found between the percentage of choice selections in which participants switched between reinforcers and the overall percentage of choice selections, which provides new insight on the reinforcing effects of choice.
 
71. Functional Analysis of Pica Using Non-Toxic Stimuli
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JULIA H. FIEBIG (Kennedy Krieger Institute), David E. Kuhn (Kennedy Krieger Institute), SungWoo Kahng (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Kyong-Mee Chung (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Traci M. Brown (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Katharine Gutshall (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Pica, which consists of the ingestion of inedible, sometimes toxic items, is oftentimes difficult to assess because of the life-threatening risks associated with this behavior. Given that functional analysis has become the standard assessment for problem behavior, it is important to develop a safe method of conducting functional analyses of pica. We conducted a functional analysis of pica for three individuals with developmental disabilities, all of whom had a history of engaging in pica. In these functional analyses, we used various types of non-toxic items to bait the session room during each condition. These items included dry pasta, rice paper, Play-Doh, and crayons. The items were placed around the session room so that they were easily accessible to the individual during all conditions. Attempts at pica were not blocked during the functional analyses. Using these items allowed us to safely conduct functional analyses of pica without disrupting the contingencies of the test conditions.
 
72. Informed Functional Analysis and Treatment of a Common Preschool Problem Behavior
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JEFFREY H. TIGER (University of Kansas), Gregory P. Hanley (University of Kansas), Kimberly K. Bessette (University of Kansas), Einar T. Ingvarsson (University of Kansas), Virginia Ndoro (University of Kansas)
Abstract: An initial functional analysis (Iwata et al., 1994) of a preschooler’s handmouthing failed to generate sufficient levels of handmouthing for a determination of behavioral function to be made A descriptive functional assessment was conducted which showed that the preschooler’s handmouthing occurred more frequently during naptime than during free play, centers, or outdoor time. However, the reinforcers for handmouthing were still unknown because relevant social reinforcers were delivered intermittently in all activities. The stimuli associated with naptime (lying on a mat with a blanket, continuous display of a video) were then incorporated into all functional analysis conditions. High levels of hand mouthing were observed across all conditions suggesting maintenance via automatic sources of reinforcement. The effects of including relevant antecedents (i.e., naptime stimuli) during functional analyses were then demonstrated within an ABAB design. A function-based treatment, which involved interrupting the putative response-reinforcer relation via response blocking, was sequentially introduced across settings and classroom teachers. Handmouthing was observed at the lowest levels only when treatment was in place. Interobserver agreement was assessed during 45% of all assessment and treatment sessions and averaged above 98%. The importance of conducting informed functional analyses for common preschool behavior problems will be discussed.
 
73. Training Parents to Implement Discrete Trial Instruction in Natural Environments
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
NANCY L. FOSTER (Munroe-Meyer Institute), Stephanie Cooper (Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract: Discrete trial instruction (DTI) is an empirically supported intervention for increasing functional communication of individuals with Autism and Autism-spectrum disorders. Although the efficacy of DTI is established, implementing DTI with integrity is essential to ensure maximum benefits are obtained. DTI is often utilized by professionals and paraprofessionals that receive extensive training, supervision, and feedback specific to DTI techniques. However, many individuals with communication deficits also benefit from the application of techniques such as DTI that are implemented by their parents in the home environment. Because many individuals do not have access to intensive services, it is imperative that they are able to receive strategies to effectively address communication or other adaptive skills. The present studies examine the effects of a program to train parents or other care givers to implement DTI with integrity with individuals with Autism and one individual with Kabuki Syndrome. The training program includes the following components: (1) education about behavioral principles that inform DTI; (2) modeling; (3) practice; and (4) continuous feedback. In addition, parents were taught to systematically collect data that were utilized to determine the effectiveness of DTI as well as to assess treatment integrity.
 
74. Fluency Building of Reading for Students with Learning Disabilities
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
HIROSHI SUGASAWARA (Keio University, Japan), Jun'ichi Yamamoto (Keio University, Japan)
Abstract: Students with learning disabilities could not read texts accurately and /or fluently, but they could acquire phonological awareness. When students were trained the accuracy and the fluency of tool skills (write a letter), they could acquire component skill and composite skill (write a text) without additional training. The correlation between reading-fluency and reading-comprehension was found in recent studies. In the present study, (1) we assessed the speed of reading among the stimuli (array of digits, letters, and words and real text) for 11 students, (2) in multi-baseline design, we trained to read fluently for some non-words, then tested for another non-words and for texts, (3) When the students could read text fluently, we evaluated to improvement of reading-comprehension. As results, (1) reading speed correlated among the stimuli (array of digits, letters, words and text) in 11 students with learning disabilities. (2) When we trained to read word fluently for 5 students, they could read fluently about novel words and novel texts. (3) 5 students improved reading-comprehension.
 
75. Decreasing Job Coach Assistance During Supported Work Routines: An Outcomes Management Approach
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
LEAH BRACKETT (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Dennis H. Reid (Carolina Behavior Analysis and Support Center), Carolyn Green (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center)
Abstract: The poster will describe a program for reducing job coach assistance provided during break routines for four adults with severe multiple disabilities in a part-time community job. The program involved assessing the amount of job coach assistance provided for each of four tasks conducted during the break routine at the supported work site. Observations of job coach assistance included the amount of job coach assistance in completing all or part of each of four respective tasks. If instruction was provided by the job coach to complete any of the tasks, the level of instructional prompt was recorded in addition to praise and/or corrective feedback provided. Observation of supported worker independence in performing any or all tasks was also recorded. Following baseline observations across two job coaches, intervention to reduce job coach assistance was implemented. The intervention included an initial decision-making meeting with each job coach to discuss intervention strategies across the four tasks of the break routine for a respective worker. During the meeting a worksheet guided discussion for strategies (instructional and/or material adaptation) to increase worker independence across the four tasks. Once intervention began for each respective worker, observation of worker/job coach behavior resumed with specific verbal feedback given by the job coach supervisor following each observation. A multiple baseline design across the two job coaches and four supported workers was used to evaluate intervention effectiveness. Across the two job coaches and four supported workers, the percentage of tasks completed by the job coaches was significantly reduced while independent worker behavior increased.
 
76. Using Competing Stimulus Assessments to Direct Treatment using Noncontingent Reinforcement with Blocking
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
KELLY M. VINQUIST (University of Iowa), Wendy K. Berg (University of Iowa), Joel Eric Ringdahl (University of Iowa), David P. Wacker (University of Iowa), Jason M. Stricker (University of Iowa)
Abstract: We conducted a functional analysis with a young man who engaged in severe ear picking, face rubbing, mouth hitting, hand biting and finger mouthing. The results of the functional analysis indicated that self-injury was maintained by automatic reinforcement with highest levels of self-injury occurring during the free play condition. We conducted a competing stimulus assessment to identify objects that resulted in low levels of self-injury and high levels of item engagement when provided on a noncontingent (NCR) basis. We compared levels of problem behavior and item engagement across sessions in which a competing stimulus was provided NCR to sessions in which other preferred stimuli were presented NCR (free play) within an ABABAB design. We then compared the effectiveness of noncontingent access to the competing stimulus with and without blocking problem behavior within a BCBCACBC design. NCR access to the competing stimulus plus blocking resulted in the greatest reduction (77% reduction) in problem behavior as compared to the free play condition of the functional analysis. Interobserver agreement data were collected for 30% of the sessions and averaged 94% for problem behavior.
 
77. The Effects of a Multi-component Program and Elimination of Stimulant Medication on the Reduction of Profanity
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
SHARON K. KELL (The Learning Tree, Inc.), Jerre R. Brimer (The Learning Tree, Inc.), Robert W. Montgomery (Reinforcement Unlimited), Ellen K. Taylor (The Learning Tree, Inc.), Robert A. Babcock (Auburn University), Melanie Davis (The Learning Tree, Inc.), Howard McPhail (The Learning Tree, Inc.), James Kelly (The Learning Tree, Inc.)
Abstract: This poster will describe the effects of a program incoporating reinforcement for appropriate communication and ignoring occurrences of profanity on the reduction of profanity used by a student with a developmental disability. Data for profanity were collected by event count. During baseline the student averaged 207.5 events of profanity daily. During September 2004 the student averaged 6.44 events of profanity daily. A discussion of the effects of the program and subsequently the reduction and elimination of stimulant medication on the occurrence of profanity will be presented. Data display will show changes. A discussion will also be provided on the student's increases in appropriate language usage.
 
78. The Effects of Providing Choice on the Consumption of Food in Children Exhibiting Food Selectivity
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
MERRILL J. BERKOWITZ (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Paula Tokar (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Veronica Armellino (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital)
Abstract: In order to obtain adequate nutrition, it is recommended that children consume a variety of foods across all food groups. Some children, however, consume only a limited number of foods, thereby compromising their nutritional intake. Providing the opportunity to make choices between reinforcers (e.g., Graff, Libby, & Green, 1998) or tasks (Lattimore, Parsons, and Reid, 2002) has been shown to enhance task completion. Two children admitted to an intensive day treatment program for the assessment and treatment of food selectivity participated in the study. Using a multielement design the effects of providing choice between foods was evaluated during the study. A four-food, paired-choice assessment (Fisher et al., 1992) was conducted immediately prior to half of the treatment meals. The three most chosen foods were then presented during the treatment meal. The child engaged in a playtime activity immediately prior to the other treatment meals. Reinforcement and escape extinction components were also implemented to increase each participant’s consumption of a wider variety of foods. The results of the evaluation and their implications on the treatment of food selectivity will be discussed. Limitations of the current study and recommendations for future research will also be provided.
 
79. The Effectiveness of Intense Positive Programming and Supplemental Contingent Skin Shock in Reducing the Frequency of Severe Maladaptive Behaviors for Individuals in a Residential Treatment Center
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
PATRICIA RIVERA (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Matthew L. Israel (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Robert Von Heyn (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Ed Langford (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Robert W. Worsham (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Robert Kalinowski (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Abstract: The Judge Rotenberg Educational Center operates day and residential programs for children and adults with behavior problems, including conduct disorders, emotional problems, brain injury or psychosis, autism and developmental disabilities. The basic approach taken at JRC is the use of behavioral psychology and its various technological applications, such as behavioral education, programmed instruction, precision teaching, behavior modification, behavior therapy, behavioral counseling, self-management of behavior and chart-sharing. Prior to their admission to the Judge Rotenberg Center (JRC) all students exhibited severe inappropriate behaviors that prevented their academic and social development, were dangerous to themselves and others and in many cases required multiple psychiatric hospitalizations. Upon admission to JRC, all individuals were treated with an intensive, positive only behavioral treatment plan. For some individuals the data indicated that they continued to exhibit severe inappropriate behaviors at a very high rate and/or intensity. For these individuals court approved contingent skin shock was introduced as a supplement to the positive behavior programming. Data will be presented demonstrating the effectiveness of this treatment package to treat the major inappropriate behaviors for these individuals using standard celeration charts.
 
80. Analysis of Idiosyncratic Variables During Functional Analysis
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
LAURA L. GROW (Marcus Autism Center), Tracy L. Kettering (Marcus Autism Center), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center), Wayne W. Fisher (Marcus Autism Center), Kelly J. Bouxsein (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Results of previous research suggest that the problem behavior of some individuals may be sensitive to idiosyncratic variables that are not generally tested during analogue functional analyses (e.g., Fisher et al., 1998; Van Camp et al., 2000). In the current assessment, we conducted functional analysis conditions with both therapists and a parent. Problem behavior occurred at low levels across conditions. Based on parental report and anecdotal observations, we compared a modified tangible session in a pairwise analysis with a control condition. First, we identified the manner in which the participant preferred to interact with items. Next, we provided access to preferred interaction contingent on aggressive behavior. Results suggested that problem behavior was maintained by positive reinforcement in the form of access to preferred interaction. Based on the assessment data, we assessed several potential treatments in a multielement with reversals design. Results showed that choice of interaction and extinction for problem behavior reduced the occurrence of problem behavior.
 
81. The Use of Competing Items to Decrease Socially Inappropriate Behavior Maintained by Social Attention
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
APRIL STACHELSKI (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Lynn G. Bowman (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Katharine Gutshall (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jennifer Lynne Bruzek (University of Kansas)
Abstract: The present study was conducted to decrease the inappropriate language of an 8-year-old female diagnosed with moderate mental retardation. Inappropriate language was defined as cursing, name-calling, derogatory statements, and directives (i.e. shut up). The results of the functional analysis (Iwata et al., 1984/1994) suggested that inappropriate language was maintained by social attention. Previous research suggests that competing stimuli have been successful in decreasing destructive behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement (Piazza et al., 1998) as well as behavior maintained by social attention (Fisher et al., 2000; Fisher et al., 2004). A competing items assessment was conducted in order to identify items that were associated with high levels of interaction and low levels of inappropriate language. A walkman was identified as a competing item and was introduced across all functional analysis conditions. Approximately 40.8% of sessions were conducted with two or more observers. Exact agreement for inappropriate language was 87.26%. The combination of a competing item plus extinction resulted in a clinically significant reduction of inappropriate language in the attention conditions of the functional analysis.
 
82. An Evaluation of Liquid and Food Quantity Intake on Automatically Maintained Rumination and Vomiting
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JANET HUNTER (W.A. Howe Center), Dynata Funderberg (W.A. Howe Center), Yemonja Smalls (W.A. Howe Center)
Abstract: As many as 80% of individuals with developmental disabilities experience serious feeding problems including rumination (chronic regurgitation, chewing and reswallowing of food) and vomiting which place them at risk for malnutrition, aspiration and esophageal damage. In this study an individual who exhibited continuous rumination and high rates of vomiting was evaluated. The treatment analysis was done as an attempt to replicate results of past literature indicating that quantity of food may impact frequency of rumination as well as to expand it by manipulating when liquids were given during mealtime. Although full satiation quantities were not attempted due to medical contraindications to continuation of the study, a significant reduction of rumination and vomiting occurred when liquids were given immediately prior to the meal. Liquids following the meal resulted in increased rates of rumination.
 
83. The Use of Video Modeling to Increase Social Interaction Between Two Preschool Children with Developmental Disabilities
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
ABIGAL CLINTON FERGUSON (Hawthorne Country Day School), Darci A. Fischer (Hawthorne Country Day School)
Abstract: Nikopoulos and Keenan (2004) used video modeling to increase social interaction between two autistic students. This project aims to replicate the use of the video modeling on preschool students with developmental disabilities. Generalization and maintenance are discussed.
 
84. A Method for Identifying the Reinforcing Efficacy of Tokens
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
STACIE L. FITCH (New England Center for Children), Jason C. Bourret (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Participants were exposed to three conditions (contingent tokens, contingent edibles, and extinction) in a multielement design. In the contingent tokens and contingent edibles conditions, consequences were delivered according to a random interval (RI) schedule which was arranged such that the number of arranged reinforcers in the session matched the number of tokens that the participant typically earned before exchange in his daily programming (e.g., if a participant usually exchanged tokens after the delivery of 10 tokens, an RI 30-s schedule was used such that, on average, 10 tokens or edibles would be arranged for delivery contingent upon responding). The edibles used were those that typically served as back-up reinforcers for the tokens earned by the participants outside of experimental sessions. The tokens used, were also those already in use for each participant. The data indicated that the tokens served as reinforcers for one participant but not for the other. The results suggested that the methodology used in the study may be useful in identifying the reinforcing efficacy of tokens currently being used for behavioral programming and may also provide a baseline for treatments designed to increase the reinforcing efficacy of tokens.
 
85. Fading of Protective Equipment in the Treatment of Self-Injurious Behavior
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
ATLI F. MAGNUSSON (New England Center for Children), Eileen M. Roscoe (New England Center for Children), Daniel Gould (New England Center for Children), Allen J. Karsina (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: This study evaluated the fading of protective equipment during the treatment of self-injurious behavior (SIB) in an 8-year-old boy diagnosed with autism. Results of an analog functional analysis revealed that SIB was not maintained by social reinforcement, as indicated by undifferentiated responding across all conditions. During treatment, protective equipment was removed contingent on SIB and re-presented contingent on completion of a simple task with no occurrence of SIB. Treatment resulted in a substantial reduction in SIB relative to baseline. Data were also collected during 30-minute probe sessions, where the participant engaged in academic activities, in an attempt to determine whether gradual fading of protective equipment had been successful in maintaining low levels of SIB. Results indicated that after more than 75% of the protective equipment was faded, SIB was maintained at near zero levels. Interobserver agreement was collected in at least 30% of sessions across all conditions and averaged over 90%.
 
 
 
Poster Session #403
#403 Poster Session – EAB
Monday, May 30, 2005
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
86. Vicarious Trial-and-Error Behavior in Hamsters Foraging for Food
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
FELIPE CABRERA (University of Guadalajara, Mexico), Francois Tonneau (University of Guadalajara, Mexico)
Abstract: Spatial memory in nonhuman animals is often tested in radial mazes. In this experiment, we examined some properties of the foraging behavior of hamsters. We used the analog of an open-field maze (110 x 110 cm) with eight baited poles arranged in a circle (without arms to connect the central start box with the poles). On each trial, a hamster was placed at the center of the open field and allowed to make 10 successive choices, correct or not. On the trials where only correct choices were made, the hamsters made more partial choices (that is, partial head movements directed at the top of a pole) as the number of previous choices increased. On trials with errors, partial choices were less frequent. This result is consistent with the vicarious trial-and-error phenomenon described by Tolman (1932), in which the subjects look (or run) back and forth at the choice point before making a complete choice.
 
87. Effects of Free Access to Water and Food on Body Weight and Food and Water Intake Under a Partial Food Deprivation Schedule
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ANTONIO LOPEZ-ESPINOZA (University of Guadalajara, Mexico), Hector Martinez Sanchez (University of Guadalajara, Mexico), Alejandra Marquez (University of Guadalajara, Mexico)
Abstract: After fifteen days of free access to water and food, ten albino rats (3-month-old at the beginning of the experiment), were exposed to fifteen days of partial food deprivation with 7 g of food by day, followed by 3 days of free access of food. This cycle deprivation – free access was repeated for other 2 times. Water was freely available during the experiment. Control group was exposed to free access all the time. When deprivation was removed, food and water consumption increased, while body weight was recovered. Results confirmed previous data about post-deprivation effects related to changes in body weight and food and water consumption after one period of deprivation food. Key words: deprivation, free access, post-deprivation effects, water and food consumption, body weight, rats.
 
88. A Comparison of Two Discrimination Training Procedures: An Application of a Multiple-Sequence Variation of the Multiple Baseline Design
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
DEREK D. REED (Syracuse University), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (Syracuse University), Laura Lee McIntyre (Syracuse University)
Abstract: The ability to discriminate among objects has been identified as pivotal; however, children with developmental disabilities often exhibit particular difficulties discriminating among stimuli (Ward & Yu, 2000). This study aimed to identify ways of maximizing discrimination training through the use of a relatively novel single case experimental design, a multiple-sequence variation of the multiple-baseline design. In contrast to the traditional multiple-baseline design, the multiple-baseline—multiple-sequence (MBL-MS) allows comparison between and within participants in an effort to examine sequencing effects. This design, as described by Noell and Gresham (2001), is an efficient way to compare teaching sequences and efficacy of the training while subsequently minimizing time. Six children diagnosed with developmental delays were asked to identify picture cards (e.g., animals, foods, toys, etc.) in a 1 to 1 setting. The auditory-visual training required each child to identify the correct picture when its name was stated. In the visual-visual training, the individual was required to identify the correct picture when a similar picture card was presented. Results will be discussed in terms of teaching multiple-discrimination to children to maximize the development of pivotal behaviors. Furthermore, the effectiveness of a multiple-sequence variation of the multiple baseline design will be examined.
 
89. Treatment Integrity Failures in Fixed Time Schedules: An Analysis of Two Failure Types
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
KRISTIN FARR (Florida Institute of Technology), David A. Wilder (Florida Institute of Technology), Claire C. St. Peter (University of Florida)
Abstract: Although several articles exist on the failure of researchers to evaluate and report treatment integrity data, few researchers have attempted to systematically evaluate the effects of compromised treatment integrity on intervention plans. The current study examined the effects of degraded levels of treatment integrity on fixed time NCR schedules. A human operant methodology was employed in a reversal design to evaluate the effects in a systematic, time efficient and ethical manner. Undergraduate psychology students served as participants. For most participants results indicate the errors of commission were more detrimental than errors of omission. Even at ninety percent treatment integrity NCR treatment effects were compromised in comission phases. Clinical implications and future directions are discussed.
 
90. Evaluative Conditioning: Timing and Salience of Stimuli
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ANNE C. MACASKILL (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), Maree J. Hunt (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), David N. Harper (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), Marc Wilson (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand)
Abstract: Evaluative conditioning is a process through which neutral stimuli acquire valence after being paired with positive or negative stimuli. Replicating Olson and Fazio (1999), participants in the current study were exposed to a series of such pairings in the context of a vigilance task. Valence changes were then measured both explicitly using a Likert rating scale, and implicitly using the implicit associations test (IAT). Evidence for conditioning was found using IAT reaction time data, but not participants’ explicit ratings. Two manipulations the would be predicted to influence conditioning if evaluative conditioning is best viewed as a form of Pavolvian conditioning were then carried out. One of the salience manipulations produced the expected result while a second salience manipulation and a change in the timing of CS and US presentations did not.
 
91. Within-Subject, Within-Session Yoked VR/VI Schedules with Rats: Extending Catania et al. (1977)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
PAUL A. ROKOSZ (University of Wisconsin-Madison), Matthew E. Andrzejewski (University of Wisconsin-Madison)
Abstract: Designed to replicate and extend Catania et al.(1977), the current study investigated the influence of various reinforcement schedules and yoking procedures on rates of lever-pressing in rats. Initially, two leader rats were conditioned under variable-ratio reinforcement schedules; their inter-reinforcement intervals formed the bases of variable interval schedules for yoked counterparts. Leader and yoked conditions were eventually reversed. During the second phase, the number of responses per reinforcement of leader rats on variable-interval schedules determined the inter-reinforcer ratios for their respective yoked counterparts. Leader and yoked conditions were once again switched between rats. In the final phase, rats were yoked to themselves using a multiple schedule arrangement; behavior under one type of reinforcement schedule determined the inter-reinforcer-intervals or ratios of the following schedule; subsequent behavior determined the intervals or ratios for a reversion to the initial type of schedule, and so on. Consistent with the results of the Catania et al. (1977), variable-ratio reinforcement schedules consistently produced higher rates of response than did variable-interval schedules. The current study extended the paradigm to rats, and also demonstrates that individual rats are sensitive to the feedback of timing features of different schedules of reinforcement within the same session.
 
92. Differential Resurgence and Response Elimination
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
STEPHANIE P. DA SILVA (West Virginia University), Kennon Andy Lattal (West Virginia University), Adam H. Doughty (University of Kansas, Parsons)
Abstract: Resurgence is the transient recovery of previously reinforced, but presently extinguished, responding when more recently reinforced responding is extinguished. It was examined whether unequal resurgence would follow different response-elimination procedures. There were three conditions in each experiment. In Condition 1, pigeons pecked under a multiple variable-interval (VI) VI schedule. In Condition 2, pecking was eliminated in different ways across components. In Condition 3, extinction was effected for all responding, and resurgence was compared across components. Importantly, the response-elimination procedures in Condition 2 varied across experiments. Experiment 1 showed greater resurgence, and an earlier onset of it, after a differential-reinforcement-of-other-behavior (DRO) schedule than after a VI schedule correlated with pecking a different key. Experiments 2 and 3 showed that the differential resurgence in Experiment 1 probably was not due to conditional stimulus control or the periodicity of food delivery. Experiment 4 showed similar resurgence after either a DRO schedule or a VI schedule correlated with treadle pressing. Experiment 5 showed greater resurgence, and/or an earlier onset of it, after a VI schedule correlated with treadle pressing than after a VI schedule correlated with pecking a different key. The relation of these results to an understanding of resurgence is discussed.
 
93. The Effects of Stimulus Range on the Central Tendency Effect in Stimulus Generalization
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CHRISTINE WEGNER (University of North Dakota), Adam Derenne (University of North Dakota)
Abstract: Recent research on stimulus generalization has shown that increasing the range of the stimuli used during the test increases the frequency of responses to the S+. This research investigated whether the stimulus range also affects the so-called central tendency effect: The tendency for the generalization gradient to shift towards middling stimulus values. College undergraduates were trained and tested with horizontal lines that varied in length. Depending on the condition, the overall test range was either wide or narrow. Also, some participants were trained with an S+ that was near the center of the test range while others were trained with an S+ that was either extremely short or extremely long. The results showed that both the range and the relative position of the S+ influenced the accuracy of responding.
 
94. From Rags to Riches: Rich Schedule of Reinforcement Affects Fixed-Ratio Response Rate Function
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CHRIS MAZZARA (Central Michigan University), Drew Fox (Central Michigan University), Mark P. Reilly (Central Michigan University)
Abstract: The goal of the current study was to examine how fixed-ratio response rates change as a function of the context in which they are presented. Specifically, ratio functions were generated alone and in the presence of a multiple schedule that alternated FR 5 with increasing fixed ratios in the alternate component. Four Sprague Dawley rats were trained to lever press under fixed-ratio schedules of reinforcement. The ratio value doubled each day starting with 2 and ending with 256. Next, the same FR function was constructed in the context of a multiple schedule in which a constant FR 5 alternated with the geometrically increasing FR across sessions. Preliminary data indicate that overall response rates were lower, and that the highest ratio that maintained response rate was lower in the context of the multiple FR 5 schedule. Results will be discussed in terms of contemporary mathematical models of behavior such as Herrnstein’s Matching Law and Killeen’s Mathematical Principles of Reinforcement. This study can have implications for topics such as schedule interactions, motivation, response time and relative reinforcer value.
 
95. Discounting of Delayed Hypothetical Food and Monetary Outcomes: Effects of Amount
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ANA A. BAUMANN (Utah State University), Delores Dorton (Utah State University), Megan T. Ryan (Utah State University), Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: Previous research has suggested that delayed hypothetical food outcomes are discounted more steeply than delayed hypothetical monetary outcomes. This difference could reflect the degree to which consumable and non-consumable reinforcers are discounted. Prior studies used a relatively large amount of food, however, which could be discounted differently than money for multiple reasons. We examined the effects of reward magnitude on differential discounting of food and money. Participants who did not report eating disorders answered questions about which of two options they would prefer: an immediate adjusting outcome or a delayed constant outcome. The delay varied from 1 day to 2 years. There were two outcome types, tested separately: food and money. There were two delayed outcome amounts, tested across groups. The delayed constant outcome was either $100 worth of the participant’s favorite food and $100 or $10 worth of the participant’s favorite food and $10. Participants experienced the outcome types in different orders. They did not actually receive any of the outcomes, but were compensated with class credit for their participation. Food was discounted more steeply than money for both groups. This result indicates that steeper discounting of primary, consumable outcomes is a robust phenomenon across different outcome amounts.
 
96. Choice, Token Reinforcement, and Sensitivity to Remote Consequences
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
RACHELLE L. YANKELEVITZ (University of Florida), Timothy D. Hackenberg (University of Florida)
Abstract: Four pigeons chose between fixed-interval (FI) and progressive-interval (PI) schedules of token reinforcement with stimulus lamps serving as token reinforcers. The FI schedule requirements remained constant within a condition but varied across conditions, from 32 to 64 s. The PI schedule began at 0 s but increased by 8 s with each reinforcer delivered by that schedule. Completion of the FI schedule reset the PI schedule to 0 s on the subsequent trial. The main independent variable was the delay to the exchange period (when each token was exchangeable for 2-s food). Exchange periods occurred either on each choice trial (immediate exchange) or massed after eleven choice trials (delayed exchange). Switch points increased as a function of FI size, especially under immediate exchange-delay conditions. At a given FI value, switching occurred earlier in the delayed exchange than in the immediate exchange, indicating greater control by remote consequences. The results suggest that the delay to the exchange period broadens the time frame over which choices are sensitive to reinforcement variables in a diminishing returns task.
 
97. Effects of Response Cost in a Time-Place Learning Paradigm
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JACOB NORRIS (Texas Christian University), Natalie Rose Bruner (Illinois Wesleyan University), James D. Dougan (Illinois Wesleyan University)
Abstract: Reinforcers often occur in different places at different times, and a time-place learning paradigm is one in which behavior must occur at the right place and at the right time if reinforcement is to occur. Previous studies in our lab have suggested that response cost has a major impact on time-place learning. Evidence for time-place learning was stronger when the cost for switching between locations was relatively high. Evidence for time-place learning was relatively weak when the response cost was lower. The present study extends our previous research. Rats pressed bars for food reinforcement in open field with two feeding stations. At the start of a session only one feeding station was operative. Halfway through the session the second station became operative and the first station ceased to be operative. To maximize reinforcement, rats needed to move from one station to the other with time as the only cue. Results have implications for theories of timing and the role of response cost in learning.
 
98. Catania & Reynolds (1968) Versus Fleshler & Hoffmann (1962): Log Survivor Analyses of Rats Responding on Constant Probability Variable Interval Schedules
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
BLAKE A. HUTSELL (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Eric A. Jacobs (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale)
Abstract: In ongoing research, we are comparing performances maintained by schedules generated by Catania & Reynolds (1968) and Flesher & Hoffman (1962) algorithms to determine if response patterning is affected by the choice of method. Specifically, we are using log-survivor analyses to determine if the choice of algorithm affects bout initiation rate, bout length, and/or within-bout response rate. Rats’ lever pressing was maintained by variable interval schedules with values ranging from 30 s to 480 s, depending upon condition. Within-subject comparisons of responding maintained by schedules generated with each algorithm were performed. Preliminary results suggest that the two progressions do not have systematically different effects on responding.
 
99. Integrating Behavioural and Neurological Evidence in a Computational Model of Habituation and Sensitization
Area: EAB; Domain: Theory
OSCAR GARCIA LEAL (University of Guadalajara, Mexico), Pablo Adarraga Morales (Autonomous University of Madrid, Spain)
Abstract: The integration of behavioural evidence with data proceeding of studies realized to cellular and molecular levels is essential to advance in the understanding of the mechanisms that are in the base of the adaptation capacities of the organisms in the ontogenetic time. From our point of view, the use of computational techniques, through mathematical modelling developed from a behavioural frame, is a fruitful alternative in this goal.In this poster, a computational model of the mechanisms involved in the habituation and sensitization of responses is proposed. This model has been elaborated from the consideration of evidence proceeding of studies realized to a cellular level with simple organism Aplysia californica.The model simulates the main properties and parameters of both behavioural phenomena considered. In the poster the computational model is examined in detail. Some results are presented about simulations of the main effects of parameters relevant to both phenomena. Main results are analyzed from a behavioural point of view.
 
100. An Exploration of the Dimensions of Context in Intermingled Concurrent and Concurrent-Chains Choice Situations
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
PAUL ROMANOWICH (University of California, San Diego), Shawn R. Charlton (University of California, San Diego), Edmund J. Fantino (University of California, San Diego)
Abstract: Although it has been empirically demonstrated that context effects choice, the exact dimensions of context remain elusive. In order to better understand these contextual effects, the experiment reported in this poster used concurrent VI/VI schedules (component A) alternating with concurrent-chains VI/VI schedules (component B). Each component lasted for 8 trials then switched to the other component. For component A, the schedule values were VI 40/VI 40, VI 120/VI 120, and VI 360/VI 360. For component B, the experiment used a single concurrent-chain with initial-links VI 60/VI 60 and terminal-links VI 30/VI 90. According to current quantitative models, choice distribution in each component should be independent of the schedule values in the other component. However, it is also possible that choice is influenced by the overall rate of reinforcement, in which case choice behavior in each component would vary as a function of the rates of reinforcement in each component. This poster describes the impact of the three concurrent schedule contexts on choice in the concurrent-chain context. Further discussion is given to the implications of these findings on current quantitative models of choice.
 
101. The Effects of Yoking Caloric Intake to Decrease Biting
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
ANA PALACIOS (Teachers College, Columbia University), Robin A. Nuzzolo-Gomez (Teachers College, Columbia University), Rebecca Roderick (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: This study tested the effects of yoking caloric intake in order to decrease hand/wrist biting. The participant in this study was an 8-year old female, diagnosed with autism, and was functioning at a listener with emerging reader/writer levels of verbal behavior. The dependent variable in this study was biting, which was defined as any contact made from the mouth to the body from the participant to herself or to another. The independent variable was yoking caloric intake. Levels of caloric intake were kept stable during baseline, and data were recorded on the number of times the participant bit herself or another. In the treatment condition, the participant’s levels of caloric intake were doubled from that of baseline conditions, and data were taken on the number of biting emitted at the same time. Results show that yoking caloric intake significantly decreased the number of biting as compared to baseline levels.
 
102. Effects of Sharing and Not Sharing Non-differential Consequences on the Choice Between Individual and Social Contingencies in Partial Altruism in Adults
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
NORA RANGEL (University of Guadalajara, Mexico), Emilio Ribes Iñesta (University of Guadalajara, Mexico), Alejandra Zaragoza Scherman (University of Guadalajara, Mexico), Claudia Magana (University of Guadalajara, Mexico), Ana Georgina Lopez (University of Guadalajara, Mexico)
Abstract: Two simultaneous puzzles were solved on separate computer screens by college students designed to 4 different dyads, (ages: between 20 and 30). Subjects were awarded a CD at the end of the experiment. All subjects could place pieces in their own puzzle (individual contingency) and in their peers’ puzzle (social contingency). They could also track both their performance and their partner’s. Dyads were exposed to two baseline sessions and then to a sequence of two experimental conditions: 1) partial altruism with non-shared consequences, in which each participant had a counter that registered his/her own earnings; 2) partial altruism with shared consequences, in which earnings produced by both participants in one session were registered in one common counter (at the end of the session points were divided in equal amounts among subjects). All dyads chose to respond socially since the first experimental session.
 
103. Delay Discounting of College Students with and Without Bulimic Symptoms
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
ANDREA M. BEGOTKA (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Joanna R.H. Thompson (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Douglas W. Woods (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee)
Abstract: Individuals with bulimia nervosa show greater reactions to stress and more negative emotionality, elevated rates of personality disorders, novelty seeking, and impulsivity (Klein & Walsh, 2003). Additionally, there is an increased prevalence of self-injurious behaviors and substance use disorders among bulimics and within their family, suggesting a general propensity to impulsivity in bulimics (Klein & Walsh, 2003). Behavioral impulsivity often refers to deficient motor inhibition, weak behavioral restraints, and an inability to resist temptations or delay gratification (Crean, de Wit, & Richards, 2000). Behavioral impulsivity is commonly studied in the behavioral literature with non-pathological and pathological conditions presumed to include impulsive characteristics such as cigarette smoking, alcohol and substance abuse, and pathological gambling. These studies have typically included delay-discounting questionnaires and/or tasks to determine if individuals engaging in impulsive acts discount delayed rewards at a steeper rate than individuals not engaging in these behaviors. Bulimia, although thought to include an impulsive characteristic, has never been studied in these types of paradigms. The present study will examine college students with and without bulimic symptoms on a standard delay-discounting task. Identifying differences in delay discounting related to bulimia could be beneficial in developing treatments for this population that target impulsivity.
 
104. Promoting Self-Control and Increased Engagement in Physical Therapy Tasks in Individuals with Acquired Brain Injury
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
DONNA DELIA (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Due to their failure to engage in physical therapy exercises, three adult males with acquired brain injury served as participants in a study, which manipulated reinforcer dimensions, implemented progressive delays to reinforcement, and introduced concurrent activity to increase their self-control and engagement in physical therapy tasks. Natural baseline, assesing their duration of engagement following verbal prompts; choice baseline, indicating their preference for smaller, immediate reinforcers versus larger reinforcers, contingent upon engaging for longer than baseline; and self-control training, involving progressively longer delays to larger reinforcers, were implemented. The study extends upon previous research via reduction of the magnitude of the larger reinforcers while sustaining preference for this choice option.
 
105. Examining the Verbal Behavior and Response Allocation After Delivery of Inaccurate and Accurate Rules During Video Poker Playing
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
BETHANY A. HOLTON (Southern Illinois University), Jennifer A. Delaney (Southern Illinois University), Ashton J. Robinson (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: The current study investigated the effects of inaccurate versus accurate rules on verbal behavior and responding during video poker. Twenty participants completed a three phase experiment involving an acquisition period and a concurrent reinforcement schedule. Initially, participants were free to allocate their responses between two variations of a poker game while simultaneously talking aloud. In one variation participants were allowed free choice of 5-card poker play, whereas the other variation was a poker hand played automatically by computer game following one button click by the participant. Rates of responding, spoken verbal behavior, probability errors made, number of chips won, and response allocation were measured for each participant. In phases 2 and 3 participants were verbally informed with one of two types of rules, accurate or inaccurate, regarding the probability of errors that were made by the automatically played hand variation. Both of these phases were counterbalanced for all participants and the previously mentioned dependent variables were assessed during each phase. The results indicate that individuals switched their response allocation on the basis of the type of rule given by the experimenter. In terms of spoken verbal behavior, a verbal protocol analysis revealed idiosyncratic rules generated by each of the participants.
 
106. EAHB-SIG Student Paper Award Winner: Functional Interdependence of Mands and Tacts in Preschool Children
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ANNA I. PETURSDOTTIR (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Skinner’s (1957) analysis of verbal behavior proposes that the mand and the tact are functionally independent verbal operants, each of which is acquired through a unique history of reinforcement. This study attempted to replicate the findings of Lamarre and Holland (1985), who empirically demonstrated the functional independence of mands and tacts in typically developing preschool children. Four children participated in the study. All of them were initially trained to complete two 4-piece assembly tasks. Three children were trained to tact the four pieces that comprised one of the assembly tasks, and to mand for the four pieces that comprised the other task, using arbitrary response forms. The remaining child received tact training only, and only on one task. The effects of training on the untrained operant were evaluated in a multiple-probe design across assembly tasks. Following mand training, 3 out of 3 children reliably emitted tacts under testing conditions. The effects of the tact training, on the other hand, differed across participants. The results differ from those of Lamarre and Holland. However, from the point of view of Skinner’s analysis, they are not necessarily unexpected. Future research should attempt to identify variables that affect transfer of control between mand and tact relations.Faculty Advisors: James E. Carr (Western Michigan University) and Jack Michael (Western Michigan University)
 
107. Comparison of Speed of Acquisition of Response Differentiation and Stimulus Discrimination in Adult Humans
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
MANISH VAIDYA (University of North Texas), Yusuke Hayashi (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Response differentiation and stimulus discrimination are two basic component responses required in complex tasks. Barrett and Lindsley (1962) demonstrated that the method of simultaneously and independently measuring response differentiation and stimulus discrimination through repeated, continuous, and controlled observations, was sensitive to individualized deficits in differentiating two responses and discriminating two stimuli in children with severe mental retardation. This study was an attempt to systematically replicate Barrett and Linsley (1962) in adult humans. A yellow square was presented either in the left or right of the computer screen at 30 s interval. Subjects emitted a response by pressing either “A” or “L” key on the keyboard, or by pressing both keys at the same time. A point and a melodic sound was delivered contingent on pressing “A” key when a yellow square was presented in the left of the screen on a FR10 schedule. A session lasted for 10 min in which a yellow square was presented 10 times in each position. The results demonstrated that the procedure was sensitive in measuring the speed of acquisition of response differentiation and stimulus discrimination and that all subjects acquired response differentiation faster than stimulus discrimination under this procedure
 
108. The Manipulation of Hues, Cues, and Physiological Arousal in Persons with Acquired Brain Injury
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
HOLLY L. BIHLER (Southern Illinois University), Ashton J. Robinson (Southern Illinois University), Jennifer A. Delaney (Southern Illinois University), Kimberly Moore (Southern Illinois University), Jeffrey E. Dillen (Southern Illinois University), John M. Guercio (Center for Comprehensive Services)
Abstract: A common problem observed with person with Acquired Brain Injury (ABI) is their tendency to act impulsively when agitated. Previous literature has demonstrated that color can come to serve as a cue for eliciting certain emotions. In this study, three persons with ABI completed a match-to-sample training program. An equivalence class consisting of a staff member’s picture, a color, and a calming word or phrase was established. Physiological measures were taken on each participant while they were shown a picture of a staff member; these measures were taken at baseline and again after completing the test for equivalence. Physiological indices of relaxation were then paired with the colored cures mentioned above. This was done to form appropriate frames of coordination between the colored cues and the relaxation response. Follow-up physiological measures were taken on all galvanic skin response and heart rate responses.
 
109. Seeing Learning Change on the Standard Celeration Chart: The Effects of Visual Feedback on the Learning of Fluent Letter Sound and Number Discriminations
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
SARAH A. LAW (University of North Texas), Kathryne Balch Schooley (University of North Texas), Jesus Rosales-Ruiz (University of North Texas)
Abstract: This study assesses the effects of visual performance feedback on the rate of correct responding, generalization and retention of letter-sound and number discriminations. The participant is a kindergartner who has an in-home tutoring program for her academic skills. A multi-element design will be used to compare the effects of visual performance feedback versus no visual performance feedback via the Standard Celeration Chart. In the visual performance feedback condition the child will record their best performance of the day on the Standard Celeration Chart. In the non-visual performance feedback condition the child will record their best performance of the day on a new Standard Celeration Chart each session so that all previous performance is not visually present to the child. One set of letter-sounds and number discriminations are taught using visual performance feedback and the 2nd set of letter-sound and number discriminations are taught without using visual performance feedback. During baseline all letters and numbers are tested in the see-say task and in the hear/write task using a duration measure. After baseline, the use of 10 sec and 30 sec timings and aims will continue until the fluency criterion is met. After training is completed, all the stimuli will be tested under baseline conditions to evaluate the generalization across tasks. A month later, the baseline test will be repeated to test for the retention of letter-sound and number discriminations. Data are in progress.
 
110. A Heart Rate Model of Visual Discrimination Learning
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
DAVID WAYNE MITCHELL (Southwest Missouri State University)
Abstract: This study assessed changes in heart rate (HR) during visual discrimination learning. One hundred and four adults were tested on a synchronous reinforcement visual discrimination task (SRVDT). The SRVDT consisted of two stimuli presented simultaneously, one to the left and right of the participant's midline, for 16 laterally counterbalanced trials: 2 Baseline Trials (no auditory reinforcement was provided); 10 Learning Trials (an auditory reinforcer was presented and maintained while the participant visually fixated on the contingent stimulus); 2 Maintenance Trials (no auditory reinforcement was provided); 2 Relearning Trials (the auditory reinforcement was reinstated). A trial was defined as the accumulation of 5 seconds of total visual fixation time to the pair of stimuli. The stimuli contained two salient components; a pattern of disjointed L-shapes and a cluster of + shapes. The contingent stimulus (S+) differed in that a pattern of T-shapes were embedded within the L-shapes. Distinct changes in HR were observed as a function of successful discrimination learning. The direction (acceleration or deceleration) and trend (slope of HR within trials) of these changes in HR are argued to represent specific stages of visual discrimination learning. A theoretical HR model of visual discrimination learning is proposed.
 
111. Shaping Simple Tactile Discriminations in Individuals with Developmental Disabilities
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JEREMY A. BIESBROUCK (University of Nevada, Reno), W. Larry Williams (University of Nevada, Reno), Marianne L. Jackson (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: The current poster examines the steps required in shaping simple discriminations within the tactile modality. Two developmental disabled adults were trained using a backward chaining procedure to contact stimuli within a custom apparatus. Participants were reinforced for choosing the stimulus identical to a presented sample stimulus. Results are discussed regarding difficulties in shaping tactile discriminations, as well as potential implications relating to stimulus equivalence within the tactile modality for individuals with developmental disabilities.
 
112. The Role of Training Structures in Stimulus Equivalence Research
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
MEDEA RAWLS (University of North Texas), Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Saunders & Green, 1999, examined stimulus equivalence research and proposed a hypothesis about the effects of each training structure, linear, many-to-one, and one-to-many, on equivalence formation. The current experiment sought to more precisely understand the role of training structures in stimulus equivalence research. A within-subject comparison of the three training structures was conducted with 4 subjects. Three, 3 class/3 member sets of arbitrary stimuli were trained with different training structure for stimulus equivalence. During each session the subjects were exposed to one block containing 36 training trials and 72 testing trials for each set of stimuli. Sessions continued until 90% accuracy across two sessions. Equivalence was demonstrated with the many-to-one training structure slightly before one-to-many and linear suggesting a slight difference between training structures.
 
113. Differential Reinforcement and Negative Punishment of Responding to a Response-Driven Stimulus in Pigeons
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ROBERT W. ALLAN (Lafayette College), Lisa Hudak (Lafayette College)
Abstract: The present studies examine the efficacy of differential reinforcement of location (DRLoc) schedules in shaping and maintaining accurate stimulus contact when the stimulus is moving. A computer touch screen monitored the x and y locations of responding to a stimulus that moved as a function of responses that were perpendicular to the stimulus location. A negative punishment contingency setback the stimulus when responses failed to make perpendicular contact. Differential reinforcement successfully increased the proportion of on-stimulus responses. The role of the negative punishment contingency in on-stimulus responding will also be presented.
 
 
 
Poster Session #404
#404 Poster Session - EDC
Monday, May 30, 2005
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
114. Evidence Based Interventions for Students With Severe Social, Emotional, and Behavioral Problems in School Settings
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
FRANK M. GRESHAM (University of California, Riverside), Kristy J. Rutherford (University of California, Riverside), S. Dean Crews (University of California, Riverside), Clayton R. Cook (University of California, Riverside), Kellie S. Butkiewicz (University of California, Riverside), Ramon B. Barreras (University of California, Riverside)
Abstract: Currently, little has been undertaken to increase understanding in the natural setting (i.e. classrooms) with respect to implementation of interventions with students with severe social, emotional, and behavioral problems. As this is an issue many educators face today, it is necessary to utilize applied behavioral analysis to the process of intervention with this specific population to garner information that can be used in the field. Interventions implemented should be evidence based, and methods for ensuring treatment integrity are also essential. This presentation will provide a discussion of evidence based intervention assessment, implementation, and results, via single case design, for several students with severe social, emotional, and behavioral problems. Evidence from Project REACH, which is a federally funded grant directed at investigating the implementation of evidence-based interventions with the top 1% of students in the schools that engage in the most intense social, emotional, and behavioral problems, will be used as the basis of the presentation. Attendees will walk away with an understanding of how empirically supported interventions can be implemented successfully in the natural school setting.
 
115. Privatizing Emotional Support: A Next Generation Classroom with Behavior Analysis at the Core
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
ILEANA HELWIG (Children Crisis Treatment Center), Joseph D. Cautilli (Children Crisis Treatment Center), Nadine Harrington (Children Crisis Treatment Center), Todd Mitchell (Children Crisis Treatment Center)
Abstract: Many school districts are currently in the process of privatizing emotional support classrooms to community behavioral health agencies. Few research based models exist for the management of emotional support. One model which has been extensively researched over the last 30 years is Hill Walkers Engineered Learning Program. This model combines classroom rules, a classroom point system in which points are earned for on task behavior, work completion, and accuracy of work, with response cost for rule infraction and verbal or physical aggression, time out, a de-escalation procedure, curriculum based measurement and Direct Instruction teaching techniques. We modified this model with the use of Functional Behavioral Assessment, direct teaching of social and problem solving skills, and individualized behavior intervention plans. This paper explores our start up challenges in a large urban school district that was privatizing its emotional support program. Issues covered in this poster included training and feedback for staff, daily operations, and methods for ensuring program integrity.
 
116. Research on Behavioral Interventions in Schools at Individual, Classroom, School System, and District Levels
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
TARY J. TOBIN (University of Oregon)
Abstract: Behavioral interventions in schools were studied in terms of effects and outcomes at four different levels. Processes and results are presented for (a) individual students identified by their kindergarten or first grade teachers as “Internalizers” or “Externalizers” and who were (or were not) provided with individualized function-based support, (b) classroom teachers’ behavior management strategies, (c) school level changes in systematic ways of organizing responses to teachers’ requests for behavioral assistance, and (d) district level options for improving the use of applied behavior analysis in schools. Although individual children whose behavior places them at risk for school failure often need support that is unique in some way, schools using teamwork, proactive planning, and data-based decision-making can find efficient ways to provide behavioral interventions without resorting to exclusion or punishment. Project FIVE (Functional Interventions in Versatile Environments), extends the work of the “Individualized Positive Behavior Support Project” (Tobin, Lewis-Palmer, & Sugai, 2002, see http://www.behavior-analyst-online.org/BAT/BAT31.pdf) to promote inclusion and support for students with challenging behaviors by taking an ecological approach to organizational behavior management within districts, schools, and classrooms. For many students, combining individualized function-based support with more general behavioral strategies was the most efficient and effective approach.
 
117. A Technical Assistance Model for Providing Behavioral Consultation to Schools: An Analysis of Treatment Efficacy
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
BOB A. BAGGETT (Tennessee Technological University), Morgan Chitiyo (Tennessee Technological University), John J. Wheeler (Tennessee Technological University)
Abstract: The Make A Difference Project (MADP) at Tennessee Technological University is a service delivery program that provides training and technical assistance in the area of positive behavior supports to the 23-county Upper Cumberland region of middle Tennessee. MADP is grant-funded through the Tennessee Department of Education and is currently in its tenth year of operation. MADP provides schools with technical assistance in addressing individual student referrals, training opportunities in the areas of positive behavior supports/functional behavior assessment, and with the development of behavior support plans. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the efficacy and social validation of MADP as perceived by school personnel.A survey was administered using a 5-point Likert-type scale with responses ranging from strongly agree to strongly disagree and very good to very poor. First, respondents indicated the type of services they received from MADP. Second, using a Likert-type scale, respondents indicated their level of satisfaction with those services received. Data will be produced with a summary of findings as to the perceived efficacy of these services by school personnel.
 
118. An Examination of Variables Surrounding Use of Functional Assessment in Schools: A Meta-Analytic Review
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
FLORENCE D. DIGENNARO REED (Syracuse University), Derek D. Reed (Syracuse University), Laura Lee McIntyre (Syracuse University)
Abstract: Despite amendments to the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (IDEA 1997) mandating the use of functional behavioral assessments (FBA) in some educational situations, research has suggested that the majority of published studies fail to utilize FBA in designing interventions for students with problem behavior. A review of last decade’s school-based interventions has shown that 52% of studies published in JABA failed to utilize FBA in designing student interventions. Furthermore, the inclusion of FBA data did not result in greater intervention effects when compared to studies that did not utilize FBA data (Gresham et al., 2004). The purpose of the present study was to extend the findings of Gresham and colleagues. Specifically, a meta-analysis of school-based interventions published in 17 journals between 1991 and 2004 was conducted to identify use and effectiveness of descriptive FBA and experimental functional analyses. Variables of interest included: participating student characteristics, setting, response class, type of assessment, time of intervention, and efficacy of intervention. Results will be presented in light of the passage of the 1997 amendments of IDEA. Discussion will focus on training school personnel to utilize FBA procedures in school settings and refining our functional analysis technology to be more amenable to school settings.
 
119. The Effects of Instructional Directives and Strategies on Compliance
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
TODD G. KOPELMAN (University of Iowa Hospitals and Clinics), David P. Wacker (University of Iowa Hospitals and Clinics)
Abstract: A two phase experimental analysis was conducted within an outpatient clinic with three young children who displayed noncompliant behaviors. Both phases were conducted within multielement designs. Results of the functional analysis(Phase 1)indicated that problem behavior (i.e., tantrums, task refusal) was maintained by escape from demands. A brief antecedent evaluation of instructional directives (Phase 2) was then conducted in order to evaluate the effects of specific types of demands on accuracy and compliance. The results of this evaluation indicated that idiosyncratic patterns of the demands (i.e., the number of steps in a directive, the modality of the directive, or an interaction between steps and modality) emerged across participants. Interobserver agreement was collected for at least 50 percent of the participants' sessions and mean agreement was not less than 80 percent across all sessions.
 
120. Effects of Matching Intervention to Problem of Stealing in Single Subject Case Study
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
DANA WAGNER (University of Minnesota), Jennifer J. McComas (University of Minnesota)
Abstract: This study illustrates the usefulness of functional behavior assessment practices in the school setting. An eleven year old, sixth grade boy was suspected of stealing monetarily insignificant, but necessary items from peers and adults who were likely to react upon realization of the missing objects. A time out procedure followed by restitution resulted in no behavior change. The results of a functional assessment of the stealing behavior suggested that the behavior was maintained by positive reinforcement in the form of attention. An intervention was designed in which the student was challenged to secretly perform random acts of giving across school settings. Positive reinforcement in the form of attention from the recipients was delivered. During this intervention phase, stealing behavior decreased and was maintained at zero levels. When treatment was removed, the number of stealing incidents returned to baseline levels. Reimplementation of the intervention again extinguished the behavior. Giving behavior was generalized across settings. Results and discussion in terms of matching intervention to the results of functional assessment in a classroom setting follow.
 
121. Functional Analysis in a Public School Setting with an Adolescent Boy with Mental Retardation and Autism
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
D. REED BECHTEL (Bechtel Behavioral Services), Susan J. Heatter (Sue Heatter & Associates)
Abstract: An analogue functional analysis was used to assess the variables controlling the throwing behavior of a 14 year old boy diagnosed with mental retardation and autism who attended the public school system. The role of social attention, escape, and automatic reinforcement were assessed using ten minute sessions. Idiosyncratic variables also were identified during automatic reinforcement conditions to assist in developing a successful intervention for the IEP.Classroom intervention data are presented regarding the effectiveness of the intervention as well as the occurrence of additional maladaptive behavior.
 
122. An Antecedent Experimental Analysis to Reduce Self-Injury in a School Setting
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
JOHN D HOCH (University of Minnesota), Ellie Mauel (University of Minnesota), Michelle Rennie (Minneapolis Public Schools), Jennifer J. McComas (University of Minnesota)
Abstract: We conducted a descriptive assessment (DA) and an experimental analysis (EA) to identify an effective treatment for high-rate self-injury (SIB)(head-punching) of a 7 year old, Neil, with profound disabilities. Neil's teachers spent most of the day blocking his SIB. As a result, Neil received little instruction. Instead, the teachers to engage his hands with free-play activities such as playing with sensory materials. Approximately 20 hours of video were collected during special education class, inclusion activities, and meals and were coded for engagement, self injury (SIB) and type of adult interaction. The resultant descriptive data suggested that SIB rarely occurred during structured activities. Next, an EA compared two conditions, free play and task demands, to test the hypothesis that SIB was less likely to occur during structured instructional activities. During several of the demand sessions, we taught Neil to use a microswitch to request preferred items. Rates of SIB were differentially lower across all demand sessions. Interobserver agreement averaged at least 80% (A/A+D) for 30% of all observations. Implications for behavioral consultation in applied settings are discussed.
 
123. Extinction of Screaming Maintained by Escape with and Without the Use of a Token Economy
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
CRYSTAL BROOKE ALLEN (Northeastern University)
Abstract: Various forms of assessments have historically assisted in the identification of a behaviors particular function. Assessments are critical because it is important to understand behavior before changes are made. Iwata, Dorsey, Slifer, Barman, and Richman (1982) identified four general conditions of variables that maintain aberrant behavior. The varying methods, functional analysis, interviews, and/or direct observation, have found that demands can be related to aberrant behaviors, and have suggested that these behaviors can be maintained by negative reinforcement (Repp & Karsh, 1994). Many interventions employ escape extinction to some degree. In the present study, the aberrant behavior of screaming by 1 preschooler was researched using interviews, direct observations, and a functional analysis. As the behavior functioned for escape, extinction and extinction plus a token economy were utilized.
 
124. Use of Functional Communication Training as Treatment for Eloping Behavior of a Child that is Emotionally Disturbed
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
ANTONIO CONTRERAS, JR. (California State University, Sacramento)
Abstract: Functional Communication Training (FCT) was utilized to assist with eloping behavior of a child that is emotionally disturbed, in a non-public school run by a mental health agency. It was hypothesized that the participant of this study was engaging in the problematic behavior due to deficits in communicating his desire for attention from school staff. Sessions were conducted to teach the participant to appropriately communicate this desire. These sessions consisted of eliciting the appropriate response by prompting the participant and then reinforcing the participant for successfully engaging in the appropriate response.
 
125. A Comparison of Multiple-Schedule Arrangements to Teach Children to Recruit Attention at Appropriate Times
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
NICOLE HEAL (University of Kansas), Jeffrey H. Tiger (University of Kansas), Gregory P. Hanley (University of Kansas), Jillian White (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Correlating salient discriminative stimuli with the availability and unavailability of attention (i.e., creating a multiple schedule of reinforcement and extinction components) and providing rules describing the contingencies is an effective means of teaching children to recruit teacher attention at appropriate times (Tiger & Hanley, 2004). The purpose of the present study was to assess the effectiveness of two multiple-schedule arrangements of reinforcement and extinction, relative to a schedule that involved no schedule-correlated stimuli (i.e., a mixed schedule). More specifically, this study examined the effectiveness of multiple schedules involving a signal correlated with reinforcement, or two signals, each correlated with periods of reinforcement and extinction. Interobserver agreement was assessed during at least 20% of sessions for all children and averaged above 85% for all measures. Both multiple-schedule arrangements were effective at generating discriminated social responses for all children, above the level observed under the mixed schedule. However, children’s preferences for each arrangement may emerge based on the number of responses emitted during extinction periods.
 
126. Concurrent Schedules: Using Immediacy of Reinforcement to Bias Responding Towards Use of a Communicative Device
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
ANNA-LIND PETURSDOTTIR (University of Minnesota), Jennifer J. McComas (University of Minnesota), Joe Reichle (University of Minnesota), Tracy Bradfield Morgan (University of Minnesota), Frank J. Symons (University of Minnesota)
Abstract: This study explored a child’s response allocation as a function of reinforcer immediacy. The participant was 6-year old boy with significant cognitive, communicative, and adaptive impairments following the surgical removal of a brain tumor. A functional analysis revealed that problem behavior (crying) was positively reinforced by access to preferred activities and toys. Following brief training in using a communicative switch, schedules of reinforcement were arranged to compare immediate versus delayed reinforcement contingent on switch use and crying, respectively. An ABA reversal design showed that the participant allocated responding to the immediate reinforcement contingency. Inter-observer agreement averaged better than 80% across all sessions. Treatment involved relatively shorter delay to reinforcement contingent on the use of the communicative switch then following crying. Results suggest that reinforcer immediacy can be effectively used to bias responding towards more appropriate ways of communicating in situations when extinction is not feasible.
 
127. Helping Behavior and Matching Law Among Elementary-Aged Children
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
TAWNYA J. MEADOWS (Munroe-Meyer Institute), James Meadows (Private practice), Nancy L. Foster (Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract: The current study examines helping behavior of children and determine if responding corresponds to matching law. Twenty-seven participants, between the ages of 8 and 11 years, completed an analogue condition (computer task). Environmental contingencies were manipulated and static characteristics of the participants were examined in relation to helping behavior. Responding conformed to matching law given an equal schedule of reinforcement. When exposed to an unequal reinforcement schedule, participants engaged in undermatching. That is, children responded more on the key associated with the highly preferred peer even though they earned more reinforcers on the key associated with the non preferred peer. In addition, age differences were found. Implications for future research, as well as limitations, are discussed.
 
128. Performance Patterns of High, Medium, and Low Performers During and Following a Reward versus Non-Reward Contingency Phase
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
RENEE OLIVER (University of Tennessee), Robert Lee Williams (University of Tennessee), Janet Beth Winn (University of Tennessee), Elizabeth Benhayon (University of Tennessee)
Abstract: Three contingency conditions were applied to the math performance of 4th and 5th graders: bonus credit for accurately solving math problems, bonus credit for completing math problems, and no bonus credit for accurately answering or completing math problems. Mixed ANOVAs were used in tracking the performance of high, medium, and low performers during the experimental phase across a mandatory follow-up phase and a choice follow-up phase. The two reward contingencies produced generally higher performance than the non-reward contingency (control condition) in the experimental phase, but all performance levels did better in the mandatory follow-up phase after the non-reward contingency than after either reward contingency. Plus, high performers did substantially better in the choice phase following a non-reward contingency than following either reward contingency. The pattern of results generally points to an over-justification effect for contingent bonus credit, with this effect more attributable to a perception of control than a perception of competency.
 
129. Effects of Reward Contingencies on Performance and Intrinsic Motivation Depend on Interpersonal Context
Area: EDC; Domain: Basic Research
KATHERINE M. BANKO (University of Alberta), W. David Pierce (University of Alberta), Judy Cameron (University of Alberta)
Abstract: Reward procedures are neither “good” nor "bad" but depend on the context. Reward contingencies presented in a coercive context (controlling situation) are expected to reduce performance and motivation (Sidman, 2001). When the same contingencies are presented in a free-choice context (involving feelings of autonomy) performance and motivation are expected to increase (Skinner, 1971). An experiment is designed to examine the effects of rewards and interpersonal context on performance and intrinsic motivation. Undergraduate students (N=60) are randomly assigned to one of the 4 experimental conditions, in a 2 X 2 factorial design. Half of the participants receive $10 for puzzle solving, half do not receive rewards; also, half the participants solve puzzles in a coercive context involving high surveillance and time pressure while other participants perform the activity in a context emphasizing autonomy and low constraints. Next, participants have a 10 minute free-choice opportunity to do various activities (i.e. solve puzzles, read, etc.). The dependent measures are number of puzzle solutions, the amount of time spent on puzzles in the free-choice period, as well as ratings of task interest. The data are currently being collected as part of my Ph.D. requirements under the supervision of W. David Pierce and Judy Cameron.
 
130. A Procedure Based on the Premack Principle to Condition Books as a Preferred Activity
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
PAUL R. JOHNSON (Teachers College, Columbia University), Dana Visalli-Gold (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: This experiment tested the effect of a conditioning procedure based on the Premack Principle to condition books as a conditioned reinforcer in a middle school classroom. The participants were the entire classroom of 8 students, all diagnosed as emotionally disabled. 7 students emitted reader/writer self-editor repertoires of verbal behavior and 1 student emitted emerging reader/writer levels of verbal behavior. Students were given “Reading Coupons” contingent on reading a book in class for 10 minutes. They could exchange the coupon for 10 minutes free time performing the preferred activity of their choice. Choices in the classroom were computer use with internet access, Sony Play station, music listening, puzzles or drawing/coloring. In addition they were allowed to exchange self-management points for backup reinforcers during the 10 minutes of free time. The design was a multiple baseline across students. Students were monitored during free time which they received upon completion of classwork at the end of the day. The students increasingly manded for reading books under the contingencies of the program. Two students also emitted independent unprompted book reading during the experiment.
 
131. The Effects of a Book Conditioning Procedure on Stereotypy or Passivity in a Free-Play Setting
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
SAMANTHA M. SOLOW (Teachers College, Columbia University), JoAnn Pereira Delgado (Teachers College, Columbia University), R. Douglas Greer (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: The present study was conducted to investigate the effects of a book conditioning procedure on the occurrence of stereotypy or passivity in two children with developmental disabilities. Two students were studied in a multiple baseline across subjects design. A procedure for conditioning books (Greer, 2003) was used that involved pairing books with reinforcement and testing whether the student would choose books in a free-play setting with low levels of stereotypy or passivity. Generalization was also tested for to determine whether the procedure was effective in reducing stereotypy or passivity across all activities, rather than only with books. Results showed that the procedure was effective for increasing the behavior of looking at books and decreasing the occurrence of passivity for participant B. For participant A, the procedure appeared to be effective until an interruption in the procedure due to a school vacation, at which point her stereotypy returned to baseline levels.
 
132. Teacher Report Versus Systematic Preference Assessment in the Identification of Reinforcers for Young Children
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
CATHERINE COTE (University of Kansas), Rachel H. Thompson (University of Kansas), Gregory P. Hanley (University of Kansas), Paige M. McKerchar (University of Kansas)
Abstract: In this study, teachers were asked to identify and rank-order 10 preferred stimuli for five toddler-aged children. Teacher rankings were then compared to results of a systematic preference assessment (Fisher et. al., 1992) that included the same items. Next, stimuli identified as most highly preferred through each method were evaluated concurrently in a reinforcer assessment. Interobserver agreement was assessed during a minimum of 25% of sessions and mean agreement was 90% or higher for all participants. For four of the five children, the correlation between the teacher rankings and the results of the preference assessments was not significant. For three participants, the stimulus identified as most highly preferred through the systematic preference assessment was shown to be a more effective reinforcer than the item identified by teachers as most highly preferred. Nevertheless, in all cases, the stimulus ranked highest by teachers was an effective reinforcer.
 
133. An Evaluation of the Effects of Different Levels of Medication on Preference and Reinforcer Assessment Outcomes for Children with ADHD
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
CARRIE ELLSWORTH (University of Nevada, Reno), Michele D. Wallace (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: We examined the effects of two levels of medication on preference and reinforcer assessment outcomes for children diagnosed with attention deficit hyperactivity disroder (ADHD). Full effects were evaluated when 1-2 hours had passed since the administration of the medication, and partial effects where evaluated when 8-10 hours had passed since medication administration. Results demonstrated that preference for some items shifted under different medication statuses; however, reinforcer effectiveness was not alterated. Implications with respect to the use of reinforcement for academic behaviors in educational settings will be discussed.
 
 
 
Poster Session #405
#405 Poster Session - TBA
Monday, May 30, 2005
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Southwest Exhibit Hall (Lower Level)
134. Using the Ideal-free Distribution to Describe Human Group Behaviour: A Laboratory Demonstration
Area: TBA; Domain: Basic Research
MAREE J. HUNT (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), Natasha A. Buist (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), Anne C. Macaskill (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), Lincoln S. Hely (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand), David N. Harper (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand)
Abstract: A reliable finding in the ethology literature is that groups of animals in the wild distribute their numbers across different feeding patches according to the relative wealth of the patches. In the ethology field this behaviour is described in terms of optimal foraging, or more specifically the Ideal Free Distribution, a theory that shares many of the features of the optimisation theory of matching behaviour. Recently a generalised form of the Ideal Free Distribution has been found to describe human group choice and thus provides an ideal context in which to demonstrate concepts underlying generalised matching to senior undergraduate students. In the described laboratory a free operant group choice procedure was employed. The demonstration called “the treasure hunt, incorporated three features that we considered novel and contributed to the engagement of the students and the quality of the data obtained. These were the use of desirable, consumable reinforcers, the game context, and automated scheduling and data collection. Data derived from this exercise allowed class discussion of important phenomena and theoretical issues (e.g. undermatching, optimisation etc) as well providing a basis to demonstrate model-fitting.
 
135. The Effects of a ‘Game’ Format on Optional Study Group Attendance and Quiz Performance in a College Course
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
TRACI M. CIHON (The Ohio State University), Gwen Dwiggins (The Ohio State University), Nancy A. Neef (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: We compared two formats for optional study sessions offered to students in two sections of a research methods course. Study sessions alternated between a game format (e.g., Behavioral Jeopardy, Who Wants to be a Behavioral Millionaire, etc.) and traditional student-question: teacher-response format, presented in counterbalanced order across the two sections. The alternating treatments design permitted analysis of (1) preference between the two formats as measured by attendance at the study sessions, and (2) the effects of participation in study sessions on subsequent quiz performance. Students’ performance on each post-study session quiz was compared with respect to (a) participation in games versus standard review, (b) participation versus nonparticipation in study sessions, and (c) performance on quizzes that preceded study sessions.
 
136. Differential Effects of Terminology on Caregiver Acceptability Rating: Conversational Versus Technical Explanations
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
KELLI WHEELER (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Tina Sidener (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Peter Girolami (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Kellie Hilker (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Previous literature (e.g., Hyatt & Tingstrom, 1993; Rolider & Axelrod, 2005) has examined the general public’s understanding and acceptability of behavioral interventions. This research suggests that the terminology used to describe a behavioral intervention may be an important variable affecting caregiver acceptability of treatment procedures. Specifically, conversational or technical descriptions may be rated as differentially acceptable depending on the type of intervention being described. The present study examined conversational versus technical explanations on caregiver acceptability and comprehension ratings of procedures used in a feeding treatment program. In the current study, caregivers were randomly assigned to either technical or conversational treatment descriptions, and then completed an acceptability and comprehension questionnaire, based on the Treatment Evaluation Inventory- Short Form (TEI-SF; Kelley, Heffer, Gresham, & Elliott, 1989). Implications of results will be discussed in terms of best practices for parent training and potential avenues for future research.
 
137. SIDD Training: Behavioral Deficits and Excesses on Pre- and Post-Tests
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
DARLENE E. CRONE-TODD (Delta State University), Alicia Satterfield (Delta State University), Marcie Desrochers (State University of New York, Brockport)
Abstract: Functional assessment is an essential treatment of severe problem behaviors for individuals with developmental disabilities/mental retardation. Successful treatment of severe problem behaviors requires that behavior analysts are able to develop testable functional hypotheses, and then develop an appropriate treatment plan. Participants (n = 14) were asked to complete 10 clinical cases in Simulations in Developmental Disabilities: SIDD software, which is designed to provide students and staff with the opportunity to acquire and practice skills in the area of behavioral psychology. Analyses of participants' pre- and post-test performance indicate that the number of cases completed in SIDD were related to an increase in the number of correct answers related to: (a) terminology, (b) correct functional hypotheses, and (c) appropriate treatment plans. In addition, following SIDD training errors of commission (behavioral excesses) were more likely to occur, compared to the pre-test, in which errors of omission (behavioral deficits) were more likely to occur.
 
138. Utilizing a Competency Validation System to Enhance the Performance of Practicum Students towards Temporary Limited Licensure to Practice Psychology
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
JESSICA M. NORRIS (Western Michigan University), Megan M. Coatley (Western Michigan University), Alyssa Warshay (Western Michigan University), David Eisenhart (Western Michigan University), James Kaye (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The Western Michigan University Professional Psychology Practicum requires that practicum students not only complete the required 500 hours of applied work, but also that they are deemed competent in the required core and elective competencies. The Competency Validation System (CVS) provides a way for practicum students to validate their skills, abilities, knowledge and experience required by the WMU practicum in order to obtain Michigan limited licensure in psychology. This validation system is based on the competency-based checklist utilized by the University of South Florida and has been adapted to fit the needs and goals of Western Michigan’s program. The CVS is made up of a variety of crucial behavior analytic techniques that are expected of graduating professional psychology students. In addition to these core required competencies, students are also encouraged to choose from a selection of electives. These elective competencies cover areas ranging from autism to emotional impairment and should reflect each student’s personal interests for additional practicum opportunities.
 
139. Teacher as Student: Self-Counts of a Student Teacher
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
ELIZABETH A. SWATSKY (Pennsylvania State University)
Abstract: The author will present data collected from her student teaching experience. The behaviors of the author,student teacher, will consist of praise counts, student responses and counts of skills taught and goals met. Also, the data collected from the student teacher supervisor will be shared on similar behaviors.
 
140. The Use of Structured Observation in Feedback in Training Graduate Students
Area: TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
JOHN C. RANDALL (Charles River Industries), John Stokes (Melmark New England)
Abstract: We examined the effects that using a structured feed back system based off of research conducted by Reid et.al.(2000) would have on the performance of graduate student working toward meeting proficiency on the skill listed on the BCBA task list. Each section of the task list was broken down into a structured observation tool. Direct observation of performance was conducted on a weekly basis with feedback following. Performance on feedback tool on implementation of skills listed in the different areas of the task list resulted in high rates of performances and a shorter latency of proficiency that staff who were only provided with verbal training and literature on techniques. Inter-observer agreement was taken on 20% of observations for each graduate student. Data is displayed graphically.
 
141. Helping Students Study for the GRE and Apply to Graduate School
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
JODYLEE M. MILLER (Western Michigan University), Cortney Osborn (Western Michigan University), Nicole Metzke (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Undergraduate students nearing the end of their studies often procrastinate on two activities: studying for the Graduate Record Examination (GRE) and preparing for the graduate school application process. Procrastination while applying to graduate school and studying for the GRE can lead to: low GRE scores, lower quality admissions materials, failure to meet application deadlines, greater stress on student and not getting into graduate school. A one-credit independent study course was designed to help our students get and stay on the right track for the GRE and graduate school. This self-management class requires students to create their own individualized plans and then follow them.Each week students are required to: complete 4 hours worth of work, attend a 50 minute class/meeting, turn in a task verification form, graph the four hours they study each week and complete the assigned homework. Throughout the semester students are also required to: take a GRE pre-test and post-test using the GRE software provided on the GRE website, complete a vita and resume, take occasional quizzes and complete evaluations. In order to receive an ‘A’ in the class students must receive an ‘A’ in each of the following categories: attendance, homework, hours studying for the GRE, task verification form and graph.
 
142. 360 Honors, Super A
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
ALLYSON L. HECK (Western Michigan University), Emily Helt (Western Michigan University), Amanda Norton (Western Michigan University), Lori Schroedter (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Psychology 597, Advanced Principles of Behavior Analysis, Super A Super A is a one credit course that one may elected to take in concurrence with Psychology 360, Principles of Behavior Analysis. The purpose of Super A is to train undergraduate students in goal setting and attainment, data graphing, and research experience in order to produce competent behavior analysts, so that future employers, professors, graduate schools, and clients can benefit from the students’ skills. In order to receive credit for Super A, each student must complete and document 50 hours of additional work in the area of behavior analysis and must also receive a grade of an “A” in Psychology 360. Students may elect to do a variety of work in behavior analysis including the completion of extra rat labs, attending departmental functions, implementing self-management projects, conducting or participating in research, writing answers to section questions, and attending weekly meetings.
 
143. BACC: Behavioral Academic and Career Counseling; a Supplemental Advisory System that Aids Undergraduates in Preparing for Future Academic and Career Goals
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
ERIN ANDRES (Western Michigan University), Alison M. Betz (Western Michigan University), Katie Larkin (Western Michigan University), Morgan E. Aue (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The Behavioral Academic and Career Counseling (BACC) project is a system that provides undergraduate students with information regarding career opportunities and graduate study in psychology. BACC is an ongoing graduate research project conducted by students in Dr. Richard Malott’s Master’s Program in Behavior Analysis at Western Michigan University (WMU). Through interviewing, planning, and goal setting, BACC helps students achieve their desired goals, such as entrance into graduate school and employment in a psychology-related field. Throughout the academic year, BACC regularly recruits interested undergraduate students to attend an initial orientation to the BACC system. The project’s authors and their faculty advisor give a lecture describing the benefits of participation in the BACC program and providing contact information for making BACC appointments. The author of this project and his colleagues in Dr. Malott’s Masters program conduct the counseling appointments. The counseling sessions follow a one-to-one interview format. After the counselor collects academic information, the counselor surveys the student’s interests in psychology. The counselor then provides answers to any questions that the student may have. After the interview, the authors use a database program to track each student’s information, and then recall it later in order to schedule follow-up appointments. The author of this project supervises the quality of the appointments given by other psychology Masters students by providing 1) training seminar, 2) written job aids, 3) an instruction manual, and 4) a database. The ongoing development of these elements enhances the effectiveness of the BACC system, thereby creating a total performance system. The author intends to facilitate the development of more comprehensive and effective career counseling systems through their presentation of the BACC project at academic conferences.
 
 
 
Business Meeting #406
BACB Certificant Meeting and Update
Monday, May 30, 2005
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Private Dining Room 2 (3rd floor)
Chair: Gerald A Shook (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
Presenting Authors:
The presentation will provide an overview of the current status of the BACB® and its certificants. It will cover important developments within the BACB over the past year relating to growth and changes in the BACB including: continuing education, recertification, professional experience, university coursework approval, examination administration, ethics, and disciplinary standards. The presentation also will offer projections for development of the BACB for the following year. Time will be provided for participant questions and discussion with presenter. This presentation is intended for BACB certificants (BCBAs® and BCABAs®), and individuals who are interested in the current status and future directions of the BACB. OBJECTIVES 1. The participant will be able to state three new developments within the BACB over the past year. 2. The participant will be able to describe the current status of the BACB, including the number of certificants, number of approved university course sequences, and members of the Board of Directors. 3. The participant will be able to describe projections for development of the BACB for the upcoming year.
 
 
Business Meeting #407
Hawai'ian Association for Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 30, 2005
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Lake Erie (8th floor)
Chair: Kimberly A. Smalley (Hawai'ian Association for Behavior Analysis)
Presenting Authors:
Quarterly business meeting to discuss planning and activities for upcoming year.
 
 
Business Meeting #408
Health, Sports & Fitness Special Interest Group
Monday, May 30, 2005
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Private Dining Room 1 (3rd floor)
Chair: Michael A. Kirkpatrick (Wesley College)
Presenting Authors:
The purpose of the meeting is to conduct HSF-SIG related business, including the election of SIG officers, in addition to the discussion of members' common interests, activities and possible areas of future research.
 
 
Business Meeting #409
OBM Network
Monday, May 30, 2005
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Joliet (3rd floor)
Chair: Angela R. Lebbon (Western Michigan University)
Presenting Authors:
The meeting will consist of officers updating members on the activities of the Network. In addition, members will have the opportunity to make suggestions and comments about the future of the Network. Some annual issues may be voted on during the meeting.
 
 
Business Meeting #410
Looking Back 40 Years: Sample of Students and Faculty in Behavior Analysis Programs at St. Cloud State University #3
Monday, May 30, 2005
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Private Dining Room 3 (3rd floor)
Chair: Kimberly A. Schulze (St. Cloud State University)
Presenting Authors:
Presentation by students and faculty from the past 40 years; they will be commenting on their careers and relationship to St. Cloud State and ABA. McDowell, Tami, The Columbus Organization, Ft. Wayne, IN Miller, Mathew, Psychologist at Pfizer Pharmacological Company, Kalamazoo, Michigan Schulze, Kim, Psychologist Faculty Community Psych. Dept. at St. Cloud State University Thinesen, Paul J., Program Director/QMRP, AME Community Services, Inc., Cokato, MN. Sota, Melinda, PhD student in Instructional Systems Design at Florida State University Van De Hey, Erin, private practice in treatment of people called autistic in Philadelphia, PA Wosmek, Jen, a Psychology Tour member, Ph.D. student at U. of Kansas at Lawrence, KS Current SCSU undergraduate students with an interest in Behavior Analysis: Jordan, Meggan, Nystedt, Aaron, Otto, Nikki, Schneider, Scott, Siewert, Tom, Swanson, Greg, Tabatt, James
 
 
Special Event #411
ABA Social
Monday, May 30, 2005
9:00 PM–1:00 AM
Grand Ballroom

Come to the ABA Social for an evening of music, dancing, and socializing! All are welcome to attend this event, which will be held in the luxurious Grand Ballroom on the second floor of the Hilton Chicago.

 

BACK TO THE TOP

 

Back to Top
ValidatorError
  
Modifed by Eddie Soh
DONATE
{"isActive":false}